Home

E2 User Manual.book - Emerson Climate Technologies

1. RATE Terminated Not Terminated Term UP r SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR T BELDEN 8761 FOR PLENUM 3 USE BELDEN 82761 OR 88761 TO OR EQUIV 485 EIE TERT AES kK 9600 baud HHHH n UUUUU Li OV z 485 52 EE 19200 baud I Lf WI i WIRE to same color WIRE OV to WIRE to same color DAISY CHAIN CONFIGURATION SET TERMINATING JUMPERS JU1 JU2 JUS JU1 JU2 JUS i UP T DOWN 9 lo o b 120 208 240 VAC rc NEUTRAL WIRING FOR 640 0056 56VA Transformer and 640 0080 80VA Transformer 24VAC Center Tapped Transformer Three conductor non shielded cables 7 are the recommended wire for connecting between the center tapped transformer and I O boards i m Power Wiring Types 14 AWG Belden 9495 240 208 18 AWG Belden 9493 120 PRIMARY SIDE m 07 SECONDARY SIDE AC1 oavAC Center Tapped OV Earth ground the OV center tapped terminal of each board 6 12 E2 RX BX CX I
2. CATS CABLE Switch Figure 1 4 E2 RX BX Network Introduction 1 5 1 5 view The E2 RX and BX controllers are among the most versatile and customizable control system products avail able on the market Because of the enhanced capabilities of the E2s programming installation and operation of E2 and its accompanying peripherals are supported by several different Retail Solutions publications All of the publica tions listed below can be ordered by contacting Retail Solutions E2 Installation and Operation Manual for RX Refrigeration BX HVAC and CX Convenience Store Controllers 026 1610 The manual you are currently reading The Installation and Operation Manual covers hardware installation network setup and important operator functions such as viewing status screens or logs and performing manual defrosts Documentation Over The Quick Start section Chapter 8 is designed to guide you quickly through setup ofthe most simple and vital refrigeration control applications such as suction groups and condensers More detailed information is included in the online help Router and Repeater Installation Guide P N 026 1605 If you have a large site with 64 or more devices on the Echelon Network you might require the use of a router or repeater to properly set up your Echelon Network The Router and Repeater Installation Guide will help you determine when a router or rep
3. E 1 APPENDIX TROUBLESHOOTING scsssssssssssssessssessssesscsssessessesessesssseseseessssessssessesessssessssessesessssessssesensesers F 1 y A I 1 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual Table of Contents xv EZ 1 introduction The E2 controller is a microprocessor based control system designed to provide complete control of compres sor groups condensers refrigerated cases and other com ponents related to refrigeration and building control The E2 is the controlling component ofa three network config uration RS485 I O Echelon amp Lonworks Networks and Ethernet that includes input and output communication boards remote communication software and a variety of sensors probes and transducers The E2 efficiently operates all systems that support refrigeration including compressor racks and condensers and other components not directly related to refrigeration control such as HVAC systems anti sweat heaters and sensor control modules Figure 1 1 E2 Controller 1 1 The E2 Refrigeration Controller The E2 RX is available in three models the RX 300 RX 400 and RX 100 The E2 RX 300 is capable of con trolling a single refrigeration system including one con denser and up to four suction groups The E2 RX 400 is capable of controlling two separate refrigeration systems including two cond
4. 5 1 25 2 CONF PORTS ee ERES S ERR AERE CREE LM INE 5 1 5 3 SERIAL DEVICE AND SOFTWARE SETUDP cssccscsssessceseesscensecsenevsnsconsssecsecneccnecnsessecssessecensesevnsesascasesaeceecnsesseeneees 5 1 6 THE RS485 NETWORK AND HARDWARE SETUP eeeeeeeee ee eee eese te stantia stas ta etas to aetas ease tastes etse 6 1 6 T ERE I O NETWORK erect RES ESAE C UR RR TRETEN 6 1 6 1 1 Bodrd Names and Terminology ie e ste ee e at ee Se eee eb ue eee 6 1 6 1 2 MultiFlex Plus amp Board a e toit e a e eee P Re ERE E ge pe euge i cene ee aded 6 2 6 1 2 1 Board Designation o rr RERO NER e ERR IX E Ie ete ERR 6 2 6152 2 Board Calculationsy i ase b HRSG YES ERREUR RENTE HER NON WDR UR ERR RE HE INIRE 6 2 61 3 Wiring TVpes iiem era e ERE OUR ERU paves E UO Re e eU a ec Cb ce Sire eee 6 2 6 1 4 The I O Network Structure Daisy Chains eese eee enne enne eret nennt nennen nennen enne nnne 6 2 01 9 Network Noise Minimization sis ste eed anie e ries d eR Miet de p ets 6 2 6 1 6 Network ID Numbers Board Numbers eee 6 3 61 7 Setting the Baud Rdte cei ev een rere PE IEEE REID dE ERI erre erepto 6 3 6 1 8 Setting the Terminating and Biasing Jumpers eese eee tete nennen eere eneee trennen nennen 6 4 6 1 9 Powering the O Boards
5. RENE EN UI En 11 44 LIAL Temperature Control oa t e po eee Pe E ve eee e ee uate eoe tote 11 44 1447 2 Unoccupied Hysteresis aee pe Ie RERO HEU PEUT ERN RE RU greet 11 44 11 17 3 Optimum Start Stop OSS a nennen ici ete etre e e eei aves legen eet de eeu Ee RE red 11 45 117 4 Setpoint Reset iiis eene o en Pe HO DRE tp rre Hdgt 11 45 LLIZS JRead Lapi sis ERR PE ee erc ptio e age e Re LOG He USE ong UNS E ESO ERE RES Rd 11 46 IT I8 ANAPOG AAND DIGETAD COMBINERS EAREN EN 11 46 11 19 TD CONTROL ree rient tenete cp ER Heb ene ee Le eee uineis tete Posi 11 47 DIE OVerview dau da eR eere a a Y P Tp e RR OR ER GIRL Y ER 11 47 11 19 2 Temperature Differential TD Strategy arrian oiii ener eren enne EET ARE 11 47 1119 3 TD Control Fail Safes ee sp rre P RR e Re OUR ER ERES RE RU Reese 11 47 L I9 4 Configurations tede a e NEG e Re e de ats e bee Ote eee res 11 47 1I 19 5 SSetpointss uota trt aU UP paccosscabevsaiee cevaseidivdsassedeabiggeseaye 11 47 INDEM p EEEE 11 48 LALA GTO Arms iiec Re ias e teo etu tia pep EE 11 48 11 20 PULSE ACCUMULATION ene initiiert rie HA EUER YS 11 48 11 20215 OTA a A EEEE EE rer OR 11 48 HI 20 2 Configurations sie ii deoa ERO E CE EROR HI EUM pt
6. Figure 6 1 I O Network Configurations 6 1 5 Network Noise Minimiza tion Site environments will frequently have numerous sources of high EMI or noise that must be accounted for when routing RS485 network cable Although the cable is shielded against noise the installer must follow best practices for minimizing network noise In general installers should follow these guidelines when installing RS485 networks 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ Avoid running cable next to noise generating devices such as motor starters contactors invert ers fluorescent light ballasts arc welders etc If possible keep cable less than 1 foot away from noise generating devices ideally at least 5 feet Do not run RS485 cable in the same conduit as high voltage wiring such as 120VAC or 240VAC power wiring Keep RS485 cable a minimum of 3 inches away from high voltage wiring ideally at least 12 inches If RS485 must cross paths with high voltage wiring cross them perpendicular running RS485 and high voltage wire in parallel increases the amount of noise induced on the net work Ensure you are grounding each input device s 0V power terminal to a separate earth ground and set ting the termination and biasing jumpers as instructed in Section 6 1 8 Setting the Terminating and Biasing Jumpers For more instructions on best practices for minimizing noise refer to publication 026 1903 E2 Controlle
7. Delay Comb Type Alt Comb Basic Sched Light Schedule 2 Extem Sched 2 Figure 11 19 Lighting Schedule Module Cell Diagram Figure 11 19 shows a flowchart diagram of the Light light level to a set of Cut In Cut Out setpoints ing Schedule application and the eight cells that work From an OFF state when the light level falls below the together to control the lights A description of each cell Cut In setpoint the result of the light level comparison and the functions they perform are given below will be an ON state When the light level rises above the 11 10 3 Control Method Select cut out setpoint the state will transition from ON to OFF The ON OFF state determined by the light level can be Control Select determines whether the Multi Logic logically combined with LOGIC IN a digital input from Combiner is used or the Light Level Interface and Sched an input point or another application in E2 The result of ule Interface are used for Lighting Control When Use Alt this comparison will be the final ON OFF light state com Control is set to Yes the Light Level Interface and Sched that is sent from the Light Level Interface cell to the ule Interface combination strategies are disabled and are Schedule Interface cell explained below not visible When Use Alt Control is set to No the Multi Logic Combiner matrix is disabled
8. i 3 2 JL 4 Blank FACE ss RR a Hee need 3 3 3 2 MOUNTING LOE BOARDS toe T E Qu RE RE qr ma 3 3 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual Table of Contents v 3 2 1 Single Double Enclosures se asc e ed eate et e Rr e 3 3 3 2 2 Boards Without Enclosures Snap Track eese ee eeee eene nennen enne enne tes 3 4 3 3 ECHELON DEVICES E M 3 4 3 34 LOAIC and ca e eed ean ees 3 4 3 3 2 CC 100 Case Controller and CS 100 Case Circuit Controller eese eee 3 5 3 3 9 ESRG Discontinued a etie cete Pera ete e E ates me operi ee doe been 3 5 3 3 4 M lti Flex ESR ia ade aed Ned dade a ee tee 3 5 3 3 5 PDD Ieee t tiro meruit telis m 3 5 3 4 MODEM COMMUNICATION EXPANSION CARD MOUNTING NEW PROCESSOR BOARD 3 5 3 4 1 Mounting PC 104 Cards in E2 Previous Generation Processor Board eese 3 6 3 4 1 1 The Internal Modem 3 4 2 Two Channel Four Channel Repeaters 3 42 1 Mounting Repeaters Overview ss aee RR ERROR RERO EE 3 4 2 2 Mounting the Two Channel Repeater 3 4 2 3 Mounting the Four Channel Repeater 3 5 SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS o AEREA REAS EDEA EAE EENS AEE EEA aT S 3 9
9. 9 11 9 2 6 1 Configuring a Point from the Output Definitions Status Screen 9 11 9 2 6 2 Using the Output Definitions Status Screen 9 2 6 3 Setting Up Digital 9 2 6 4 Setting Up Analog Outputs 9 3 CC 100 CASE CONTROLLERS etre recette tette eee eee AERE ee THDUIS Aue UE testis cea SEX I RU VL Ue DP E E S EE TEM 9 3 2 Power Module Wiring iiid atte di adeat e e Re tei e e i Dae eds 9 3 3 VALVE CADIS EET 94 ESRS VAEVEOUTPUTWIRING trecenti ve e Bea ae aE A R N Ie 10 QUICK STAR Piss cases soassucasaescvascesedcusebssuascsoeaseogcnapavssnesecsebcassdssusecssascose 10 1 IEGGGING ON PM 10 1 10 2 CLEANING OUT THE CONTROLLER trier I ee ER TT SERERE N a A 10 1 10 3 SETTING NUMBER OF NETWORK DEVICES eee ee e en e een en n en eren enne nennen 10 2 10 4 SETTING NUMBER OF APPLICATIONS recte thee teet tte attinent 10 3 10 5 THE MAIN STATUS HOME SCREEN ves 10 3 10 5 Customizing the itr E ERREUR HE eva EXE rt rie ii be ve den 10 3 10 6 COMMON SCREEN E UE MENTS irer 10 4 10 631 The Headerii i i dero RS p E ee NU at oid ecc pie dE 10 4 10 611 Header Icons e e d eed e e qe n EC GR D
10. ESR8 BOARD DISCONTINUED Figure 10 30 ESR8 Service Button Location The service button on the ESRS is located on the right hand side of the board directly below the termination jumper Figure 10 30 To send the Neuron ID press and hold this button down for five seconds Commissioning the EC 2 The EC 2 can be commissioned by pressing the UP ARROW key on the EC 2 front panel and holding it for 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 five seconds 10 14 2 2 The Manual ID Entry Method The Manual ID Entry Method involves entering each device s twelve digit ID number by hand When entered the E2 searches the network and tries to match the ID number to the device When the E2 finds this device the commissioning process is completed The easiest way to set up a multiple node store using the Manual ID Entry Method is to arrange all network devices into a list that shows each device s name subnet and node address controller type and corresponding Neu ron ID number Once this list is complete each device may be commissioned one at a time from the E2 front panel To make a list of network devices follow the steps below 1 For each record set up in the Controller Network Configuration Status Screen write down the con tents of each device s Controller Name Model Subnet and Node fields on a sheet of paper If desired you may also include the model or serial numbers of the units that will be con
11. to Figure 4 7 E2 Digital I O Network Card Install and Wiring 4 3 4 1 LEDs The plug in Digital I O Network card LEDs can be used to determine the status of normal operating parame ters for the card Plug In Digital I O Status Card LEDs Red D1 Out 1 Red D4 Out 2 ON Relay Output 2 is On Table 4 2 LED Status for Plug In Digital I O Card ON Relay Output 1 is On 4 3 5 E2RS485 Port Card P N 537 4890 The E2 main board has two RS485 Network channels allowing you to connect input and or output boards via the RS485 Network This optional card adds a second RS485 port to the E2 allowing a connection to the ISD compressors Control Link devices and other supported MODBUS devices The plug in RS485 Network card connects to the power interface board between the two fixed RS485 I O Network connectors and the battery 4 3 5 1 LEDs The plug in RS485 Network card LEDs can be used to determine the status of normal operating parameters for the card 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ RS485 Plug In Card LEDs Yellow D5 RX1 Status ON Communication is being received on RS485 Port 2A Yellow D2 RX2 ON Communication is being received on RS485 Port 2B Red D1 TX ON Communication is being sent on RS485 Port 2A and 2B Table 4 3 LED Status for RS485 Plug In Card 4 3 6 Plug In Four Channel Inter nal Repeater The four channel repeater P N 832 483
12. 10 4 10 6 2 The FUNCTION Keysi ait GNO NIS IG ARs RT RARE RI dide tesi dete a v Eos e d 10 4 10 6 3 The Help Lih E RR RR eO Gr Fe Rte REG ee eerie US 10 4 viii Table of Contents 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 OA reign MNA PC 10 5 10 7 The Main Menu sa o ce 10 5 10 72 Status SCreens acce S IR NON ERN RENE OA AALS AAA ee aes 10 5 10 73 The Actions es etur m Rr RF eR RE Re bd nd ERE RR OP HH rere 10 6 10 74 The Setup Screens a iue e o i eter EE RU RE OUR EE eae Des 10 7 10 7 5 System Configuration Menu eee RR E ee Ere ER EE Rr te ER ee o eerte idein 10 7 10 7 6 The System Information Menu eese ele be e iot dete tede a Wade tee e bb ee tests 10 8 10 8 FIME DXTE SETUP e RE RP 10 9 10 8 1 Setting the Time Gnd ettet gt EE eee o DERE ER ERE ete 10 9 10 9 SETUR MODEM ic HR EET EET SEP EUER MERY GUERRA ONSE ERRASSE 10 10 10 10 SETUP MO VII e E 10 11 I0 LY SETUP NETWORK BAUD RATES edet ertet e eH CEP ER 10 12 1011 1 COMI Serial RS232 Baud Rate te eti ER etf ta b te E ER e vets 10 12 LOAD 2 VO Network Baud Rates oe e RU eR ER RENTUR Gt RR E ER Fee EXE E ta ears 10 12 10 12 SET UP SBR A CCESS enis n odii id ete d deu fece ise dri rin OP ped 10 13 10 12 1 Changing Required
13. S O M E S S O 4 20 OUT m ov lt Not Used ov fS Note Either the 2 wire or 4 wire 250 ohms Hookup may be used at either Grounded 4 20mA output The Hookups may be the same or different If a 4 20mA is not used it may be left unconnected WIRING FOR 640 0056 56VA Transformer pardus are the recommended wire A MEN 3 are the recommended wire and 640 0080 80VA Transformer 128 f for connecting Between the ov Q E center tapped transtormer 24VAC Center Tapped Transformer H and VO ds Power Wiring Types 14 AWG Belden 9495 18 AWG Belden 9493 c 240 208 SECONDARY SIDE ECT MODBUS The RS485 Network and Hardware Setup 6 9 ee 4AO INSTALLATION GUIDE 1 Connect board to power transformer 2 2 BOARD o gt 2 Connect 4AO to the RS485 I O Network 3 Set the network address on the first five 9 rockers of dip switch S1 2 4 Set the network baud rate using rockers 6 and 7 of dip switch S1 2 5 Set RS485 termination jumpers Wu at either end of a daisy chain Other se set d jumpers DOWN 6 Note if you change am uipswn settin while the board is powr d disconne th power and re power boar reset WIRING FOR 640 0043 Three Board Xformer and 640 0045 Six Board Xformer
14. 0 0 WOO 0 OOOO AIO D sao ems 0 516 0vSIG ovSIG 0v SIG 2 ose OvSIG ovsiG ovsiG m INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4_ INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 INPUT 9 INPUT 10 INPUT 11 INPUT 12 INPUT 13 INPUT 14 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR 2 ADDRESS 3 BAUD RATE BELDEN 8761 FOR PLENUM nn TAA USE BELDEN 82761 OR 88761 HHI S3 S3 4 OR EQUIV BOARD 1 BOARD 2 BOARD 3 BOARD 4 ee mI T SANEL EIL HLNEDWORA 7 7 LN bo E BOARD 5 BOARD 6 BOARD 7 BOARD 8 9600 baud Wi BOARD 9 BOARD ey See eee D Bees eta mea MN 19200 baud d JUL BU shag LIL p WIRE to same color A T TET T AITTE PED E WIRE 0V to 0V UUU UUU UUU JUU WIRE to same color Danse ms AT 4 5 1 IN OUT PLUG INPUT PLUG CABLE JP2 0 EE 2 2 ile CONNECTOR 2 CONNECTOR FROM 16 INTO Jes e Jes INTO THIS 3 MULTIFLEX 16 INPUT SOCKET Je4 e d JP4 NO TERMINATION TERMINATION MULTIFLEX INPUT ADAPTER P N 335 2301 6 WIRING FOR 640 0056 56VA T
15. The I O Network Board Traristatlon Boards That Type Match Board Type 16AI 16 Any I O board that 16AI discontinued has digital and ana 8IO discontinued log inputs The j inputs of a combina MultiFlex 16 tion I O board 8IO The inputs on all Mul or MultiFlex combo tiFlex combo boards board are by them 88 88AO 168 selves treated as one 168AO and 1616 versions of the Gateway board some versions behave like as multiple 16AIs Any I O board with 8RO relay outputs ROSMT relay outputs of a combination I O The relay outputs on board 8IO or Multi all MultiFlex combo Flex combo board boards 88 88AO are by themselves 168 168AO and treated as one 8RO 1616 which behaves as two 8RO boards 8IO discontinued 8IO discontinued Any I O board with analog outputs The analog outputs of a combination I O The analog outputs on board 810 or Multi the MultiFlex 88AO Flex combo board and 168AO are by themselves treated as one 8RO Any I O board with 12VDC digital pulse outputs 8DO including all versions of the PMAC and PMAC II anti sweat con troller Digital outputs on the MultiFlex 168DO ARTC 32 Rooftop HVAC con MultiFlex RTU and RTU troller board ARTC discontinued RCB 32 MultiFlex RCB MultiFlex RCB advanced rooftop unit controller Table 6 1 Board Types and Boards Included in Each Type The RS485 N
16. 4 Press General Controller Info aand navigate to the COMI Baud rate field The COMI Baud rate field determines the speed of communications between the E2 and an RS232 device such as a satellite link or PC The baud rate selected in this field should correspond with the baud rate for the RS232 device For example if connecting a PC to this port the PC s COM port should be set up to communicate at the same rate as what is set in this field There are multiple options to choose from Select one of the options below using LOOK UP depending on the type of connection 1200 Baud devices that operate at 1200 2400 Baud devices that operate at 2400 4800 Baud devices that operate at 4800 9600 Baud recommended for satellite 19 2 Kbaud recommended for modem 38 4 Kbaud recommended for modem 57 6 Kbaud recommended for modem 115 2 Kbaud recommended for direct connect 10 12 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee 88 26 05 RX 466 Unit 3 16 28 62 ALARM Use Ctrl X to Select CX Tabs SETUP C1 General co 1 1 z i C3 Modem Ch TCP IP H CAE Peer Netwrk C9 Web Server CO System General Setup GENERAL SERU General Site Name Site Phone 66172605 Refresh Rate 6 66 36 RS 292 Baud 1 0 Net Baud 9666 baud Alarm Annunc No RX Home Screen Default ScreenBlankTine 18 Write DFHC Init No F1 PREU TAB F2 NEXT TAB F3 EDIT F4 LOOK UP F5 CANCEL Figure 10 18 COMI Baud
17. Echelon Plug In 9 Test Button Power Interface Board Connector 10 General Status LED TCP IP Ethernet Connector 11 Backlight Inverter External Keyboard Connector 12 Contrast Adjust 2 100 Ver Only Lithium Battery 3 Backlight Dim Adjust E2 100 Ver Only Battery Enable Switch Figure 4 1 E2 Inside Enclosure Open the door and expose the main processor board The main processor board and powerinterface board PIB 14 Boot Status LED Figure 4 2 E2 Main Board RX 100 Board Shown are mounted side by side one on each side of the box The main processor board is mounted on the hinged enclosure door part of the enclosure directly behind the keyboard Setting up the E2 E2 Hardware Setup 4 1 4 1 3 Main Processor Board Pre vious Version LCD Connector Echelon Plug In Power Interface Board Connector TCP IP Ethernet Connector External Keyboard Connector Lithium Battery Battery Enable Switch Reset and Clean Out Buttons Test Button Backlight Connector PC 104 Slot Figure 4 3 E2 Main Board Previous Version P N 237 4800 4 1 4 Power Interface Board Plug In 3rd Party Network Card RS232 Port External Keyboard Port Termination Jumper JP7 Echelon Network Connector Plug In Digital O Card RS 485 I O Network Connectors two RS 485 Termination Jumpers JP1 6 Power Interface Port Power S
18. 10 22 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual Users can view alarm notifications and alarm logs for all controllers from the Alarm Annunciator Only the Alarm Annunciator needs to be pro grammed with alarm filter settings for dial out out put and display All other controllers may be programmed to simply send all alarms to the Alarm Master via the LonWorks Network 10 16 2 Setting up an E2 to be an Alarm Annunciator Any E2 on the network that has a modem or Ethernet connection can be set up as an alarm annunciator but only one alarm annunciator per network is allowed To set up from the Main Menu Press Wil System Configuration 1 2 Press Vl System Information 3 Press General Controller Info 4 SetAlarm Annunc field to Yes 0007 NOTE When the E2 is set up as Alarm An nunciator the Home screen becomes the Alarm Log RX 466 Unit 3 SETUP C2 Eng Units C3 Modem Cu TCP IP C8 Peer Netwrk C9 Web Server General Setup GENERAL SERU 108 26 05 Use Ctr1 X to Select Tabs Ci General 14 16 58 ALARM CG System General Value Site Name Site Phone Refresh Rate RS 232 Baud 1 0 Net Baud Alarm Annunc RX Home Screen ScreenBlankTime Write DFMC Init 66172665 Fi PREU TAB F2 NEXT TAB F3 EDIT F4 STATUS F5 CANCEL Figure 10 39 Alarm Annunciator 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 ee 10 16 3 Alarm Dial Out RX 466 Unit 3 CONTROLLER SETUP 14 08 01 ALARM
19. 11 3 3 2 Door Switches Walk In Box freezers are often equipped with door switches that disable the evaporators when the door is open The E2 is capable of reading a digital door switch input and controlling the freezer appropriately When a door switch opens the E2 will shut off the Software Overview 11 7 refrigeration solenoid and the fans if active and turn the lights ON 11 3 4 Fan Control A circuit s circulation fan is always ON when the cir cuit is in refrigeration mode Its state during defrost is determined entirely by how theapplication is programmed by the user You may choose to set the fan either ON or OFF for each phase of a defrost cycle Pump Down Defrost and Run Off If you choose to keep fans off for the entire defrost cycle you may also choose to program a delay that will keep the fan from activating for a fixed amount of time after the cycle ends Fans are locked OFF during clean mode 11 3 5 The TD3 Temperature Display The TD3 is a case display that 1s designed to monitor three types of temperature sensors The compact unit is mounted on the face of a refrigeration case and displays by default the discharge air temperature Pressing the function button repeatedly allows you to view the temper ature of Retail Solutions product probe the defrost termi nation value and then back to the discharge air temperature The TD3 has a status light that is controlled by the E2 controller A gr
20. 6 ICBX__ lce cream freezer box 20 5 30 oroo 320 345 xeo 2 60 Roachin freezerjuice 15 S 2 3222 vas veoj 160 S FRBX Foznfdbox P s 32w xeo 3 12 MDFF__ Multi deck freezer food 10 0 20 322 vas xeo 32 iS FZBK Muldeckfreezerbakery 10 20 222 2 60 260 Table A 1 Case Type Default Settings The number of defrosts per day and the defrost time length from the Elec column under Defrost types For example if you select 14 RIFF reach in frozen food the E2 sets the circuit s setpoint at 10 the number of defrosts at 1 and the defrost time at 60 minutes The other columns in this table such as the High and Low Alarm Dly columns and the Hot Gas Rev Air and Timed columns are suggested values that are not automat ically entered into the Circuit application Appendix A Case Type Defaults A 1 Defrost Type Low Elec Type Description Alarm Delay DEF Timed S2 BART Bakery retarder 3 6 40 oro vas 2 45 2 6 SS RTDR Bakery retarder 35 oo 40 oro 245 245 2 6 S4 MTPK Meat packaging room 4 0 40 oro 245 2745 290 SS MTCU Meateu ingroom a 6 40 oro 245 zas 290 Se MTPR Meat prep room s o 0 0L00 on 24s 24s 299 S7 MTWR Meat wrapping room as 6 oro 245 2745 2590
21. Bypass Duration For example Time Schedules have two such inputs I O Mode toggles between displaying board names and board numbers Setup I O allows user to enter an input or output point setup screen 10 18 2 2 Entering Setpoints An application setpoint is a user defined control 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 ee parameter stored inside the controller Setpoints can be programmed from any application setup screen To enter setpoints from a Setup screen Press SETUP from the desired applica tion s Status screen If starting from the Home screen move the cursor to the desired applica tion s value and press to open the Actions Menu Choose Setup This will take you to the Setup screen 2 Once inside the application s Setup screen look for the Setpoints option in the index tabs along the top of the screen 3 Use NEXT TAB to tab over and the Set points box of your application will open 98 26 05 RX 466 Unit 3 16 50 33 Use Ctrl X to Select Tabs SETUP FULL ALARM C1 General C2 Setpoints c3 CS Outputs C Comp Setup C7 Comp Outs 8 Suction Groups SUCTION GRPO1 Setpoints SUCT PRES SETPT Suct Pres DBand Extrn Pres Shft Comp On Delay Comp Off Delay Unldr On Delay Unldr Off Delay Min ON Time Min OFF Time TR Pressure Fi PREU TAB F2 NEXT TAB F3 EDIT F4 STATUS F5 CANCEL Figure 10 47 Setpoints Box 10 18 2 3 Navigating the Setup Screen Fi PREV TA
22. CC CS166 lt gt CaseCtrl Circuit Association Case Ctrl Circuit Application CC LIQUID_661 LONWorks CS SUCTION 601 LONWorks CC SUCTION 601 LONWorks F1 SETUP CCB F2 SETUP F4 LOOK UP FS CANCEL Figure 11 7 CC CS100 Circuit Association Screen RX 400 This screen lists all of the CC 100s CS 100s EC 2s and CCBs defined in this E2 Each one is listed with its name its node number the application name of the case controller s application and the associated circuit name To associate a case controller with its circuit move the cursor into the Circuit field of the controller you wish to associate and press the key The Application Selec tion menu will list all of the Case Control Circuit applica tions in the E2 Choose the desired circuit and press or to select Repeat this process until all case con trollers are associated with Case Control Circuit applica tions 11 5 Logging Groups A logging group is a set of application property inputs and outputs whose values are recorded logged with the same parameters Parameters include the interval how often the property values are logged for example every 30 seconds every 5 minutes etc the duration of the log for example 2 days 30 days 100 days etc and the res 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ olution how precisely the analog values are recorded 11 5 1 Data Compression Because the user may need to log more data than the default
23. CONNECT GND GROUND SHIELD OUT SIGNAL Figure 9 14 Auxiliary Analog Input The four pin analog input is designed to be connected to a Relative Humidity Sensor P N 203 5750 The wiring harness P N 335 3252 designed specifically for the input must be used Wiring for this device is shown in Figure 9 14 Hand Held Terminal Jack The Hand Held Terminal jack on the left side of the CC 100 is where a CPC Hand Held Terminal HHT may be connected The HHT may be used to program setpoints and change settings in a CC 100 In addition you may use an HHT to send a case into defrost or terminate an exist ing defrost force a case into wash mode and bypass or CC 100 Case Controllers override numerous case functions The Hand Held Terminal jack also doubles as a service pin used when commissioning a CC 100 Plugging the Hand Held Terminal into a CC 100 sends the special Ech elon ID number to the E2 9 3 2 Power Module Wiring CC 100s are powered by 24VAC Class 2 power which is supplied by a CPC power module The case power module shouldbe connected to either a 120 VAC or 240 VAC single phase power source which ever is necessary for the model ordered Complete wiring of the case controller power module including lights fans defrost and anti sweat heaters is diagrammed in Figure 9 15 Follow
24. Figure 3 21 Inside Temperature Sensor Mounting 3 5 3 Outside Temperature Sen sor 3 5 3 1 The outside or ambient temperature sensor should be located on the north side of the building preferably under an eave to prevent sun heated air from affecting the tem perature of the sensor 3 5 3 2 Mounting The temperature sensor may be mounted using any standard tubing clamp Retail Solutions also offers an alu minum cover and clamp P N 303 1111 which may be mounted as shown in Figure 3 22 fasteners are not pro vided Location 3 8 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 26509018 Figure 3 22 Outside Temperature Sensor with Cover and Clamp 3 5 4 Insertion Temperature Probe 3 5 4 1 The 12 inch insertion temperature probe may be used to monitor temperature in either the supply or return air ducts of the AHU or RTU 3 5 4 2 Mounting The insertion probe may be mounted in any orientation within the duct as long as the probe is in the air flow of the duct The probe housing should be secured using self tap ping screws A 0 250 diameter hole is required for the probe Figure 3 23 shows the installation of the insertion probe self tapping screws are not provided Location 26509012 Figure 3 23 12 Inch Insertion Probe Mounting 3 5 5 Supply and Return Air Sen sors In addition to the 12 inch insertion temperature probe Retail Solutions uses the same temperature sens
25. MultiFlex RTU Rooftop Controller Installation and Operation Manual P N 026 1706 Installa tion and operation guide for the MultiFlex RTU replacement for ARTC MultiFlex RCB Rooftop Controller Installation and Operation Manual P N 026 1707 An improved version of the MultiFlex RTU the RCB has 16 fully configurable analog and digital input points The RCB also has four analog outputs for use in controlling variable speed fans economizers or modulating heating and or cooling valves The RCB also features a more sophisticated HHT inter face and updated algorithmsfor controlling heating cooling dehumidification and air quality Refer to this manual for more information on the MultiFlex RCB Rooftop Controller E2 User s Manual Supplement for Flexible Com biner Programming P N 026 1620 The Flexible Combiner application is an advanced I O control program used to combine multiple analog and digi tal input values using programmed equations simi lar to those used in spreadsheets and is a new feature of E2 versions 2 20 and above Refer to this manual for more information on the Flexible Com biner application Facility Status Display FSD Installation and Operation Manual P N 026 1400 The FSD reports alarm information and more such as tem peratures occupancy case status and setpoints and provides a centralized device for store person nel to review information by communicating with the E2 via Ethernet connectiv
26. POWER 2 The output section of this board must be given a separate 999 network ID number as if it were 8RO Set the network ID Ga number using rotary switch S1 3 The input section of this board must be given a separate network ID number as if it were a 16Al Set the network ID B number using rotary switch S2 S BOARD 4 Set the jumper JU4 to enable or disable the analog outputs 5 Set RS485 termination jumpers UP if at either end of a daisy 2 _ Ld chain Otherwise set jumpers DOWN Al 5 Da 6 Connect board to power transformer DO NOT USE THE 5 d CENTER TAP Connect 0V terminal to a separate Earth x round 5 D D SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR 3 g qii m 8761 FOR PLENUM OUTPUT 56 INPUT E x0 1 OREQUNS 82761 OR 88761 NET ID 5 A J NET ID 5 E jJ JUMPER ON d 1 w 6 X 1 e 6 wW ARE BENG Q 0 0 0 USED i 7 i 2 i 7 W JUA _ JUMPER OFF XC EUN IF ANALOG e PE 0 e ourPurs WIRE to same color 1 ARE NOT ont pg WIRE OV to OV 4 a ES BEING USED WIRE to same color 2 4 Ert es Eg 5 DAISY CHAIN CONFIGURATION SET TERMINATING JUMPERS
27. RCB Controller TD Condensor Fan 16 28 Control Table 1 2 BX 300 vs BX 400 Comparison 1 3 The E2 Convenience Store Controller The CX controls HVAC lighting and refrigeration systems for convenience store and small box retail facili ties The CX s primary function is to provide energy effi cient control of rooftop units as well as refrigeration and defrost control of display cases and walk in boxes In addition the CX provides extensive sensor control log ging and graphing features that allow the user to view accurate real time information about system conditions The CX is equipped with many power monitoring and demand control features that give you the information you need to keep your site s energy consumption low The E2 CX is available in three models the CX 300 CX 400 and CX 100 The only significant difference between the E2 CX 300 and the E2 CX 400 is the amount of C Store equipment that may be operated by a single controller The CX 100 is a low cost alternative to the CX 300 with fewer capabilities and a monochrome display Table 1 3 shows the differences between capabilities for the CX 300 and CX 400 The E2 Convenience Store Controller EHE NE Control 1 ee emcees o 5 9 o 5 9 _ 8 pe qw case Dip 6 9 m _ m 5 Sms o m T fo pe pe Dm pe pe e Enhanced Suction 4 Group E
28. to Select CX Tabs C3 Modem System DHCP Enabled IP Address Subnet Mask DNS Server 1 No z 18 10 64 39 1 255 255 248 0 DNS Server 3 Default Gateway Domain Name Address F1 PREU F2 NEXT TAB F3 EDIT F4 STATUS F5 CANCEL Figure 10 33 TCP IP Screen Locating the Mac Address 4 Call Retail Solutions Customer Service at 770 425 2724 and have your MAC Address ready in order to obtain your unique license key Once you have received your unique license key from Customer Service you can now activate the licensed fea ture s from the License Report screen The License Report screen displays that E2 controller s unit type and firmware version the list of all licensed features on that E2 the current number and maximum number of each of those applications allowed and which additional features that require a license key have been enabled From the Main Menu 1 Press System Configuration 2 Press Licensing 3 Press Add Feature Enter your license key to activate the desired feature Licensed Features 09 06 2005 13 58 24 Rev 2 20B12 For controller model type BxX 466 Feature GEN LON Demand Limit Cont Flexible Combiner Time Schedule Log Group CarrierOne ARTC RTU Nose5 HUAC Zone Analog Sensor Ctr Loop Sequence Ctr Digital Sensor Ct RCB Lighting Control Trane SCC Air Handling Unit Digital Import Point Analog Import Point F5 CANCEL
29. 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 Ee E2 Installation and Operation Manual for RX Refrigeration BX HVAC and CX Convenience Store Controllers EMERSON Climate Technologies amp EMERSON Retail Solutions 3240 Town Point Drive NW Suite 100 Kennesaw GA 30144 USA Phone 770 425 2724 Fax 770 425 9319 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED The information contained in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate However Computer Process Controls Inc assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained herein In no event will Computer Process Controls Inc be liable for any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages resulting from any defect or omission in this manual even if advised of the possibility of such damages In the interest of continued product development Com puter Process Controls Inc reserves the right to make improvements to this manual and the products described herein at any time without notice or obligation FCC COMPLIANCE NOTICE This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the fol lowing two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation CE COMPLIANCE NOTICE Class A Product Information for Einstein E2 Controllers The Retail Solutions Einstein and E2 controllers are Class A produ
30. ATP Hi Temperature CPC s 100K High Tempera ture Sensor Range 0 500 DegF 86K Temp Copeland s integral dis charge temperature sensor Table 9 2 Sensor Input Types Select Eng Units The engineering units of the 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ points point names engineering units and other impor tant parameters sensor value are entered in the Select Eng Units field This value is set automatically to an appropri ate default unit whenever the Sensor Type is changed To select a different engineering unit press or to scroll through the options or select the unit from the LOOK UP Units Per Pulse The Units Per Pulse field appears only when Pulse Accum is entered in the Sensor Type field The E2 is capable of generating an analog KW value by counting the number of pulses from the pulse accumulation outputs of a KW transducer Each pulse from the transducer signifies that a fixed num ber of KW has been used The number of KWs per pulse varies depending upon the type of transducer being used Consult the trans ducer s documentation for the exact number of KWs per pulse and enter it in this field Default on Open The value placed here will deter mine the value the unit reports if there is an open condition detected in the sensor input connection An open condition could be the result of a broken wire to the sensor or a sensor failure Default on Short The numeric entry in this p
31. Base TX Hub Room Temperature 0 to 50 C P N 570 0100 10 Base T 100 Base TX Hub Extended Temperature 40 to 65 C P N 570 0200 Table 7 1 Equipment for E2 Ethernet Peer Communications amis NOTE An external power supply may be needed E2 Ethernet Peer Communications 7 1 7 3 Software Specifica tions TCP IP E2 controller versions 2 10 and later communicate between controllers using the TCP IP protocol TCP Port 7238 is the default for connections established between the controllers All peer communications occur over this port 7 4 Ethernet Network Layouts The two types of network options for E2 controllers using Ethernet communications are 1 Closed Network E2 devices arenot connected to a store s LAN The only devices on the net work are the E2 controllers themselves This network type is used if there is no need to inte grate the network into the company s intranet 2 Open Network E2 devices are connected to the store s LAN Devices on the network include E2s and other Ethernet TCP IP devices This network type is used if the network will be con nected to the store s LAN ess NOTE Contact your IT Network Administra 4 tor for setup parameters for both closed and open networks The E2 peer Ethernet network facilitates communica tions between E2 controllers These include at least the following Routing of messages between external entities such as UltraSite
32. ET TL E FOR 110 VAC POWER SOURCE D FOR 208 VAC POWER SOURCE WIRING FOR 640 0048 ard or BETA I l AGH 12 AC1 q 11 pt 8 ov q AR 7 AC2 24 VAC OUTPUT CENTER TAP 24 VAC OUTPUT CENTER TAP FU 0 VAC POWER SOURCE FOR 208 230 VAC POWER SOURCE BAUD RATE SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR B BESS EET BELDEN 8761 10 oREQUV I ER c BOARD 1 BOARD 2 BOARD 3 BOARD 4 ences Soot EG Cr TEN eee muitis 485 i afl Mau Wi LLL NEZ SS nS BOARD 5 BOARD 8 9600 baud HAHH n v s a d rs i 2 ii hl lud 485 amp 3OARD 9 BOARD 12 qM WA WU Ue M a Rs p al di 19200 baud HL a ut BOARD 13 BOARD 14 BOARD 16_ Vv UV to 0 1 Bn SOCOM 1 MEE 5 DAISY CHAIN CONFIGURATION SET TERMINATING JUMPERS Ju U2 JU3 JU1 JU2 JU3 9 o o HN P i T DOWN UP DOWN DOWN UP 6 10 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ INSTALLATION GUIDE 1 Connect 810 to the RS485 I O Network
33. Figure 3 8 Double Enclosure Mounting Dimensions Mounting 3 3 3 2 2 Boards Without Enclosures Snap Track 16AI 8RO 8DO and Gateway boards not supplied with an enclosure are supplied with a snap track for easy installation The insulation sheet and I O board must be removed from the track before the track is mounted The snap track is mounted using the 0 1875 mounting slots Figure 3 10 shows this installation procedure Figure 3 9 provides mounting dimensions for the Mul tiFlex 16AI 8RO and the 8DO boards Figure 3 11 pro vides mounting dimensions for the 4AO i 10 00 4 75 i p 0 218 i TYP6PL 16AI BRO 8DO AND MULTIFLEX BOARDS TOP VIEW 1 26501055 1 REMOVE THE BOARD AND THE INSULATOR FROM THE SNAP TRACK 2 MOUNT THE SNAP TRACK USING THE 1875 SLOTS PROVIDED OPERATION OF THE BOARD WTHOUTTHS INSULATOR VOI WARRANTY AND WAY CAUSE SERIOUS DAMAGE T0THE BOARD TENPORARLY REVOVE EAGTEDEETEEN THS NSULATOR LE TEMPOR MOONINGSMP TRACK 3 REINSTALL THE INSULATOR IN THE SNAP TRACK 4 REINSTALL THE BOARD IN THE SLOTS IN THE SNAP TRACK 26501040 Figure 3 10 4AO 8RO or MultiFlex Snap Track Installation 3 4 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 4 BOARD WEIGHT 0 50 LB 26501009 Figure 3 11 440 Mounting Dimensions The Gateway is typically mounted in the same area as the site contro
34. I O Network Termination Jumper Settings 6 1 9 Powering the IJO Boards All models of E2 compatible I O boards require 24VAC Class 2 input power Some boards such as the 16AI 8RO 4AO 8DO MultiFlex ESR and MultiFlex 16 use a center tapped power source All other models such as the 8IO and MultiFlex Combination I O boards may use non center tapped power sources Retail Solutions supplies a wide variety of 24VAC transformers with varying sizes and either with or without center taps Table 6 2 shows the transformer sizes and whether they are center tapped or non center tapped Table 6 3 lists each board the board s rating and whether or not the board must use center tapped power Xformer P N VA Rating Input Voltage Center Tap 640 0041 50 VA 110 VAC No 640 0042 50 VA 220 VAC No 640 0056 56 VA Multi tap 120 208 240 VAC Yes 640 0050 75 VA 110 VAC No 640 0045 75 VA 220 VAC No 640 0080 80 VA Multi tap 120 208 240 VAC Yes Table 6 2 Transformers Compatible with I O Network Boards 6 4 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 m tapped EY EES La wc Table 6 3 Device Power Requirements To select a power transformer for a board or aseries of boards 1 Determine what the total VA is for the boards that will be powered by the transformer see Table 6 3 Example Two MultiFlex 168AOs 15 VA each and one 8DO 18 VA board
35. Name Model THIS 03 18 91 03 01 16AI 80 03 01 880 THIS 01 1 CX366 ALARM SETUP MialDial out Setup Alarm Filtering Setup Controller Alarm 1 0 Status Figure 10 40 Alarm Setup Menu One of the E2 s most important alarm reporting fea tures is its ability to dial out to remote sites whenever a serious alarm condition occurs Each E2 is capable of dial ing out to up to three sites The E2 may dial out to a com puter a fax machine a digital pager or a printer To set up from the Main Menu Dial out devices are set up in the Dial out Setup screen To reach this screen 1 Press System Configuration 2 Press KB Alarm Setup 3 Press Dial out Setup RX 466 Unit 3 16 55 52 SETUP FULL ALARM C4 Status CS Day Status Report to All Sites Filtered Sites only Night starts at 6 66 Night stops at NightNumsOnSat NightNumsOnSun Printer Baud Use Default F1 PREU TAB F2 NEXT TAB F3 EDIT F4 LOOK UP F5 CANCEL Figure 10 41 Remote Dialout Setup Screen Set Up Alarming This screen and the other screens that follow it areused to set up dial out sites for both daytime and nighttime operation including specifying phone numbers and IP addresses Use the and keys to cycle through the Setup screens 10 16 4 Introduction Alarm Report ing In general a controller reports alarms to any or all of four different sources 1 The E2 Display Header Alarms that o
36. Power Interface Board UE V VV V WW B 22 D or MODBUS Network 1 Connect the I O or MODBUS Network to one or both of the E2 RS485 I O or MODBUS Network ports A maximum of 31 devices can be wired to each I O or MODBUS Network port 2 For each I O or MODBUS Network port set RS485 termination jumpers UP if at either end of a daisy chain Otherwise set jumpers DOWN 3 Connect the E2 to the Echelon Network If possible connect shield wires to a separate earth ground outside of the E2 enclosure 4 Set the Echelon Network jumper UP Terminated if the E2 is at either end of an Echelon daisy chain Otherwise set the jumper DOWN Not Terminated WIRE to TO OTHER 5 Connect earth ground to one of the two ground terminals WIRE aM provided Use 12 AWG preferred 14 wire and keep as E A short as possible less than 12 inches preferred SEDED TWISTEDPAR 6 Connect 24VAC to the power terminals BELDEN 8641 7 Flip the power switch to the ON position When 24VAC has been OR EQUIV OBSERVE WIRE applied to the board the green LED will illuminate COLOR POLARITY 2 RS485 I O or MODBUS Net 8 Echelon Ground NOT TERMINATED TERMINATED LON Level IV 22 AWG Shielded DAISY CHAIN CONFIGURATION Max Daisy
37. RX Function BX Function AHU WIN suction Grou CONDENSERS ZONES STANDARD LIGHTING CIRCUITS SENSOR CONTROL SENSORS POWER MONITORING SETUP CANCEL SETUP CAN CEL Table 12 6 Function Keys for Status Screens The Help key opens the Help menu The Alarms key opens the Alarms Advi sory Log The Home key opens the Home screen The Menu key opens the Main Menu The Back key moves you back to the previous screen Table 12 7 Icon Function Keys The Help 4 key opens a pop up window con taining either information about the screen or menu you are currently on or information about the input output or setpoint you have highlighted with the cursor if available After the Help key has been pressed will open the General Help menu containing Troubleshooting options Press the and XP keys together at any time to open General Help The Alarms LD key displays the alarm advisory log that shows all the current alarms in the E2 When the Home key is pressed from any location the Home screen opens When the Menu P key is pressed from any location the Main Menu opens The Back key will take you to the previous screen Pressing from an application status screen Home screen or Input Output Status screen brings up the Operator s Guide to Using the E2 12 7 Actions Menu and gives the user access to controller func tions such as graphing logging se
38. SSFHPR Fish prep room 45 6 40 1 00 245 2745 2599 So SBCL Subcoler 35 o as _o0 1s 245 2760 2 45 G0 PRPR Produce prep room 55 65 45 oro 245 2as 250 6I SDFM__ Single deck freezer meat 10 20 oro 240 13s i45 63 MDFM___ Multi deck freezer 10 o 20 oro 2m8 240 2 60 24 Table A 1 Case Type Default Settings A 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ Appendix B Pressure Voltage and Tempera ture Resistance Charts for Eclipse Transduc ers amp Retail Solutions Temp Sensors Eclipse Transducers Voltage Pressure PSI VDC was st fo 4 90 Table B 1 Temp Sensor Temperature Resistance Chart 100 Ib 200 Ib 500 Ib xducer xducer xducer Table B 2 Eclipse Voltage to Pressure Chart Appendix B Pressure Voltage and Temperature Resistance Charts for Eclipse Transducers amp Retail Solutions Temp Sensors B 1 EZ Appendix C Alarm Advisory Messages The table below is a list of all alarm messages that may appear in E2 s Alarm Advisory Log Each alarm message is listed by its Alarm Name which is the text recorded in the Alarm Advisory Log when the error occurs and the Default Priority which is the default priority value for the alarm A Default Priority of User indicates the alarm type s priority is programmed by the user during
39. VA is the total VA rating of the I O boards For example if you had an 80 VA load 14 AWG 24 ft 18 AWG 9 ft rounded down Figure 6 3 Power Wire Lengths Sensors requiring 24VAC can be powered from the same transformer powering the input board as long as the resulting total load of both the input board s and the sen sor s connected to the transformer does not exceed the transformer s VA rating Consult Section 6 1 9 Powering the I O Boards and Section 8 6 1 Powering Echelon Devices for more information 6 1 10 Board Installation The following pages give step by step graphical instructions on all steps necessary to install each I O Net work device so that it is powered up and able to communi cate with E2 If these devices have not yet been mounted refer to Section 3 2 Mounting I O Boards for mounting instructions for these devices 6 2 IMC Prodigy Rooftop Unit Controllers All E2 Building Controller BX versions 2 21F01 and The RS485 Network and Hardware Setup 6 5 above may communicate with IMC Prodigy rooftop units equipped with IMC Prodigy control boards version M4 1 or higher E2 controllers version 2 30F01 and above may use any of the RS485 I O ports COM2 COM4 or COM6 as a IMC Prodigy communication port Version 2 21F01 E2 units may only connect IMC Prodigys to an RS485 Expansion Card Connectivity to IMC Prodigy is a licensed feature and must be purchased from Retail Solu tions The IMC Pr
40. ager Set the COM port to MODBUS and the baud rate match the baud rate on the CT drive For more informa tion on setting up serial ports go to Section 5 Serial Con 6 6 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee figuration The Control Techniques VSD has its own technical bulletin that explains interfacing with E2 P N 026 4122 The installation and operation manual explaining the VSD is maintained by Control Techniques Contact your Con trol Techniques representative for a copy of this manual 6 3 2 E2 controllers version 2 21F01 and above may com municate with Copeland ISD compressors using the ECT MODBUS network E2 controllers version 2 30F01 and above may use any of the RS485 I O ports COM2 or COMO as a Copeland ISD communication port Version 2 21F01 E2 units may only connect Cope land ISD compressors to an RS485 Expansion Card Copeland ISD Compressors The installation and operation manual explaining the Copeland ISD interface 1s maintained by Copeland Con tact your Copeland representative for a copy of this man ual 6 3 3 XR XEV and XEV22D Case Controllers E2 controllers version 2 84 or greater communicate with the XR and XEV controllers The XR and XEV con trol compressor regulation defrost light and evaporator fans in refrigeration systems on normal low or medium temperatures control a wide variety of stepper electronic expansion valves and anti sweat heaters if present and measure and
41. eese eene nennen nne ener eren entree 11 1 11 1 2 1 Overview of PID Control Strategy oisein a R 11 1 2 2 Variable Speed Compressors A xs 11 1 2 3 Floating Setpoint Control eese entente en 11 1 3 The Enhanced Suction Group Application E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual Table of Contents ix 1 Learning MOG M ital bain eas 11 41 3272 boad Arialysls 3 4 ication on Eee ete t ei a hae ie ees 11 1 3 3 The Control Cycles Parameter 11 1 3 4 Variable Speed Digital Scroll and Digital Discus Compressor Support see 11 2 11312325 Floating Suction Control iet re rre ee tee reir ean eT 11 2 LD TA Hardware Overview ase iet eei toin qet etis cid ee ed ende c gest vase deed ice eee ED eed este d 11 2 11 2 CONDENSER CONTROL vestit eter rH ERHTO Pe Eee ns 11 3 11 2 1 Air Cooled Condensers suasit e a ete pa ente die beta aden 11 3 112211 Air Cooled Strategy iua erret dr exe e 11 3 11 2 1 2 Temperature Differential Strategy sioe reet e e Re eR Te ORI Hi bee HU dre pee pee ipea 11 3 11 2 2 Evaporative Condensers uui e pce aue RH aen bi dite nie aH GER MBSASEEXUNOInIn TI CondenserSplit Mode degere ets 11 2 5 Fast ReCOVeky oU Re er
42. put of heating and cooling devices As is the case with all applications that use PID control Heat Cool control makes use of a PID setpoint and a throttling range Refer to Appendix D PID Control for more information Unlike normal PID loops that assume a 5096 output is required to keep the temperature stabilized on the setpoint Heat Cools strive to stabilize the temperature on the set point with the output at 096 Thus when the temperature goes below a heating setpoint or above a cooling setpoint the heating or cooling outputs climb from 0 to 100 as determined by the throttling range see Figure 11 25 Lighting Control Command Cells Input Valie DVCOMBINER In 1 Out In2 In3 In4 SCHEDIF Alt Combiner e Use Alt Comb Comb Type Alt Comb Invert Output 3 ONESHOT PHBe Trigger Je Pulse Width Timer MIN ON OFF OVERRIDE Vw In LIGHTS 26512043 Figure 11 25 Example of Heat Cool PID Control By default only the proportional and integral modes of PID control are enabled for Heat Cools The user may choose to add the Derivative mode or to get rid of the Inte gral mode and use strictly Proportional control 11 17 2 Unoccupied Hysteresis When the Heat Cool receives an indication that the building is unoccupied the control mode changes from the PID method described previousl
43. tion it contains highlighted indicators and icons to show when a user is operating in a particular mode such as full options edit macro record or insert mode If the E2 s Global Data feature is being used to supply outside air temperature and outside relative humidity val ues these values will also be displayed in the header 10 6 1 1 Header Icons At the very top of every screen in the E2 there are icons that indicate various stages of activity number of users logged into the controller battery alerts connectivity status and more 68 61 65 CX 366 Unit 1 11 15 16 Device Summary ALARM Press Log In Out to Log On Figure 10 6 Header Icons 10 4 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual icon Battery indicator Yellow less than 30 of battery life left Red less than 10 of bat tery life left or battery switch is disabled Single user is logged in Multi users are logged in Le Erered Eron X HI E Caps lock is ON Table 10 1 Header Icons and Descriptions 10 6 2 TheFunction Keys F1 SUCTION F2 CONDENSER F3 CIRCUITS SENSORS FS SETUP Figure 10 7 Home Screen Function Keys RX version shown At the very bottom of every screen in the E2 there are five boxes labeled through El These boxes are the function key descriptions The function key descrip tions show what each of the five function keys do when pressed Options will vary depending o
44. 1L Pressure Tr nsdUC ES re i co Sen E E C RH ERE e eee RR E E E nie ce ERE EAS 3 5 L1 Mounting se iod dite not ede donee ep eon ah Re et ep e opt d ene ee et 3 5 2 Inside Temperature Sensor a iita be e e e e resi eb uu pee tie er ORE bes eredibus 3 5 2 1 Location ia oro E ido Do DOR Hop Po pore op obe ie ade dne 3252 2 Mo nlTIp eee ade fene e RII D HE ERE ERROR UE e ie een 3 5 3 Outside Temperature Sensor 3 5 39 LOCATION in erede ce etes ete eee tet e Ve operto deb vuv Neues EE T EE SORRENTO 3 5 4 Insertion Temperature Probe 3 5 4 1 _ 3 5 4 2 3 5 5 Supply and Return Air Sensors 3 5 6 Refrigeration System Temperature Probes and eene eene 3 9 3 5 6 1 LOCATION iint ee dese tiere eei 3 5 6 2 Mounting Bullet and Pipe Mount Sensors 3 5 7 Product Temperature Probes esee eene 3 5 8 Humidity Sensors and Humidistats eee 3 9 35 81 IndGor RH Sensor 3 5 8 2 Outdoor RH 3 5 8 3 Duct mounted Insertion RH Probe 3 5 9 Dewpoint eI mene reete en ER HMM 3 5 9 2 Mountings ee ee LS S E debe o e edere ad e i TE dicet 3 5 10 Light Level Sensor 3
45. 6 Enter the appropriate access level for the user See Table 10 7 7 Press BACK 10 12 3 Deleting a User To delete a user from the system 1 Move the cursor so that it is highlighting the record to delete in the Users box at the bottom of the screen and press DELETE USER 2 question box will appear to double check the deletion of the current record Press Wil if you are sure about the deletion 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ 10 13 Set Up IJO Network b RX 300 Unit 3 OAT 78 RX DEU SUMMARY NONE 10 57 06 ALARM EN SUC GRPO1 22 8 Circuits State Temp CKT61 Off NONE CKT82 NONE T61 Refr NONE NETWORK SETUP B Network Summary Connected 1 0 Boards amp Controllers Router Setup SUCTION GRP81 beast Controller Associations CONDENSER trl Value Cmd ENS61 NONE OFF Controlled By Dis SENS61 NOTAC OFF F1 ON Figure 10 22 Network Setup Menu To start the setup on the I O Network access the Net work Setup menu 1 Press to open the Main Menu 2 Press System Configuration 3 Press Network Setup The Network Setup menu displays four options Network Summary Connected I O Boards amp Controllers Router Setup Controller Associations For the total E2 devices online or offline status setup screens changing board or controller names config uring and commissioning devices deleting a device and viewing detailed status screens of c
46. 8R0_661 8R0 IONet Port 8D0 881 800 10 Port 4A0_661 10 IONet Port LEAK DETECT881 IRLDS IONet Port CL RSC 881 CtrlLink RSC No Network Unknown CL CD 801 CtriLink CD work a Unknown CL RCCO01 CtrlLink ACC Unknoun ISD2 COHP 601 ISD 2 8 Conp M Unknoun PERF ALERT_661 Performance Alert HODBUS 1 Unknoun SQD BRKRPNL661 590 Breaker Panel HODBUS 1 SQD BRKRPNL662 SqD Breaker Panel HODBUS 1 STATUS DSP_661 Status Display Ethernet 1 STATUS DSP_662 Status Display Ethernet 1 This Controller F1 DELETE RCRD F2 STATUS NET STATUS COMMISSION FS SETUP Figure 8 6 Network Summary Screen RX Unit Shown Highlight the LonMark device on the screen you wish to commission and follow the steps in Section 10 14 2 Commissioning a Device to commission the device 8 8 1 1 Troubleshooting After commissioning has been completed check to make sure the device has been added successfully From the Main Menu select BH Configured Applications to open the Configured Applications list If the device you have commissioned does not appear in this list the Description File has failed to upload correctly onto the E2 An alarm of No Description File will be generated and can be found in the Alarm Advisory Log Call Retail Solu tions at 770 425 2724 to contact your sales representative or technical assistance to obtain the Description File Echelon Network and Hardware Setup 8 5 CC
47. Be sure that no other ser vice buttons on any devices on the network are being pressed during the Wait Time Since the service button on the CC 100 is its Hand held Terminal jack be sure that no one has a Hand held Terminal plugged into a CC 100 other than the one being commissioned The location of the service button and the method of pressing it depends on the device or controller being com 10 18 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual missioned The CC 100 s Service Button Since the CC 100 is meant to remain in an enclosure the CC100 s Hand Held Terminal jack has been config ured to act as the service button Plugging a Hand Held Terminal into the jack simulates a service button press The Hand Held Terminal Jack is on the left side of the case controller next to the power cable harness connec tion To send the Neuron ID plug a Hand Held Terminal into the jack and hold it in for five seconds The TD3 s Service Button FUNCTION COMMISSIONING BUTTON BUTTON ECHELON ADDRESS STICKER RUBBER SLEEVE ON BOTTOM Figure 10 29 TD3 Service Button Location The service button on the TD3 is located on the front panel Figure 10 29 Of the two buttons on the face the commissioning button is the one on the right To send the Neuron ID press and hold this button down for five sec onds The ESR8 s Service Button LII AHUL COMMISSIONING BUTTON
48. Monitoring ik hw Er a Rete Pet rie abe Pee er LER 11 33 1011 3 Load d e a e REPRE tabs a ede Cag ERR CU ARE EE ea eae 11 34 LELEST cD finiti n zz Se E te ai Se A AS DI DER PN IHE 11 34 Hb Shedding Levels sci tel nec eed e eme ae eee P ee eds 11 34 DIE e aet i pui ete E IERI 11 34 11 11 6 How Demand Control Uses Load Shedding eese ener nenne 11 36 11 11 6 1 Power Monitoring Input eonenni i A E E EEE EO EE A E 11 37 SENSOR CONTROL R EAE A EE oet ttd RE A EE 11 37 TD O AS OV CIVIC Wi a sus tT Red EA OE EE 11 37 11 12 22 Analog Sensor Control sionin e E E CU dedic de Datei LR 11 37 11 12 3 Cut In Cut Out Setpoint Coritrol 5 cete ede tte Sah a hae eeoa p eop Eee eia oE PROSTRE 11 37 Digital Sensor Control a b eee e e Rr ne ien cn aes GE a 11 37 LEADS Logical Combination s a ROUEN d pea ie bs Eres 11 38 11 13 EOOP SEQUENCE CONTROL 11 38 11 13 1 Layout of the Loop Sequence Control Application eese eere ener enne 11 38 11 13 1 1 Control Cells shat si s 11 13 1 2 Output Cells hs sens DA VS ES Diagrath ig ete e eee ee E BT ete ele eie 11 13 2 Loop Sequence Control Cell Descriptions eese e E e E e 11 39 bl15 23b s EhesSelecto ell oret onte Mot ders cta Mao S EE E MI MUR E D Ed 11 13 2 2 The Setpoint Float Cell 11 13 2 3 The PI
49. N C positions One wire of the two wire con nection should always be con nected to the middle terminal The second wire must be either connected to the N C terminal if you want the relay to be closed ON during power fail ure or the N O terminal if you want the relay to be open OFF during power failure Compressor in override Highlight compressor stage and cancel the override by pressing Enter to open the Actions Menu Select 3 for Override options or go to the Override Bypass Log to view and cancel overrides 1 From the Main Menu press 8 to open the Status menu 2 From the Status menu press 4 for the Graphs Logs menu 3 Press 3 for the Override Bypass Log This screen gives you quick access to all overrides bypasses in the system Rack is in Phase Fail Verify correct phase and verify correct input for phase loss If you specified that phase pro tection would be used on this rack the Phase Loss input is dis played The Phase Loss input is automatically configured to use E2 s Global Data phase loss pro tection source If you wish to define a different source re define this input definition To point this input to a board and point address press EDIT and then 1 to change the definition format Oil sensors are set up but are not in use Remove oil sensors from indi vidual compressors 1 Highlight the Comp Setup tab C6 in the Suction Group Setup screen 2 Us
50. Temperature Control i et Do ge RUE RE e P ERE E E Pe Heo ee Ee ERRORS LD DZONE Temper ture hd i ge dade e RI ee qve te ve desi eve Eee eeepc ies TH 7 6 Economi zer Control iui oet tr bite qp PRO PR UN LE ZF Economization En ble cis acca ck si ei re atte ENSURE UNI ORI ED TERR e keen aE 11 7 8 The Effect of Enabling Economization eese esee esee eere entente teet teret nete ennt 11 27 11 7 9 Dehumidification Control cad n tee he Ped e iet Fete a e e pde ees 11 27 14 710 The Zone Humidity Input ee ceto edi eiie egit ee 11 27 11 7 11 The Effect of Enabling Dehumidification eese eene eren entree 11 27 11 7 11 1 MultiFlex RTUs and RCBs Il EZ AHUS ettet s bs ei 11 7412 Optimum Start Stop e eR e E e e ERE t petet ia repre ie i eta 11 7 13 Losing Contact With Zone Applications eese eese ener enne trennen mene nenne terere eene 11 28 LIT AA Stand Alone MultiFlex RTUs eec eet ette TIN eR Senos 11 28 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual Table of Contents xi 11 7 15 MultiFlex RTU ARTC and AHU Zone 11 26 IS MULTIPLEX CUR BOAR Dori ettet eerte tmo 11 29 TEST MULTIPLEX PAK BOARD nep tenter abe Rh hidden 11 29 TITO EIGHTING SCHEDUEBS zer mH OR EUER RE UU PERIERE RUPES 11 29 OV CI
51. The differences between the two PIDs can be seen by observing the throttling ranges For non Condenser Con trol applications PID reacts to error that exists on either side of the setpoint If the input goes lower than the set Other PID Features point the output percentage is dropped from 50 it is assumed this will result in the input rising back to the set point Likewise when the input is higher than the set point the output percentage is raised For Condenser Control PID no reaction is made to an input that is lower than the setpoint since the output percentage is already 0 Changing the Output at Setpoint Advanced users may wish to change the Output at Set point in order to change the stabilization characteristics of their system s In most cases the default values of the Output at Setpoint 0 for Condenser Control and HVAC 50 for all others are appropriate and recommended Changing the value of the Output at Setpoint may have some beneficial results but at the same time it may also hamper the system s ability to react to changing condi tions and it may also result in decreased energy efficiency Other PID Features The following section lists other PID related constants or control structures that are a part of some PID control algorithms Many of these features are advanced features that are accessible only by service personnel or advanced users As a general rule it is best to contact Retail S
52. This jumper should be either be set to ENABLE or it should not be present at all X300 X300 Links Lost CRC Err 20 An internal error has caused aloss of communication between E2s C 14 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ Appendix D PID Control Introduction to PID Control PID Control is a specialized method of closed loop control that strives to maintain equality between an input value and a user defined setpoint by operating a device or a number of devices at somewhere between 0 and 100 of full capacity PID Control works by making adjustments to the out put at a constant rate called the update rate usually 2 6 seconds For every update that occurs PID Control takes a reading from the input sensoror transducer measures the distance between the input andthe setpoint also called the error makes a series of calculations and adjusts the out put percentage in such a way as to move the input towards the setpoint in the most efficient manner The calculations that determine the new value of the output after each update aremade by three different modes of control Proportional P Mode Integral T Mode and Derivative D Mode Each mode of control makes its own adjustment to the output percentage and the three adjustments are added to the previous output percentage to determine the new output percentage In mathematical terms every update will affect
53. To view expanded information on alog entry highlight the desired log and press EXPD INFO A screen will come up telling the user what advisory is being viewed out of a total number of advisories Property or Board Point This message shows the location where the advisory was generated This will be a board and point address or an application input or output in Area Ctrl Applica tion Property format Advisory Message The advisory message is displayed below the Property or Board Point The Advisory Message describes the advi sory log entry what went wrong in the system Acknowledge Status Acknowledge Status describes the state of the advi sory If an advisory has been acknowledged or reset the user name or the person who acknowledged or reset the alarm will appear below the acknowledge status The date and time when the advisory was acknowledged or reset will also be displayed below the user s name If the advisory has not been acknowledged or reset this field will display an asterisk along with the word UNK Report Priority The report priority fields describe the priority level of the advisory as well as the date and time the advisory occurred Return To Normal If the advisory has returned to a normal state either on its own or because of a user ordered alarm reset the date Operator s Guide to Using the E2 12 13 and time on which the reset occurred will be shown beside th
54. at DR 11 51 11 21 6 2 Obstructed Zone aea r deer nee ERU Ee EH ER SERIO S Peto e Ea da te ree Ente Pe consi re NERIS 11 51 LL21 7 Service Modes is Re DEVE NER DER AES 11 51 11 21 8 Heat Cut In Cut Out Setpoints For Each Stage esee eene nennen ennt 11 51 11 21 9 Cool Cut In Cut Out Setpoints For Each Stage essent entente nennen nnne 11 51 1 21 10 Dehumidification Control sete eere tenete rrr rete EH p trt ee ipea 11 51 LIZLIL Two Speed Fan Control iue e op ad e nO E eui 11 51 II 2h12 Configuration eec D o ERGO OR tpe eap pei 11 52 14 22 ELEXIBEBCOMBINER iore Ep IRR EG 11 52 11 22 MODULAR CHILLER CONTROL 11 52 11 52 11 23 2 Learning Mode codd ER e E e PERI rr Re OR E Pp MR Re REN RR 11 53 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual Table of Contents xiii 1123 3 The Control Cycles Parameter ere rH ER RE ere RR eR 11 23 4 Compressor Control case ri e GR alu a e e ERE UT e Re eee pretesa ipe deerat 11 23 4 1 Digital Scroll Compressor sese eret sen nennen ettet nennen 11 23 4 2 Variable Frequency Drive Compressor m ids TT 11 23 4 3 Unequal Capacity CompresSOrs rites feci S EA ER ERN ER ERR eee ER 11 23 9 Bypass Valve Control i ee ee ICD e
55. denser fans should all be configured normally closed N C Condenser Fan Relay Variable Speed Evaporator Pumps C see note N C see note Evap only N C 7 C The fan should operate at 10096 during loss of communication with E2 N Dampers Evap N N C up Dampers should be open during communication loss N C only N Some condensers have dual pumps that cycle at even intervals One pump should be wired N C and the other N O so thatonly one pump runs during communication loss Variable Speed Fan None analog point one analog point This 4AO or 8IO analog point sends the 0 100 fan speed sig Output to inverter nal to the inverter Table 11 4 Suction Group Outputs 11 3 Standard Circuits Refrigerated cases that do not use case controllers are controlled by Standard Circuit applications In a Standard Circuit application the E2 is responsible for all case mon itoring and control it uses the RS485 I O Network to both gather case temperature inputs and activate or deactivate the liquid line solenoids defrost modes and fans Also circuits that use ESR8s and MultiFlex ESRs are controlled using Standard Circuits Standard Circuits NOTE Do not set up a Standard Circuit appli 4 cation for a case that uses a CC 100 or CCB case controller These cases must use Case Cir cuit Control applications see Section 11 4 Case Con trol Circuits 11 3 1 Refriger
56. ee TD3 TACCA MONS GUIDE 1 Connect the two BLUE flying leads on the TD3 harness to the Echelon network 2 Wire the GREEN WHITE and ORANGE leads on the TD3 harness to the discharge air probe the product temperature probe and the defrost termination sensor respectively 3 Connect the two RED leads and the GREEN BLACK ground lead to a Class 2 24VAC transformer rated at 4VA or greater a 2 DI CU UMS IAE IT NN TN EC L STUB IS SPLICED TO BOTH a ENDS OF THE ECHELON e TRUNK CABLE ol l Il OI 8 ECHELON CABLE TRUNK EN N N i STUB IS CABLE TYPE LEVEL IV 22AWG 2 PAIR NN CONNECTAIR W221P 2002 eee ee ECHELON CABLE TRUNK Green DISCHARGE AIR TEMP NEM White PRODUCT PROBE Orange DEFROST STAT OR DEFROST SENSOR 3 110 VAC 10 VA 220 VAC 50VA P N 640 0039 P N 640 0042 YELLOW YELLOW RED CLASS 2 POWER CLASS 2 POWER GRN BLK YELLOW RED 8 8 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ 9 Input and Output Setup 9 1 The 16AI SIO and MultiFlex Inputs 9 1 1 Boards Connecting Sensors to Input There are five network boards that may accept inputs on the I O Network the MultiFlex 16AI ARTC and the 810
57. hands of the control network Sensors see what needs to be controlled on the network and Loads are what can be controlled or more specifically be turned on and off such as compressors condensers lights and fans E2 Hardware DISPLAY FUNCTION KEYPAD Figure 2 1 E2 Front Panel Standard Mount 9 06 W x 12 06 H x 3 75 D Recessed Mount 9 06 W x 10 56 H x 2 0 D Base 10 56 W x 10 56 H x 3 75 D Operating 40 F to 149 F 40 C to 65 C Temp Storage Temp 40 F to 158 40 C to 70 C Operating 5 95 RH non condensing at 90 F Humidity 5 100 RH Storage Humidity Power 24 VAC 20 50 60 Hz Class 2 VA Load Table 2 1 E2 Specifications gt 4 Service at 770 425 2724 for E2 controller www NOTE Contact Retail Solutions Customer 1 part numbers and model descriptions Hardware Overview 2 1 E2 Main Processor Board 2 1 1 CPU Figure 2 2 E2 CPU RX 100 Version Shown The E2 CPU or main processor board Figure 2 2 contains the CPU Ethernet port and memory used for log ging The 3 6V battery for the E2 is located on this board and protects log and alarm data during power loss The main processor board connects to the PIB via a ribbon cable The RX and CX 100 versions support mono chrome display only For optimum viewing backlight and contrast adjusts are available for customizing the mono chrome display depe
58. plied by your administrator in this field If not leave this field set to 0 0 0 0 Primary Gateway Contact your network adminis trator to see if a Primary Gateway value is required for this E2 If so enter the Primary Gateway address supplied by your administrator in this field If not leave this field set to 0 0 0 0 Secondary Gateway Contact your network administrator to see if a Secondary Gateway value is required for this E2 If so enter the Secondary Gate way address supplied by your administrator in this field If not leave this field set to 0 0 0 0 DHCP Enabled Dynamic Host Communication Protocol DHCP isa protocol that assigns a dynamic IP address to devices on a network With dynamic addressing a device could have a different IP address every time it connects to the network When set to Yes DHCP Enabled keeps track of IP addresses and enables a new IP device to be added to a network without having to manually assign it a unique IP address DHCP supports a mix of static and dynamic IP addresses Quick Start 10 11 10 11 Set Up Network Baud Rates lt lt lt NOTE If a baud rate is the controller must be 4 rebooted turned OFF then ON again to make the baud rate change occur 10 11 1 COM1 Serial RS232 Baud Rate To access COMI Serial RS232 and I O Network baud rates 1 Press to open the Main Menu amp 2 Press System Configuration 3 Press System Information
59. quality 11 7 3 3 AHUs An AHU controls all aspects of an air handling unit including up to eight stages of auxiliary or reclaim heat six cooling stages dehumidification analog or digital economization and support for single two or variable speed fans Normally since AHUs are designed to cover a wide area of space AHU Control applications operate on their own and are not associated with Zone applications they are large enough to be zones within themselves How Software Overview 11 25 ever 1f desired an AHU may be associated with a Zone application which will allow the AHU to use the Zone s setpoints occupancy state summer winter state and dehu midification and economization enabling 11 7 4 Temperature Control As mentioned Zone applications do not control tem perature themselves Zone applications simply pass along the setpoints an HVAC unit will use and the individual unit is responsible for controlling to the setpoint using its own temperature input The Zone application passes along eight different set points which are shown in Table 11 11 Of these setpoints the application receiving the setpoints will only use one cooling and one heating setpoint The pair the application will use is determined by whether the current season is SUMMER or WINTER and whether the building is OCCUPIED or UNOCCUPIED both of which is supplied by the Zone SUMMER COOL OCC SUMMER HEAT OCC SUMMER COOL
60. schedules that a special day or event is occurring For example master schedules and their corresponding slave schedules may be programmed with special holiday events such as Keep all lights off during Holiday x The holiday schedule s job is to inform the schedules to which it is connected Today is Holiday x Although holiday schedules are used exclusively by Time Scheduling applications they are setup as individual applications separate from Time Scheduling See Section 11 14 2 Holiday Schedules for more information Temporary schedules are technically not schedules but temporary override functions that may be made to Time Scheduling and Holidays exist within an individual master or slave schedule Tem porary schedules are used to temporarily override the ON OFF instructions of an individual master or slave sched ule Generally temporary schedules are only used for one shot applications such as keeping the lights on an extra hour for a single night Temporary schedules override all other events within a master or slave schedule including holidays 11 14 1 How Schedules Work 11 14 1 1 Events Master schedules and slave schedules consist of up to 15 pairs of events Events are simple commands to turn the schedule output either ON or OFF at a particular time within a range of days Events are usually programmed in pairs so that during a specified range of days the schedule output can be turned ON and OFF at a parti
61. the Select cell will assume this application will not use occupancy based set points and will use the occupied setpoint only no switch ing Note the Select cell does not have any on board sched ule function to determine for itself whether the building is occupied or unoccupied It relies solely on the digital state Software Overview 11 39 of the Occupancy input If you wish to follow a schedule for occupancy this input must be tied to the output of a Time Schedule application 11 13 2 2 The Setpoint Float Cell The Setpoint Float cell provides users to raise and lower the control setpoint based on the value of a sensor called the float sensor The float sensor can be any type of analog sensor but 1s typically a temperature sen sor since most of the applications for floating setpoints involve HVAC and floating the setpoint based on outdoor air temperature To set up the Setpoint Float cell you must provide three values a High Float Value a Low Float Value and an Output Range The Output Range is the maximum amount that the PID Setpoint may vary An Output Range of 4 for exam ple means that the control setpoint may only be increased by a maximum of 2 and decreased by a maximum of 2 The High Float Value and Low Float Value form a range of values that determine what portion of the Output Range is applied to the final control setpoint For example suppose a Setpoint Float cell is given a High Float Value
62. the function key descriptions and the help line Options will vary depending on the type of controller used For more information on the E2 Home screen including options for both RX and BX versions see Sec tion 12 1 The E2 Home Screen 10 5 1 Customizing the Home Screen The Home screen can be customized to show different information depending on the user s needs There areeight different screen options available The Device Summary screen is the Default screen See Section 12 5 Customiz ing the Home Screen for the steps to customize the Home screen Quick Start 10 3 10 6 Common Screen Ele ments TETTE 17 10 28 RX DEU SUMMARY SUCTION GRPO1 tate Tenp Refr NONE CAP 100 2 Refr NONE NONE STANDARD CKTOA E 5 STANDARD CKTOS STANDARD CKTU Refr STANDARD Refr STANDARD CKTOR Refr STANDARD CKTO9 Refr STANDARD CKT10 Refr STANDARD CKT11 Re CONDENSER01 NONE 200 0 HELP LINE Controlled fy Discharge Status Fan s On 1 DIGITAL 1 DICITOL Fiz SUCTION F2 CONDENSER Fa CIRCUITS z SENSORS F5 SETUP FUNCT ON KEY DESCRIPTIONS Figure 10 5 Common Screen Elements RX version shown 10 6 1 The Header The first two lines at the top of the E2 screen are referred to as the screen header This area of the screen contains the time and date controller name subnet and node number and alarm and failure notifications In addi
63. 0a b j E2 gateway E2 Unit 1 it 2 Ethernet Local UlttraSite g 2 3m R S Figure 7 3 TCP IP Setup Screen 3 over to the Peer Netwrk tab VPN Connection VPN Firewal x 05 09 05 BX 300 Unit 1 16 54 28 Figure 7 2 Open Network Layout Use Ctrl X to Select CX Tabs SETUP C1 General C2 Eng Units C3 Modem C4 TCP IP fn C8 Peer Netwrk co General Setup GENERAL SERV Peer Netwrk Value ortware up AutoDscTimeout 300 ReconectTimeout 120 Group Name NAME OF SITE 1 Log on to the E2 controller 2 Navigate to the TCP IP setup screen Alt T www NOTE DHCP does not have to be enabled if 5 you have the IP Address Subnet Mask and Primary Gateway settings Contact your IT Network Administrator for all IP configuration infor mation If you do not have the IP configuration set tings and there is a DHCP server on the network set Figure 7 4 Peer Network Tab Set Network Type DHCP Enabled to Yes and it will retrieve the informa 4 Change Network Type to Ethernet ETH and tion from the server and populate those fields E2 con press Enter The Group Name field is now visi trollers must all have the same Ethernet Subnet in ble order to communicate box to box www NOTE If unsure of any tab settings it is rec 4 ommended that the default settings be used 5 Once the Ethernet network type is enabled enter Software Setup E2 E
64. 1 6 ON LINE HELP SYSTEM OVERVIEW xit en eed bee EEEE ise e e ar 1 7 1 7 SOFTWARE LICENSING i aito e eR REP RE TU EE UD Er eet chases ep er e eR eno eter des 1 7 2 HARDWARE OVER VIEW 2 1 2 1 EZ HARDWARE HERE UP ERO DURCH SOWIE CR UTOR HE Re ERREUR eee 2 1 21 1 E2 Main Processor Board CPU ss eet rer epe re See ee elect 2 2 2 1 2 E2 Processor Interface Board PIB eese esee 2 2 DAS FEZ ROY DAG e ecoute et rettet ite t aede cati eee RI e Revo des 2 2 LASA LEDS E 2 2 2 1 5 PC 104 Peripherals The Internal Modem Previous Generation Processor Board esee 2 3 2 2 I O NETWORK BOARDS AND PERIPHERALS iriri E EE ERA teen entente trennen enne 2 3 22 TheGateway Board xs eere pi IER RE RIPE 2 3 PEE TITRE 2 4 2 2 2 1 MultiFlex 16 Input Board entente ate tene dria ite iae ia inia anto innt ene eu ene o eo en 2 4 2 2 2 2 MultiFlex Combination Input Output Boards entente tenente tenerent ener 2 5 2 2 2 3 Multi Flex CUBE sar eet Eh e e oce e deed d Das S scd der dime Se a tea diee 2 2 2 4 MultiFlex BX and CX Only m T 2 2 2 5 MultiFlex Rooftop Control Board BX and CX enne nene 2 7 2 2 2 6 Mu ltiElex PA
65. 100 CS 100 INSTALLATION GUIDE DETAIL A A NETWORK 3 OUTPUT js CABLE vaLve HB D Y POWER MODULE 1 Connect CC 100 to power module using output cable P N 335 3258 If not using a CPC power module clip the connector from the cable and wire based on the pinout shown below 2a If using a pulse valve connect to the CC 100 using valve cable P N 335 3263 2b If using a Sporlan SEI or Alco ESR stepper valve with four pin connector connect valve to CC 100 CS 100 using valve cable P N 335 3261 2c If using a stepper with no four pin connector connect valve to CC 100 CS 100 using valve cable P N 335 3260 A A 3 Wire the CC 100 CS 100 to Echelon network 1 2a CASE NS GRA CONTROLLER roune GRAYIBLACK a BLACK AUX as PEACIURED PULSE VALVE 1 giulia BLACWRED PULSE VALVE 1 Output Cable 9 gt co CC 100 POWER MODULE E 5 BLACK GREEN PULSE VALVE 2 gt CASE 20 6 BLACK GREEN PULSE VALVE 2 VALVE RECEPTACLE CONTROLLER a PLACK TO 24VAC CLASS 2 50VA SOURCE 2 BLACK GROUND 2b 1 MN y 8 9 1011 12 1314 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SPORLAN BLACK PINOUT FOR CC 100 AUX GROUND POWER MODULE RECEPTACLE CC 100 SEI amp BLACK AUX GROUND CS 100 ALCO ESR BLACK TO 24VAC CLASS 2 50VA SOURCE BLA
66. 2 RS485 jumpers E2 4 2 Termination Block 8 3 Termination Res istance Jumpers I O Network 6 4 Termination Resistance Jumpers I O Network See Jumpers termination Thermostatic Expansion Valves See TXVs Time Date Setup 0 9 Active Date 70 9 Active Time 10 9 Date Format 10 10 Daylight Savings Dates 70 10 Daylight Savings Time uses GMT 0 10 Sundown 70 10 Time Zone 10 9 Unit Location From 70 10 Toggle Full Options 72 3 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ Transducers Pressure See Sensors pressure stand alone mode 11 28 transducers MultiFlex RTU 11 28 Transformers temperature control 71 26 T O board 6 5 zone humidity 71 27 selecting the correct VA rating 6 5 8 3 zone temperature 71 26 six board 6 5 ten board 6 5 three board 6 5 Troubleshooting F Two speed fan control 1 51 TXVs control using CC 100s 11 12 U Unit Controllers Echelon 70 2 10 16 User Access Menu 10 13 Usernames Creating 10 13 V Valves Alco ESR wire colors 9 6 Alco ESV wire colors 9 6 EEPR cables for CC 100 9 75 EEVs cables for CC 100 9 75 Sporlan CDS wire colors 9 6 Sporlan SEI wire colors 9 6 W Watt hour Transducer See Sensors KW Trans ducer Web Services 0 20 Wire Types Echelon Network 8 7 s Zone Control 11 25 AHUs 11 23 11 25 dehumidification 71 27 dehumidification 71 27 economization 26 11 27 enabling 71 26 MultiFlex 25 MultiFlex RTUs dehumidification 71 27 optimum start stop OSS 11 27
67. 2 Temperature Differential Strat egy The temperature differential strategy attempts to keep a minimum amount of difference between the temperature of the refrigerant and the ambient outside temperature This strategy begins by determining the temperature of the refrigerant coming into the condenser This can be sup plied by either atemperature sensor or pressure transducer located near the condenser inlet if it s a pressure trans ducer its value will automatically be converted to a tem perature value based upon the type of refrigerant Software Overview 11 3 The refrigerant temperature is subtracted from the value of an ambient air temperature sensor The result is the temperature differential It is this differential value that is compared to the PID setpoint for the purpose of determining the amount of total fan capacity to activate 11 2 2 Evaporative Condensers In an evaporative condenser water is sprayed across a condenser coil which cools the refrigerant as water is evaporated Control of the evaporative condenser is simi lar in ways to the air cooled strategy in that the Condenser Control application uses PID control to activate or deacti vate fans thus increasing or decreasing the amount of evaporative cooling Like air cooled condensers evaporative condensers may be controlled by discharge pressure or temperature They may also be controlled by water sump temperature In addition each evaporative condens
68. 3 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual to the cut out four screws and four nuts are included but the plate is equipped with a total of 14 holes for the best possible fit 219 DIA 14 HOLES CUT OUT TOP 9 97 219 DIA 4 HOLES SIDE 281 DIA 4 HOLES Figure 3 6 Conversion Bracket for REFLECS Side Mount Figure 3 6 shows the conversion bracket that allows a side mounted REFLECS to be converted to a side mounted E2 The conversion bracket is attached to the back of the E2 using the two holes at the top and bottom of the bracket and aligning the oval openings with the oval cut outs in the back of the E2case Once the E2 is attached to the conversion bracket use the two holes in either side of the conversion bracket depending on which side is needed to mount the E2 to the wall and replace the REFLECS controller 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 3 1 4 Blank face control is designed to be used in a system with more than one E2 It has no screen or keyboard and is logged into remotely from another E2 on the Echelon net work The green General Status LED transmits status information to the user See Table 2 3 on page 2 3 for more information on main board CPU status LEDs Blank face mounting dimensions are identical to the stan dard and recessed mount boxes See Figure 3 3 and Fig ure 3 4 3 2 Mounting I O Boards The 16AI 8RO 8DO 4
69. 400 Version Shown 12 4 3 The E2 Keypad The Cursor The cursor highlights individual fields on the E2 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ screen allowing you to change their contents and or select them to perform other functions like viewing logs graphs or setting alarm parameters The E2 includes arrow keys for the user to easily navigate the cursor around each screen Areas can be accessed for detailed information and certain functions by guiding the cursor with the arrow keys The Tab Key When an E2 screen is splitinto areas like the default Main Status screen the Tab le cursor to each section of the current screen The border around each section is highlighted by the cursor so the user will know which section the cursor is on The Enter Key Pressing the key from the Home screen or any up the Actions Menu If is pressed that high key moves the application status screen will po an option is highlighted when lighted option is selected Pressing on an applica tion summary screen will bring you to the status screen of that application Keypad PREV TAB Moves backward one screen NEXT TAB Moves forward one screen EDIT Opens the Edit Menu box STATUS OVER Opens the Detailed RIDE or LOOK UP Status screen Opens the Override Update screen or Look Up Tables Opens the Setup screens or Cancels an operation SETUP or CANCEL Table 12 5 Function Keys for Setup Screens Navigation
70. 71 8 inputs wiring 11 9 line up ESR Defrost control 71 6 line up MFESR Defrost control 71 6 outputs wiring 1 10 problems with F 6 pulsed defrost 1 7 refrigeration control 71 5 line up ESR 71 6 line up MFESR 171 6 temperature control 6 temperature monitor 6 temperature control 6 temperature monitor 6 wiring 11 8 State 2 11 Status Screen 72 5 Status Screen The Main 10 3 Status Screens 10 5 Circuit Status Screens 72 10 Condenser Status Screen 2 0 Home Screen 2 navigation of cursor 2 7 Network Summary Screen 0 16 12 10 Sensor Control Screen 2 0 Suction Group Status Screen 2 0 Subnet setting the number 0 2 10 16 Suction Groups 11 1 bypassing compressor stages 2 9 Enhanced 71 1 floating setpoint control 71 1 hardware overview 11 2 Introduction 71 1 overriding compressor stages 12 9 1 10 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual PID control strategy overview 11 1 variable speed compressors 171 1 Summary Screen 2 5 Superheat Control 71 11 Supply And Return Air Sensors 3 8 System Configuration Menu 0 7 System Information Menu 0 8 T Tabs Index 10 27 TCP IP setup 70 11 TD3 Temperature Display defined 2 13 features 2 13 Temperature Control case controllers 77 11 Temperature Differential TD Control 47 alarms 71 48 configuration 11 47 inputs 11 48 setpoints 47 TD failsafes 11 47 TD strategy 11 47 Temperature Differential Strategy 71 3 Termination 8 2 block 8 3 Echelon jumpers E2 4
71. BIOS BIOS Extension Updated 50 The E2 s BIOS was successfully updated 50 Can t Set Hardware Cloc 20 The E2 1s unable to change the time on its hardware clock Case Cleaning Was Started User A case circuit has entered clean mode U ser A single temperature sensor in a Standard Circuit or Case Control Circuit is recording a temperature higher than its defined case temperature high set point Case Temp Low Limit Exceeded A single temperature sensor in a Standard Circuit or Case Control Circuit is recording a temperature lower than its defined case temperature low setpoint Cell Config Not Restored 15 E2 s attempt to restore configuration data to its appli BRUNNEN C RE Cell Create Failed For Restore 20 E2 attempted to create new applications as part of the configuration restoration process and failed to do so successfully Checkit Sensor Has Failed User A Checkit sensor 1s returning an invalid temperature value indicating a sensor failure Checkit Sensor Is Alarming User A Checkit sensor on a Suction Group application 1s recording a high temperature Checkit Sensor Is In Notice User A Checkit sensor s temperature 1s above its pro grammed notice setpoint C 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 Priority Comb Temp Hi Limit Exceeded User The combined temperature of an entire Standard Cir cuit or Case Control Circuit has risen above its pro grammed high temperature setpoint Com
72. BX Firmware Was Updated 0 The E2 s firmware was successfully updated A smoke detector input on an ARTC MultiFlex RTU has detected smoke SRAM Memory Corrupted 30 A problem with memory has resulted 1n a reset of the State Switched On User A digital value that has been set up to alarm when tatus Config Loss CRC Error An internal error has occurred in the E2 MultiFlex ESR controller has detected a stuck valve ystem date needs manual reset The date time of the box 1s not valid System In Pump Down The suction pressure has fallen e pump setpoint for a Suction Group causing shutdown of the rack Template File Bad CC100 Liq 15 A template file in E2 for a CC 100P or CC 100LS 15 bad emplate File Bad CC100 Suct A template file in E2 for a CC 100H 1s bad emplate File Bad 5100 Ckt A template file in E2 for a CS 100 15 bad Test Dial Successfu E2 performed a test dial out with 1ts modem and the dial out was successful ime Updated By A User Time Updated Over Networ The time n the current E2 was updated by another pd controller or user on the network Timed Out Waiting For FW Updt 50 The E2 waited for a firmware update to begin and it never did Too Many Reboots Flash erased 0 A number of successive reboots has erased the Flas RAM Too Many Reboots SRAM erased 50 A number of successive reboots has erased the SRAM Total On Time Exceeded Limit A digital value s total ON time has exceeded its defined Ti
73. Board Type Brd Pt Type Application Association Value 16AI 1 1 SUCTION PRESS NONE 16AI el vd A SUCTION GRPO2 SUCTION PRESS NONE 16AI 2 3 A CONDENSERO1 PRES CTRL IN NONE CONDENSERO1 DISCH TRIP IN CONDENSERO1 FAST REC IN 16AI 1 4 D OIL FLT PLUGED OCCUPANCY OFF OIL FLT PLUGED LOGIC 16AI 1 5 D COMP OIL FAIL LOGIC OFF 16AI X 6 D GLOBAL DATA REFR PHASE IN OFF 16AI X A D SUCTION GRPO1 VS ALARM INPUT OPEN 16AI 1 8 D SUCTION GRPO2 VS ALARM INPUT OPEN 16AI 1 9 OUTDOOR TEMP INPUTi NONE REF LEVEL INPUT2 GLOBAL DATA OUTDOOR TEMP 16AI 1 10 DROPLEG TEMP INPUTL NONE SUBCOOL INPUT2 REF LEVEL INPUTL 16AI 1 16AI 1 12 2 INPUTI NONE EX FAN 1 INPUTI DAMPER 2 INPUT1 DAMPER 1 INPUTI Fi SETUP F2 DEL MOD F3 OFFSET F4 LOOK UP F5 CANCEL Figure 9 4 Input Status Screen Use the up and down arrow keys to move the cursor to the point you wish to set up and press SETUP A pop up menu such as the one shown in Figure 9 5 will prompt you to specify the point as analog or digital T Press W if the input is analog press 4 if the input is dig 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ ital or press to cancel setup 1 8 D 1 9 A SUCTION GRPO2 OUTDOOR TEMP VS ALARM INPUT INPUT1 Please select the data type for Input 15 1 Analog 2 Digital Press desired selection DAMPER I ALARM SILANCE LOGIC EX FAN 2 EX FAN 1 DAMPER 2 DAMPER 1 EMERGENCY OVR EME
74. C9 Dehum to check Dehum Stages Dehumidifier source not set up From the same screen verify what the sensor source is Temperature setting for DEHUM OCC or DEHUM UOC is set too high From the same screen check the minimum temperature setting Lighting Control Problems Lights will not come on Make sure you have a Time Schedule set up A Time Sched ule is not Lighting Control You can use the same Time Schedule for several Lighting Controls Set up the Time Schedule first and then assign it to a Lighting Control Set up a Time Schedule and got to Lighting Control Choose the desired application and press SETUP Move the cursor to C7 Inputs and highlight the Board field Press LOOK UP choose the input device and press Highlight the Point field and press LOOK UP Select the type of schedule Enter and press ES Make sure Lighting Control out put is assigned Lights Will Not Come On With The Photocell F 8 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual Photocell is not recognized by controller Make sure the photocell is con figured as an analog input Verify that the type of light sen sor is correct If using a light level sensor from another E2 controller set it up on the controller it is associated with in the Global Data section 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 Index Numerics 16AI Analog Input Board input type dip switches 9 7 power connections for
75. CL 63 662 Subnet 3 Node 2 Specify Neuron ID Of Controller Neuron 1D ME Figure 10 32 Setting Controller Address Neuron ID Enter the device s Neuron ID as it appears on the form you created and press ES The E2 will then look for the controller with the Neuron ID you entered If it is found the E2 commissions the device and you may move on to commissioning the next device If E2 does not find it the display will read ERROR Controller with specified Neuron ID did not respond This could be caused by an improperly entered number or it could be caused by a problem with the device s network connections or power connections When all devices are commissioned keep the form with the Neuron ID stickers in an easily accessible place so that it may be referred to 1f necessary for board remov als replacements or troubleshooting 10 15 License Management Some applications in the E2 are only available when activated with a license key that is obtained through Retail Solutions Licensing allows the user to activate certain features in the E2 To obtain a license for a feature go to the TCP IP setup screen and obtain your E2 controller s MAC Al Address Press or from the Main Menu amp l Press System Configuration 2 Press VE Remote Communications 3 Press TCP IP Setup to open the TCP IP Setup screen and locate your E2 s MAC address circled in Figure 10 33 Quick Start 10 19
76. Chain Length SET TERMINATING JUMPERS LON PB Feet 4592 Meters 1400 P N 135 2300 Non Plenum 1 Pair 1000 Feet A TERM P N 135 2301 Plenum TERM 1 Pair 1000 Feet ITN Echelon 5 TERM Earth JP7 CO around TERMINATED 12 or 14 AWG JP7 NOT TERMINATED DAISY CHAIN CONFIGURATION 110 VAC 50VA 220 VAC 50VA P N 640 0041 P N 640 0042 AC1 AC1 e e AC2 AC2 Battery Testing and Replacement E2 Hardware Setup 4 7 5 Serial Configura tion 5 1 Overview E2 s Serial Configuration is the centralized location where all communication ports COM ports may be set up in the E2 controller To support the increasing number of third party devices that E2 can communicate with E2 has the expanded flexibility of dynamic COM ports that will support different types of communication protocols to meet the specific needs of the user Previously all COM ports were pre defined to support a specific type of serial device E2 now has five configu rable COM ports that can communicate with different devices on the network 5 2 COM Ports The Serial Connection Manager is located in General Setup under the Serial tab To access Serial connections to set up the COM ports press Alt M or from the E2 Main Menu amp l System Configuration 2 System Information 3 General Controller Info 4 C3 Serial tab To begin first select the COM port you wish to set up choose the protocol and s
77. Combination Input Output Board Wiring an input to these boards requires three steps 1 Connect the sensor s signal wires to the two ter minals of an input point 2 Setthe input type dip switch that corresponds to the point being connected 3 connect the power lead of the sensor to one of the 5V or 12V power terminals 9 1 1 1 Wiring MultiFlex Boards An input point connector on a MultiFlex 16AI and 16AIe board consists of two terminals as shown in Figure 9 1 One of these terminals labeled SIG reads the sig nal from the sensor while the other labeled Ov is where sensor s ground and or cable shield wire 1s connected MULTIFLEX INPUT POINTS Ov 516 INPUT 1 Figure 9 1 Input Board Points 16AI Boards On a 16AI terminals are numbered 1 32 starting with the first terminal of point 1 and ending with the last termi nal of point 16 The even numbered terminals of a 16AI are always where the signal voltages are connected The sensor grounds and cable shields are connected to the odd numbered terminals 8 and ARTC Boards On an 810 board the two terminals of every point are labeled or The ground wire is always connected to the terminal and the signal wire is connected to the The 16AI 8IO and MultiFlex Inputs terminal On the ARTC board the input and output points are predefined and are labeled accordingly 9 1 1 2 Specific w
78. Decision Z2 is made either by setting a fail safe jumper for old style 8ROs or by wiring the load to either the N O or N C terminals on the Form C contact all other output boards Table 9 3 shows how the fail safe switch jumpers and or Form C contacts should be configured based on how you want the output to perform during both normal operation and during network power loss Controller Command vs Contact State Set Jumper or switch ea Contacts To CLOSED N C OPEN CLOSED N O F OPEN OPEN DOWN NO F CLOSED OF F CLOSED Table 9 3 Output Board Fail Safe and Switch Settings 9 2 3 Switch The fail safe dip switch determines the sate of the relay when communication is lost between the board and E2 Setting the Fail Safe Dip 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ The fail safe dip switches are labeled S2 on the 8RO and switch S3 on the 8ROe and 8IO Each of the eight rockers on the fail safe dip switch corresponds to an output on the board Set the rocker UP to close the relay and turn the output ON during network failure Set the switch DOWN to open the relay and turn the output OFF during network failure 9 2 4 Old SROs The old design of 8RO P N 810 3002 used points with two terminals on them To connect output devices to these points wire the point terminals in series with the load so that the path is closed when the 8RO relay is CLOSED and open when the 8RO relay is OPEN Ne
79. E2 RX 1 4 installing Echelon devices 8 3 location of connectors on E2 4 2 maximum number of nodes 8 2 Neuron ID number manual entry of 0 19 overview 8 peripherals for 5 powering Echelon devices 8 3 problems with F 2 subnets setting the number 0 2 10 16 termination block installation 8 3 unit controllers 70 2 10 16 wire length limitations 8 3 wire restrictions 8 3 wiring 8 1 wiring type 8 Echelon Network Setting Up 10 16 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 Economizers See AHUs economizers Edit Menu 10 26 EEPRs See Valves EEVs See Valves Electric Defrost See Defrost electric Enhanced Lighting combination strategies 71 30 occupied mode 71 31 Enhanced Suction Group 1 1 ESR8 Board defined 2 2 features 2 2 installation guide 8 7 mounting 3 5 specifying the number of 70 2 10 17 Ethernet Box to Box 7 F Flexible Combiner 1 6 11 52 Full Options On and Off 2 3 Function Buttons BX controller 2 7 RX controller 2 0 Function Keys 10 4 10 28 G Gateway Board 2 4 models 2 4 Global Data priority settings 70 24 setup 10 24 Graph View 12 16 zooming 12 16 H Hand Held Terminal connection to case controller 9 15 Hand held Terminal 2 8 Hardware Overview 2 Header Icons 0 4 12 6 Heat cut in cut out setpoints 71 51 Help Line 10 28 Holiday Schedules 71 42 Home Screens RX and BX 12 1 Hot Gas Defrost See Defrost hot gas Hot Keys 2 8 Humidistats See Sensors humidity Humidity Sensors S
80. Enter the number of ESR suction lineup circuit boards SR100s in this field Temperature Displays Enter the number of TD3 temperature display units in this field EC 2 Case Controllers Enter the number of EC 2 refrigerated case controllers in this field Echelon 16Al Enter the number of 16AIe analog input boards in this field Echelon 8RO Enter the number of 8ROe analog input boards in this field NOTE At any time you can access this screen to add or remove boards on this E2 by pressing mam Ab When finished press NEXT to move to the next screen 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 ee 10 4 Setting Number of Applications T xxx APPLICATION SETUP Figure 10 3 Application Setup RX version shown The Application Setup screen is where you will enter information about the types of devices on the E2 s control system If you know how many applications will be needed this step will save you time and will keep you from having to create new applications during the setup process Options will vary depending on the type of con troller used NOTE You must create at least one applica 4 tion in this screen to continue to the next screen even if you are only using this E2 to control applications not listed on the screen If neces sary you can create one application here and delete it later When finished press NEXT to go straight to the Main Status Home
81. Figure 10 34 Enter Your Unique License Key Activate Feature Enter License key to activate a Feature 4 Reboot the controller and open the License Report screen again to see the license key appear next to the activated feature Figure 10 35 BX 466 Unit 1 LICENSE REPORT TD Control HUAC Simulation Conversion Cell Holiday Schedule Anti Sweat Control Heat Cool Control 16AI 8R0 800 Echelon 16 1 Echelon 880 Digital Combiner Pulse Accumulation LonWorks Network Ethernet Network Color Display Web Services Lennox INC Power Monitoring IRLDS Analog Combiner 91 5 64 1623 S8B9F 675E 1921 FD7A Figure 10 35 License Report Screen BX 400 version shown 10 15 1 Web Services Web Services is a licensed feature that allows the user once the required license has been obtained and entered to view and adjust certain parameters in the E2 controller through a Web page The E2 Web Services feature enables the user to View site specific information such site name site phone local date and time View the current version of the E2 This includes the type of unit e g RX 400 and the version of 10 20 2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 the firmware View global data values such as outside air temper ature and humidity View a list of other networked area controllers at the site including version
82. Inputs C7 Outputs C8 Alarms C9 Notices Figure 12 11 Index Tabs RX 400 Version Shown The 10 boxes at the top of the screen labeled C1 through C0 are known as the index tabs These tabs pro vide you with a short index of the screens that are used to set up an application C1 through C0 represent the screen numbers C1 being screen 1 C2 being screen 2 and so Ctrl on Press the key the number of the index tab next to the C and the cursor highlights that index tab Each of the Setup screens that you may access will have a name beside its number In Figure 10 11 for exam ple you will notice some tabs have names while others are blank This is because there are only fourscreens in the Setup for this particular application C3 is not an accessi ble screen There are several reasons why a tab may be inaccessi ble i e without a name next to the number The tab and the corresponding screen is unused and reserved for later revisions The screen may only be accessed when running in Full Options mode see Section 12 2 Logging On and Access Levels The screen may require one or more fields to be set to certain values beforethe screen may be accessed For example a screen containing nothing but com pressor proof input definitions might be hidden if there is a field on another screen that tells the sys tem there are no proof checking devices on the group s compressors To access this screen you would hav
83. PASS in the Password field Enter 4 Press ml Logging into and out of the E2 controller can be done at any time by pressing key on E2 keypad If you are currently logged out pressing will bring up the User EE dialog box If you are already logged in pressing will immediately log you out and return you to the E2 home screen 10 2 Cleaning Out the Con troller Cleaning out the E2 controller needs to be done if If you are programming your E2 controller for the first time If all of the settings need to be cleared If the program settings are unknown Logging On Open the E2 controller panel There are two buttons located midway down on the main board see Figure 2 2 These buttons are used to perform various hardware func tions Reset Button The button C labeled RESET on the main board resets the controller m T Pressing and holding this button T CLEAN OUT for one second will cause the E2 X BLUE R to reset and retain all pro grammed applications logs and other data stored in memory Clean Out Button The button labeled CLEAN OUT on the controller is used to perform a function called clean out Using this button in conjunction with the Reset But ton will cause a clean out which is a reset that erases all data from memory The E2 will re boot after a clean out with all programmed applications logs and other data erased Clean outs are also commonl
84. PWM output The analog control output comes directly from the Override cell However the same control output is fed into the Sequencer and PWM cells for translation into digital staged outputs and pulse width modulation 11 13 3 1 The Sequencer Cell The Sequencer cell simply activates a certain percent age of the Digital State 1 8 outputs based on the percent age of the control output For example if the control output is 50 the Sequencer cell will activate 50 of the total number of stages The Sequencer cell will always round DOWN that is if there are four stages in a Sequencer cell and the output is 74 the Sequencer cell will only activate two stages or 50 of the stages When the output climbs above 75 the third stage will activate If desired delays may be specified for stage activation and deactivation Also the definitions of OFF and ON may be redefined as either ON OFF or NONE 11 13 3 2 The PWM Cell The PWM cell converts the control output percentage into a periodic ON pulse A pulse in this cell is a con 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ stant period of time that consists of one ON event and one OFF event The PWM cell takes the PID percentage and turns the output ON for an equivalent percentage of the total pulse period In other words if the PID output is 60 and the pulse period is 30 seconds every 30 seconds the PWM output will be ON for 60 of 30 seconds 18 sec onds and OFF for the remainin
85. Pak ProAct superheat low imit exceeded Low oe Seton aa Exceeded Limit Exceeded Us The suction pressure has fallen below a Suction Group s low suction setpoint Messages from the Echelon network are coming into E2 too fast for the controller to process This might be caused by an E2 having too many applications and or logs running or there may be too many Eche lon devices on the same segment as the E2 1 e more than 63 If this message persists call Retail Solu ho Jos service Modem Didn t Initialize E2 attempted to initialize the modem but failed Modem Init String Is Not Valid 30 The dial out initialization string for the Tie ed oar TRS Doe starte E S HT modem I is incorrect and may need editing e chip that handles Echelon networking on the E2 is od defective or in a mode that makes it non responsive Contact Retail Solutions service for assistance No Description File The Description File has failed when the Echelon device was commissioned No INo Refrigerant flowing No update has been received from the output point connected to Normal Hi Limit Exceeded User An analog value has risen above its programmed Hi Limit setpoint C 10 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 ee Priority Normal Low Limit Exceeded User An analog value has fallen below its programmed Lo res o a Not Enough Backed Memory The E2 tried to save data to the battery backed mem pee ory but the mem
86. Press Remote Communications 3 Press Modem Setup to advance to the Gen eral Services screen You can choose between an internal modem one that is mounted directly on to the E2 circuit board via the PC 104 slot in previous generation E2 circuit boards or an external modem If you have a modem navigate to the COM3 Modem Port field and select Internal Modem Press LOOK UP for the Option List Selection screen 10 10 Set Up TCP IP 81 25 11 C RX 466 Unit 3 Use Ctrl X to Select CX Tabs SETUP C1 General 2 Eng Units C3 Serial C6 Web Server C7 System General Setup GENERAL SERU 17 65 16 ALARM Ch TCP IP n co sd TCP IP Value DHCP Enabled FTP Enabled Yes Allow Anon Yes IP Address 2 18 212 237 25 Subnet Mask 1 255 255 240 0 DNS Server 1 1 172 21 255 146 DNS Server 2 2 172 21 255 141 DNS Server 3 Default Gateway Host Name Domain Name 1 ERS NA EMERSONCLIMATE ORG MAC Address 66 GA F6 66 2E 4F Rem Client Port 1625 Monitoring Port 3661 FSD Client Port 14166 On Demand Delay 8 PDQ Gateway Pt 31268 F1 PREU NEXT TAB F3 EDIT FS CANCEL Figure 10 17 TCP IP Addressing The TCP IP screen is where you enter the information necessary to allow Ethernet connection to this controller If this site uses Ethernet box to box you will need to enter a TCP IP address and a group name to allow all E2s on site to communicate as a group See Section 7 E2 Ether net
87. Pt read only The point number of each point appears in its record under the Pt column 4 Type read only The Type field shows the output s data type Possible Types are A Analog or D Digital If the point has not The 16AI 8IO and MultiFlex Inputs ec been identified a 5 Application Select which application you wish to set up inputs to Pressing LOOK UP when on a defined point will open the Application Selection menu a list of application types currently existing in the box CANCEL will cancel this menu will appear in the field instead 6 Association If a point has already been defined and is currently being used by an application the name of the input to which the point is connected will be displayed in the Asso ciation field Association is the application s user defined property that is associated with the point Multiple applications attached to single input will all be displayed in the Associ ation field Pressing LOOK UP on a set applica tion will bring up a list of property selections CANCEL will cancel this menu 7 Value read only Value shows the sensor value in the units you select for the input type NOTE When changes are made the Appli cation or Association fields data will not be saved until attempting to arrow off of that par ticular board and point or attempting to leave the screen If Type has changed data will be saved and then the controller w
88. RX BX I O Network Diagram Figure 1 2 shows the peripherals that make up the I O Network MultiFlex The MultiFlex line of control system boards provide a wide variety of input output and smart control solutions all of which are based on a single universal hardware platform SROSMT Relay output board activates and deac tivates up to eight devices Previous generation I O boards such as SRO 8DO and 4AO are all still compatible with E2 I O Network 1 4 2 The E2 Echelon Lonworks Network 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ The E2 is also compatible with a network platform called Lonworks This is most commonly referred to as the Echelon Network after the company who invented the platform the Echelon Corporation In general peripherals with control functions such as case controllers rooftop HVAC controllers and other E2 RX and BX units are interconnected on the Echelon Network These controllers do most of their own computa tion and system control but they communicate with other E2s to provide logging alarm control and other functions In addition to these Retail Solutions also offers Echelon compatible input and output boards similar to those avail able for the RS485 Network E2 RX REFRIGERATION L BUILDING E2 RX amp BX ECHELON NETWORKS Figure 1 3 E2 RX Echelon
89. Rate Setup Serial RS232 10 11 2 I O Network Baud Rate When a comport is set to I O Net the I O Network baud rate is the rate at which the E2 will communicate with input and output boards on the RS485 I O Network and is located directly below the RS232 Baud rate field Press to select the baud rate The appropriate baud rate is 9600 baud 62 61 11 RX 466 Unit 3 Use Ctrl X to Select CX Tabs SETUP NAMES FULL C1 General C2 Eng Units C3 Serial C4 TCP IP Web Server C7 System General Setup GENERAL SERU 14246222 ALARH C5 Peer Neturk Serial Value COM1 Connection Serial Baud C0M2 Connection MODBUS 1 COM2 Baud z 19 2 Kbaud COM2 Data Size 8 COM2 Parity None COM2 Stop Bits 1 Connection Modem COM3 Baud 1 115 2 Kbaud Modem Port Internal Modem Modem Type CPC 33 6K Internal Hodem Init RTEGU1S8 1510 48 amp D2 amp Q5XNGZC O amp K G amp Y GUB Fax Init RTU1E8S8 1510 48 amp D2 amp Q5XNOZC ORK G amp V COM3 DTMF Dur 188 COM3 Pause Dur 2 F1 PREU TAB F2 NEXT TAB F3 EDIT F4 LOOK UP F5 CANCEL Figure 10 19 I O Network Baud Rate Setup 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 ee 10 12 Set Up User Access Access the User Access Setup screen from the System Information menu 1 Press to open the Main Menu amp 2 Press System Configuration 3 Press System Information RX 466 Unit 3 18 36 55 ALARM
90. Standard See Standard Circuits Case Control Circuits associating CC 100s with 71 16 defrost in 77 12 overview 11 10 Case Controllers anti sweat control 3 associating with Case Control Circuits 71 16 CC 100H defined 2 2 11 10 CC 100LS defined 2 2 11 10 CC 100P defined 2 2 11 10 clean mode 71 14 CS 100 defined 2 2 11 10 defrost 11 12 pump down delay 71 12 defrost types 71 12 digital sensors installing 9 14 dual temp control 4 EEPRs recovery mode 71 12 fail safe mode 71 15 fan control 71 14 humidity sensor installation 9 15 inputs 9 14 installation guide 8 6 light control 11 14 mounting dimensions 3 5 power modules wiring 9 15 wiring schematic 9 15 problems with cases F 6 recovery mode EEPRs 1 12 EEVs 11 11 sensor default locations 9 74 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 sensor failures 1 15 11 16 sensors default installation locations 9 14 setting up individual CC 100s 77 16 specifying the number of 70 2 10 16 stand alone mode 71 15 superheat control 71 11 temperature control 71 11 temperature probes installing 9 14 valve cable 9 15 valves 71 11 EEPRs 1 12 EEVs 11 11 liquid pulse 77 11 liquid stepper 71 11 pulse 1 11 stepper 71 11 suction stepper 71 12 walk in freezer control 71 15 wash mode See Clean Mode 11 14 CC 100H See Case Controllers CC 100LS See Case Controllers CC 100P See Case Controllers Checking Boards Online 70 16 12 10 Checking Status Screens 2 0 Clean Mode 1
91. To other Echelon j mpi devices zl TTTIETIT 100 A ESR8 e ESR8 e ECARD BOARD ECHELON CABLE TYPE Level IV 22 AWG Shielded Max Daisy Chain Length Feet 4592 Meters 1400 P N 135 2300 Non Plenum 1 Pair 1000 Feet P N 135 2301 Plenum 1 Pair 1000 Feet 3 Refer to the Emerson Emerson Flow Controls 2 JP Valve 4 Flow Controls Valve ESR12 or ESR20 1 Field Wiring Guide ESR8 BOARD NOTE or Sporlan TERM and SEI valves O use GREEN wire JUMPERS E where BLUE wire is connected in the diagram NOTE Leave jumper hanging on one pin when unterminating an TERMINATION ESR8 so the jumper will be available for future use For an NO TERMINATION alternative termination method refer to section 8 4 1 of this manual Na s Lx Use cable harness supplied with valve OR use 18AWG wire no longer than 75 ft OR 14AWG wire no longer than 200 ft 1 2 4 110 VAC 75VA 220 VAC 75VA P N 640 0050 P N 640 0045 YELLOW YELLOW 24 VAC 24 VAC CLASS 2 POWER CLASS 2 POWER GND GND 24 VAC 24 VAC YELLOW YELLOW 5 Select board in Controller Network Config screen Press SET ADDRESS Function Key Select the Service Pin option Enter a wait time hrs mins secs Press Enter le 7 SERVICE Open Echelon Device Connectivity Echelon Network and Hardware Setup 8 7
92. UOC SUMMER HEAT UOC WINTER COOL OCC WINTER HEAT OCC WINTER COOL UOC WINTER HEAT UOC Table 11 11 Possible Heating Cooling Setpoints 11 7 5 Zone Temperature Each MultiFlex RTU and AHU application has a space temperature output that is equal to the unit s current Con trol Temperature When associated with a Zone applica tion this space temperature output is connected to one of sixteen Zone Temperature inputs in the Zone application These sixteen inputs are then combined using a user defined combination method to yield the Zone Tempera ture Zone Temperature provides an at a glance view of how well the units within the Zone are doing in heating and cooling If desired Zone Temperature may also be used as a temperature control input by one or all of the Zone s HVAC applications 11 7 6 Economizer Control A Zone application is responsible for analyzing the outside air conditions and determining if the conditions are favorable for bringing in outside air If the air condition is favorable the Zone sends a signal to its associated HVAC units telling them economization is OK If not it sends a signal to disable economization It is up to the associated HVAC unit to process the 11 26 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee economization information and open the dampers 11 7 7 Economization Enable There are five possible ways a Zone application may determine when conditions are favorable for economiza tion 1 Entha
93. alarm logging and network setup information To open the System Configuration menu 1 Press gt 2 Press System Configuration The System Configuration menu contains nine menu items 1 Input Definitions View the status of all input boards as well as set up individ ual points on the I O boards 2 Output Definitions View the status of all output boards as well as set up individ ual points on the I O boards 3 System Information Menu that gives access to more E2 setup options and informa tion 4 Remote Communica Gives access to modem informa tions tion dial out setup and TCP IP Table 12 2 System Configuration Menu Options Operator s Guide to Using the E2 12 3 mm The System Information Menu is another menu used to Menu Option Description a d set up the E2 The options in this menu allow setting up 5 Alarm Setup Set up dial outs and alarm time and date passwords toggle full options general reporting for the current E2 information about the controller and other important data 6 Logging Setup Enter information about Logging To open the System Information Menu Group applications such as the ie sampling frequency and total l Press amp hamber samples 2 Press System Configuration 7 Network Setup Accesses the Network Setup menu where you can view and or 3 Press System Information change the configuration of the Echelon and RS485 I O Net
94. amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ MultiFlex ESR INSTALLATION GUIDE POWER VAWEi VALVEZ VALVES VALVEA VALVES VALVEG VALVE7 VALVES 1 Connect the MultiFlex ESR to the I O Network AC1GND juo Be 2 Set the network address on the first five rockers of the dip switch labeled S1 on the MultiFlex ESR board of 3 Set the network baud rate using rockers 6 and 7 E 4 Set the termination jumpers UP terminated if at u either end of a daisy chain Otherwise set jumpers DOWN ov no termination w 5 Wire each stepper valve by connecting the stepper valve harness to one of the eight connectors along the top of the board S1 6 Connect the MultiFlex ESR to a Class 2 80VA 24VAC center tapped power transformer One MultiFlex ESR board v gg 4 per transformer For more information on transformer wiring refer to the MultiFlex ESR manual P N 026 1720 1 SHIELDED TWISTED 2 Set the network address L USE BELDEN 82761 88761 using the first 5 rockers ADDRESS TTE yo OR EQUIV of dip switch S1 1 S1 Valid address range 1 31 2 BOARD i BOARD 2 BOARD 3 BOARD 5 BOARD 6 a BOARD 7 BOARD 8 4485 A ps ee eee ete rn ha ov BOARD 9 BOARD 10 BOARD LE E BOARD 13 BOARD 14 BOARD 15 ___ T6 n d A AR LL RR 485 BOARD 17 BOARD 18 BOARD 19 I BOA
95. and controller type infor mation Connect to the selected E2 for remote configuration changes Access Terminal Mode View Alarms To access Web Services Open a browser window and enter the IP Address of your E2 controller E2 WebServer At site THIS 01 1 Controllers at this Site ea Summary for Controller THIS 01 1 Serves IP 19 10 5490 1 Toes General Status Figure 10 36 E2 Web Services Page 10 16 Set Up Alarming To set up alarms open the Alarm Setup menu 1 Press to open the Main Menu 2 Press System Configuration 96 3 Press Alarm Setup Set Up Alarming RX 466 Unit 3 CONTROLLER SETUP Name Model THIS 03 1G P RI 03 01 16RI RO 63 61 SRO THIS 61 1 CX366 ALARM SETUP MEalDial out Setup Alarm Filtering Setup Controller Alarm I 0 Status Figure 10 37 Alarm Setup Menu Quick Start 10 21 10 16 1 Specifying Alarm Reporting Types Apart from storing alarms it generates in its own Alarm Advisory Log E2 can also report alarms it gener ates or receives in order to notify personnel E2 can report alarms in several different ways 10 16 1 1 The Display Line Alarms that occur within an E2 or which are received by an Alarm Annunciator from another E2 may be reported to the header display at the top of the screen When an alarm is reported to the display the word ALARM flashes underneath the time at the top of
96. another group as assigned by the user If there is no beside the definition the value is not part of a logging group and therefore will not be logged 11 5 3 Setting Up Logging To begin logging setup go to the Logging Setup menu 1 Press for the Main Menu 2 Press System Configuration 3 Press Logging Setup LOGGING SETUP Groups Add Log Group Delete Log Group Display Logged Points Figure 11 8 Logging Setup Menu From this menu you can control different logging aspects Access Log Group summary screen or Base Log if no additional log groups exist to set logging parameters Add a new log group and automatically enter edit mode Delete a log group Displays a report of all logged points for the entire system Software Overview 11 17 For Base Log setup select 1 Log Groups from this menu RX 366 Unit 1 16 05 02 SUMMARY INANE SBFULL ALARH Summary For Logging Groups Resolution Duration Interval Used Anlg Dig Status Log High 2 1 8 03 06 18 3 168 158 Idle USER LOG GRPG2 High 6 68 8 Idle USER LOG GRPO3 High 83 8 8 8 Idle USER LOG GRPO High 83 8 8 8 Idle Press enter on desired application for status F1 SUCTION F2 CONDENSER F3 CIRCUITS F4 SENSORS F5 SETUP Figure 11 9 Summary Screen for Logging Groups The summary screen for Logging Groups will open where a variety of log parameters can be viewed Log group name configured re
97. application All inputs must be connected to board and points set up with Engineering Units of Amps Software Overview 11 43 11 16 Anti Sweat Setup An anti sweat application controls one anti sweat zone An anti sweat zone is defined as one or more anti sweat heaters that use the same dewpoint or RH and tem perature sensors and the same control setpoints If all the outputs on a 20 channel PMAC panel are going to use the same setpoints and dewpoint device s then all the heaters may be set up in a single zone Zones are set up in a single screen called the Anti Sweat Control Setup screen 11 16 1 How Anti Sweat Works Anti sweat applications control anti sweat heaters by monitoring the dewpoint A dewpoint value may come from a dewpoint probe mounted within the Zone or it may be calculated automatically by the E2 using a combination of a relative humidity sensor and a temperature sensor The dewpoint value is used to pulse the heaters ON for a certain percentage of a user defined time interval The dewpoint is compared to the anti sweat application s con trol setpoints the Full ON Dewpoint and the Full OFF Dewpoint Based on this comparison the anti sweat heat ers will do one of three things fthe dewpoint is equal to or above the Full ON Dewpoint the heaters remain ON 100 of the time If the dewpoint is equal to or below the Full OFF Dewpoint the heaters will be ON 0 of the time fully OFF If
98. application setup Priority Of Events Exceeded Limit User A digital value has transitioned ON more times than its defined Number of Events setpoint 50 60 Hz Line Clock Is Bad 0 E2 1s not successfully synchronizing its clock wit oe the 50 60 Hz pulse of its incoming power A FreezeStat Input Is Too Low User A temperature sensor on an HVAC cooling stage 1s lower than the programmed freezestat setpoint indi cating possible coil freeze 2 Access Log Lost CRC Error 20 An internal error has caused the loss of E2 s user access log Advisory Log Lost CRC Error 20 An internal error has caused the loss of E2 s alarm advisory log Alarm Limit Exceeded User An Analog Sensor or a Suction Group has an input value greater than one of its high limit setpoints Alarm s Were Cleared 0 A user has erased one or more alarms from the alarm advisory log A user has performed a clean out on this E2 remov All Config Logs Were Cleared 3 ing all programming and stored data All Lights On User A Global Data application s All Lights On input has turned ON to switch on all the lights All network connections used ae controller has reached its limit of bound NVs A User An analog value in an application using alternate setpoints has risen above its programmed Hi Limit Alarm s Were Reset A user has reset one or more alarms from the alarm advisory log setpoint Alternate Low Limit Exceeded User An analog value in an appl
99. applications depending on which controller type you are using as well as all configured applications in the control ler The Main Menu also allows you to add and delete applications gives system configuration abilities and shows status information for inputs and outputs network graphs and logs Menus RX 466 Unit 3 RX DEU SUMMARY 10 56 28 ALARM 68 23 05 NONE Circuits Temp r NONE MAIN MENU r SUCTION GRPO1 NONE suction Groups i ry NONE y NONE Condensers NONE SPP abus Circuits NONE 1 NONE Sensor Controls d r NONE NONE Configured Applications fidd Delete Application System Configuration Value Status NONE Controlled By Dis NONE DIGITAL 5 561 NOTAC F1 DIGITAL SENS82 NOTAC ON Figure 12 4 Main Menu Toggling Full Options The System Configuration Menu RX 466 Unit 3 RX DEU SUMMARY 15 82 17 22 8 Circuits SVSTEM CONFIGURATION ME Input Definitions Output Definitions System Information Remote Communications Alarm Setup Logging Setup Network Setup Value Global Data NONE Controlled By Dis Licensing FA NOTAC ON Figure 12 5 System Configuration Menu The System Configuration Menu is one of the menus used to set up the E2 Included options are Input Output Definitions internal system information remote commu nications global data
100. bags 7 3 1 3 OORT WARE SETUP 4 ie rtt E Eee Pe Coetu eate no dee te UE Pe M epe e o Tee Y NE eS 7 3 7 6 TROUBLESHOOTING che piri ettet deret Pr Ue RE REESE RETE E oir erede e eee o ee ties 7 4 8 ECHELON NETWORK AND HARDWARE ee sense ense nette tones ttes ta setae tosta etos ense tasto setae 8 1 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual Table of Contents vii x OD ELE 8 1 A A EE 8 1 8 3 ECHELON NETWORK STRUCTURING DAISY CHAINS ccssccssesseesecesceeceseeseceeceseeeeeeseeeaeeseecaecseecaecsaesaecnesnseenseeeenreees 8 1 8 3 1 Maximum Number of Echelon Devices eese eese eee ethen nennen 6 2 5 4 DEVICE TERMINA HON tosni a a steep ten REGIA Ie ed ERU n NEIN UNT EE I tah rers egens 8 2 8 4 1 Using a Termination Block P N 535 2715 to Terminate a Daisy Chain eere 6 3 8 9 WIREGRESTRIGTIONS eiie etra d ditate tdt Rs e e dise Age EO IERI ud 8 3 8 6 INSTALLING ECHELON DEVICES det ntt rr EN erp renti E ee eter P ER S PERS 8 3 8 6 Powering Echelon Devices ii eti ere en Ye pe x EU SER 6 3 SL LEDS szsssct rU RO tm olus atti deett 8 4 8 8 OPEN ECHELON DEVICE CONNECTIVITY ette aae ak RII I ESI delete tue bp tae eds ee Ee 8 4 8 8 1 Configuring Echelon Devices eiie ee ertet re ter Posee ertt aeree peni 6 4 8 8 1 T Tro blesh
101. been active and will display a battery icon at the top of the E2 screen whenever the battery is reaching the end of its recommended battery life If a battery has less than 30 of its battery life left a yellow battery icon will appear at the top of the screen If the battery has less than 10 life left or if the battery switch is currently disabled a red battery icon will appear 4 4 2 TheBattery Enable Switch The battery enable switch is located near the battery clip on the processor board This switch should be set to OFF whenever the E2 unit is not being used to preserve battery life If the E2 unit is powered up with this switch set to OFF a red battery icon will appear at the top of the screen Check the position of this switch and set it to the ON position You will have to perform a battery test to clear the battery icon from the screen See Section 4 4 3 Battery Test below 4 4 3 Battery Test E2 s automatic calculation of battery life is based on the number of hours it has been active not its voltage If you wish to know for certain if the battery is good you can perform a battery voltage test from the E2 front panel You will need to perform this test to remove a yellow or red battery icon from the screen If you are replacing the bat tery and wish to remove the battery icon from the screen see the instructions under Section 4 4 4 Battery Replace ment Qualified Technicians Only To perform a battery test 1 Lo
102. d e P e PR ERE ER 1 24 BOILER MM DEN MEDIA UA Et T4242 Alarms io te t al abet o i ce E E 11 25 ENERGY METER IE25F OVervIeWauxizusiust Gan Eq RU RI OE 11 25 2 Supported System Types iis at M t RR HERR P ee ET RR Y EE RT ERU sabes ee 12 OPERATOR S GUIDE TO USING THE E2 eere ee eee ee eee senes tn sense states tosta tasto aeos seas 12 1 THE E2 HOME SCREEN eR PRI d ove vu CST ute ee eredi nig 12 1 I2 1 ARX Home Screen soo Pe naria ede e Er iners 12 1 ADA BX Home Screen eb t d a etie stude ete Reda es 12 1 I2 035 CX Home SCreensaz o aee eee ie Rs 12 2 12 2 LOGGING ON AND ACCESS LEVELS E A 12 2 12 3 SLOGGLING FULL OPTIONS ORE EU EA ISDN rr ee Re e Een tree 12 3 12 4 NAVIGATION IPs 12 3 12 1 1 Menus e mtl ie Iud iD dius 12 3 12 4 2 A Screen Types uisi RE EORR re le eb ER i e E I e ERE ORE ens 12 5 12 4 3 2 es ete ee DP eR E RR ERR P RE RERO eios 12 6 12 5 CUSTOMIZING THE HOME SCREEN i eea riae eE EEE ea EE EEE E reap pire dte doo ti reperi Eae eg 12 8 12 6 MANUAL DEFROST AND CLEAN enne EPan ener en nest entente nete nennen 12 8 1227 OVERRIDES eec n e eure cdeevbesevaleseturcgvcsa
103. fast recovery Fast Recovery is always used in an evaporative condenser 11 2 6 Hardware Overview An overview of the input and output devices that make up a typical Condenser Control application is shown by Figure 11 2 and Figure 11 3 Figure 11 2 shows the typi cal layout of an air cooled condenser Figure 11 3 shows the typical layout of an evaporative condenser AMBIENT TEMP gt DISCHARGE PRESSURE CONDENSER EX SZA OUTLET E CONDENSER INLET Su AIR COOLED CONDENSER 26509037 Figure 11 2 Air Cooled Condenser Diagram 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ AMBIENT TEMP DISCHARGE PRESSURE OUTLET COI WATER SUMP TEMPERATURE DAMPERS aT Om e SUMP PUMP 1 PUMP 2 EVAPORATIVE CONDENSER CA 26509038 Figure 11 3 Evaporative Condenser Diagram Wire Output Output Device Board Contacts Sot Falsafa Dip to Switch to Wiring Sensor Type Discharge Pressure 500 Ib Eclipse see Table 9 1 on transducer page 9 3 Ambient Temp Temperature see Table 9 1 on page 9 3 Water Sump Temp Temperature see Table 9 1 on Evap only Immersion page 9 3 Override Temp Sen Temperature see Table 9 1 on sors Evap only Pipe Mount page 9 3 Table 11 3 Suction Group Inputs Condenser Fan N N C up To ensure condensing during network and power failure con Single Speed
104. heat CCBs Version 2 3 and above of the E2 software is backward compatible with the CCB an I O Net work based controller used primarily in old RMCC installations Like the CC 100 family the CCB was available in several different models that controlled liquid pulse liquid stepper suction stepper and suction lineup cesses NOTE There are several variations of the 4 EC 2 Contact Retail Solutions at 1 800 829 2724 for more information 11 4 2 1 Valve Control The CC 100 is capable of supporting two types of valves pulse and stepper The CC 100 uses PID control to vary the aperture rates of both valves between 0 and 100 as required by their temperature control algorithms see Section 11 4 3 below Pulse Valves A pulse valve is a device capable of being in only two states fully open or fully closed To achieve the necessary percentage of refrigerant flow CC 100s repeatedly pulse these valves open for a percentage of an interval called the valve period which defaults to six seconds For example to achieve a 20 valve output in a CC 100 with a valve period of six seconds a pulse valve would be opened for 20 of six seconds or 1 2 seconds and closed for the remaining 80 of the valve period 4 6 seconds This same six second sequence will repeat for as long as the CC 100 calls for a 20 valve output Stepper Valves Stepper valves are devices that may opened to many different positions between fully
105. held Terminal P N 814 3110 which allows tech nicians to view input values check relay and analog out put states and override output points with fixed digital or analog values For more information on MultiFlex I O boards refer to the MultiFlex I O Board Installation and Figure 2 8 MultiFlex Combination Input Output Board Side Operation Manual P N 026 1704 View Table 2 7 shows the available models of MultiFlex combination input output boards with description and part numbers P N Model Description Name 810 3063 MultiFlex 8 analog digital inputs 8 88AO relay outputs 4 analog out puts 810 3064 MultiFlex 8 analog digital inputs 8 88 relay outputs 810 3065 MultiFlex 16 analog digital inputs 8 168AO relay outputs 4 analog out puts LEGEND AC Input Power Connection Transducer Power Out Termination Resistance Jumpers three 11 General Status LED Network Connection Analog Outputs 4 I O Net Tx and Rx LEDs Form C Relay Outputs 8 Hand Held Terminal Port Network Failsafe The 8RO and 4AO Address Dip Switch S4 15 Relay Output Fuses 8 and network baud rate dip Output LEDs OUT1 OUT8 Input Dip Switches 51 and S2 Input Connections 16 Table 2 7 MultiFlex Combination Input Output Board Models olon oja A wne Figure 2 9 MultiFlex Combination Input Output Board Top View There are several models of the MultiFlex board that combine the func
106. if Quick Start 10 9 enabled When the E2 time is updated an entry in Service Log is added If this field is set to No the E2 clock will have to be set manually If this field is set to Yes SNTP support is used Two SNTP servers are supported Primary Time Server and an optional Secondary Time Server Primary Time Server The E2 will call up this primary server first to synchro nize the E2 time If the primary server fails to respond the secondary server is used Enter the IP address or name of the first server the E2 should use to set the time up to 40 characters Secondary Time Server The E2 will use this secondary server if no response is received from the primary server or if the primary server is invalid If desired enter the IP address or name of the second server the E2 should use to set the time up to 40 charac ters Date Format Dates may be presented and entered in either of two ways month day year format and day month year for mat Choose the most appropriate date format by using the LOOK UP tab Daylight Savings Dates The Daylight Savings Dates type determines how the E2 will make date adjustments for daylight savings time Use the LOOK UP tab to cycle through the options in each of the fields There are four options STANDARD US DLT DATES the E2 will use the standard United States method of determining Daylight savings time dates The Daylight savings time will start o
107. ineine iranis sie Ne eo es e i p E o UP a ue eee 6 4 6 1 9 T Types aeree iem eter era tete treten en nie Pic il in iem ea Ee e d e dete dade ires dte id 6 5 641 10 Board nstallation eee ate 6 5 6 2 IMC PRODIGY ROOFTOP UNIT CONTROL ERS een e e e nE 6 5 6 3 ECT MODBU niori EEE E 6 6 6 3 1 Control Techniques Drive VSD eee eese eee eeeee an a aE OEE EE AE EE eE EE EER eet E nEn 6 6 6 3 2 Copeland ISD COMpPressOTS dum f re tei OR dre SEE Ms 6 6 6 3 3 XR XEV and XEV22D Case nnne enne nene n ehe e nnn ense esses sense entrent nnn 6 6 7 E2 ETHERNET PEER COMMUNICATIONS cesses eene eene etos eo ts etate tto sto seta sto sense tns 7 1 7 1 ETHERNET IP CONFIGURATIONS ede Hen eie a pere e ER EE RO Ee pe eer deve 7 1 T 2 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS i recette nne PN PER OH EQ TNT ORI 7 1 JB TP EROTIC 7 1 SOFTWARE SPECIFICATIONS eet tetti nct stdin IE OU RR Re ER REO TORT ER p EO EHI Hee ERO EHE ER 7 2 TA ETHERNET NETWORK LAYOUTS eh terere b Ede ing OI Ee ie Ro EM Sem 7 2 LAA Closed Network Layout ss iid et e Ore HF DER EY Ln UR tes eee 7 2 7 4 2 Open Network Layout ici aceto e RETRO e Gk lay Sead Oed ae Ute He EE PEE eu bunds er Peor ve eese
108. is stored in hourly daily and monthly formats All logged data can be erased from memory by using the Applications Command menu In addition appli cation logs show the total and peak rates of consumption for the last day hour and month The Hourly log will be updated every hour at the top of the hour and contain data for the last 48 hours Time date total accumulation for that hour maximum average for that hour maximum peak value and time of peak value are stored in this log The Daily log will contain data for the last 48 days Date total accumulation for that day maximum average for that day maximum peak value time of peak value and minutes tripped are stored in this log The Monthly log will contain data for the last 24 months The log will be updated on auser specified day of the month Date total accumulation for that month maxi mum average for that month maximum peak value time of peak value and date of peak value are stored in this log Application graphing generates hourly daily and monthly graphs from the application log data All graphs show the total and max average On the main Status screen consumption for the current hour day and month are displayed 11 20 6 High Trip A high trip output can be triggered if the Accumula tor s total quantity exceeds a user defined setpoint The Irrigation Control trip point output can be controlled by any of three input sources The output will be turn
109. its demand limit to be exceeded for the current or a future demand window it will begin shedding loads to bring the KW usage down A graphic example of the rolling demand window used by the Demand Control application is shown in Figure 11 20 ACTUAL DEMAND WINDOW MEASUREMENT FROM POWER COMPANY E 3 S S APPLICATION WINDOWS VIRTUAL DEMAND WINDOWS time minutes 26512041 Figure 11 20 Example of Rolling Demand Window In short the primary goal of a Demand Control appli cation is to make sure that every possible interval of time that might be used by the power company as a demand window will be under the set demand limit This ensures the demand setpoint will never be exceeded 11 11 2 Demand Monitoring The E2 either monitors power using an analog KW transducer which sends the current KW usage via analog signal or monitors energy consumption using a digital watt hour transducer which pulses to signify a fixed amount of watt hours have been used Software Overview 11 33 As mentioned in Section 11 11 1 Introduction to Demand Limit Control all KW input values are gathered together and averaged together in a demand window The demand setpoint is then subtracted from this average The result of this calculation 1s called the integral error or integral of the demand window The integral error repre sents how far below or above the setpoint the input has been for
110. located Once a value has been chosen the controller is able to calculate the sunrise and sunset times The Sunset output will turn ON at sun set and OFF at sunrise and can be connected to a lighting circuit Sundown Sundown is an output that calculates when the sun sets based on latitude and longitude and is ON when the sun sets The user will select the Board Controller Point Application and Input values from the LOOK UP menu for each field When a Lighting Schedule is config ured to use Sundown information the Lighting Schedule application automatically connects to the Sundown out put 10 9 Set Up Modem 61 24 11 Cx Use Ctr1 X to Select Tabs SETUP C1 General C2 Eng Units C6 Web Server C7 System General Setup GENERAL SERU RX 466 Unit 3 17 21 47 Serial Value COM1 Connection Serial COM1 Baud 1 115 2 Kbaud COM2 Connection MODBUS 1 COM2 Baud z 19 2 Kbaud COM2 Data Size 8 COM2 Parity None COM2 Stop Bits 1 COM3 Connection Modem COM3 Baud 1 115 2 Kbaud COM3 Modem Port COM3 Modem Type CPC 33 6K Internal COM3 Modem Init ATEGU1SG 1S16 462D2 amp Q5 NOZC O amp K G amp V 86 8 COM3 Fax Init ATUTEGSO 1S16 462D22Q5 NOZC ORK GRY O amp O COM3 Dur 188 COM3 Pause Dur F1 PREU TAB NEXT TAB F3 EDIT Fh LOOK UP F5 CANCEL Figure 10 16 Modem Select Screen From the Main Menu 1 Press System Configuration 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 ee 2
111. logged data in this form it is usually listed with the most recent sample at the top of the list and the other samples listed below it in reverse chronological order A graph is a graphical representation of these log 12 14 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee entries that shows how the sampled value has changed over time Graphing is a quick easy way to get an idea of how the application has been behaving Special graphing features also allow you to zoom in on specific areas of the graph 12 11 1 Locating Logged Inputs Outputs 12 11 1 1 Home Status Screens RX 4668 Unit 3 RX DEU SUMMARY 14 28 36 RLARH iscuits State Temp NDARD CKT61 Refr NONE NDARD CKT82 Refr NONE NDARD CKT83 Refr NONE NDARD CKTO4 Refr NONE NDARD CKT85 Refr NONE NDARD CKT86 Refr NONE NDARD CKT87 Refr NONE NDARD CKT88 Refr NONE NDARD CKT89 Refr NONE NDARD CKT18 Refr NONE 77 NDARD CKT11 Refr NONE Actions Menu Log Override Expanded Information Detailed Status CONDENSERO1 NONE 298 8 Sensor Ctrl Value ANALOG SENS61 NONE ANALOG SENS62 NONE DIGITAL SENS61 NOTAC F1 DIGITAL SENS82 NOTAC ON F5 CANCEL Controlled By Discharge Status Fan s On Figure 12 24 Sample Actions Menu From RX Home Screen The easiest way to access a log or graph is from the Actions menu while on the Home screen or an applica tion s Status screen These screens contain a number of different input and output values from th
112. logging of the E2 can hold in memory the user can set the resolution type in the log manager to determine how the desired points will be logged E2 converts these analog sample values to this lower resolution Low or Medium by Adding subtracting an offset Multiplying by a scaling factor Rounding to the nearest integer value of the size appropriate for the desired resolution 11 5 1 1 Clipping Clipping occurs whenever the conversion process results in a sample value that falls outside the range of the selected log resolution For example converting a value of 750 PSI to low resolution would result in a compressed sample value of 609 PSI refer to Appendix E Com pressed Point Log Sample Limits and Precision Table Low resolution only allows values up to 609 PSI there fore the sample is said to be clipped If the value that will be logged is anticipated to exceed the high or low range for a particular log resolution a higher resolution should be chosen High Clipping occurs when a compressed sample value is above the range allowed by the set resolution In this case the sample value is considered high clipped and the data recorded will be the high clipped value and logged at the highest possible valid value Low Clipping occurs when a compressed sample value is below the range allowed by the set resolution In this case the sample value is considered low clipped and the data recorded will be the low clipped
113. longer has a valid temperature value to send to the other Global Data applications After five minutes of no updates from E2 A E2 C will consider the pri mary Outside Air Temp source to have failed and it will begin sending the value of the secondary sensor to the Global Data applications of the other two E2s All E2s would then use this secondary value as Out side Air Temperature L ER m PRIMARY USED AS GLOBAL OUTSIDE AIR TEMP BY ALL E2s X 1 ma SECONDARY SENSOR USED AS OUTSIDE AIR TEMP WHEN PRIMARY FAILS 26512038 Figure 10 45 Global Data Priority Example Just as there may be only one primary provider for Set Up Applications each input type there may be only one secondary for each input type It is recommended that secondaries be set up on different E2s than primaries this way if a single controller fails or loses communication with the other E2s there will still be a usable input source for the other E2s User This setting means the E2 s global data will read or be a User of all values coming from the network This setting is for E2s that are not con nected to the sensor itself but read the data that comes from it If the application in this E2 will be using primary or secondary inputs from other E2s then set the priority to US
114. look for malfunctioning valves and leaks by cycling each zone ON one at a time starting with the first zone The active zone uses the Service On Time parame ter and remains ON for the programmable time period entered for Service On Time While in the Service Check cycle any active irrigation cycles will be terminated The Service Check cycle will continue looping until stopped by the user or the program mable value in the Suspnd Failsafe field is reached Irrigation Control 11 21 8 Heat Cut In Cut Out Set points For Each Stage If the current space temperatur is greater than orequal to the heat stage Cut Out setpoint or the individual cool ing stage is currently ON due to a call for cooling Cut In setpoint or dehumidification and the current space tem perature is greater than the individual COOL stage Cut In setpoint then begin turning the stage OFF by starting the heat stage Off Delay countdown timer Or if the current space temperature is less than or equal to the heat stage Cut In setpoint begin turning the stage ON by starting the heat stage On Delay countdown timer 11 21 9 Cool Cut In Cut Out Set points For Each Stage If the current space temperature is less than or equal to the cool stage Cut Out setpoint begin turning the cool stage OFF by starting the cool stage Off Delay countdown timer If the current space temperature is greater than or equal to the Cut In setpoint begin turning the cool stage ON by star
115. mem E eee Controller or Device Absent From 20 The current E2 could not find the specified E2 I O Mum e board or Echelon controller pon Controller Reset 50 An ARTC MultiFlex has gone through a reset Controller Shutdown B0 The EX has gone through a shutdown Config Loss File CRC Error Appendix C Alarm Advisory Messages C 3 Default Hen A device on the Echelon network is of a different type than the user has specified In other words a user might have wired a device such as a CC 100P to the network but set it up in the E2 software as a CC 100LS Check your network setup and if necessary reconfigure the device with the correct type to get a file from its memory and so This alarm likely indicates one or more templates in the E2 software have been corrupted Contact Retail Solutions service for further assistance User A Curtailment device set up in Global Data has acti BENE RM DFMC Standby Mode 20 A DFMC 1s put into standby by a service technician TI it indicates the unit is not actually controlling by the DFMC when it has lost its internal time of day E2 will resend the time upon receipt and this alarm should return to normal without user interac tion Over Max Defrost duration was in excess of the maximum limit defined For example the case is not defrosting within spec Maximum fan delay time has been exceeded to the case s ability to get refrigerant into the coil For examp
116. minutes before the building is scheduled to change occupancy states and prepares the building for the upcoming change in setpoints As a result when the occupancy state changes the temperature will be 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ comfortably within the range of the new setpoint Figure 11 15 shows an example of how pre starts and pre stops work in a heating application From unoccupied mode the pre start period ramps the temperature up slowly so that when the scheduled change from unoccu pied to occupied mode occurs the temperature will already be at or near the occupied heating setpoint During the pre stop which occurs before AHU Control goes from occupied to unoccupied mode heating is suspended and the temperature is allowed to coast down to the unoccu pied setpoint OCCUPIED SET POINT UNOCCUPIEDE SET POINT 26512036 Figure 11 15 Diagram of Pre Start and Pre Stop Operation Intelligent Pre Starts and Pre Stops OSS is designed to handle pre starts and pre stops in the most energy efficient manner possible Every time a pre start or pre stop occurs OSS measures the amount of time it takes to bring the temperature from the previous setpoint to within the comfort zone of the new setpoint a user defined range of values above and below the set point within which the temperature is considered accept able This duration is used to determine the average rate of temperature change call
117. negative value entered if offsetting the sunrise to an earlier time For example if the user wanted to turn the lights OFF one hour before sunrise Sunrise Offset would be set to 60 and if the user wanted to turn the lights ON 45 minutes after sunset Sunset Offset would be set to 45 11 10 6 The Basic Schedule Cell The Basic Schedule cell has two main functions f a Time Schedule application is set up in E2 to provide ON OFF times for the lights the Basic Schedule cell passes the occupied unoccupied state from this time schedule to the Schedule Interface or Multi Logic Com biner cell If no Time Schedule application is set up in E2 for light scheduling the Basic Schedule allows you to configure a schedule for the Lighting Schedule application This custom schedule will pass along a digital occupied unoccupied state to the Schedule Interface or Multi Logic Combiner cell If an external Time Schedule will be used you will only need to configure the Basic Schedule by linking the schedule output to the input of the Basic Schedule cell and setting the Use External Schedule parameter to Yes If no external Time Schedule is being used you may configure a set of schedule events and date ranges to be used by the Lighting Schedule application Up to 15 ON OFF schedule events can be programmed as well as up to 12 date ranges Schedule events and date ranges programmed into the Basic Schedule cell are used only by the Light
118. network with multiple E2s it is often the case that certain sensors or transducer values will need to be used by all E2s A good example of this is outside air tempera ture There is no real need for every E2 to have its own outside air temperature sensor and therefore it would be beneficial if a single sensor could be used by all E2s on the network 88 26 05 RX 400 Unit 3 16 31 45 Use Ctrl X to Select CX Tabs SETUP FULL C1 Inputs Inputs Value ORT Hode OUTDOOR TEMP Out RH Mode OUTDOOR HUHID Indoor RH Mod Light Level LIGHT LEVEL I Spare Anlg Mode Spare finlg EU SpareAnlg2 Mode SpareAnlg2 EU SpareAnlg3 Mo SpareAnlg3 EU SparefAnlg4 Mo SpareAnlg4 EU DF SpareAnlgS Mode User SpareAnlgS EU DF F1 PREU TAB F2 NEXT TAB F3 EDIT F4 LOOK UP F5 CANCEL Figure 10 44 Global Data Setup Screen Navigate to the Global Data screen from the Main Menu 1 Press System Configuration 2 Press Global Data to open the Global Data Status screen 3 Press Setup to open the Global Data 10 24 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 16 07 29 SETUP FULL ALARM PPS ee CS Outputs ee Setup screen The Global Data feature is an enhanced method of effectively distributing commonly used input values between multiple E2s Sensors such as outdoor tempera ture and outdoor humidity are set up on an E2 as Global Data inputs This E2 then becomes the provider ofthe g
119. number of licenses for that feature is less than the number needed for the configuration Further information may be found in the service log File Bad 0200 15 SROe has corrupted firmware C 6 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 Default Mas Alarm Name Priority Definition Firmware Is Not Compatible 20 The firmware in a unit controller 1s not compatible eih meoumem vesion oE s Firmware Update Failed 10 The firmware on a unit controller was not success uM T MEE Flash File Has A Bad CRC Error An internal error has occurred n the E2 Flow obstructed 0 hrigstion pipe obstruction detected 20 Fuse Is Blown ESRS A fuse has blown on an ESR8 board and will require replacement Global Spare Digl On User The Spare Dig 1 input in Global Data has switched ON C An analog value has undergone a gradual change greater than its programmed Minimum Change set point Heap Memory Corrupted Reboot WE problem with memory has resulted in a reset of the E2 High Discharge Limit Exceeded A high discharge pressure detected by a Suction Group application is causing the suction group to operate at a reduced capacity High Limit Alarm An HVAC application AHU Zone 100 or ARTC MultiFlex RTU has a temperature above one of its cooling setpoints High Limit Notice 50 Network variable high limit exceeded High Suction Limit Exceeded User The suction pre
120. of 100 a Low Float Value of 0 and an Output Range of 4 When the float sensor value is at the high float value the setpoint will be increased by its maximum amount 2 When the float sensor value is at the low float value the setpoint will be decreased by its minimum amount 2 For all float sensor values in between the High Float and Low Float values the amount added or subtracted to the control setpoint will vary linearly If floating setpoint control is not desired this cell can be effectively disabled by setting the value of the Float Output Range to 0 11 13 2 3 The PID Control Cell The PID Control cell uses a PID algorithm to compare the control input value with the control setpoint value The result of this comparison is a percentage from 0 100 The PID Control cell repeats this sequence ever few sec onds and the result is a PID percentage that adjusts over time to provide the optimum amount of output to achieve the setpoint The 0 100 output from the PID Control cell 15 passed along to the Filter cell Bypassing PID For users who simply wish to convert an analog output to a pulse width modulation or sequenced staged output a Loop Sequence Control application can be programmed to bypass PID Control altogether If this option is selected the Loop Sequence Control application completely ignores the Select Setpoint Float and PID Control cells 11 40 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee and passes on the value of
121. of priorities as Mode 1 Demand Control continues to shed in this manner until the KW goes below the setpoint minus a user defined hysteresis value and the integral error is less than zero When both these conditions are met the shed levels will be restored in last shed first restore order Mode 3 Integral Error Approaching Zero If the integral error is getting too close to zero this sig nifies the demand window may soon be above the power company s demand setpoint When this occurs Demand Control switches to Mode 3 Mode 3 simply calculates the amount of KW differ ence between the current KW input and the setpoint and sheds enough levels to meet or exceed the KW shedding 11 36 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee requirement Demand Control does this by reading the KW levels of all applications which have been defined by the user when the applications were set up in all the prior ity levels that have not yet been shed It then sheds as many levels as necessary to bring the KW input value down thus saving the demand window from exceeding the setpoint Note that though each application has a user defined Application KW parameter that represents how much total power the application uses the actual amount of KW used by the application may be significantly lower especially if itis OFF when Demand Control sheds it Demand Con trol compensates for this fact by assuming shedding an application will only lower the KW inp
122. of the 16 input connections located on the board This board has been discontinued and is no longer available for sale 2 3 2 The 8ROe Discontinued LEGEND Output LEDs 8 Status LED Network LED Service Button Form C Outputs 8 f10 Service LED Echelon In Echelon Out Power Network Failsafe Figure 2 18 8ROe The 8ROe P N 810 4010 1s an Echelon based input Echelon Network Boards and Peripherals board similar in function to its I O Network counterpart the 8RO The8ROe board is the direct link betweenthe E2 and component operation Information gathered by the controller from the input boards is checked against current stored setpoints If differences in the received input data and the setpoint information are detected a signal is either sent to the proper 8ROe relay or an existing signal is dis continued Through the use of this relay signal control functions that can be properly maintained by a simple con tact closure sequence are effectively operated by the E2 The 8ROe features Form C contacts for wiring outputs as either normally open or normally closed Fail safe dip switches on the 8ROe allow the installation technician to specify the desired state of each relay in case of communi cations loss This board has been discontinued and is no longer available for sale 2 3 3 EC2s LEGEND Compressor LED 6 Select Button Fan LED Defrost LED Alarm Auxilary Digital Dis
123. operate the sensor several termi nals exist on the 16AI Multiflex boards 81O that may be used to supply DC power see Figure 9 3 for 16AI and gt i Set DOWN for MultiFlex power connections sensors requiring voltage z 4 Set UP for i Sx ux oxto ER ow i f sensors not requiring I I voltage INPUTS 9 16 26501070 Figure 9 2 Input Dip Switches for MultiFlex 16 and 16AI Boards MultiFlex REA 12V 5V DC DC Figure 9 3 Input Board Power Sources Input boards may supply 12VDC or 5VDC To connect to one of the DC power sources simply connect the sen sor s power wire to one of the terminals The maximum current that may be drawn from the 12VDC terminal is 100 milliamps The maximum cur rent that can be drawn from all three 5VDC terminals COMBINED is 50 milliamps NOTE For 24VAC sensors a separate trans 4 former must be used unless specified other wise in Table 9 1 on page 9 3 Specific wiring instructions for each type of sensor are given in Table 9 1 on page 9 3 9 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 various T emp Sensors and Probes Input Type Dip Switch EZ Connect one lead tothe odd numbered terminal and the other lead to the even num bered terminal polarity inse
124. percentage is sent to the next cell in line the Filter cell Step 4 Filter The Filter cell limits the rate of change of the PID percentage over time and is typically used to keep the PID cell from over compensating when inputs change drastically The filtered PID percentage is sent to the final control cell the Override cell Step 5 Override Once the PID percentage is figured the Override cell provides for overrides of the PID per centage The Override cell when activated by a user initi ated manual override will block the PID percentage from 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ being sent to the outputs replacing it with a fixed value specified by the user The value from the Override cells is then sent to the Loop Sequence Control s PID output and also to the two output cells for conversion to stages and PWM 11 13 1 2 Output Cells The two output cells make no alteration of the PID per centage determined by the control cells but re interpret them in a way that can be used for systems with multiple stages and or with pulse width modulation Sequencer The Sequencer cell will use the percent age to activate an equivalent percentage of its defined SELECT CELL Occ SP FILTER stage outputs The Sequencer supports up to eight cells and also provides for minimum on off times and first on last off sequencing PWM The PWM cell drives a digital output whose ON time per pulse width modulation period is eq
125. programmed defrost time For cases using a pulsed defrost strategy this means the defrost heat will not be pulsed during emergency defrost Emergency defrosts are initiated by the user from the Standard Circuit Bypass screen see Section 12 6 Manual Defrost and Clean Mode 11 3 2 5 Hot Gas Defrost with ESR8 and MultiFlex ESR If an ESR8 or MultiFlex ESR is used on a circuit that uses hot gas defrost values for circuits in defrost are forced OPEN 100 to allow hot gas to flow through the evaporators 11 3 3 Clean and Door Switches 11 3 3 1 A Standard Circuit application may be configured to entirely shut down a case circuit so that it may be cleaned or serviced A case circuit enters clean mode when it receives a signal from an input called the clean switch Clean Switches Clean switches may be set up as either Switched or Timed If aclean switch is configured as switched the circuit enters clean mode when the switch is turned ON and it remains in clean mode until the switch is turned OFF If a clean switch is configured as timed the circuit enters clean mode when the switch is turned ON and it remains in clean mode for a fixed user defined amount of t me During clean mode the Fan Defrost and Refrigera tion Solenoid outputs are all turned OFF and the liquid line solenoid is CLOSED If desired a notice may be sent to the E2 s Alarm Log so that the E2 can keep track of clean modes and times
126. proof latch time 11 10 9 Output Light Dimming The dimming feature allows the lighting output to be varied based on a light level sensor Dimming capability can work with both Standard Control and Alternate Con trol configuration For setup the user can Specify the light levels for the minimum and maxi mum light output Specify the ramp speed that the indoor lighting out put changes 11 11 Demand Control Demand Control applications are used by E2 to keep the total power usage of the building environmental sys tem below a specific demand setpoint dictated by the power company Demand Control applications achieve this by reducing power consumption in one or more appli cations in the other E2 applications as necessary until the total KW is below the setpoint This process is called load shedding The Demand Control application is designed to calcu late power usage in much the same way power companies do which ensures that it will be able to meet the power company s demand limit accurately The Demand Control application is also designed with a large amount of flexi bility in the way load sheddingis prioritized which allows users to maximize power economization with a minimal amount of interference into the normal operations of the building s HVAC systems 11 11 1 Introduction to Demand Limit Control Power companies supply power to consumers at a fixed rate per kilowatt hour until a pre defined level of energy cons
127. put never goes below Output at Minimum or above Output at Maximum Minimum Accumulated Error The Minimum Accumulated Error setting disables error accumulation in the Mode when the current error is equal to or less than a certain amount For example if the PID setpoint is 30 and the Minimum Accumulated Error is 1 the Mode will not adjust the PID output per centage as long as the input is between 29 and 31 Because Mode does not accumulate error within the Minimum Accumulated Error range the control input is allowed to settle on a value other than the setpoint It is possible in the example given above for the system to achieve stability at any value between 29 and 31 without the Mode trying to bring the error to zero Application The practical use of Minimum Accumulated Error is to set up a close enough zone around your PID setpoint When the control input is within the zone PID will not worry about making any adjustments to attempt to equalize the input and the setpoint Proportional Mode will handle any minor input changes that occur within this zone Filtering Filtering is a feature commonly used by CC 100s in valve control and it thus sometimes called valve filter ing The primary purpose of filtering is to dampen the rate of change of the PID percentage in an effort to make the PID control loop less reactive The filtering feature takes samples of the PID output percentage at
128. service modes 71 51 zone inhibit 77 50 alarm 11 50 freeze lockout 71 50 rain delay 11 50 timed 71 50 volume 50 zone override 71 50 zones and cycles 71 49 Jumpers Echelon termination E2 4 2 RS485 termination E2 4 2 termination settings on I O boards 6 4 K Keyboard 2 2 Keypad 12 6 I 6 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual KW Transducer See Sensors KW Transducer L LED Status Keyboard 2 3 Main Board CPU 2 3 PIB 2 2 LEDs Plug In I O Card 4 4 LEDs Plug In RS 485 4 4 License Management 10 19 Licensing 1 7 Light Level Sensor 3 11 Lighting alternate control 71 31 multi logic combiner 71 31 offset solar 71 32 control method select 1 30 functions 71 30 overview 71 29 separate control min ON OFF cell 71 32 proof cell 71 32 slave scheduling 71 32 standard control 11 30 light level interface 71 30 schedule interface cell 31 unoccupied mode 3 Line Up ESR 1 6 Line Up MultiFlex ESR 6 Liquid Level Sensors 3 11 Log View 12 16 Logged Inputs and Outputs 12 14 Logging power monitoring 43 Logging Groups 71 16 Base Log Group 1 17 Data Compression 71 17 Clipping 17 Incompressible DataTypes 1 17 Log Reports 71 18 Logging Setup 11 17 Logging On 10 1 Logs and Graphs 72 14 LonMark Device 8 5 LonWorks Network See Echelon Network M Main Board 2 2 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 Main Processor Board 2 2 Main Status Screen 0 3 Manual Defrost ending 2 9 initiating from Main Status Scre
129. set to NONE For TD Delay if the TD alarming feature is used enter the amount of time the TD must be higher than the setpoint before an alarm will be generated HHH MM 11 20 Pulse Accumulation 11 20 1 Overview The Pulse Accumulation application counts incoming pulses and converts that consumption value into a rate value once per minute Pulses are user specified by the Input Type parameter power gas liquid or volume to represent what is being measured The Pulse Accumulator input can support many types of pulse counting applications such as flow meters for water and gas applications In addition application spe cific logging such as hourly daily and monthly usages are supported for pulse type inputs 11 20 2 Configuration Set the Input Type parameter to the desired measure ment power gas liquid or volume vsu NOTE The engineering unit for the Pulse Accumulator T ype Input is specified by the active EU parameter This parameter is located in the General Controller Information screen under the Engineering Units tab and determines what unit of measure will be used when the Input Type is set The analog input connected to the board and point number must be configured as a Pulse Accumulator Type input The engineering unit of the analog input must match the engineering unit that is being used in the Pulse Accu mulation application Pulse Accumulation application can be deter mined by viewing the To
130. temp Minimum outside temp Figure 11 1 Temperature Ranges An Outside Air Temperature Boiler On and an Outside Air Temperature Boiler Off can be defined If the outside air temperature is lower than the Outside Air Temperature Boiler On the boiler is turned ON If the outside air tem perature is higher than the Outside Air Temperature Boiler Off the boiler is turned OFF If defined the Outside Air Temperature Boiler Off must be greater than the Outside Air Temperature Boiler On 11 24 2 Alarms There are four advisory generated by the Boiler Appli cation High Temperature Low Temperature High Pressure Low Pressure Each advisory will have an associated type priority and delay 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ 11 25 Energy Meter z i Energy Meter Alarm Figure 11 1 Emerson Energy Meter 11 25 1 Overview The Emerson Energy Meter provides a solution for measuring energy data with a single device Inputs include Control Power CT and 3 phase voltage The Energy Meter supports multiple output options including solid state relay contacts Modbus with or without data log ging and pulse The LCD screen on the faceplate allows instant output viewing The meter is housed in a plastic enclosure suitable for installation on T35 DIN rail according to EN50022 The Energy Meter can be mounted with any orientation over the entire ambient temperature range either on a DIN rail or in a pa
131. the baud rate at which the Gateway communicates with the site controller on the RS485RS485 Network These switches must be set to the same baud rate setting as the E2 or REFLECS usually 9600 baud Dip switch 8 controls the baud rate at which the Gate way communicates with the other devices on the Receiver Bus Network This baud rate may only be set to either 9600 baud switch DOWN or 19200 baud switch UP All Gateways and receivers on the Receiver Bus Network must have the same baud rate dip switch setting It is rec ommended you use 9600 baud as the Receiver Bus Net work baud rate Baud Rate for the 81O 8DO and ARTC There are three I O devices that do not have baud rates determined by dip switches They are as follows The RS485 Network and Hardware Setup 6 3 1 The SIO this board automatically detects the baud rate being used by the I O devices on the network and adjusts to match their baud rate 2 The 8DO this board automatically detects the baud rate being used by the I O devices on the network and adjusts to match their baud rate 3 The ARTC this board is fixed at 9600 baud Baud Rate for MultiFlex Boards On all MultiFlex boards switches 6 and 7 on S3 are used to set the baud rate To communicate at 9600 baud set switch 6 to the UP position and 7 to DOWN For 19200 baud set switch 6 to the DOWN position and 7 to UP Baud Rate for the MultiFlex ESR Set the baud rate on the M
132. the control input directly to the Filter cell Note that when bypassing PID the control input must be an analog percentage from another E2 application or a 0 10VDC analog signal from an input point 11 13 2 4 TheFilter Cell The Filter cell s primary function is to slow the rate of change of the PID cell s output The filter reads the differ ence between the current output value and the value x sec onds ago where x a user specified period of time The difference between these two values is multiplied by the filter ratio which is a percentage between 0 and 100 The result of this multiplication is the output value Note that if the filter ratio is at 100 or if the Filter cell is dis abled the input is not modified by the Filter cell 11 13 2 5 The Override Cell The Override cell s function is to provide a method of overriding the analog output going to the Sequencer and PWM cells to a user specified value instead of the value called for by the Filter cell The Override cell can override the output to any value between 0 and 100 and may be either fixed or timed A fixed override remains overrid den until the user deactivates the override while a timed override remains in effect until a user specified time has elapsed 11 13 3 Output Cell Descriptions The Loop Sequence Control application has three con trol outputs a standard 0 100 analog output a set of up to eight staged outputs and a pulse width modulation
133. the dewpoint is between the Full ON and Full OFF Dewpoint the heaters will be pulsed ON for a percentage of the specified time interval The per centage is determined by proportionately measuring where the dewpoint falls between the range of val ues formed by the two setpoints Figure 11 6 shows an example of an anti sweat appli cation The setpoints Full ON 80 F Full OFF 20 F form the range of dewpoints across which the heaters will be pulsed When the measured dewpoint is 45 F directly in between both setpoints the percentage will be 50 and the heaters will be pulsed ON for five seconds of the defined 10 second interval If the dewpoint drops to 30 F the percentage will lower to 20 and the heaters will be on only two seconds out of every 10 11 17 Heat Cool Control Heat Cool Control is a special kind of sensor control that applies to heating and cooling devices Heat Cool Control applications use PID control to vary the amount of heating and cooling based on the current temperature and 11 44 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual its relation to the heating or cooling setpoint Both staged and modulated 0 100946 heating and cooling outputs are supported by Heat Cool Control Heat Cool controls are available in RX units allowing small installations with simple HVAC systems to use one controller for all refrigeration and HVAC systems 11 17 1 Temperature Control Heat Cool applications use PID control to vary the out
134. the entire demand window Under non demand conditions the integral error will be below zero since the average KW or watt hour value will be below the setpoint The current value of the integral error and the current value of the KW input are what determine when the Demand Control application will begin load shedding 11 11 3 Load Shedding 11 11 3 1 Definition Load shedding is the process of curbing the amount of kilowatt usage within one or more target applications Most applications that drive mechanical or electronic devices such as lights heaters air conditioners compres sors etc are configured with special inputs that when active shed the application Physically when a device is shed its control set points are altered by a specified amount in a direction that will save energy For instance an HVAC unit with heating and cooling stages that is commanded to shed will have its heating setpoints lowered and its cooling setpoints raised This will cause the HVAC unit to operate at a lower capac ity thus saving energy Table 11 12 lists a number of E2 RX 300 and BX 300 applications and how load shedding affects them Application Shedding Effect All HVAC applica Raises cooling setpoints lowers tions RT 100s Multi heating setpoints Flex RTUs AHUs Heat Cools Raises or lowers Cut In Cut Out setpoints whichever direction saves energy Sensor Control and Analog Input I O Modules Refrigerati
135. the output percentage as follows NEW OUT OLD OUT P mode adjustment I mode adjustment D mode adjustment Each of the three modes P I and D serves a different and important purpose as described below Tries to stop the error from changing Measures difference P ional Mod between current and previous error and adjusts output per roportional Mode centage to prevent any further movement I Tries to bring the error to zero input setpoint Integral Mode D Derivative Mode Tries to slow or stop a rapidly changing error so P and I Modes may effectively work to eliminate it Proportional P Mode The Proportional Mode in PID determines the system s immediate reaction to a change in the error Proportional Mode simply analyzes the difference between the current error and the previous error Based on the size of this dif ference Proportional Mode will make a change to the out put in an attempt to stabilize the input value and keep it from changing any further Mathematically the following equation determines the P Mode adjustment for a single update P mode adjustment E E 4 TR Kp proportional constant E current error E error during last update TR throttling range Throttling Range In simplest terms the Throttling Range is the number Introduction to PID Control of input value units between a 0 output and a 100 out p
136. they require a 24VAC Class 2 power source in order to operate This will likely require a transformer such as P N 640 0041 110V or P N 640 0042 220V to be mounted near the external repeater enclosure Make sure there will be enough space next to the repeater to mount the trans former 3 4 2 3 Repeater The four channel repeater P N 832 4830 serves the same basic function as the two channel repeater boosting signal strength However the four channel repeater is also useful as a means of connecting the E2 to its associated devices using more than one daisy chain Mounting the Four Channel With a four channel repeater mounted in the E2 you can run as many as three daisy chain segments out into the field each of which can be as long as the prescribed Eche lon maximum wire length The fourth channel of the repeater can be used to connect other E2s in a separate daisy chain eliminating the need to run cable from the field back to the next E2 The standoffs and mounting holes are located above the PIB inthe back of the enclosure box Use the mounting screws and standoffs to secure the four channel repeater in place and connect the repeaterto the PIB with thetwo pin power connector located next to the battery Sensors and Transducers expansion card and four channel repeater card share the same mounting platform they must be used separately NOTE Because the modem communication REPEATER MOUNTS 4 Standoffs
137. top of the board after the board name 6 1 2 2 Board Calculations With X as the number of plus boards and Y as the num ber of non plus boards use the following equation to ensure that the number of devices on your network has not exceeded the maximum load limitation of the network For example if the total number of devices is less than 256 the maximum load limitation has not been exceeded Board Designation 6 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 6 1 3 Wiring Types Retail Solutions specifies all RS485 I O and MOD BUS wiring used by the E2 must be Belden 8641 24AWG 300V Retail Solutions P N 135 8641 Belden 8761 22 AWG 300V not stocked by Retail Solutions or a 600V shielded 22AWG equivalent stocked by Retail Solutions P N 135 0600 These are two connector shielded twisted pair cables that support a maximum daisy chain cable distance of 4000 feet 1219 m betweenthe E2 and the end device on the network 6 1 4 Thel O Network Structure Daisy Chains The RS485 Input Output I O Network connects all input and output communication boards together in a sin gle open communications loop This loop or daisy chain connects the E2 to multiple input and output com munication boards and terminates at the last input or out put board on the network A diagram of this network arrangement is shown in Figure 6 1 NETWORK COM ne DV CPC input OR OUTPUT BOARD
138. 0 boosts sig nal strength on Echelon Networks However the four channel repeater is also useful as a means of connecting the E2 to its associated devices using more than one daisy chain With a four channel repeater mounted in the E2 you can run as many as three daisy chain segments out into the field each of which can be as long as the prescribed Eche lon maximum wire length The fourth channel of the repeater can be used to connect other E2s in a separate daisy chain eliminating the need to run cable from the field back to the next E2 The plug in Four Channel Internal Repeater card con nects above the power interface board on the case mounts using standoffs and screws See Section 3 4 2 3 Mounting the Four Channel Repeater for more information 4 4 Battery Testing and Replacement hazard Do not recharge disassemble heat above 212 F 100 C incinerate or expose contents to water WARNING Fire explosion and severe burn Battery replacement should only be performed by a qualified trained technician The 3 6V battery located on the E2 processor board protects log and alarm data during power loss It is very important that each active E2 unit have a battery and therefore the E2 has several features that warn you of low Battery Testing and Replacement battery conditions and allow you to test and replace the battery 4 4 1 Low Battery Notification The E2 keeps track of how long the E2 battery has
139. 0 00 Setting the Time and Date 11 59 p m 11 59 00P 23 59 00 12 00 midnight 12 00 00A Table 10 6 Time Formats 12 and 24 hour To select a time format select either 12 or 24 hour using the LOOK UP tab Active Date The Active Date shows the current Julian date in the format that was chosen in the Date Format field For secu rity reasons the Active Date cannot be set to a date earlier in time than the current date without assistance from Retail Solutions Technical Service 7 800 829 2724 Active Time The Active Time is the current time in the controller s internal clock This time may be changed by entering the new time in the Active Time field When a new time is entered in the Active Time field it is sent across the network and changed on all device clocks so that all devices can remain synchronized Time Zone Time zone is where the time zone of the E2 is entered Each time zone is represented by a time zone offset that corresponds to the amount each time zone must add or subtract from Greenwich Mean Time GMT to get the correct local time Choose the time zone by using the LOOK UP tab Time Server Set this field to Yes or No depending on whether you would like to use SNTP simple network time protocol for synchronizing the E2 clock SNTP ensures accurate synchronization to the milli second of computer clock times If the E2 time is off by 5 seconds or greater the SNTP will update the E2 time
140. 1 11
141. 1 14 12 8 initiating 12 8 Clean Out 0 1 Clean Switches 71 7 Cold Reset performing a 10 1 Cold Reset Button 70 1 COM Port Setup 5 7 Commissioning 10 17 Commissioning CC 100s 10 17 how commissioning works 10 17 Commissioning MODBUS 10 17 Compressors troubleshooting F 3 Condensers air cooled 71 3 strategy 11 3 bypassing fan stages 12 9 evaporative 71 4 fail safe dip switch setup 71 5 EZ fan control 71 4 single speed 71 4 two speed 71 4 variable speed 71 4 fast recovery 171 4 hardware overview 11 4 input types 71 5 output wiring 71 5 overriding compressor stages 12 9 problems with F 5 split mode 71 4 Temperature Differential Strategy 11 3 Control Keys 72 8 Control Techniques VSD 6 6 Convenience Store Controller 3 Cool cut in cut out setpoints 71 51 Copeland Digital Discus Compressor 71 1 11 2 Copeland ISD Compressors 6 6 CPU 2 2 Creating 10 14 CS 100 71 10 CS 100 See Case Controllers CS 100 CT Drives 6 6 CUB 2 7 11 29 CX Home Screen 2 2 D Daisy Chains diagram of 6 2 Date and Time 12 11 Date Setup 10 9 Daylight Savings Dates 10 10 Defrost defrost cycle 71 6 11 12 demand 71 13 fail safe time 71 13 drip time See Defrost run off time electric 71 13 emergency 11 13 initiating 12 8 hot gas 71 12 in case controlled circuits 2 inhibiting using demand sensors 171 13 manual defrost ending a cycle 72 9 initiating 12 8 off cycle 71 12 L3 pulsed 3 pump down delay 71 12 reverse cycle
142. 15451 Gallons Per Minute 0 1 038 66 0 0158503 0 124 0 5 REU CCFH 0 655 29 0 01 0 25 0 Volume Change Rate gas Cubit Meters Per Second 0 30 9262 0 000471947 0 1 17043 0 00471948 Cubic Feet Per Minute 0 65 529 1 0 2 480 10 Distance Meters 0 65 529 1 0 248 1 Feet 0 214 990 3 28084 0 813 648 3 28084 Inches 0 65 529 1 0 248 1 Centimeters 0 65 529 1 0 248 1 Distance Change Rate speed Meters Per Second 0 332 89 0 005080 0 248 1 Feet Per Minute 0 65 529 1 0 48 818 9 196 850 Meters Per Minute 0 19 973 0 304800 0 14 880 60 Frequency Hertz 0 6 552 9 0 1 0 248 1 E 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 Appendix F Troubleshooting EZ The chart below describes symptoms and solutions if troubleshooting the system or equipment is needed For further information contact Retail Solutions Service at 1 800 829 2724 SYMPTOM POSSIBLE PROBLEM SOLUTION I O Network Problems T O board not getting power Check I O board power is the green STATUS light on If not check power wiring connections and use a multimeter to verify the board is getting 24VAC Reset power to board I O board not communicating or won t come online Check I O network connections 1 Check wire polarity positive to positive negative to negative 2 Check for broken or loose Dip switches are set incorrectly Check I O board network dip switches Verify network ID number is not a duplicate and
143. 17 lame Model Bus Subnet Board Neuron ID HIS 63 1 RX CL 63 662 07 AL 63 61 16 RO 63 61 SRO HIS 61 1 Set controller address for CL 63 Subnet 3 Node 2 662 Select method for identifying controller ressing Service Pin on controller ntering Neuron ID s directly pecifying a range of nodes P S 1 1 2 3 4 Press desired selection Figure 10 27 Commissioning Menu A menu will appear on the screen giving you the option of either pressing the service button entering the Neuron ID by hand or canceling and returning to the main screen Press Hi to select the service button option Setting Controller Address for Subnet 3 Node 2 CL 63 662 Enter time to wait for service pin message 6 61 66 Wait Time Figure 10 28 Service Button Screen The E2 will prompt you to enter a wait time in the Wait Time field The Wait Time is the amount of time the E2 will try to detect a service button press before declaring the attempt unsuccessful and returning to the main screen To commission the device the Neuron ID must be sent during the Wait Time duration After you enter a wait time in hours minutes seconds format and press the Wait Time duration begins All that is left to do is to press the service button on the device to be commissioned CAUTION When the E2 s Wait Time dura tion begins the E2 will accept the first Neuron ID code it receives
144. 3 Dial Qb repete ede d eei dere iau ets eee teste 10 22 10 16 1 4 The Echelon Network The Alarm Annunciator eese eere enne enne nennen 10 22 10 16 2 Setting up an E2 to be an Alarm Annunciator eese esent eterne enne nenne netten nennen 10 22 10 16 3 AMarm Dial Out isse eere etie bebe eredi dec teo esteri eet Nee ien desks 10 23 10 16 4 Introduction Alarm Reporting esses eee enne eterne tenerent enne t renes en trennen tente 10 23 SETUP GLOBAL DATA a RE UI REO EUR ETUR SERRE PNG 10 24 Priority Settings uc d epatis iue 10 24 10 18 SET UP APPPICATIONS ROI EROR RESTER URIU PIRE 10 25 10 18 21 SAdd Delete an Application 5 ao due eH idet E Eee 10 25 10 18 2 Using and Configuring a Setup Screen essent ennt renes nen nennen nennen 10 26 10 18 21 The Edit Men en rete entren thier RR eae AREE 10 18 2 2 Entering Setpoints 10 18 2 3 Navigating the Setup Screen 10 18 3 Using the Help Key to get Property 10 28 11 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW cssscssssscsscsssssssscsssssssssesssssssnssescssesssessesssscssessssessnssssssssnssessessesscssessssessnessesssseseoes 11 1 HE SUCTION GROUPS citro ee eerte WR RD Ee tenses Me RES 11 1 PS Ein cnim E EE 11 1 11 1 2 The Standard Suction Group Application
145. 3 is a digital display unit designed to show both case temperature and product temperature for a refriger ated store case or walk in freezer The TD3 mounts on the front of a case and connects to up to three input devices a case temperature sensor a product temperature probe and either a defrost termination probe or thermostat The real time input values of these probes can be viewed on the TD3 s digital display by pressing the function button on the front panel to cycle through the temperatures The TD3 is connected to a certral E2 RX controller via the Echelon Network Input values are sent to the E2 from the TD3 for use in case circuit control A diagram of the TD3 layout is shown in Figure 2 22 Status LED Commissioning Button Numerical Display Function Button Figure 2 22 TD3 Temperature Display Layout Echelon Network Boards and Peripherals 2 3 7 Facility Status Display FSD Figure 2 23 Facility Status Display The FSD reports alarm information and more such as temperatures occupancy case status and setpoints and provides a centralized device for store personnel to review information by communicating with the E2 via Ethernet connectivity minimum E2 firmware rev 2 68 01 The FSD has a touch screen color display for quick navigation and can be mounted in a separate remote loca tion from the E2 controller which enables alarms and other relevant store information to be viewed fr
146. 4 51 66 196 8 89 89 85 14 48 66 196 8 F1 BEGINNING F3 GRAPH Fh UPDT DATA F5 INFO Figure 12 27 Sample Log View The Log view shows logged data in a tabular format arranged by the date time of sample 1 Highlight a value from any screen and press E to open the Actions Menu 2 Select Log and the Log screen opens Several function keys may be used to navigate the Log view and provide additional information BEGINNING Move the cursor to the top of the table the most recently recorded sample END Move the cursor to the bottom of the table the oldest sample GRAPH Displays logged data in a graph format see Sample Graph View Figure 12 28 UPDT DATA Pressing this key updates the Log View by adding all newly recorded samples to the top of the table EXPD INFO Pressing this key will display the board point address or the controller applica tion property address for the point that is being logged Page Page Up Scrolls up one page Page Page Down Scrolls down one page 12 16 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee 12 11 3 The Graph View Figure 12 28 Sample Graph View The Graph view shows logged data in a graphical for mat with sample times as the X horizontal coordinate and sample values as the Y vertical coordinate To access a graph view 1 Highlight a value from any screen and press E to open the Actions Menu 2 Select Graph and a graphed view ofthe se
147. 5 10 1 Location 3 5 10 2 3 5 11 Liquid Level Sensors 3 242 Refrigerant Leak e Te es eee cet er inve tee xe rite 3 11 4 E2 HARDWARE SETUP r 4 4 1 A SELHING UP DHE EZ ORT e coded creek le sat ERIS CR RED TU ETC E ERE 4 1 ADT Enclosures eua tace eee ut inte e E AS 4 1 4 1 2 Main Processor Board adve osten 4 1 4 1 3 Main Processor Board Previous Version cesses seen eene enne entere nein nennen rennen nnne 4 2 414 Power Interface Board i ute ER e HR aee tt DU ER Ete e vL e e ES REL AE e IE OAE 4 2 4 2 POWERING THEE2 D DUCI OE EO ERU EO e ORE nen or eue ie d Eee ere gage etu 4 2 4 2 1 RS48EI POr ECCCIE 4 2 4 227 FRS485 Jumpers sp E E RURSUM qe E E E 4 2 4 2 3 Echelon Network Connect essi eee on Wee eo yao nra ee e RE eee SEIS ERR Ve E eo iani 4 2 vi Table of Contents 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 ADA Echelon Jumperss iioi ee eene Feet e ane tu ree ER HR sd ove SER EU e e crede 4 2 4 3 ADD ON E2 PERIPHERALS vcs teret ree RI ED NOSE e ORE deo NEM Re oue an 4 2 4 3 1 Echelon Card Plug In P N 537 4860 with mounting screw P N 101 4201 cessere 4 3 4 3 2 Modem Communic
148. 75CX position to provide RS 485 termination at the E2 DEVICE 4 Do not connect the shield of the MODBUS network to the E2 PIB center terminal Instead use 100 ohm 1 2 watt resistor to connect the MODBUS cable shield to earth ground 5 At each device wire the MODBUS cable to the RS 485 terminals and connect the MODBUS shield to the pin 18 terminal 6 Terminate the end of the MODBUS network at the last device on the daisy chain with the MODBUS termination block P N 535 2711 or by connecting a 150 ohm resistor between the MODBUS terminals ESTAS CON 8 RS 485 or MODBUS Net 4 CETERA TE ON E2 PIB ai i an RS 485 2A RS 485 NOT TERMINATED TERMINATED DAISY CHAIN CONFIGURATION SET TERMINATING JUMPERS RESISTOR S 100 OHM Y2 WATT BELDEN 8641 SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR BELDEN 8641 RECOMMENDED OBSERVE WIRE A COLOR POLARITY EARTH GROUND TERM TERM lt CONNECTION TO DEVICE TO DEVICE 2 5 TO OTHER RS 485 NETWORK DEVICE TO E2 PIB 637 4890 COM4 ON E2 PIB RS 485 2A RS 485 000 REVERSE POLARITY OF OV ON RS 485 CABLE FROM E2 TO DEVICE MODBUS SHIELD To PIN 18 TERMINAL OF DEVICE WIRE WHITE TO WIRE BLACK TO SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR BELDEN 8641 RECOMMENDED 100 OHM 7 WATT OBSERVE WIRE COLOR POLARITY IXR35C
149. 9 heat degree days If the daily average temperature is above 65 F then the number of cool degree days for that day is equal to the day s average temperature indegrees Fahrenheit minus 65 Example if the day s average temperature is 71 F the number of cool degree days for that day is 71 65 6 cool degree days Larger degree day numbers indicate a larger demand for heating or cooling Degree day totals may be added together to indicate heating and cooling demand for weeks months or years E2 does this to keep monthly logs of heat and cool degree days 11 15 2 1 Power Monitoring Input The Input Type Selection parameter defines the way the Power Monitoring input INPUT under the Inputs tab in application Setup will be used The parameter can be set to KW Analog Pulse KWH Current Amps or Current 3 phase Settings When KW Analog is selected verify the input is con nected to a board and point that is set up with Engineering Units of KW When Pulse KWH has been selected verify the input is connected to a board and point that is set up with Engineering Units of KW When Current Amps has been selected verify the input is connected to a board and point that 1s set up with Engineering Units of Amps When Current 3 phase has been selected verify the input is connected to a board and point that is set up with Engineering Units of Amps Note that for 3 phase three power monitoring inputs will appear under the Inputs tab of the
150. AO 810 and MultiFlex boards are usually installed by the refrigeration or building equipment manufacturer Therefore the installer need only make the necessary connections between the E2 and the cases condenser boards and or HVAC units Blank Face In some instances an installer may be required to mount an I O board There are no restrictions on the loca tion of these boards however for ease of network config uration it is recommended that the boards be located adjacent to the E2 I O boards may be mounted without an enclosure but they should be mounted in a location that is not easily accessible to avoid tampering or damage 3 2 1 Single Double Enclosures The Single enclosure and Double enclosure are sup plied with four mounting holes in the rear panel of the enclosure The mounting holes can be accessed without removing any of the boards inside the enclosure Figure 3 7 shows the dimensions and weight for the Single enclo sure Figure 3 8 shows mounting dimensions for the Dou ble enclosure When mounting boards inside the enclosure refer to Figure 3 9 for mounting dimensions Mounting I O Boards for the MultiFlex 16AI 8RO and the 8DO 0 25 TYP2PL 0 50 TYP2PL SINGLE ENCLOSURE REAR OF ENCLOSURE WEIGHT 12 LB 1 00 TYP 4 PL 0 25 TYP 2 PL 26501039 0 25 TYP 2 PL 0 50 TYP 2 PL DOUBLE ENCLOSURE REAR OF ENCLOSURE WEIGHT 15 LB 0 25 TYP 2 PL 26501033
151. BUS 1 3 The RS485 COM card is connected above the COM6 COM6 is located on E2 s optional modem expansion communication card which can be configured for RS485 operation Configure COM6 to the type of device you are connecting I O Net ISD 1 0 RX unit default Lennox IMC BX CX unit default or MODBUS 1 3 RS232 operation will be available in future versions of E2 Both connectors cannot be used at the same time Configure the connection type baud rate and parity The expansion card mounts onto the four standoffs located on the back of the E2 enclosure above the PIB and is compatible with E2 processor board version 237 4801 only For more information on this card refer to Section 4 3 2 of this manual Table 5 1 COM Ports with Associated PIB and Card Connections Refer to Figure 5 2 NOTE MODBUS configured multi ple ports 5 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ 6 The RS485 Network and Hardware Setup Previous versions of E2 hardware and firmware before version 2 30F01 only supported one I O network port with an optional expansion card that could be used for connection to Copeland ISD compressors or IMC Prodigy S Bus rooftop unit controllers Beginning with E2 version 2 30F01 E2s now have up to three RS485 network ports each of which may be configured as an I O network IMC Prodigy ISD or ECT MODBUS port Section 5 Serial Configuration of thi
152. C4 TCP IP SYSTEM INFORMATION General General Controller Info Site Name Site Phone Refresh Rate RS 232 Baud I 0 Net Baud Alarm Annunc RX Home Screen ScreenBlankTil Write Ini Time and Date MEPassvords User access Firmware Revision Service Actions Maintenance Logs Display Users Toggle Full Options Application Default Value Setup Figure 10 20 System Information Menu In the User Access Setup screen you may add user names and passwords to the controller with varying levels of security and customize user access for each security level To access this menu choose option Passwords User Access from the System Information Menu Set Up User Access RX 466 Unit 3 16 39 14 USR ACCESS SETUP FULL ALARM Change Setpoint Bypass Access level guidelines 1 View System Administrator 2 Config Override 4 Level Required for Set Point Bypass Override Config Alarm Ack Refrigeration Control 2 2 Building Control 2 Advanced Control 2 2 2 e 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Common Control 2 3 3 3 Enable Detailed Transaction Logging Yes Enable Global Log On Yes Users Username Password Access Level Auto Logout USER 1 USER PASS E F5 CANCEL Figure 10 21 User Access Setup Screen An E2 may be programmed with up to 25 different users A user basically consists of a username a passwad and an access level Whenever a username and password are entered during login the E2 se
153. CK FANE BLACK LIGHTS BLACK ANTI SWEAT 2c case mn BLACK DEFROST a CONTROLLER GRAY AUXILIARY 1 RED GRAY BLACK edipi AUXILIARY 2 o gt BLACK a STEPPER 2 gt BEUE STEPPER 3 dein x Zi GREEN STEPPER 4 1l2 3 e WHITE PINOUT FOR CC 100 Bm E amp 12V DC VALVE RECEPTACLE 7 m BROWN GROUND To other Einstein s NETWORK NETWORK To other CC 100s 8 6 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ ESR8 INSTALLATION GUIDE 1 Connect the ESR8 to the Echelon Network II Roo con My 2 Set the termination jumper on the ESR8 For daisy chain fl configurations the device will need to be terminated 5 only if at either end of a daisy chain e W 3 Wire each Emerson Flow Controls ESR12 or ESR20 valve to one of the four pin connectors on the ESR8 Refer to the Emerson Flow Controls Valve Field Wiring Guide Use Belden 9418 18AWG or equivalent 4 Connect the ESR8 to a Class 2 75 VA 24VAC transformer 5 Use the Service Button to commission the ESR8 Refer to z section 8 14 4 in this manual for more information on commissioning device Note that dip switches 52 amp S3 are implemented bas other Einsteins E2s or Echelon devices p B
154. COMS Pug A Modem Card RS485 COM Card a 2 Connectors Serial Device RS232 Port COM4 POWER INTERFACE BOARD PIB Serial Device RS485 COM Port 2 Connectors COM2 Figure 5 2 Associated Device Connections and COM Ports E2 COM ASSOCIATIONS CONNECTOR COMI COMI is a pre set serial connection type for a PC or laptop and is located on the RS232 port on the PIB The baud rate is configurable 95232 Port COM2 2 may be configured to the type of serial devices you are connecting I O Net default ISD 1 0 Lennox IMC or MODBUS 1 3 These devices are connected via Serial Device the RS485 connectors for wiring convenience two connectors are available on the PIB amp 3 e Connectors The connection type and baud rate are configurable mE COM3 is a pre set connection type for modems only optional The E2 modem expansion communication card P N 637 4871 has a plug in modem that uses the phone line jack RJ TRUS 11 The 637 4872 version has a plug in for an external modem Configure the baud rate Du and modem type for either the internal modem or the external modem dual RS485 connectors on the PIB The connection type is configurable COM4 COMA is located on the optional RS485 COM card for configurable devices Configure to the type of device you are connecting I O Net ISD 1 0 RX unit default Lennox eere IMC BX CX unit default or MOD
155. Choose an application by pressing LOOK UP to open the Option List Selection menu and choose the application you wish to add 5 Press to place the application in the Type field 6 Select the number of applications you wish to add in the How many field 7 Press to add 8 Youare then asked if you would like to edit the application now Press Y Yes or N No Delete an Application 1 Press the key to open the Main Menu screen 2 Select Add Delete Application to open the Add Delete Application menu ieu 3 Select EM Delete Application 4 Press to delete the application if not dis played by default 5 Ifnot displayed by default choose the applica tion you wish to delete by selecting LOOK UP The Option List Selection menu opens Choose the application you wish to delete from this list 6 Press and the application appears in the Type field 7 Press to delete the application 8 A dialog box opens asking if you are sure you want to delete the application you have selected Press Y Yes or N No 10 18 2 Using and Configuring a Setup Screen The Setup screen is application specific depending on where you place the cursor on the Home screen 96 Press to open the Actions Menu and select Setup or press SETUP on the Home screen The Setup screen for your selected application will open 10 26 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 10 18 2 1 The Edit Menu 68 26 05 RX 466 Unit 3 Use Ct
156. Cs and AHUs that are set up on the current E2 To make an association move the cursor to the HVAC Zone field of the RTU ARTC or AHU you wish to associate and press LOOK UP to open the Application Selection menu and use the arrow keys to scroll to find the desired Zone name When this menu is open use and to move quickly to the beginning or end of the list respec tively From this screen you may also choose to jump to the Setup screen to configure an individual RTU ARTC AHU or Zone application by using the SETUP AHU key or the SETUP ZONE key 11 8 MultiFlex CUB Board The MultiFlex Condensing Unit Board CUB is a smart input output board designed to control single con densing units A single condensing unit is a self contained compressor and condenser bearing unit which controls refrigeration in a single case line up or walk in cooler The MultiFlex CUB uses the same general hardware configuration as a MultiFlex 168AO It is equipped with a processor and extra memory to allow it to control com pressors condensers refrigeration and defrost for a single condensing unit using on board I O and control algo rithms The MultiFlex CUB has its own installation and opera tion manual P N 026 1706 MultiFlex CUB Board 11 9 MultiFlex PAK Board The PAK is a distributed pack rack controller that controls compressors and condenser fans The PAK can control up to 8 compressor groups containing up to 16 compres
157. Cut In Setpoint Figure 11 23 Cut In Setpoint Lower Than Cut Out When the Cut In setpoint is lower than the Cut Out set point the Sensor Control output turns ON when the sensor input goes lower than the Cut In setpoint The Sensor Con trol output remains ON until the input rises above the Cut Out setpoint at which time the output turns OFF See Figure 11 23 for an illustration 11 12 4 Digital Sensor Control The Digital Sensor Control module performs three Software Overview 11 37 basic functions LOGICAL COMBINATION Up to four inputs may be combined using standard logical combina tion methods such as AND OR XOR etc The result is the command output value which can be used to operate a relay BYPASS The command output may be configured to be bypassed to a fixed value by a switch or but ton press ALARMING Alarms and notices can be generated based on the command value of all the digital inputs of the cell plus occupancy and schedules 11 12 5 Logical Combination A Digital Sensor Control module has four inputs num bered 1 through 4 The logical combination of the Digital Sensor Control modules follows one of the following strat egies FIRST The first of the four digital inputs received will be used as the logical input value This combi nation first looks at input 1 If the value of this input 1s undefined it looks for other valid inputs starting with 2 and descending in numer
158. D Control Cell 11 13 2 4 The Filter Cell sese 11 13 2 5 The Override Cell 1 13 3 Output Cell Descriptions iie o etre eer a e Re P EE I E Ret ee ia prre oo aeris 11 13 3 1 The Sequencer Cell meer rie aad eR HR MEER REL Ure IP CER ECT 11 13 32 TRGPWM e ree e er e 11 14 TIMESCHEDULING AND HOLIDAYS 1 rp ERU EF ERR Hie a uie tip b er HE 11 14 1 How EET DERE 11 14 1 2 Absolute and Relative Events 11 14 1 3 Temporary Schedule Events ES was m TT 11 14 1 4 Overlapping EEE S S E EET EA E AEE E N aT AE E Em 1I14 2 Holiday Schedules te dee eee ae pei ee re O aa E 11515 POWEREMONEEFORING erepti ates cade baa a Geo ast eec Lipi ep SEE toda xii Table of Contents 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 PEAS SOW GPVICW E E E EEE E EE E 11 42 29 25 n abe ep poca bibet 11 43 11 15 2 1 Power Monitoring Input eseeeeseseeseeeeeeeeeneee eene enne 11 43 ARTES WEAN SE UP te er eut te oe as cic oe rie bu 11 44 ILIO How ANS Wat WOFKSX o ER NS Ne Tn BOTA a aS e Ives E a hoes 11 44 II 17 HEAT COOU CONTROL
159. E2 ENCLOSURE Figure 3 20 E2 Repeater Mounting 3 5 Sensors and Transduc ers 3 5 1 Pressure Transducers Retail Solutions transducers convert pressure readings to proportional electrical signals between 0 5 and 4 5 volts The transducer is desgned with a 1 8 inch male FPT fitting for connection to a standard access fitting If the fit ting is configured with a Schrader valve this fitting will have to be removed and replaced with a 1 8 inch female fitting Each pressure transducer is supplied with 20 feet of cable for connection to a 16AI input board 3 5 1 1 Mounting The pressure transducers should be mounted in a verti cal position pressure port down above crank case oil level to prevent drainage of oil into transducer port 3 5 2 Inside Temperature Sensor 3 5 2 1 Location Inside temperature sensors are supplied within a wall mounted enclosure for attachment to a standard switch plate The temperature sensor should be located in a central location within the zone to be measured away from doors windows vents heaters and outside walls that could affect temperature readings In addition the sensor Mounting 3 7 should not be mounted above other sensors that generate heat during operation such as relative humidity sensors The indoor temperature sensor should be between four and six feet from the floor 3 5 2 2 Mounting Mount the sensor using the screws provided as shown in Figure 3 21 26509013
160. EFRIGERATION ON Wl DEFROST HEAT ON REF DEF BOTH OFF 26512052 Figure 11 4 Defrost Termination Pulsed Pulsed Defrost is only available if the circuit is using heated defrost such as Electric or Hot Gas defrost Pulsed Defrost is similar to the Temperature Termina tion strategy outlined in Section 11 3 2 3 except a defrost cycle always continues for the full programmed duration When the termination temperature rises above the set point defrost does not end Instead the defrost heat is turned OFF until the case temperature falls below the set point at which time the output will come back ON to con tinue heating Figure 11 4 illustrates what happens in a pulsed defrost cycle In this example the case reaches its termina tion temperature approximately 2 3 of the way into its defrost cycle Defrost continues but defrost heat is turned Standard Circuits OFF until the temperature falls below the setpoint at which point the heat is turned back ON Defrost heat will continue to be pulsed in this manner until the defrost time has passed The defrost cycle will then begin the Run Off period and then restart refrigera tion 11 3 2 4 Emergency Defrost When necessary a user can initiate an emergency defrost cycle in a circuit Emergency defrost cycles are similar to normal defrost cycles except an emergency defrost cycle will ignore all calls for termination and remain in defrost for the entire
161. ER Local Only This setting specifies that the input to the global data is read and sent only to within the E2 you are programming Also this means that this E2 will not read any Primary or Secondary providers from the network If using this priority setting you must enter board and point settings Example Setting Up an Outdoor Temperature Sen sor Press Global Data and the Status screen opens 2 Move the cursor to the Outdoor Air Temperature OAT Mode and then choose the priority by scrolling with the mmm keys 3 Press the down arrow button once to the Board and Point section and enter the board and point locations for the sensor 4 Press BACK to return to the Main Status Home screen The Outdoor Air Temperature sensor is now set up as a global device in the E2 Other global inputs can be set up using the same method as above E2 1s now ready to be programmed with applications 10 18 Set Up Applications From the Main Status Home screen place the cursor on the application you wish to view and press nter SETUP You can also press and select Setup from the Actions Menu to open the Setup screen for your selected application 10 18 1 Add Delete an Application Add an Application Quick Start 10 25 l Press the gt key to open the Main Menu screen 2 Select Add Delete Application to open the Add Delete Application menu 3 Select add an application 4
162. ESRs to vary evaporator pressure for an entire circuit and is an alternative to mechanical EPR control The MultiFlex ESR receives input data from a Retail Solutions E2 controller via the I O Network and then regulates the stepper valves according to the data from the E2 Each MultiFlex ESR board requires a Class 2 80VA 24VAC center tapped transformer for power Retail Solu tions transformer P N 640 0080 is a multi tapped pri mary transformer that may be used with the MultiFlex ESR board 2 2 4 Hand held Terminal P N 814 3110 The Hand held Terminal HHT is used by manufac turers and service technicians to diagnose and test several of Retail Solutions existing and legacy products The HHT can be used on any Retail Solutions product with an RJ 11 connector The most common applications include All MultiFlex I O boards and the SROSMT All Gateway boards Stand alone MultiFlex boards RTU RCB PAK CUB 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 Ee CCB and CC 100 case controllers The HHT does not require a separate power source The unit is powered from the RJ 11 connector on the peripheral equipment The HHT includes a standard male RJ 11 to male RJ 11 cable www NOTE The 9V battery and 9 12V DC adapter Pa connection are not used on this HHT model P N 814 3110 The power switch determines if the HHT is in self powered mode BATT ext power EXT or if powered from a target device HOST External P
163. Figure 9 16 Wiring the 335 3263 Valve Cable P N 335 3261 Sporlan SEI and Emerson Flow Con trols ESR Stepper Valve The 335 3261 valve cable is equipped with a four pin male connector that plugs into a four pin female connector on the valve Plug the valve cable connector into the valve connector P N 335 3260 Generic Stepper and Emerson Flow Controls ESV Valve The 335 3260 valve cable has six flying leads for con nection to a stepper valve Four of these leads connect to the stepper motors while the other two serve as the power wiring 12VDC and ground The pinout for this valve cable is shown in Figure 9 17 Table 9 5 shows how to hook the flying leads to Emer son Flow Controls ESR Emerson Flow Controls ESV and Sporlan SEI amp CDS valves CASE CONTROLLER 4516 11213 PINOUT FOR 100 VALVE RECEPTACLE 26513116 Figure 9 17 Wiring the 335 3260 Generic Stepper Valve 9 16 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual EEA on Valve 335 3260 Pin Color trols ESR trols ESV Lern que TR 3 mak Re Sporlan s pw Table 9 5 335 3260 to Valve Connection Information 9 4 ESRS Valve Output Wiring The stepper valves are wired to the board by connect ing the four conductor wire from the stepper valve to a connector plug and then plugging in to one of eight Jacks along the top of the board Figure 9 18 Use the cable har ness
164. INT NUM BER Board Point The Board Point number will auto matically be defined if you are configuring the point from the Input Status screen Sensor Type The analog input may come from a number of different sensor types Temperature CPC Standard Temp Sensor 12V 100 LB 12VDC 100 PSI transducer 1 6VDC output Discontin ued 12V 200 LB 12VDC 200 PSI transducer 1 6VDC output Discontin ued Table 9 2 Sensor Input Types 9 8 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 12V 500 LB 12VDC 500 PSI transducer 1 6VDC output Discontin ued 5V 100 LB 5VDC 100 PSI transducer 0 5 4 5 VDC output 5V 200 LB 5VDC 200 PSI transducer 0 5 4 5 VDC output 5V 500 LB 5VDC 500 PSI transducer 0 5 4 5 VDC output Refrig Leak Refrigerant Leak Detector not IRLDS Refrig Level Refrigerant Liquid Level Probe Liquid Level Liquid Level Float Sensor Light Level Light Level Sensor Linear General purpose linear out put sensor Humidity Relative Humidity sensor Kilowatt value from KW transducer pulse accumula tion readings see Units Per Pulse on page 9 9 Pulse Accum KW Transducer Kilowatt transducer using 4 20ma 0 5V signal Dewpoint Dewpoint probe LM235 Temp Linear voltage output tem perature sensor PT2 Temp Danfoss PT2 temperature sensor CDK Temp CDK 2097MC temperature sensor 20K Pot Adjust Standard temperature sensor with offset adjustment potentiometer
165. ITAL SENS61 NOTAC F1 DIGITAL SENS62 NOTAC ON Controlled By Discharge Status Fan s On Figure 10 10 The Actions Menu The Actions Menu is available from any status screen by pressing Enter ES and may be used to do just about any task in the E2 system software This screen lists a number of options that can be used to affect a selected field an entire application or the E2 in general 10 6 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual Graph Opens graph view for the selected value Log Opens the Log screen of the selected value Override Opens the Override Update win dow where the selected input or output can be overridden to a user defined value or state Expanded Information Displays detailed information about the selected value Setup Opens the setup screen for the selected value Detailed Status Special status screen that shows detailed setpoints and input out put information with complete summary of inputs outputs Manual Defrost For circuits only Opens the Cir uit Bypass screen to force a man ual or emergency defrost or wash mode Allows Service Start End for Irri gation and Pulse Accumulation applications Application Com mands Opens various log and graph screens for Anti sweat and Pulse Accumu lation applications Applications Logs Graphs Opens the Circuit Report screen for standard circuits only Table 10 3 Actions Menu Options and Descriptions One of the more importa
166. ITY 5 i 2 595 22 e SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR BELDEN 8641 RECOMMENDED SHIELD short as possible o o o o 13 14 15 17 3 RS 485 I O or MODBUS Net 4 oo NOT TERMINATED TERMINATED Ju WIRE BLACK TO f WIRE WHITE TO DAISY CHAIN CONFIGURATION 2 SET TERMINATING JUMPERS REVERSE POLARITY OF ON RS 485 CABLE FROM E2 TO DEVICE 637 4890 COM4 ON E2 PIB RS 485 2A 000 RS 485 OV We RESISTOR 100 OHM Ye WATT TO DEVICE Pad EARTH GROUND CONNECTION A TERM FROM E2 PIB BOARD OR OTHER RS 485 MODBUS DEVICE XR REVERSE POLARITY OF ON RS 485 CABLE FROM E2 TO DEVICE MODBUS SHIELD TO PIN 16 wor OF DEVICE LAST XEV22D XEV22D DEVICE WIRE BLACK TO WIRE WHITE TO WIRE BLACK TO WIRE WHITE TO MODBUS TERMINATION BLOCK P N 535 2711 150 OHM TERMINATE LAST DEVICE ONLY 6 14 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ XR35CX XR75CX TO E2 INSTALLATION GUIDE 1 Connect the MODBUS Network to the RS 485 Connector on the E2 PIB board Belden 8641 recommended 2 Note to wire the RS 485 polarity at the E2 in the reverse of 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 the XR35CX or XR75CX device 3 Position the three termination jumpers to the UP terminated XR35CX XR
167. InSite Site Manager and non gateway E2 controllers e Distribution of global data and other network variables such as system time controller iden tification etc e Communication between E2 controller applica tions such as Remote Login and Remote File Services 7 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual NOTE The gateway E2 is the E2 controller at aremote site to which UltraSite directly con nects It is through this E2 that UltraSite com municates with the other controllers defined as the non gateway E2s and external entities such as UltraSite InSite Site Manager etc 7 4 4 Closed Network Layout A E Sg Sg g 3 g z 5 g g Echelon daisy chain c zm EN o E2 gateway 2 Unit 1 init 2 Ethemet Ethernet Ethemet Se sse Hub Switch 5 5 2 E 8 E Hi o Remote UttraSite Figure 7 1 Closed Network Layout 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ 7 4 2 Open Network Layout 05 09 05 BX 300 Unit 1 KAE 16 53 51 Use Ctrl X to Select CX Tabs SETUP C1 General C2 Eng Units C3 Modem C4 TCP IP Peer Netwrk C9 System General Setup GENERAL SERV 4 g g EI Echelon daisy chain e TCP IP Value DHCP Enabled IP Address 10 10 64 17 Subnet Mask 255 255 248 0 DHS Server 1 DNS Server 2 DNS Server 3 Default Gateway 10 10 64 1 Domain Name MAC Address 00 0a f6 00 04
168. JU1 JU2 JU3 JU1 JU2 JU3 f f UP 1 T DOWN um a o o UP DOWN DOWN UP Acceptable Retail Solutions Transformers Pus P N 640 0041 120VAC Primary AC1 50VA YELLOW AC2 P N 640 0050 120VAC Primary 75VA P N 640 0042 220VAC Primary 120 208 240 VAC C 50VA P N 640 0080 Multi tap 120 208 240VAC Primary 80VA P N 640 0056 Multi tap 120 208 240VAC Primary 56VA YELLOW AC1 24 VAC Note Please refer to transformer SECONDARY SIDE for primary side wiring ECT MODBUS The RS485 Network and Hardware Setup 6 11 ee 16Al INSTALLATION GUIDE 1 Connect 16A1 to the RS485 I O Network POWER AC1 0V AC2 YYY AAAY AAAY EE 16Al BEBE n o 2 2 Set the network address on the first five rockers of dip switch S3 3 Set the network baud rate using rockers 6 and 7 of dip switch S3 4 Set RS485 termination jumpers UP term if at either end of a daisy chain Otherwise set jumpers DOWN not term 5 Connect board to the 24VAC center tapped secondary of the power transformer Note If you change any dip switch settings while the board is powered disconnect the power and re power the board to reset
169. K Boatd s esa seas I Cep tae peine eee dei 2 7 2 2 8 The MultiFlex ESR Board eese eterne ennt these stet eth 2 6 2 2 4 Hand held Terminal P N 814 3110 2 8 2 2 5 The 8RO and 8ROSMT Relay Boards eed e tede t teet perpendere eet 2 9 2 2 6 4A0 Analog Output Board e bad E dp dead e lee eds 2 10 2 2 7 8 Digital Output Board and PMAC II Anti Sweat Controller eene 2 10 2 3 ECHELON NETWORK BOARDS AND PERIPHERALS esee enne neetren nennen 2 11 2 3 1 The I6AIe Discontinued e esses essent enne senes entes ente 2 11 2 3 2 The 8RO Discontinued ua eee e tea e manducat 2 11 PASSEND CR ET A mm 2 11 2 3 4 CC 100 Case Controllers and CS 100 Case Circuit Controllers cese esee 2 12 2 3 5 The ESR8 Discontinued 2 12 2 9 0 Temperature Displays ese ete ea e ed PORE REPE eee 2 13 2 3 7 Facility Status Display FSD aues ei m rrr ERE ER ERR RSEN ana E O in E ATSE EENT EE EERS 2 13 rele ul CE 3 1 MOUNTING THE 2 te Prot teer nadie o teo nte E EH REDE ER SOIRS 3 1 Standard MOWHE secte ttem tete e edid Dni deno I In 3 I Sills Recessed MOWHL ists tia ittm enata Ip IS 3 1 321 3
170. KW usage 1s higher than the demand setpoint Power Monitoring goes into Shed Mode During Shed Mode Power Monitoring turns on a digital output called SHED OUT This output may be connected to the demand shed inputs of one or more E2 applications which will in turn shut down or otherwise curb the power usage of the overall system The SHED OUT output remains ON until the KW usage falls below the demand setpoint In short the purpose of Shed Mode is to get the total KW usage below the demand setpoint as soon as possible 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ nen NOTE If you do not wish to use load shedding 4 for your building simply do not connect any thing to the SHED OUT output 11 15 2 Logging Power Monitoring applications are pre programmed with extensive logging capabilities that record the hourly daily and monthly power usage statistics Hourly The hourly log contains a list of power usage summa ries of the previous 48 hours An hourly log entry con tains The time and date of the entry The KWh for that hour The maximum average KW that occurred within any demand window for that hour The highest instantaneous KW reading taken for that hour and the time that reading was taken Daily The daily log contains a list of power usage summaries for the previous 48 days A daily log entry contains The date of the entry The KWh for that day The maximum average KW within any demand window for that day The h
171. NE Licensing NOTAC F1 NOTAC ON Figure 10 12 System Configuration Menu The System Configuration Menu is one of the menus used to set up the E2 Included options are Input Output Definitions internal system information remote commu nications global data alarm logging and network setup information To open the System Configuration menu 1 Press gt 2 Press System Configuration Screen Types The System Configuration menu contains nine menu View the status of all input boards as well as set up individ ual points on the I O boards View the status of all output boards as well as set up individ ual points on the I O boards Menu that gives access to more E2 setup options and informa tion Gives access to modem informa tion dial out setup and TCP IP Enter information about Logging Group applications such as the sampling frequency and total number of samples Opens the Network Setup menu where options to view network status add or delete boards and controllers commission devices set up a router and make board associations are available Configure one or more analog or digital sensors to be used as global values by all E2s Opens the Licensing Report page with a list of all licensed features on the current E2 and allows additional features after a password key has been entered by the user to be enabled Table 10 4 System Configuration Menu Options Quick Star
172. Network Diagram Figure 1 3 shows the E2 RX peripherals that commu nicate across the Echelon Network CC 100 Case control board controls all lights fans defrost and refrigeration fora single case The CC 100 controls pulse or stepper valves to provide precise evaporator control resulting in better tem perature maintenance and energy efficiency ESR8 amp Evaporator stepper regulator the analog outputs on this board allow the E2 to control circuit temperature in up to eight circuits using suction side mounted electronic evaporator pressure regula tors EEPRs Networking Overview TD3 Temperature display has three inputs that monitor case temperature product temperature and defrost status Third Party Echelon Devices Echelon amp LON MARK devices communicate with E2 through its Open Echelon networking feature and require a license key and a description file that 1s loaded into the E2 that enables communication 1 4 3 Interconnection With Other E2s In large installations where more than one refrigeration system is present or where E2s are controlling both refrig eration and building HVAC systems in the same site the E2s share information with each other across either the Echelon Network or via Ethernet Echelon Box To Box N A ECHELON CABLE daisy chain Ethernet Box To Box
173. Off Season and no normal or manual cycles will be possible This prevents accidental cycles from occurring after the system has been winterized 11 21 4 Zone Inhibit 11 50 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee Inhibiting sensors enable a zone to terminate irrigation early when enough water has been dispensed for the cur rent cycle or completely removes a zone from the cycle Each zone is equipped with a digital inhibit input called Zone Inhibit If the inhibit input is ON the zone status will be set to Inhibit and the valve output will be set to OFF 11 21 4 1 Timed If the zone is inhibited for Timed control types it will be excluded from the cycle If Zone Inhibit turns ON dur ing the cycle control will transfer to the next defined zone 11 21 4 2 Volume For Volume control types the inhibited zone will be excluded from the cycle only while the inhibit input is ON If the inhibit input turns off and the cycle is still in prog ress the zone s state will again be set to Pending and will again be included in the cycle 11 21 4 3 Rain Delay The rain inhibit input should be connected to a rain sensor and will only function during the ON season In the event of rain a programmable rain delay of 0 7 days will prevent irrigation cycles for the user defined number of days from when the rain sensor has detected rain Active cycles will not be terminated if the input turns ON how ever Rain Inhibit will begin when the activ
174. Out Enthalpy This strategy requires indoor and outdoor humidity sensors and also indoor and outdoor temperature sensors The enthalpy of the outdoor air is calculated and com pared to the enthalpy of the indoor air If the out door air enthalpy is less than the indoor air enthalpy economization is enabled Otherwise economization is disabled You may choose a different method for use in summer and winter months Also an alternate method may be specified that will be used as a fail safe when the primary method is not available due to sensor failure etc 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ 11 7 8 The Effect of Enabling Econ omization Both MultiFlex RTU and AHU applications support the use of both two position digital and variable position analog economizers Digital economizers when enabled behave like a first stage ofcool When analog economizers are enabled the MultiFlex RTU or AHU will modulate the opening percentage of the dampers based on its own mixed air temperature measurements 11 7 9 Dehumidification Control A Zone application is responsible for reading the rela tive humidity level within the Zone comparing it to a dehumidification setpoint and sending a command to dehumidify when the humidity is above the setpoint Once the Zone humidity level rises above the setpoint dehumidification will be active in all the Zone applica tion s associated HVAC units until the indoor relative humidity falls below
175. Peer Communications for more information From the Main Menu 1 Press System Configuration m 2 Press VM Remote Communications 3 Press TCP IP Setup to advance to the TCP IP Setup screen E2 units may be configured to communicate across an Ethernet computer network using TCP IP protocol To enable Ethernet communication you will need to enter IP address information for the E2 in the Serial IP screen IP Address The IP Address field sets the network address for this E2 Other network devices such as Set Up TCP IP PCs running UltraSite will communicate with this E2 by sending information to this specified address Contact your network administrator to determine what IP address to enter The IP Address always consists of four numbers from zero to 255 each of which is separated by a period Enter the address in this format Subnet Mask Contact your network administrator to get the correct subnet mask value and enter it in this field The default value 255 255 255 0 is the subnet mask commonly used for small networks Primary DNS Contact your network administrator to see if a Primary DNS value is required for this E2 If so enter the Primary DNS address supplied by your administrator in this field If not leave this field set to 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS Contact your network administra tor to see if a Secondary DNS value is required for this E2 If so enter the Secondary DNS address sup
176. Physical State Active translated to 1 on Inactive translated to OFF OUTPUT MED TEMP COMP OIL FAIL LOGIC F1 SET ALARMS F2 SET LOGGING F5 CANCEL Figure 9 7 Digital Input Screen Point Name The Point Name is simply a name for the point that may be used as a reference Assigning a descriptive name to a point makes set ting up inputs for applications much easier For example if you are setting up a push button switch to reset compressor 1 after an oil failure shut down you may choose to name it OIL RESET 1 Then when programming your Pressure Control applica tion you may easily define compressor 1 s reset input by tying it to OIL RESET 1 This keeps you from having to keep track of which contacts are tied to which point numbers You are required to enter a point name in the Point Name field The default name is BOARD NAME BOARD NUMBER POINT NUM BER Board Point Number The Board Point Number will automatically be defined 1f you are configuring the point from the Input Summary Screen Select Eng Units The Select Eng Units field is where you may select how the ON and OFF states of this point are displayed and represented in E2 s setup fields and status screens By default digital inputs have ON OFF engineering units meaning when the input is ON or OFF the input will be represented as ON or OFF in the system software Since the controller looks at only the a
177. R TYPICAL CASE INA STANDARD CIRCUIT Figure 11 5 Typical Case in a Standard Circuit Case Temp Probe Temperature see Table 9 1 on up to 6 page 9 3 Defrost Termination May be digital see Table 9 1 on Probes up to 6 Klixon or Tem page 9 3 perature Product Probe Temperature see Table 9 1 on up to 6 page 9 3 Clean Switch not pic Digital see Table 9 1 on tured page 9 3 Door Switch not pic Digital see Table 9 1 on tured page 9 3 Table 11 5 Suction Group Inputs Standard Circuits PRODUCT PROBE REFRIGERATION SOLENOID LIQUID LINE S 26513118 Software Overview 11 9 Switch to Wire Output Output Device Board contacts to Set Fail safe Dip C up Wire fans to remain ON during comm loss Refrigeration Sole noid Liquid Line Sole noid Hot Gas defrosts only EEPR ESR8 con trolled circuits only C C N N N N HN UT N one ESR8 point Table 11 6 Suction Group Outputs 11 4 Case Control Circuits 11 4 1 Overview Case circuits that use CC 100s CS 100s EC 2s or CCBs for case control rely on Case Circuit Control appli cations in the E2 to provide them the necessary setpoints defrost scheduling and other control parameters Unlike Standard Circuit applications Case Control Circuits do not directly control temperature in the case circuits instead the case controller controls temperature for each individual c
178. RD 21 BOARD 22 BOARD 23 BOARD 24 fii 0 M PAL LL REAL BOARD 25 BOARD 26 a BOARD 27 E BOARD 29 BOARD 30 BOARD 31 WIRE to same color t i i Sc COM tud Ph RO LU AU HMM EHE WIRE to same color RATE 3 4 RS485 I O NET DAISY CHAIN CONFIGURATION SET TERMINATING JUMPERS JP2 JP3 JP4 JP2 JP3 JP4 PRE Ut Tire aaa I OE 9600 baud HHHH H TERMINATION NO TERMINATION Em VreRM peas ee SGN Jumpers in the Jumpers in the 19200 baud a UP position DOWN position 5 Valve 1 connector Stepper valve harness Use the cable harnesses RUM to Match wire colors to that are supplied with the valves eres We Coen silk screen legend A valve cable harness may not orientation on valve connectors be longer than 150 feet Wire color legend silk screened on each valve connector 8 ECT Flow ESR 12 or F 1 I h Valve connectors on the ESR 20 Valve or poran valves MultiFlex ESR board 1 8 green wire Instead connect R BLU BLK VALVE2 VALVE3 VALVE 4 VALVE 5 VALVE6 VALVE7 VALVE8 the green the silk screen BS5S SSS E558 5 6 ap a WIRING FOR 640 0080 80VA 24VAC Center Tapped Transformer AC1 24VAC Center Tapped 125 L1 GND NEUTRAL Three conductor non shielded cabl
179. RGENCY OVR EMERGENCY OVR EMERGENCY OVR Figure 9 5 Data Type Pop Up Menu Depending upon what type of input you selected the Analog Input or the Digital Input screen will appear The analog screen is described in Section 9 1 3 3 while the digital screen is described in Section 9 1 3 4 9 1 3 2 Screen Using the Input Definitions Status In order for the E2 to properly read an input value from a sensor or transducer hooked to an I O board you must first tell the E2 what kinds of devices are hooked into each input board point This is achieved by using the Input Def initions Status screen SETUP DEL MOD OFFSET LOOK UP and CAN CEL are the function keys along the bottom of the screen available for the Input Definitions Status screen Each record in this screen contains the following infor mation about a point 1 Board Type read only The Board Type column will read 16AI regardless of whether the input board is a 16AI MultiFlex 16 8IO or MultiFlex Combination I O board NOTE When setting up 88s and 8AOs re member that there are only eight usable input points even though the 16AI that represents the 88s and 8 05 in the summary screen has sixteen points Only inputs one through eight may be defined all other points will be ignored 2 Brd read only The point s board number will appear in its point record under the Brd column All input boards on a con troller will be displayed 3
180. Rotational Shed levels leaving the First Shed levels blank Demand Control would then skip directly to the Rotational Shed levels during load shed ding and all loads would share shed time equally 3 Last Shed The Last Shed priority levelsare shed in sequence only if all First Shed and Rotational Shed levels have been shed and the Demand Control application still requires demand reduction Like the First Shed priority levels level 1 is always the first Last Shed level to be activated followed by 2 3 4 and so on up to 20 Applications that are assigned to this priority should be the most vital applications to system performance These applications will be shed only as a last resort and there fore will spend the least amount of time in shed A diagram of how Demand Control cycles through all of the three different types of priority levels are shown in the diagram in Figure 11 21 Demand Control ROTATIONAL SHED Woo Woo Hom Won Wm Woo Wo Ho o mm LEVELS ROTATE IN THIS DIRECTION FOR NEXT DEMAND CONDITION FIRST SHED 26512042 Figure 11 21 Shedding Priority Levels Other Notes About Priority Levels All priority levels whether they be First Rotational or Last should be shedding relatively the same number of kilowatts When the Demand Control application is shed ding in a non emergency situa
181. S F2 F3 EDIT Fh STATUS FS CANCEL FUNCTION W KEYS Figure 10 48 Typical Setup Screen RX version shown The Setup utility is the interface used to change set tings and setpoints and define inputs and outputs in the E2 Figure 10 11 and Figure 10 48 show a typical Setup screen and its primary elements Index Tabs The ten boxes at the top of the screen labeled C1 through C0 are known as the index tabs These tabs pro vide a short index of the screens that are used to set up the current application The numbers C1 through CO represent the screen numbers C1 being screen 1 C2 being screen 2 and so on Each of the Setup screens that you may access will have a name beside its number But as in Figure 10 11 and Figure 10 48 for example you will notice some tabs have names while others are blank As you move through these screens within the Setup Editor the highlight will move to different tabs to indicate which screen is being displayed Pressing PREV TAB will back up the order of the screens Pressing HOME at any point will take you to the Main Status Home screen TIP To see each screen in a typical setup for the E2 RX controller start from the Main Sta tus Home screen Position the cursor somewhere inside the Suc tion Groups section and press and Setup or just SETUP from the Home screen The General Setup screen will be dis played Press NEXT TAB to mo
182. SR 11 3 1 4 Line Up MFESR Defrost In Line Up MFESR circuit temperature is controlled by an electronic evaporator pressure regulator EEPR The EEPR is controlled by a PID algorithm that steps the valve open from 0 to 100 based on how far away the circuit temperature is from the setpoint This new strategy requires the use of the I O Network based MultiFlex ESR and should not be used with the Echelon based MultiFlex ESR 11 3 2 Defrost Control Defrost cycles in a Standard Circuit application may be initiated in either of three ways by schedule at specific times of the day programmed by the user by external trigger a user initiated signal such as a switch or button or by manual command initiated on the E2 front panel by the user 11 3 2 1 Defrost States The defrost cycle for a Standard Circuit application consists of three steps 1 Pump Down Elec amp Hot Gas only The defrost cycle begins with this step immediately after the 11 6 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee refrigeration solenoid is turned OFF During the Pump Down phase the application waits for a user specific amount of time to elapse before turning on the defrost heat This allows refriger ant in the evaporator to be evacuated before defrost heat is activated The compressor s remain ON during Pump Down 2 Defrost During the defrost phase refrigeration is disabled If using electric defrost heaters will be ON If using hot gas heated r
183. SR8 ESR Control o 199 199 Table 1 3 CX 100 CX 300 and CX 400 Comparison Introduction 1 3 puce oe posce qe ei NONO tion mcm e m Towne Grup m _ ewSewensCon t m amer o n pu Permen o o 8 2 s pe Pasero f fe fe Pesco Smac e nome _ como FY Control omues o e mese 2 Table 1 3 CX 100 CX 300 and CX 400 Comparison 1 4 Networking Overview 1 44 E2 IJO Network Most of the general purpose input and output commu nications devices required by the E2 to control refrigera tion systems are connected to the E2 via the I O Network The I O Network is a simple RS485 three wire connection that allows data interchange between input boards which read sensor values and digital closures output boards 1 4 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual which carry out commands from E2 s control applica tions and the E2 itself The I O Network is the same thing as the COM A and COM D Networks found on Retail Solutions previous generation of controllers REFLECS This allows current owners of Retail Solutions Refrigeration Monitor and Control RMC or Refrigeration Monitor and Case Control RMCC controllers to easily retrofit with an E2 RX with out need for re wiring E2 RX REFRIGERATION BUILDING E2 RX amp BX RS485 I O NETWORKS Figure 1 2 E2
184. Software Overview 11 51 stages have been set to High then the fan speed should be set to High otherwise the fan speed should be set to Low If for any reason the algorithm thinks that the high speed and the low speed should both be ON the high speed fan should be turned ON only Proper fan speed should be set when there are no heat ing or cooling stages ON and the Fan Always On Setpoint is enabled 11 21 12 Configuration Set the Strategy type under application Setup under the General tab to Separate Setpoints Enter the desired val ues for heating and cooling stages Cooling heating alarm and miscellaneous setpoints can be edited under additional tabs Press Control zero 0 while the More tab is highlighted to bring up the list of additional tabs 11 22 Flexible Combiner The Flexible Combiner application a new feature of E2 versions 2 20 and above is a highly advanced and ver satile I O control program used to combine multiple ana log and digital input values using programmed equations similar to those used in spreadsheets A Flexible Combiner application may have up to eight analog outputs and four digital outputs each of whose val ues are determined by user programmed equations that mathematically combine up to eight analog inputs and eight digital inputs Four of the analog outputs have the ability to remember their output state over an E2 power cycle Additionally up to four alarms can be set up whose
185. Solutions service the IRLDS display for error code information and call Retail Solutions service An internal error has occurred in the IRLDS Check the IRLDS display for error code information and call Retail Solutions service An internal error has occurred An internal error has occurred the IRLDS display for error code information and call Retail Solutions service An internal error has occurred the IRLDS display for error code information and call Retail Solutions service A zone on an IRLDS unit has a dirty filter or a crimped tube C IRLDS General Fault IRLDS Line Filter Flow Fault 20 20 IRLDS Pressure Data Error An internal error has occurred the IRLDS display for error code information and call Retail Solutions service DEOR UMEN IRLDS has failed its self test procedure EDS Temperate Data Error An internal error has occurred the IRLDS display for error code information and call Retail Solutions service IRLDS Unknown Error The IRLDS has experienced an error not recognized by the E2 IRLDS Voltage Data Error An internal error has occurred the IRLDS display for error code call Retail Solutions service If any of the 3 phases of power is missing after the compressor is called to be on this advisory is gener ated If there 1s voltage on the 3 phase sense inputs 0 5 sec onds after the compressor is called to be off this advisory is generated ISD Compressor Modul
186. Switch E2 Receiver Bus Status LED 40 Alarm and Gen Status LEDs Figure 2 6 Gateway Board I O Network Boards and Peripherals Hardware Overview 2 3 The Gateway board is an RS485 to RS485 converter One side of the Gateway is always connected to the Retail Solutions I O Network The other side of the Gateway is the receiver bus RS485 The receiver bus is connected to one or more RS485 devices depending on which type of Gateway is being used The Gateway interfaces devices to the Einstein E2 and legacy Retail Solutions controller REFLECS by simulating 16AI and 8RO boards using Retail Solutions standard I O board protocol The Gate way can also convert third party controller protocols to Retail Solutions protocol for custom cells created in the Einstein E2 to interface with third party controllers Dan foss Woodley etc The Gateway performs one of two basic functions 1 It allows control of and or status ofa device using I O board simulation 2 Converts a third party protocol to Retail Solu tions I O Net protocol and interfaces to a custom cell in Einstein E2 810 3711 Woodley Case Controller ateway 810 3712 Woodley Pack Controller ateway 810 3720 Cutler Hammer Breaker ateway 810 3721 Square D Breaker Gateway Table 2 5 Gateway Board Models 2 2 2 MultiFlex Boards The MultiFlex line of control system boards provides wide variety of input output and smart control solutions all of which
187. T11 Refrigeration NONE NONE ai OFF CKT81 OFF NONE 28 8 OFF CKT62 OFF NONE 28 8 OFF CASECTRL CKT83 OFF NONE 26 8 OFF F1 SUCTION F2 CONDENSER F4 SENSORS Figure 12 9 Summary Screen RX 400 Version Shown Status Screens Status screens are real time views of application func tions They show the current status of all outputs the cur rent values of all inputs and other important data such as control setpoints run times and whether or not bypasses or overrides are active Each status screen is specially designed to provide a concise at a glance view of how one or more systems are functioning RX 466 Unit 3 SUCT GROUP STAT 13 59 56 ALARM SUCTION GROUP NAME Suct amp SUCTION GRPO1 Dsch HP STATUS RUNTIME CONDENSER Comp 15 P 6 62 CONDENSER 61 Comp 15 s 6 14 Comp 15 ON 8 15 Comp 15 ON 8 15 22 0 GENERAL INFORMATION Sat Suc Temp 3 2 Rack Fail Current HP Capacity PID F1 SUCTION CONDENSER F4 SENSORS FS SETUP Figure 12 10 Status Screen RX 400 Version Shown Setup Screens The Setup utility is the interface used to change set Operator s Guide to Using the E2 12 5 tings and setpoints and define inputs and outputs in the E2 Figure 10 11 shows a typical Setup screen and its pri mary elements Index Tabs RX 4668 Unit 3 SETUP 10 07 33 ALARM CS Defr Times CO MORE 69 69 65 Use Ctr1 X to Select Ci General Tabs C4 Defrost C6
188. The MultiFlex RTU board also has the ability to act in stand alone mode without help from the Zone application The MultiFlex RTU has its own fallback temperature con trol strategy and even has a seven day fallback occupancy schedule that may be substituted when communications with the Zone is lost 11 7 3 2 MultiFlex RCB Board The MultiFlex Rooftop Control Board RCB P N 810 3062 is a rooftop HVAC control board for use either as a stand alone controller or in zone control applications using a Retail Solutions E2 BX building control system The MultiFlex RCB is capable ofcontrolling heat and cool stages fans humidification and dehumidification devices economizers using on board I O and control algorithms as well as monitor and interact with other building control systems and peripherals such as smoke alarms and CO2 sensors Differences Between the MultiFlex RCB and the Mul tiflex RTU The RCB is an improved version of the MultiFlex RTU The RCB has sixteen fully configurable analog and digital input points whereas the RTU has only eight inputs two of which are configurable The RCB has four analog outputs for use in controlling variable speed fans economizers or modulating heating and or cooling valves whereas the RTU has only two analog outputs for use only with VS fans and economizers The RCB also features a more sophisticated HHT interface and updated algorithms for controlling heating cooling dehumidification and air
189. Up 1 81 81 168I 801 16 168I 882 16 1 8RO0 601 8R0 002 8R0 8 0 003 8R0 8R0_004 8R0 8RO_605 8R0 ARTC RTU_ 661 ARTC RTU IRLDS_661 IRLDS RCB 601 HultiFlex CUB_661 HultiFlex CUB MFLEX ESR_661 MultiFlex ESR CL RSC661 CtrlLink RSC M 4 13B 03 CL RSC662 CtrlLink RSC i 4 13803 CL RSC663 CtrlLink RSC i 3 12801 CtriLink CD 2 87F81 CtrlLink CD 2 87F81 CtriLink CD 2 07961 CtrlLink CD 2 07961 4 00 03 Unknoun CL CD601 CL CL F2 STATUS F3 NET STATUS Figure 12 17 Network Summary Screen You can check all boards that are on eitherthe Echelon Network E2 controllers or the I O Network from the Net work Summary screen See Figure 12 17 This screen displays information such as board status name of the device type of device board controller etc firmware revision the network address for each device the number of Echelon controllers E2s that are online or offline and the number of I O boards online or offline After determin ing which board is offline turn to Appendix Trouble shooting for more information To access the Network Summary screen 1 From the Main Menu screen press Status for the Status menu 2 Press Network Summary and the Network Summary screen will be displayed The Network Summary screen can also be accessed by amp 1 From the Main Menu screen press System Configuration amp 2 Press Network Setup for the Network S
190. User Access 5 10 14 10 12 2 Creating a New User ACCOUNE ERU EE ei 10 14 10123 Deleting a User i Eas BOR DR E ee ERE pre Eee 10 14 10 13 SET UPR VO NETWORK nose ge ee ARIES ERR Pe RR EI e d d ret 10 15 10 13 T Specify Number of Boards isa e eer dee e HERD Pg rte erii 10 15 1013 2 Checking Online Status id e a a e ee RE OQ o e beng vay eb e Pe RE e ERE Se EE ets 10 16 10 14 SET UP ECHELON NETWORK To Ea E R E AREE A E E A OE EEEE O E EEA 10 16 Specifying Number of Devices s d ie eee i lesu a me Pee dte er Ree iot 10 16 10 14 2 Commissioning a Device ie eo etre o e ir e Pe ER REEF Ri tire perat 10 17 10 14 2 1 The Service Button Method eerte rre tette he e EH ea fot eti ere Reve 10 17 10 14 2 2 The Manual ID Entry Method RR nr EORR IO e e ee ee qe Rie eed e 10 19 10 15 LICENSE MANAGEMENT sis enint p Pee i rite d a rt HERE GEH ein i EG rie 10 19 I0 I5 L WebServices ias ret e D a EROR CR RITE ERR COE USE e PIG e E HR 10 20 10 16 SET UPAEARMING retirar note rne PER THREE TED Iri FH I ev e E eee e eee oun 10 21 10 16 1 Specifying Alarm Reporting Types nissin teens treten tente 10 22 10 T6 1 1 The Display tete ee eee pee 10 22 I0 16 1 2 The Alar ber ceto edet ehe edades 10 22 10 16 1
191. VIC REP 11 29 11 10 2 Functions of the Lighting Schedule Application eese eene 11 30 410 5 Control Method a eR iae d te petes e ive de hr adr dete debere n 11 30 T1 10 4 Standard Control i e eR rete t HII e ER ORE TR E ET NA LC eR Gr ERES 11 30 11 10 4 1 The Light Level Interface Cell LLEV INTERFACE nennen nennen nennen 11 30 11 10 4 2 The Schedule Interface Cell SCHEDIP e e e a e 11 31 ILi10 5 Alternate Control tr te T C Oe ANO legent dake nas 11 31 M lt Logic Combiti t 2 e e De e ee deret p date eh p e tee olere ad 11 31 11 10 5 2 Offset Solat e eerie EE REPERI E Re Fiet ECRIRE IRI RU Pie SEU ELE 11 32 1 10 6 The Basie Schedule Gell o e RM ERE RR EUR SENE UE a EET E ERE RERUA ADR Re HEUS 11 32 Slave Scheduling aere err SENI 11 32 IIL 10 7 The Min ONOFF Cell e a 11 32 FEIOS The Proof Cell eee e ata eo eti E O E e Av Een re p Re ei gettin 11 32 11 10 9 Output Light Dimming ie tcr e e eR E EIEEE esr Pe I repe er De P ERR 11 33 IL DEMAND CONTROL ettet ERR REA NOE Pete ence DANA eet tente nit 11 33 11 11 1 Introduction to Demand Limit Control eee eese esee eene tenete ennt 11 33 1 L11 2 Demand
192. X XR75CX REVERSE POLARITY OF ON RS 485 CABLE FROM E2 TO DEVICE FROM OTHER RS 485 4 ODBUS DEVICE MODBUS TERMINATION BLOCK P N 535 2711 150 OHM TERMINATE LAST DEVICE ONLY MODBUS TERMINAL BLOCK SHIELD WIRE g CONNECT TO WIRE BLACK TO PIN 18 OF DEVICE WIRE WHITE TO TO LAST DEVICE AT END OF DAISY CHAIN SIDE VIEW XR35CX XR75CX TERMINAL XR35CX XR75CX ECT MODBUS The RS485 Network and Hardware Setup 6 15 EZ 7 E2 Ethernet Peer Communications Communication between E2 controller version 2 10 or greater may now be implemented through an Ethernet net work using TCP IP protocol To utilize peer connections over Ethernet the following tasks must be performed Upgrade the E2 controller firmware to version 2 10 or greater nstall an industry standard Ethernet switch es or hub s in an area or areas nearby the E2 controllers nstall Ethernet straight through cabling at the site from each E2 to the switch or hub Installation of RJ 45 connectors may be necessary to achieve this goal The recommended cabling is CAT 5 7 1 Ethernet IP Configura tions If using an open network configuration see Section 7 4 2 Open Network Layout contact your IT Network Administrator for all IP configuration information IP Address Subnet Mask Primary and Default Gateway set tings 7 2 Hardwar
193. Y STATUS LEDs SWITCHES S3 S4 INPUT TYPE DIP 14 EDU RR SAFE SWITCHES S1 S2 BOARD STATUS LEDs 15 _ OUTPUTS Code A Code B General Status DC POWER OUTPUTS 3 at 5VDC 1 at 12VDC NETWORK STATUS LEDs 2 2 2 6 MultiFlex PAK Board The PAK is a distributed pack rack controller that controls compressors and condenser fans The PAK can control up to 8 compressor groups containing up to 16 compressors The compressor control strategy is Fixed Steps with setpoint deadband using ON and OFF delays Up to 20 Fixed Steps can be configured Table 2 8 MultiFlex RCB Hardware Overview 2 7 The PAK can control up to 4 condenser fan groups containing up to 8 total condenser fans The PAK con denser control strategy is sequential TD control with set point deadband using ON and OFF delays The PAK has a compressor condenser interlock fea ture that will override TD control and force the condenser fans to stage off using the TD control OFF delay when all compressors are off This feature can be disabled with an Enable Disable setpoint or when the discharge pressure is above a configurable setpoint The MultiFlex PAK boards consist of two circuit boards a bottom layer with 16 combination digital analog inputs and a plug in top layer which contains a combina tion of 8 relay outputs and 4 digital DC voltage outputs The analog outputs on the Multiflex PAK drive solid state relays to control the fanstages Th
194. a Hand held Terminal interface Section 2 2 4 Hand held Terminal P N 814 3110 that may be used by technicians to view the input voltage and engineering unit values for each input point without need of a voltmeter or front panel controller display Table 2 6 shows the part number of the MultiFlex 16 MultiFlex 16 16 analog digital in puts no outputs Table 2 6 MultiFlex 16 Input Board Model 810 3013 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ The MultiFlex 16 is designedwith several features that The MultiFlex combination I O boards consist of up make it easy to install wire and configure These main to 16 combination digital analog inputs and a combina user interface features are shown in Figure 2 7 tion of relay outputs digital outputs and analog outputs 2 2 2 2 MultiFlex Combination Input All boards feature both 5 and 12VDC output Output Boa rds voltage points for use in powering transducers or other input devices that require power On the RS485 Network the MultiFlex combination input output boards present themselves to Einstein E2 or REFLECS site controllers as 16AI Analog Input Boards 8RO Relay Output Boards 8DO Digital Output Boards and or 4AO Analog Output Boards depending on what type of inputs or outputs are equipped Dip switches are used to assign network ID numbers to each board type The MultiFlex combination input output boards also support a Hand held Terminal interface Section 2 2 4 Hand
195. a Termination Block P N 535 2715 to Terminate a Daisy Chain Refer to the installation guide references at the end of this section for specific device termination instructions All other E2s and Echelon devices that aren t at the end of a daisy chained network segment must be untermi nated If a router or repeater is being used in a network termi nation becomes more complicated because routers and repeaters join multiple daisy chain segments together Refer to the Router and Repeater Installation Guide P N 026 1605 for specific termination instructions TERMINATION E2 Termination NO TERMINATION Terminate Here Terminate 26513153 Figure 8 3 E2 Termination Daisy Chain 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ 8 4 1 Using a Termination Block P N 535 2715 to Terminate a Daisy Chain Some Echelon Network devices notably TD3s have no on board means of terminating For some other devices it is inconvenient to use the jumpers supplied for termination the CC 100 CS 100 case controllers for example require the enclosure to be removed to set the jumper To remedy these problems Retail Solutions supplies termination blocks that can be wired to the end of an Eche lon cable segment This termination block uses the same three pin connector as all other Echelon devices Wire the two signal wires to the outside terminals and
196. ae e ete I Cede ete Ey ree Gase de EI De Roni 11 2 6 Hardware OQY rview inae ttai eta ee a eter educere redeo ce EP ed 11 3 STANDARD CIRCUITS nee Hn YO IDE OT Dre d oo erede eom I E oT LDS Refrigeration COntYol tS eee te EN re teo Eie beet rU SER 11 3 1 Temperature Monitor 11 3 1 2 Temperature Control 11 3 1 3 Line Up ESR Defrost 11 3 1 4 Line Up MPESR Deftost 5 Dea ree e eU aee eU eR EHE Dead Roe ed den dede cuts 11 6 1I 3 2 Defrost Control sth eee erede ive aia fes R 11 3 2 1 Defrost States ee et toe ie dece dne dep Mase Lol Paden dea deb aep doe Mirae eee deb euin 11 3 2 2 Defrost Eypes re ertet esed eite ette tee tete Pet eee eee eee pee Pavo a qua aede ne 11 3 2 3 Defrost Termination 11 32 4 Emergency rre re P TETTE dade OR SERRE TREE ae 11 3 2 5 Hot Gas Defrost with ESR8 and MultiFlex ESR cccceccesscescesceseeeceeceeceeceeceaecaecsecaecaeeaeeaeeeenseeesseceececseseaes 11 7 11 3 3 Clean and Doo Switches es ed dde bid em dI 11 7 14 3 3 E Clean Switches 25st eee te ter t eee dete ded e im n en a ed dep Pe eie 11 7 11 3 3 2 Door Switches 11 3 4 Fan Control 11 3 5 The TD3 Temperature 11 3 6 The Control Link CD Case Display 11 3 7 Wiring sess 114 CASE CONTROL CIRCUITS WI SEE IU Em 11 4 2 Case Circuit Control Softwar
197. ages and other dehumidification devices 11 18 Analog and Digital Combiners Instead of using a single output source as an applica tion input you may use a combination of up to sixteen input sources To use multiple inputs a Multiple Input cell 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ must be used A Multiple Input cell is a simple application that reads data values from its inputs combines them using a user defined combination strategy and sends the combined value to the desired application input A common application for this is in HVAC control where a single heating control value might come from an average of anumber of temperature sensors throughout the building Two different types of Multiple Input cells may be used depending upon whether the inputs to be combined are analog or digital sources 11 19 TD Control 11 19 1 Overview The TD Control application controls fans sequentially based on the temperature differential TD of the con denser When an increase is called for the next fan will turn on when the time since the last fan state change is greater than the Fan On Delay Time setpoint or will turn on immediately if the last change was more than the Fan On Delay Additional fans will be staged on at Fan On Delay intervals while an increase in capacity is called for When a decrease is called for the next fan will stage off when the time since the last fan state change is greater than the Fan Off Delay Time s
198. ail safe dip switch is used to determine connection status during net work failure 9 2 1 Figure 9 8 shows how to wire the three terminal Form C contact Wiring Form C Contacts One wire of the two wire connection should always be connected to the middle terminal The second wire must be connected to the N C terminal if you want the relay to be closed ON during power failure or the N O terminal if you want the relay to be OFF during power failure RELAY IS OPEN ON POWER FAILURE RELAY IS CLOSED ON POWER FAILURE N C N O Figure 9 8 Form C Contact Wiring 9 2 2 MultiFlex Relay Outputs 9 10 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee The MultiFlex boards that have relay outputs all mod els except the MultiFlex 16 each have eight relays that energize and de energize to control output loads When setting up an output on one of these relays you must make two important decisions 1 Do you want an ON command from your control ler to mean energize the relay or de energize the relay and 2 When the relay is de energized as 1s the case when the 8RO or 8IO goes off line or loses power do you want the contacts to be OPEN or CLOSED Decision 1 is made by setting the fail safe switch This is a bank of eight switches labeled S2 on the 8RO SROe and 8RO FC S3 on the 8IO and S1 on the Multi Flex plug in output board Each switch corresponds to an output on the board switch 1 output 1 etc
199. al Current Amps 0 6 552 90 0 1 0 4 960 20 Milliamps 0 6 552 900 100 O 4 960 000 20000 Electrical Resistance Ohms 0 655 290 10 0 496 000 2000 Power Appendix E Compressed Point Log Sample Limits and Precision Table E 1 ee Watts 0 6 552 900 100 0 496 000 2000 Kilowatts 0 6 552 9 0 1 0 496 2 Energy Watt Hours 0 131 058 000 2000 0 9 920 000 40000 Kilowatt Hours 0 131 058 2 0 9 920 40 Parts Per Million Parts Per Million 0 32 764 5 0 5 0 2 480 10 Percentage Percentage 0 200 0 00305208 0 124 0 5 Revolutions Per Minute Revolutions Per Minute 0 65 529 1 0 2 480 10 RPM Change Rate Revolutions Per Minute Per Minute 0 6 552 9 0 1 0 4 960 20 Time Milliseconds 0 65 529 1 0 248 1 Seconds 0 65 529 1 0 248 1 Minutes 0 65 529 1 0 248 1 Hours 0 6 552 9 0 1 0 248 1 Days 0 6 552 9 0 1 0 248 1 Months 0 6 552 9 0 1 0 248 1 Years 0 6 552 9 0 1 0 248 1 Time seconds display 0 65 529 1 0 248 1 Time minutes display 0 6 552 9 0 1 0 248 1 Time hours display 0 6 552 9 0 1 0 248 1 Volume Liters 0 248 056 3 78544 0 9 387 894 37 8544 Gallons 0 65 529 1 0 2 480 10 Cubic Meters 0 1 855 57 0 0283168 0 70 2258 0 283168 Cubit Feet 0 65 529 1 0 2 480 10 REU CCF 0 65 529 1 0 248 1 Volume Change Rate liquid Liters Per Second 0 65 529 0 001 0 7 82319 0 03
200. al HVAC unit by providing the temperature setpoints that will be used in Temperature Control Zones are also responsible for ordering HVAC units to dehumidify and determining when outside air conditions are favorable to economize 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ 11 7 2 How Zones Work A Zone is built by first creating a Zone application in the E2 BX Then all HVAC unit applications that will be a part of the Zone must be connected with the Zone applica tion This connection process is known as association When a rooftop unit or AHU is associated with a Zone the E2 automatically makes a series of I O connections between the Zone application and the individual MultiFlex RTU or AHU application From that point on the Zone is responsible for passing along the following information to the individual unit The heating and cooling setpoints it will use during occupied and unoccupied building times A command to operate in either occupied or unoccupied mode based on the Zone appli cation s own time schedule input Outdoor air and outdoor relative humidity values A signal to enable or disable economization based on the Zone application s own econo mization checking method A signal to begin or end dehumidification based on the Zone application s own humid ity reading and dehumidification setpoint A signal indicating the current season is either SUMMER or WINTER The combined Zone Temperature and Zone
201. al See Table 9 1 on page 9 3 VS Inverter Alarm Digital See Table 9 1 on page 9 3 Enthalpy Switch Digital See Table 9 1 on Indoor and or Out page 9 3 door Dewpoint Probe for Dewpoint See Table 9 1 on Economization page 9 3 Mixed Air Temp ana4 Temperature See Table 9 1 on log economizers only page 9 3 Table 11 9 Suction Group Inputs Output Device Wire 8RO Set Fail safe Dip contacts to Switch to Heat Cool Staged see note see note Outputs 7 see note see note LOW HIGH and fan contactor Two Speed Fans Table 11 10 Suction Group Outputs 11 7 Zone Control 11 7 1 An HVAC Zone is a collection of up to sixteen rooftop units or air handling units that work together to maintain the same temperature and humidity throughout a particular Overview 11 24 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual Set up any stages you wart ON when the controller is off line as N C Stages you want OFF should be set as N O If one or more heat or cool stages will be ON wire fan N C so it will be active during controller off line times Otherwise wire N O If any heat orcool stages are configured to be ON N C set the wiring and the switch to N C and set either the LOW or HIGH stage output to N C whichever speed you want active If no heat or cool will be active set LOW HIGH and the fan contac tor to N O volume of space The primary function of an HVAC Zone is to manage the operation of each individu
202. al modem interface RS232 Plug In for ote that the RS232 and RS485 ports are counted as one port COM6 only one connector at a time may be used he COM6 RS232 will be selectable in future versions Table 4 1 Modem Com Card Part Numbers and Descriptions 4 3 3 Plug In Modem Card P N 537 4870 with mounting screws P N 101 4038 and standoffs P N 107 9440 Previous Generation Pro cessor Board The E2 s internal modem mounts in the PC 104 slot located at the top leftedge of the E2 main processor board See Figure 3 18 on page 3 6 Disconnect power to the unit and carefully plug the male pins on the back of the modem card into the E2 s PC 104 slot Use the standoffs and screws supplied with the modem card to secure the card to the main processor board as shown in Figure 3 18 on page 3 6 When finished restore power to the E2 4 3 4 Plug in Digital I O Network Card P N 537 4880 This card adds two user programmable digital outputs and two digital inputs to enable connection of switches and relays relay contacts are rated at 3A up to 24 VAC The plug in Digital I O Network card connects to the power interface board to the right of the two fixed RS485 I O Network connectors 4 4 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee E2 Power Interface Board input and Output Wiring NORMALLY OPEN ergo NORMALLY CLOSED _ tt Cos E2 Plug In Digital VO Network Card
203. all local NEC and UL wiring practices Power is supplied to the CC 100 via the output cable harness DEFROST HOT DEFROST HOT DEFROST HOT DEFROST OUT DEFROST OUT DEFROST OUT ANTI SWEAT HOT ANTI SWEAT OUT FANS HOT FANS OUT NC or NO LIGHTS HOT LIGHTS OUT NC or NO HOT LINE NEUTRAL 9099eoo399o OUTPUT CABLE EARTH GROUND Ng ge 26513067 Figure 9 15 Case Controller and Defrost Power Module Wiring Schematic 9 3 3 Valve Cable The six pin connector on the right hand side of the CC 100 is where the liquid stepper or suction stepper must be connected The CC 100 uses this connection to control the stepper motors and change the position of the valve aperture All valve cable harnesses have a six pin male connec tor that plugs into the CC 100 s VALVE port Plug this connector in so that the tab on the top of the connector is facing up For instructions on connecting the valve cable to the pulse or stepper valve refer to the instructions below for Input and Output Setup 9 15 the appropriate cable type P N 335 3263 Pulse Valve Figure 9 16 shows the connections for pulse valve 1 and pulse valve 2 The pulse valve 2 leads BLACK GREEN may be clipped if a second evaporator is not present on the case CASE CONTROLLER 4156 11213 PINOUT FOR 100 VALVE RECEPTACLE 26513115
204. and CX Only The MultiFlex Rooftop Control Board RCB P N 810 3062 is a rooftop HVAC control board for use either as a stand alone controller or in zone control appli cations using a Retail Solutions E2 BX building control system The MultiFlex RCB is capable of controlling heat and cool stages fans humidification and dehumidification devices economizers using on board I O and control algo rithms as well as monitor and interact with other building control systems and peripherak such as smoke alarms and CO2 sensors I O Network Boards and Peripherals The RCB is an improved version of the MultiFlex RTU The RCB has sixteen fully configurable analog and digital input points whereas the RTU has only eight inputs two of which are configurable The RCB has four analog outputs for use in controlling variable speed fans economizers or modulating heating and or cooling valves whereas the RTU has only two analog outputs for use only with VS fans and economizers The RCB also features a more sophisticated HHT interface and updated algorithms for controlling heating cooling dehumidification and air quality The MultiFlex RCB has its own installation and opera tion manual P N 026 1707 26501126 LEGEND INPUT OWER RS485 TERMINATION 24VAC JUMPERS RS485 I O NETWORK EAE HAND 4 HELD TERMI 3 RCB INPUTS 1 8 11 RELAY OUTPUT CON NECTORS RCB INPUTS 9 16 12 RELAY OUTPUT FUSES oaa ud 250V slow NETWORK D IIPD RELA
205. and not visible Logical Combination Strategies There are several different strategies for combining 11 10 4 Standard Control the light level ON OFF state with the value of the Standard control comprises Light Level Interface and EN Schedule Interface strategies Logic Only The cell will read only the LOGIC IN input and ignore the light level 11 10 4 1 The Light Level Interface Cell reading LLEV INTERFACE LLEV Only The cell will read only the light The Light Level Interface cell of the LightingSchedule level sensor and ignore the value of the application translates the value of the light level sensor LOGIC IN input into an ON or OFF command by comparing the analog Both ON Both OFF From an output OFF 11 30 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ state when both the light level state and the LOGIC IN input are ON the resulting output command will be ON The output command will remain ON until both the light level state and the LOGIC IN input turn OFF Both ON LLEV OFF Like the Both ON Both OFF strategy except only the light level state must turn OFF in order to turn the output from ON to OFF LLEV ON Both OFF Like the Both ON Both OFF strategy except only the light level state must turn ON in order to turn the output from OFF to ON Both ON Any OFF Like the Both ON Both OFF strategy except any of the two states that turn from ON to OFF will result in the o
206. aram eter is the default value the analog input wouldreport if a short is detected on the sensor input connec tion A short could be the result of a damaged wire or a sensor failure Default Other The value placed in Default Other is the value reported if the input is not updated after a certain amount of time If there is a failure that will not allow the input board to report the value of the sensor the value placed in this parameter will be reported Sensor Offset If a sensor needs a numeric value added or subtracted to the calculated value enter the number here The value can be positive or negative Sensors sometimes have to have offsets The offset that you enter in this field is in the units you selected in the Eng Units field NOT in millivolts Output This field displays the link between the input and the application s they feed into You do not need to enter anything in this field You will be able to link applications to this point during the application setup process 9 1 3 4 Setting Up Digital Inputs Open the Digital Input screen by selecting a Digital D input from the Input Status screen Figure 9 4 and pressing SETUP Set up digital inputs in order to assign digital input The 16AI 8IO and MultiFlex Inputs 01 01 02 RX 300 Unit 1 18 15 19 DIGITAL INPUT Poit ame Board Point 1 Select Eng Units ON OFF Default Value 1 OFF Push Button Mode No Physical Active State 3 CLOSED
207. arches the user records for the username and password If found the E2 will log the user in at the access level chosen for the user in the user records The access level determines how many of the E2 s fea tures the user may use The E2 uses four access levels one being the lowest and four being the highest Table 10 7 gives a description of each level and the capabilities they have access to Read only access Users may generally only view status screens setpoints and some system settings Level 2 Setpoint and bypass access Users may perform all the tasks a level 1 user may plus they may change control setpoints and bypass some devices Level 3 Configuration and override access Users may perform all the tasks a level 2 user may plus they may override system set tings create new cells and program new applications Level 4 System Administrator access All E2 func tions are accessible by a level 4 user Table 10 7 User Access Levels Quick Start 10 13 10 12 1 Changing Required User Access Levels The Level Required For table in this screen is used to customize what access level is required to perform certain actions within the E2 unit There are four rows in this table each of which corresponds to a different type of E2 function or application Refrigeration Control This category includes changes or actions involving refrigeration applica tions specific to RX controllers Suction Groups Conde
208. are based on a single universal hardware plat form The board design uses flash uploadable firmware and plug in expansion boards to configure the base plat form board and apply it for use as an input board relay output board analog output board or a combination I O board 2 4 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee 2 2 21 MultiFlex 16 Input Board in ij i E LIE 3 Address and Baud Rate Dip Switch Input Dip Switches Input Connections 16 Transducer Power Out General Status LED AC Input Power Connection Termination Resistance Jumpers three Network Connection I O Net Tx and Rx LEDS Hand Held Terminal Port Figure 2 7 MultiFlex 16 Input Board The MultiFlex 16 input board offers sixteen combina tion analog digital input points for use by Retail Solutions E2 Einstein and REFLECS control systems The Multi Flex 16 may be used in retrofits with no additional hard ware or software setup or upgrades The MultiFlex 16 is designed to be 10096 compatible with the previous generation of Retail Solutions input boards the 16AT communicates with the site controller via an RS485 connection to a REFLECS COM A amp D Net work or an E2 I O Network Dip switches on the board set the network ID board number and baud rate The board also provides both 5 and 12VDC output voltage points for use in powering transducers or other input devices that require power The MultiFlex 16 has
209. as eight outputs which may pulse up to 150mA at 12VDC Since the 8DO is primarily designed to control anti sweat heaters the 8DO is the heart of Retail Solutions Pulse Modulated Anti Sweat Control PMAC II panel The PMAC II P N 851 1000 provides 16 channels of anti sweat control circuitry The PMAC II panel combines the 8DO with high capacity relays in a single enclosure providing 256 total amps of anti sweat heater operation The 8DO is shown in Figure 2 15 The PMAC II is shown in Figure 2 16 AC Input Power Connection Network Address Rotary Dials LED Power Indicator Fail Safe Dip Switch Network Connection LED Output Indicators Terminating Resistance Jumpers Digital Output Connections 26501042 Figure 2 15 8DO Digital Output Board Figure 2 16 PMAC II Anti Sweat Control Panel 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 2 3 Echelon Network Boards and Peripherals The 16Ale Discontinued 2 3 1 Echelon In Inputs 1 8 Echelon Out Status LED Power Network LED Node ID 10 Service Button Inputs 9 16 11 Service LED Voltage Outputs 26501112 Figure 2 17 16Ale The 16AIe P N 810 4000 is an Echelon based input board similar in function to its I O Network counterpart the MultiFlex 16 see Section 2 2 2 The 16AlIe receives input signals through any of 16 two wire connections The board receives either digital or analog data from sensors wired to any
210. ase based on the setpoint s supplied to them by their associated E2s Setup of a case controlled refrigerated case system is a two fold process 1 For each case circuit in the refrigeration system separate Case Control Circuit application is cre ated with its own set of control parameters 2 Each CC 100 CS 100 EC 2 and CCB is associ ated with a Case Control Circuit application in the E2 Association creates a network link between the case controller and the application which supplies the information necessary to con trol temperature defrost lights fans and anti sweat heaters This section of the manual covers both the program ming of a Case Circuit Control application and the process of associating a CC 100 CS 100 EC 2 or CCB with a Case Circuit Control application 11 10 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual one ESR8 point N C p N C up Wire solenoid to remain energized OPEN during comm loss N O down Defrost heaters electric and hot gas will remain de energized CLOSED during comm loss The liquid line solenoid will remain de energized CLOSED during comm loss The evaporator stepper regulator valve should be plugged in to a point on the ESR8 board 11 4 2 CaseCircuit Control Soft ware Overview There are six different versions of case control soft ware in the Retail Solutions case control family e CC I00P This version controls temperature in a case using a pulse modulated valve whi
211. at Setpoint is placed in such a way as to put the setpoint right in the middle of the throttling range as shown in Figure D 3 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ THROTTLING OUTPUT AT RAN SETPOINT shown here as 50 0 100 CONTROL INPUT 26512028 Figure D 4 Centered Setpoint PID Control Output Setpoint 50 Therefore as the input value gradually drops below the setpoint the Proportional Mode of PID will gradually bring the output percentage down When the input drops below the low end of the throttling range the output will be zero The opposite happens with the input value begins to rise above the setpoint The output percentage is gradually brought up from 50 until when the input is at or above the throttling range Proportional Mode will bring the out put to 100 Output at Setpoint for Condenser HVAC PID Control For Condenser and HVAC PID Control the Output at Setpoint defaults to 0 This places the 0 end of the Throttling Range at the setpoint value and it generally means Proportional Mode will strive to pull the input back down below the setpoint and attain a 0 output percent age As the input climbs from the setpoint to the top of the Throttling Range Proportional Mode likewise increases the output percentage to 100 THROTTLING RANGE OUTPUT AT SETPOINT shown here as 0 100 CONTROL INPUT 26512028 Figure D 5 End Setpoint PID Control Output Setpoint 0
212. ation 3 11 mounting 3 11 wiring to input board 9 4 liquid level mounting 3 11 liquid level probe wiring to input board 9 5 offsets 9 9 outside temperature 3 8 location 3 8 mounting 3 8 power connections on input boards for 9 2 pressure transducers Eclipse wiring to input board 9 3 Eclipse voltage to pressure chart B mounting 3 7 refrigeration probes and sensors 3 9 location 3 9 mounting 3 9 relative humidity wiring to input board 9 3 sail switches wiring to input board 9 3 supply and return air mounting 3 8 temperature temp to resistance chart B wiring to input board 9 3 Wiring To 16AT 8IO Input Points 9 7 Separate Setpoints 71 23 configuration 11 52 Serial Configuration 5 Serial Connection Manager 5 Serial Tab 5 Service Button 0 17 CC 100 10 18 Setpoints separate 71 23 Setpoints entering 70 26 Setting Number of Applications 0 3 Setting the Time and Date 70 9 Setup Screen 72 5 Setup Screen Configuration 10 26 Setup Screens 0 7 Single Enclosure Mounting For I O Boards 3 3 Snap track Installation For I O Boards 3 4 SNTP Support 0 9 Software Applications 71 1 Software Licensing 7 10 19 Software Overview Demand Control Demand Monitoring 11 33 Specify Number of Boards 70 15 Split Mode 71 4 Standard Circuits 1 9 defrost 11 6 electric defrost 71 6 hot gas 11 6 reversed cycle hot gas 71 6 states 11 6 termination 71 7 timed and reverse air 6 types 11 6 emergency defrost 71 7 fan control
213. ation Control A Standard Circuit application may apply one of four different control methods to a case circuit the Tempera ture Monitor method the Temperature Control method Software Overview 11 5 and the Line Up ESR Defrost method and the Lineup MFESR Defrost method 11 3 1 1 Temperature Monitor The Temperature Monitor method does not control case temperature The application will read and record case temperature inputs but it will not make any attempt to control temperature The application will still initiate and control defrost cycle fans and perform other neces sary functions 11 3 1 2 Temperature Control A Standard Circuit application using the Temperature Control method will pulse the refrigeration liquid line solenoid OPEN and CLOSED so as to control the case temperature to the user defined setpoint The application monitors up to six different temperature sensors in the cir cuit and combines them into a single value that is com pared to the setpoint 11 3 1 3 Line Up ESR Defrost In Line Up ESR circuit temperature is controlled by an electronic evaporator pressure regulator EEPR The EEPR is controlled by a PID algorithm that steps the valve open from 0 to 100 based on how far away the circuit temperature is from the setpoint This strategy requires the use of the Echelon based ESRS stepper regulator output board which has been dis continued and replaced by the I O Network based Multi Flex E
214. ation Expansion Card New Processor Board eene 4 3 4 3 3 Plug In Modem Card P N 537 4870 with mounting screws P N 101 4038 and standoffs P N 107 9440 Previous Generation Processor Board eene 4 4 4 3 4 Plug In Digital I O Network Card P N 53 7 4880 nennen 4 4 LEDS eroe ger Ped deve ed 4 4 4 3 5 E2Z RS485 Port Card P N 537 4890 1 is Era diee dde edt et e tesa dia ease eie ees 4 4 4 3 5 l te tei ate e xe ede red E eae RR RUN D e e sw epit eben ees aa 4 4 4 3 6 Plug In Four Channel Internal Repeater eese essent teen nenne ene tenentes nennen en 4 5 4 4 BATTERY TESTING AND REPLACEMENT tenerte nennen nennen nente nenne enne 4 5 44 1 Eow Battery Notific tion uci ER eee ee EE ie epe te HE o nro covey gute NER ese ae cep pages 4 5 44 2 The Battery Enable Switch ue eR ERROR ERE Rer EUER Mec per E a eod ipee 4 5 4 4 3 Battery Test ies RU da atate ida NEIN Qe 4 5 4 4 4 Battery Replacement Qualified Technicians Only eese esee eene nennen netten nere nennen 4 5 5 SERIAL CONFIGURATION vi sscsssccssissecoscsosssesenssovscesssesesasecsscavevsseescesectessevesseasasconssshsoussosveasosesecssexsosedescsesssesenseutese 5 1 Sl OVERVIEW trie Eni vM toe vo e dece eed ced
215. ation waits for a user specific amount of time to elapse before turning on the defrost heat This allows refrigerant in the evaporator to be evacuated before defrost heat 1s activated The compressor s remain ON during Pump Down Pump Down times may only be used for hot gas and electric type defrosts 2 Defrost During the defrost phase refrigeration is disabled If using electric defrost heaters will be ON If using hot gas heated refrigerant will be pumped through the coil This phase will con tinue until the defrost is terminated see Section 11 3 2 3 for information on how defrost is termi nated 3 Run Off After defrost heat is deactivated the application waits for the Run Off time to pass before re entering refrigeration mode This allows melted frost on the evaporator to drain from the coil so that it will not re freeze when refrigeration begins again After the user speci fied Run Off time has passed the defrost cycle has ended Run Off times may only be programmed for hot gas and electric type defrosts 11 4 4 2 Defrost Types There are many different ways used to defrost a refrig erated case A case controller is capable of using three dif ferent types of defrost Off Cycle Timed Off Cycle defrost also known as Timed defrost is simply a period of time during which refrigeration is sus pended No heat is applied to the evaporator The applica tion simply turns refrigerant flow OFF for the duration of
216. ature Control uses PID control to operate the valve and keep the case temperature input value equal to the case temperature setpoint Recovery Mode Recovery Mode for suction side case controllers is slightly different than Recovery Mode for liquid side controllers Suction side case controllers enter Recovery Mode only after a defrost or cleaning cycle and it does so in order to bring the case temperature down to a level that is controllable by Temperature Control During Recovery Mode the valve is opened to a fixed percentage until the case temperature falls below the case setpoint When this occurs the case controller exits Recovery Mode and begins normal Temperature Con trol 11 4 4 Defrost Control The physical aspects of defrost control such as shut ting off valves and turning on defrost heat sources is han dled by the case controller When operating on its own a case controller initiates defrost cycles at programmed time intervals When connected to a Case Circuit application the case controllers defrost times are coordinated and scheduled by the E2 11 12 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee 11 4 4 1 Defrost States The defrost cycle for a Case Circuit application con sists of three steps Of these three steps 1 and 3 apply only to cases with heated defrosts 1 Pump Down The defrost cycle begins with this step immediately after the refrigeration solenoid is turned OFF During the Pump Down phase the applic
217. aus tb Nr eR DR E RE ee CHER OE C RS 11 48 11 20 3 Outputs iet eae DERE RR DN REO AOI n p eerte DR 11 48 11 20 4 Accumulator Reset Types sse e dee adh ae te ditate e d re A hes d e i bees 11 49 1520 9 PEE 11 49 11 20 60 High Trip edu eA e cete eee e ore Lech Ue ERE EUN HE Ee N E EE EEPEO 11 49 TEST IRRIGATION CONTROL a E e o EE ORO NE Bui nds E ee e ennai 11 49 IPIE Overview 11 49 11521 27 Zones AN CYCLO Sars ses is e no e GERI E a desea 11 49 T 21 2 le Cycle Control Types si cen EROR DPI ERE EUREN GERNE pia NRI E 11 50 13 21 2 2 Timed e ente eed bee iae ade Da HU e EO EE Pede diee 1 21 2 3 Volume ccrte tirer rece re e egere ee a Ier opti itu vote grae et ete esee 1 23 CyclesScheduling iier re i e t ER De rte e br pe ea a etae Re LE ZEA LOWE Inhibitusdg ieu ose e Neb e P tete a edere Dime soca itis eee edet i ede te pat ee ele Pe ope EO P 11 21 4 2 Volume see 11 21 4 3 Rain 11 21 4 4 Freeze Lockout s site vns n S WE I E a 1 EERE E MP EA 11 21 97 Zone Bypass Me pii etie cepe e natin ve E eene sd IDEAE NB LOCCCRICIIECIUCENERRCEE RR 11 51 1 214 FLOW SensorsRelated T sts 4 e teen ehe i ee RUST eite eee on etn anoo te eere e UNA 11 51 617
218. b Temp Low Limit Exceeded a combined temperature of an entire Standard Cir cuit or Case Control Circuit has fallen below its pro grammed low temperature setpoint Communication Port 1 Is Down 50 Commission of Echelon controller failed binding o NV was not successful Check the Echelon network 20 E2 cannot communicate with the RS232 port on the E2 main board The E2 main board likely needs repair or replacement 20 E2 cannot communicate with the RS485 network on the E2 main board The E2 main board likely needs repair or replacement Communication Port 3 Is Down a cannot communicate with the modem slot on the 50 Communication Port 2 Is Down E2 The E2 main board likely needs repair or replace Communication Port 4 Is Down 15 used by service personnel to ware used in test or debug functions This alarm indi cates the port that allows E2 to communicate with these devices is faulty The E2 board likely needs repair or replacement Communication Port 6 1s down Completed Firmware Update 50 Ihe E2 s firmware was successfully updated 1 I5 difference between configuration templates in a previous E2 version and templates in the current version configuration data could not be restored Config Loss CRC Error uH to an internal error E2 has lost configuration data 15 Due to an internal error E2 has lost configuration INE NENNEN Config Not Saved To Flas 20 E2 could not save configuration data to flash
219. ble position analog economizer damper based on the outside air conditions 11 6 2 Temperature Control In its most basic form Temperature Control simply reads a control input value compares it to the active tem perature setpoint and activates or deactivates heating or cooling stages in an effort to satisfy the setpoint The majority of user setup that must be done in Temperature Control involves specifying which input is to be used as 11 20 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual the control source defining different setpoints for use in occupied unoccupied summer and winter modes and setting up the operating characteristics of the heating and cooling stages 11 6 3 Alternate Setpoints For both the heating and cooling setpoints you may choose to use different setpoints during occupied or unoc cupied building times and different setpoints for summer and winter seasons In other words AHU Control may have four different pairs of heating and cooling setpoints as shown in Table 11 8 SUMMER COOL OCC SUMMER HEAT OCC SUMMER COOL UOC SUMMER HEAT UOC WINTER COOL OCC WINTER HEAT OCC WINTER COOL UOC WINTER HEAT UOC Table 11 8 Possible Heating Cooling Setpoints AHU Control looks at the E2 s Global Data parameters to determine whether it should run in summer or winter mode Refer to Section 10 17 Set Up Global Data for information on how to set up summer winter control parameters The AHU chooses occupied or unoccu
220. board just above the Power Interface Board PIB connector The connector for the plug in Echelon card is labeled Echelon Plug In so it is easy to find minis Screw ECHELON FTT 10A 50051R CI BE 710018 wp Ly eu Figure 4 5 Echelon Card 4 3 2 Modem Communication Add On E2 Peripherals Expansion Card New Processor Board The E2 s modem communication expansion card mounts above the PIB in the back of the enclosure box as shown in Figure 4 6 See Table 4 1 for modem expansion card types and descriptions LAYOUT Ribbon Cable Modem Active Jumper RX and TX LEDs for RS 485 Port Phone Line Connector HE Termination Jumpers Modem Online Plug in Modem LED MOUNTING Expansion Card E2 Ribbon Ribbon Connector Cable Connector Expansion Card Mounting Figure 4 6 Modem Com Expansion Card Layout and Mounting E2 Hardware Setup 4 3 Modem PN 637 4871 odem com expansion card with modem and RS485 Berial communication port plug in ote that the RS232 and RS485 ports are counted as one port COM6 only one connector at a time may be used he COM6 RS232 will be selectable in future versions odem com expansion card with an RS232 plug in COM2 that can interface with an external modem and RS485 serial communication port plug in This model omes with a cable that has a male DB 9 header and a DB 9 to DB 25 converter not shown to support the standard extern
221. capacity of the compressor to maintain the Chilled Supply Temperature setpoint All other compressor con trol modules will be turned ON or OFF based on the rota tion sequence defined above Based on this strategy the digital scroll compressor will have the fewest cycle counts and the most runtime of all the compressors in the system 11 23 4 2 Variable Frequency Drive Com pressor MCC can utilize one compressor with a variable fre quency drive The method of control will be similar to the digital compressor strategy The application will continue to allow only one variable capacity device to be defined in the system making the Variable Frequency Drive and Dig ital compressor options mutually exclusive If a Variable Frequency Drive compressor is to be used and it is a Control Techniques drive using the Modbus communication interface the Control Techniques Drive association menu will support associating the drive to an MCC 11 23 4 3 Unequal Capacity Compressors Optionally the MCC can support different capacity compressors When this option is selected the capacity of each defined compressor will be user specified The con troller will evaluate the capacities of all the compressors to determine the appropriate compressor to switch on or off in order to maintain the Supply Temperature at setpoint When unequal capacity compressors are defined the controller will not use a simple round robin approach to switching compressors on
222. ccur within a E2 may be reported to the header display at the top of the screen When an alarm is reported to the display the word ALARM flashes underneath the time at the top of the screen as shown in the example below 68 61 65 CX 366 Unit 1 Device Summary 11 15 16 ALARM Press Log In Out to Log On Figure 10 42 E2 RX Display Header 2 The Advisory Output Each E2 has a single digital output that reacts to alarm reports When an alarm is reported to this output the out put turns ON and remains on until the alarm condition has returned to normal 3 Dial Out Alarms may be sent to remote alarm receivers via the modem defined for the controller Possible dial out devices include a PC running UltraSite a printer a fax machine and a digital pager 4 The LonWorks Network The Alarm Annunciator If multiple E2s exist on a network you may choose to send alarms across the LonWorks Network so that they may be picked up by the Alarm Annunciator Refer to Section 10 16 2 for information on how an Alarm Annunciator works Quick Start 10 23 10 17 Set Up Global Data RX 466 Unit 3 CO MORE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Outputs COMMAND OUT Alarm When On Input Definitions Output Definitions System Information VALUE ALG STATUS Remote Communications Alarm Setup Logging Setup Network Setup EEGlobal Data Licensing Figure 10 43 System Configuration Menu In a
223. ce the output voltage specified in the High End Point field PRIORITY OVR When an input is overridden to an output cell If this input is not set to NONE it will be used for the output value instead of the input value but only for the override timeout period Priority Override Timeout When an input goes on it will override to a value for the timeout period INPUT This field links the output to an application You do not need to enter anything in this field You will be able to link applications to this point during the application setup process 9 14 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 9 3 lers 9 3 1 The input connections to the CC 100 are made on the left hand side of the controller Figure 9 13 shows the CC 100 input connections CC 100 Case Control Inputs HAND TEMP SENSORS HELD AIN TERMINAL Aa JACK AUXILIARY INPUT DETAIL A A 26502035 Figure 9 13 Temperature Auxiliary and HHT Inputs Temperature and Digital Sensors The six two pin Molex connectors on the left hand side of the unit numbered 1 through 6 are where the case s temperature probes coil inlet coil outlet sensors and other digital switches and contacts are connected CPC temperature sensor leads are equipped with male connectors that plug in to these receptacles For digital switches and sensors such as dual temp and clean switches CPC supplies a digital output harness P N 335 3264 that consists of a c
224. ch is pulsed ON for a percentage of a fixed amount of time to achieve the necessary refrigerant flow e CC I00LS This version controls temperature in a case using a liquid side stepper valve This valve is capable of various positions in between 0 and 100 As a result the CC 100 is capable of supply ing the exact refrigerant flow necessary to achieve the case setpoint CC I00H This version controls temperature in a case using a suction side evaporator pressure regu lator EEPR This valve is capable of various posi tions in between 0 and 100 As a result the CC 100 is capable of providing the exact suction pres sure necessary to achieve the case setpoint CS 100 This controller uses suction side evapora tor suction regulators ESRs to control suction pressure for an entire circuit Unlike the CC 100 which controls only one case the CS 100 controls all cases on an entire circuit EC 2s The EC 2 is a liquid side pulse valve case controller that doubles as a case temperature and information display Unlike the CC 100 it 1s designed to be mounted on the front of the cag and has a push button front panel interface for program 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ ming and viewing status The EC 2 29x version controls the refrigeration solenoid valve to allow the passage of refrigerant to the TXV valve whereas the 39x version controls a pulse valve on the liquid side of the evaporator to regulate super
225. closed 0 and fully open 100 Stepper valves usually have hundreds or thousands of steps in between fully closed and fully open To achieve the desired opening percentage the CC 100 moves the valve the required number of steps To properly control a stepper valve the CC 100 must know the operating characteristics of the valve such as its maximum steps per second change rate the total number of steps between 0 and 100 and its hysteresis rate the number of steps required for the valve to change direc tion Case Control Circuits 11 4 3 Refrigeration Control 11 4 3 1 5 Liquid Pulse and Liquid Stepper In CC 100P CC 100LS EC2 and CCB liquid and pulse stepper case controllers there are two different con trol systems that work together to regulate refrigeration temperature control and superheat control Temperature Control Temperature Control measures the case temperature and turns refrigeration ON or OFF as required to keep the case within a certain proximity of the user specified tem perature setpoint The user supplies Temperature Control with the set point and a deadband which is the range of case tempera tures equally above and below the setpoint within which the case temperature will be considered acceptable When the case temperature is above the setpoint plus one half the deadband refrigeration will be turned ON It will remain ON until the temperature drops to below the temperature
226. compressor cycling seems too fre quent after 24 hours of operation you may reduce com pressor cycling by changing the Control Cycles parameter 11 23 3 The Control Cycles Parame ter The MCC has one parameter with five preset settings to allow users to alter temperature control performance or compressor cycling frequency The default setting Mod erate Control seeks to balance good temperature control with efficient cycling If tighter control is needed setting the field to Tight Control or Tightest Control will increase the application s reaction to temperature changes resulting in tighter control usually at the expense of more frequent cycling If fewer compressor cycles are desired setting the field to Less Cycling or Least Cycling will decrease the number of cycles but also increase the amount of fluctuation in the temperature control Modular Chiller Control MCC Chilled Valve Water Return 11 23 4 Compressor Control MCC can utilize up to 32 compressors for maintaining the chilled supply temperature at a user specified setpoint This is accomplished by either turning on or off any of the compressors defined in the application As Supply Tem perature rises above setpoint compressors will be turned ON As Supply Temperature falls below setpoint com pressors will be turned OFF The Chilled Supply Tempera ture sensor should be located very close to the Compressor Control Unit so no minima
227. connect the shield to the middle terminal see Figure 8 4 cvs NOTE The recommended termination proce 4 dure for all Echelon devices is the termination block Shield Wire TO LAST DEVICE AT END OF DAISY CHAIN 26501113 Figure 8 4 Placement and Wiring of the Termination Block 8 5 Wire Restrictions Maximum Total Segment Length The total amount of wire used to connect all E2s and associated controllers in a single segment not including devices on the other side of routers cannot be longer than 4592 feet 1400 meters If the total length of cable used is longer than 4592 feet a repeater or router will be required Routers act as communication gateways that reduce the amount of network traffic They are used when net works exceed their 63 node limit Adding a router allows you to add another daisy chain segment of 4592 feet with Wire Restrictions a maximum of 63 more nodes Repeaters boost signal strength and are only used in instances where a segment of 63 nodes or less uses more than 4592 feet of Echelon cable Refer to the Router and Repeater Installation Guide P N 026 1605 for information about router and repeater placement 8 6 Installing Echelon Devices The E2 control system has several types of peripheral control boards that communicate using the Echelon Net work the 16AIe analog input board the 8ROe relay out put board the CC 100 CS 100
228. cription Select action ES Defrost Emergency Defrost Clean End Manual Mode Press BACK Use Up Down Arrow keys or function keys to select entry F1 SELECT F3 BEGINNING Figure 12 15 Option List Selection Screen 5 Press ZB LOOK UP The Option List Selection screen see Figure 12 15 will give you five choices of defrost modes No Action Normal no manual defrost state Defrost This is the normal defrost mode The defrost ends according to the terminating device sensor or fail safe time whichever occurs first Emergency Defrost The defrost time goes the full duration of programmed defrost time and ignores any defrost termination sensors Overrides Clean This mode disables all refrigeration and defrost so that the case can be cleaned or serviced NOTE If the case circuit has been placed in 5 Clean Mode it must be taken out of Clean Mode Follow the procedures up to the Option List menu and choose End Manual Mode End Manual Mode Selecting this command will end any defrost cycle or the Clean Mode initiated manually If the defrost time needed is shorter than what the nor mal programmed defrost time allows or if in Clean Mode follow the procedures to the Option List menu and select End Manual Mode 12 7 Overrides If a compressor stage or a fan on the condenser needs to be bypassed follow these instructions 1 From the default Home screen arrow to ei
229. ct GREEN signal wire to even numbered terminal RED EM TO 12V ON BOARD TERMINAL TERMINAL 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 Input Type Dip Switch 207 1000 Refrigel BLACK GND Deve Trans Wire BLACK ground ducer Hansen aucem CREEN SIGNAL Probe sensor terminal to odd numbered board ter minal y Wire GREEN signal TO ODD TO EVEN wire from SIGNAL TERMINAL TERMINAL sensor terminal to even numbered board terminal lt Wire RED power wire TO 12VDC from POWER sen ON BOARD sor terminal to 12VDC terminal on board RED POWER 203 1902 Dewpo int Probe Connect the WHITE and GREEN wires to ACI and AC2 power terminals Connect BLACK ground wire to odd numbered board termi nal Connect RED signal wire to even numbered board terminal To AC1 To AC2 on Input Bd V W on Input Bd VV Toodd Toeven terminal terminal Table 9 1 Sensor Wiring The 16AI 8IO and MultiFlex Inputs Input and Output Setup 9 5 Input Type Dip Switch 550 2500 550 2550 KW Transducer Down for 4 20mA Up for Pulse 4 20 mA output to input board Wire positive transducer terminal to positive 24VDC supply DC VOLTAGE SUPPLY 250 ohm resistor Wire negative transducer termi nal to odd numbered input termi nal Wire negative 24VDC supply to even numbe
230. cts In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures This covers Einstein family product types RX Refrigeration Controller 830 xxxx BX Building HVAC Controller 831 xxxx and all ver sion models 300 400 500 AIL E2 family product types RX Refrigeration Controller 834 xxxx BX Building HVAC Controller 835 xxxx CX Convenience Store Controller 836 xxxx and all version models 300 400 500 Table of Contents L INTRODUCTION po P 1 1 1 1 THE E2 REFRIGERATION CONTROLLER ete iro eee He Rie ect PE RR re PED EUER 1 1 1 2 THE E2 BUILDING CONTROLLER mt ter ote xe Rettore E E E E E E 1 2 1 3 THE E2 CONVENIENCE STORE CONTROLLER e esee nennen nennen nennen nenne enne nennen en ene etes tren nennen nennen nnne 1 3 INET WORKING OVERVIEW pita e DX REFERRE EOD bero Bnet ab 1 4 PAD FQ TOLNGCEWOPK HE 1 4 1 4 2 The E2 Echelon Lonworks Network icccccccssscscccccssssscccecsnssscececsnsccececsssacecensnsaeeecessssaeeecesessaeeeecesesaacececensaeececeenes 1 4 1 4 3 Interconnection With Other E2s cccccccccccccessscesessesseceecceusceceecssssaeceecsessueceeceessueceececssaeceececesuseeececesasseccecesssseeeeeees 1 5 1 5 DOCUMENTATION OVERVIEW ep o tete ib iau libi en baee t o doppr 1 6
231. ctual state of the point when it uses the input for control purposes it is not necessary to define engineering units for dig ital inputs However selecting units that are appro priate to the input s function such as BYP or Input and Output Setup 9 9 NO BYP for inputs that initiate bypasses will make the input s state easier to read and understand To choose an engineering unit press LOOK UP to select Push Button Mode Digital inputs may be set up as push button inputs by changing this field to YES Push Button Mode is a method of interpreting a digi tal state that is used strictly for push buttons When used a button press lasting longer than one second will change the state of the input In other words if the input is OFF a button press will change it to ON and another button press will change it back to OFF etc Output This field displays the link between the input and its application s You do not need to enter any thing in this field You will be able to link applica tions to this point during the application setup process 9 2 The 8RO 8 810 and MultiFlex Outputs The 8RO 8ROe 810 and MultiFlex have relay out puts that close when called tobe ON and open when called to be OFF When an output point is closed ON the LED directly above the output terminal glows red These boards use Form C contacts that determine if the connection will be open or closed during power failure A f
232. cular time within the same day However events may be pro grammed singularly on OFF or one ON command per day Events may be programmed to take place on any or all days from Sunday to Saturday In addition events may take place on any or all of four holiday or special dates called HD1 HD2 HD3 and HD4 Holiday sched ules are used to tell the master or slave schedules when these special dates occur 11 14 1 2 Absolute and Relative Events Master schedule events always occur at specific times of the day In other words when you program an event pair in a master schedule you must specify two specific times of the day the events will occur These types of events are called absolute events However when programming event times in slave schedules you may choose to enter event times that are relative to its master schedule s ON and OFF times These types of events are called relative events They are pro grammed not as absolute times but as amounts of time before or after its master schedule s events For example suppose a master schedule is set up to be ON at 8 a m and OFF at 9 p m every day of the week and you wish to set up a slave schedule so that its output comes ON 15 minutes before the master comes ON and OFF 15 minutes after the master goes OFF To do this you would set up the slave schedule to come ON at 00 15 and OFF at 00 15 every day of the week The slave schedule will automatically determine the corr
233. d into a table As a result by constantly observing and recording the results of previous pre starts and pre stops OSS will be able to intelligently guess how much time a pre start or pre stop mode should last based on the outside temperature Heat Cools keep track of three different kinds of fac tors Heat K factor used to guess pre start durations for Heat Cools operating in heating mode Cool K factor used to guess pre start durations for Heat Cools operating in cooling mode Coast K factor a measurement of the change in temperature when no heating or cooling is active This is used to determine pre stop durations for both heating and cooling Heat Cools 11 17 4 Setpoint Reset If desired Heat Cools may be configured with a Set point Reset that varies the value of the heating and or cooling setpoints based on an analog value from a reset sensor This is most often used to vary the value of a heat ing or cooling setpoint based on the outside air tempera ture To set up a setpoint reset for heating or cooling the user must specify the minimum and maximum range of reset sensor values and the maximum range of setpoint Software Overview 11 45 adjustment As the value of the reset sensor varies within the mini mum and maximum range an equivalent portion of the maximum setpoint adjustment will be added or subtracted from the heating or cooling setpoint When the reset sen sor value is directly in be
234. de is most often used in cold climates during periods of low outside air temperature Split mode is also sometimes used when heated refrigerant from the refriger 11 4 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ation system 1s being used as reclaim heat by an HVAC unit The most common way E2 achieves split mode in an air cooled condenser with single speed fans is to lock OFF 5096 of the total number of fans You may choose to lock OFF all odd numbered fans even numbered fans the first half of all fans or the last half of all fans Split mode can also be achieved by activating a valve that bypasses a portion of the tubing in the condenser man ifold The resulting decrease in surface area results in reduced cooling 11 2 5 Fast Recovery Under certain conditions the system pressure may increase too quickly above the condenser setpoint to be reduced effectively by normal condenser control The E2 provides a user definable fast recovery rate setpoint at which all the condenser fans are turned ON to reduce sys tem pressure For air cooled and temperature differential condenser strategies discharge pressure is always used as the control value that determines fast recovery You may choose to enable or disable fast recovery and also to include a delay when transitioning from one mode to the other For evaporative condensers up to 16 override tem perature sensors may be combined to yield a single over ride value that is used for
235. dehumidification 71 21 single speed fans 71 20 two speed fans 71 21 variable speed fans 71 21 optimum start stop OSS 11 22 overview 11 20 temperature control 71 20 alternate set points 71 20 Alarm Advisory Log accessing 2 11 viewing 12 11 Alarm Advisory Messages C Alarm Annunciator Setup 0 22 Alarm Reporting 0 23 Alarms 12 11 acknowledging 12 12 advisory log accessing 2 11 I 1 viewing 12 11 date and time stamp 72 11 dial out 70 22 The Alarm Output 0 22 The Display Line 70 22 The Echelon Network 10 22 forced to normal See Alarms reset to nor mal resetting 12 13 reset to normal 2 2 return to normal 2 2 state in advisory log 72 11 the Alarm Annunciator 10 22 Alternate I O Formats 0 26 Analog Sensor Control 11 37 Anti Sweat case controlled 71 13 dewpoint input 11 14 how setpoints work 71 14 how anti sweat works 44 setup 11 44 zones definition of 11 44 Application Setup 0 25 B Base Log Group 11 17 Battery 4 5 enable switch 4 5 low 4 5 12 17 replacement 4 5 test 4 5 Baud Rates 70 12 E2 RS 232 port 10 12 E2 setting for I O Network 70 12 I O Network 6 3 8DO 6 3 8IO 6 3 ARTC 6 3 E2 6 3 IRLDS 6 3 Blue R See Cold Reset Board Types 6 1 Boards on the I O Network 0 2 10 15 Box to Box Communications 7 Box To Box 5 Building Controller 2 I 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual E2 Buttons cold reset 70 1 reset 70 1 BX Capabilities 7 2 Home Screen 72 1 C Case Circuits
236. dered from Retail Solutions as an Echelon enabled E2 and equipped with an Echelon plug in card See Section 4 3 1 Echelon Card Plug In P N 537 4860 with mounting screw P N 101 4201 8 2 Wiring Type Retail Solutions specifies one type of cable for Echelon Network wiring This cable type s properties are listed in Table 8 1 Cable Type Level 4 twisted pair stranded shielded Wire Diam AWG 0 65mm 22AWG Loop Resistance 106 ohms km Capacitance 49 nF km Table 8 1 Echelon Network Cable Specifications Cable Type Retail Solutions Part Number 1 pair non plenum 135 2300 1 pair plenum 135 2301 Table 8 2 Recommended Wiring 8 3 Ech e etwo rk large unbroken chain called a daisy chain see Figure 8 2 This allows for all devices in the Eche Structurin g Dai sy Ch ain s lon Network to be hard wired together for trouble free communication Echelon devices are networked together into configu rations called segments A segment is a group of up to 64 Echelon devices that are connected together on an unbro ken series of wires The recommended way of constructing an Echelon Network is called daisy chaining In the daisy chain net work configuration devices are arranged by subnets which consist of one E2 and all Echelon devices associ ated with the E2 First all devices in a subnet are connected in an unbro ken chain without branches or star configurations see Figure 8 1 Then if more than
237. dle Resolution Analog Points Interval Digital Points Duration 7 8 Percent Used Enable ENABLE Available Pts Press enter for a list of actions F1 SUCTION F2 CONDENSER CIRCUITS F4 SENSORS FS SETUP Figure 11 11 Status Screen for Logging Groups From the Status screen you can View configuration and usage information for the selected logging group Display the Logging Group Report press Enter 8 1 Display the Application Log Report press Enter 8 2 Turn off logging for all points associated with that logging group press Enter 9 1 Go back to the Setup screen press EZB 11 5 5 Log Reports A selection of log reports are available that indicate system resource usage how much disk space logging con figurations use resolution settings the duration logs are stored number of analog and digital points and all the types of logged points that belong to groups specific applications or the entire system 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 ee 11 5 5 1 Logging Group Report The Logging Group Report provides a summary of the logging group configuration and a complete list of all apricarion Loc EES oints associated with that group To display the Loggin eS J g P P y 88 8 Logged Points Summary 61 36 2667 14 51 51 Rev 2 46B14 Group report SUCTION GRP61 Point Log Summary Referenced Points Analog Points high resolution H Analog Points medium resolution 1 Fro
238. do Controller startu Property MESSAGE 1 500 BRKRPNL661 1 NetSetup 7 58 NOTCE THIS 03 1 CL RSC 601 1 CL RSC 801 1 CL RSC 86801 7 58 N NTC THIS 7 46 N NTC THIS 7 58 N NTC THIS 7 58 N NTC THIS CL RSC 8801 7 58 NOTCE THIS STATUS DSP_ on 7 31 NOTCE THIS 1 Systen 7 27 NOTCE THIS System 5 85 N NTC THIS System 4 26 N NTC THIS 63 1 System E 11 55 NOTCE THIS 63 1 GENERAL SERU 7 57 N NTC THIS 83 1 System E 7 52 N NTC THIS 83 1 System 11 35 N NTC THIS 83 1 System 1 RSC 801 EXPD INFO Figure 12 20 Alarm Advisory Log The Advisory Log is divided these categories Date Time State Area Ctrl Application Property Message 12 10 3 Date and Time The Date and Time columns simply display the date and time when the alarm or notice was generated and logged into the controller 12 10 4 State The State column describes the alarm type the current alarm state and whether or not the alarm has been acknowledged There are three possible alarm states ALARM A high priority warning usually signify ing a condition that requires attention NOTICE A low priority message usually signify ing a condition or a system change that requires no attention or may require attention in the future Operator s Guide to Using the E2 12 11 FAIL A failure is aspecial message that signifies a failure in an E2 system an application or in an input or output de
239. due to probe failure all fans will be staged on Drop Leg Temperature Above Maximum Drop Leg Setpoint If the Drop Leg temperature Drop Leg Temp rises above the maximum drop leg temperature setpoint Drop Leg Max an increase will be called for until Drop Leg Temp drops below Drop Leg Max This protects against the possibility of the Drop Leg Temp rising too high as a result of high plenum temperature Drop Leg Temperature Below Minimum Drop Leg Setpoint If the Drop Leg temperature drops below the mini mum drop leg temperature setpoint Drop Leg Min a decrease will be called for until Drop Leg Temp rises above Drop Leg Min This protects against the possibility of the Drop Leg Temp falling too low as a result of low plenum temperature Plenum Temperature Not Available If plenum temperature is not available due to probe or communication failure control will be based on the Drop Leg Min and Max setpoints 11 19 4 Configuration TD Control allows the user to operate a condenser at its designed temperature differential and saves energy by maintaining optimal condenser TD with the least amount of fans on as possible Standard discharge pressure control may attempt to operate the condenser below its designed TD and turn on more fans than necessary Set the number of condenser fans to be controlled in the Num Cond Fans field under Setup 4 is the default value 11 19 5 Setpoints TD setpoints are configured to allow c
240. e The Energy Meter supports multiple output options including solid state relay contacts Modbus with or without data logging and pulse The LCD screen on the faceplate allows instant output view ing 1 6 On Line Help System Overview The E2 On Line Help is the primary source front panel interface users will have to consult when seeking instruction on properties screens menus and trouble shooting of hardware software problems The on line help topics are designed to minimize the time the user would otherwise have to spend searching through the manual to find information Press keys to open the General Help menu To use on line help from any screen in the E2 front panel interface simply press the E2 s permanent Help key This opens a pop up window containing either information about the screen or menu you are currently on or information about the input output or setpoint you have highlighted with the cursor if available After the Help key has been pressed will open the Gen eral Help menu containing Troubleshooting options On Line Help System Overview 1 7 Software Licensing Some applications in the E2 are available only when activated with a unique license key that is obtained through Retail Solutions Software licensing see Section 10 15 License Management allows the user to activate certain features in the E2 such as Web Services and third party controllers Call your Retail Solutions sales r
241. e 24VAC center tapped secondary 2 of the power transformer CAUTION If you change any dip switch settings while the board is powered disconnect the power and re power the board to reset NOTE The voltage divide function capability 5 K on the previous model P N 810 3030 4AO board is Nout no longer supported This can now be accomplished by using two external 15 K resistors If used with E2 5 K scale output range 1 SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR 2 ADDRESS 3 BAUD RATE BELDEN 8761 FOR PLENUM Dna LZ USE BELDEN 82761 OR 88761 h OR EQUIV BOARD A 9600 baud OUR 19200 baud BOARD 16 DAISY CHAIN CONFIGURATION SET TERMINATING JUMPERS 03 VO NET 7o J 7 RAIER A 7 85 f 4 DS 4 d i 7 WIRE to same color WIRE OV to OV WIRE to same color Terminated Not Terminated ak DOWN DOWN UP 2 wire 4 20mA 4 20mA 4 wire 4 20mA 4 20mA Externally Powered Analog bibas Analog Hookup example Output ookup example Output Isolated Jumper Not Isolated A ET l LL 12V I 12V lt amp Not Used a oy 44 20 li 4 20 lt j 4 20 OUT
242. e 8RO board is the direct link between the E2 and component operation Information gathered by the con troller from the input boards is checked against current stored setpoints If differences in the received input data and the setpoint information are detected a signal is either sent to the proper 8RO relay or an existing signal is dis continued Through the use of this relay signal control functions that can be properly maintained by a simple con tact closure sequence are effectively operated by the E2 The 8RO board is easily installed and operated within the Retail Solutions Network environment because of its straightforward design Several of these features are shown in Figure 2 11 AC Power Connection Network Connection Power Receive LED Termination Resistance Jumpers Address and Baud Rate Dip Switch Fail Safe Dip Switch Output Connection 8 places Relay Fuses 8 places LED Relay Indicators 8 places 26501106 LEGEND Address amp Baud Rate Dip Switcl AC Power Connection VO Network Connection Fail Safe Dip Switch Rx and Tx LEDs Output Connection 8 places Termination Resistance Jumpers 9 Relay Fuses 8 places Hand Held Terminal Port LED Relay Indicators 8 places Figure 2 12 SROSMT Relay Output Board Hardware Overview 2 9 2 2 6 Analog Output Board The 4AO Analog Output Board P N 815 3030 Fig ure 2 13 is configured wit
243. e Alarm Log but all annunciation of the alarm is suspended until the alarm is reset or cleared As stated in Section 12 10 5 the state of the alarm or notice will also change to a dash indicating acknowl edgement When you acknowledge an alarm you prevent it from ever annunciating again in any way until you manually reset or clear the alarm A condition that causes an alarm will never automatically return to normal when it is 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 acknowledged Q ACKNOWLEDGEMENT VS RESETTING Reset an alarm if you believe the condition that caused it is fixed but you wish for a new alarm to occur if the problem happens again You MUST reset an alarm that has been previ ously acknowledged to re enable alarming for the alarm Failure to do so will cause the alarm to remain in ACK and the alarm will not be gen erated again AN ACKNOWLEDGED ALARM WILL NOT AUTOMATICALLY RESET Acknowledge an alarm to silence alarm panel horns or lights ONLY IF technicians have been notified of the problem and have been dis patched Technicians after fixing the problem MUST reset or clear the alarm to re enable alarming To acknowledge an alarm or notice highlight the desired log entry and press ALARM ACK A screen will come up prompting the user to either acknowl edge the selected advisory acknowledge all advisories or to cancel the operation A Press Mall to acknowledge the selected advisor
244. e Failure 20 hardware failure has occurred in the ISD module C 8 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 Default as ISD Discharge Pressure Lockout 2 The discharge pressure has gone above the high dis charge cut out and this condition is set to only gener ate a lock out A lock out has occurred on the compressor because the discharge temperature sensor has gone above its alarm set point If the supply voltage to ISD falls below 170V this advisory is generated e motor winding temperature sensor has gone ISD Discharge Temp Lockout 20 ISD Supply Voltage Trip ISD Motor Temp Trip ISD Low Oil Warning ISD Internal Line Brea The internal line breaks have opened on compressors equipped with them ISD Discharge Pressure Trip discharge pressure has gone above hig above their preset value on compressors equipped with them Low oil pressure 1s sensed on starting the compres sor charge cut out and this condition is set to only gener ate a trip A trip has occurred on the compressor because the discharge temperature sensor has gone above its alarm setpoint The suction pressure has fallen below the low pres sure cut out If there 1s no 3 phase power on the 3 phase sense inputs when the compressor is called to be on e ISD will only accept run commands from the Einstein when the communications jumper is installed If this jumper is not installed an advisory will be gen
245. e Home screen Press the function key SUC TION GRP If more than one Suction Group has been set up the Suction Group Summary screen opens Choose which application you wish to view with the cursor and press The current status runtime and HP rating for each compressor are displayed in this screen To view other application types use the function keys WB and see Table 10 2 to see the condenser circuits and sensor control status screens Quick Start 10 5 Key Function for Function for Function for RX BX CX LIE TTL Standard and Lighting Circuits Case Circuits EZE Sensor Control Sensors Sensors and Power Monitor ing Table 10 2 Status Screen Function Keys Status screen functions are explained in more detail in Section 12 i Guide to Using the 2 of man ual For now press Mau to access another important screen the Actions menu 10 7 3 The Actions Menu RX 4668 Unit 3 RX DEU SUMMARY 14 28 36 RLARH ixcuits State Temp NDRRD CKT81 Refr NONE NDRRD CKT82 Refr NONE NDRRD CKT83 Refr NONE NDRRD CKT8 Refr NONE NDRRD CKT85 Refr NONE NDRRD CKT86 Refr NONE NDRRD CKT87 Refr NONE NDRRD CKT88 Refr NONE NDRRD CKT89 Refr NONE NDRRD CKT18 Refr NONE NDRRD CKT11 Refr NONE Actions Menu Log Override Expanded Information Detailed Status CONDENSERO1 NONE 208 0 Sensor Ctrl Value ANALOG SENS61 NONE ANALOG SENS62 NONE DIG
246. e Overview 11 4 2 1 Valve Control 11 4 3 Refrigeration Control 11 4 3 1 EEVs Liquid Pulse and Liquid Stepper 11 4 3 2 EEPRs Suction FLAA Defrost Contfol uae a dete ee Nagata e Was etie dag ab aah ere OP tapes viedo tere ros BEL IMMISIT AT abate Rich dea ae ated es eee doe ee kd 11 4 4 2 Defrost 11 4 4 3 Defrost Termination 11 4 4 4 Demand Defrost 11 445 Emergency Defrost sii rre en ten e b reed e ete m Date pe rest Dee e rep eig oae dede 11 4 4 6 The WALT State e e TR HT ND RARE QU SERRE UENIUNT RS 11 4 5 Ann Sweat Control te ntt aec tet nde eee 11 4 5 1 Dewpoint Input Sources dec ete ae RR ERR ERE PAL ERR HE RT CERE EE ain asta exa 11 4 6 Dual Temp Control itecto alie D a t D T eee pae eb o re eoe T4 7 Fan Control d Rc end niei BE LIAS Light Control e ceo e d ri eR ERR PERF H49 Clean Wash Mode ie e E Wanne aH RR Iq UE 11 4 10 Walk In Freezer nennen entren tenens inner eren rsen rre enne serre nennen nennen x Table of Contents 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 DL ADI Fail Safe Re ao E E d i coast e eg t E EE ER e ER Ee scele 11 15 11 4 11 1 Recoverable Sensor Fail reSis a A EEA OA O EE aE EE 11 15 LEA AZ Wiring eoi eie ge aee S IE S Re O vec E e b b
247. e Section 12 6 Manual Defrost and Clean Mode 11 4 4 6 The WAIT State When a Case Control Circuit application enters defrost mode it sends a message out to all case controllers in the circuit to begin defrost at the same time However since each case in a circuit will have its own termination sen sors it is possible for some cases to terminate defrost while defrosts in other cases continue When a case controller terminates defrost it enters a state of operation called the WAIT state While in the WAIT state all refrigeration and defrost heat will remain OFF When the Case Control Circuit application detects that all case controllers have entered the WAIT state the application will consider the defrost cycle completed and refrigeration will restart 11 4 5 Anti Sweat Control A case controller manages its anti sweat heaters by monitoring the dewpoint in and around the case area The dewpoint input value is compared to the anti sweat appli cation s control setpoints the Full ON setpoint and the Software Overview 11 13 Full OFF setpoint Based on this comparison the anti sweat heaters will do one of three things fthe input is equal to or above the Full ON set point the heaters remain ON 100 of the time If the input value is equal to or below the Full OFF setpoint the heaters will be ON 096 of the time fully OFF If the input value is between the Full ON and Full OFF setpoint the heaters wil
248. e Specifica tions Standard industry accepted practices for wiring of Eth ernet networks are expected E2 controllers use a star topology identical to PC deployment This includes a unique point to point run from a switch or hub to the controller see Table 7 1 for hub part numbers for order ing This is done with Category5 or better cable Maxi mum distance for a run of 10BaseT is 328 feet 100 meters 11 5 dB loss max The maximum number of controllers allowed on an IP subnet is 20 All E2 controllers that must com municate with each other must be on the same sub net Recommended Ethernet cabling is CAT 5 straight through cable 328 feet 100 meters is the maximum distance allowed between devices before a switch or hub must be added Ethernet IP Configurations 7 2 1 Ethernet Five or Nine port Switch may require an additional power supply Components Equipment Type Specifications Industrial grade Operating storage temp range 40 F to 185 F Vibration IEC68 2 6 RH 5 to 9596 UL 508A CE approved Supports 10Base T crossover cable Supports all IEEE 802 3 proto col Supports Auto Crossover MDI MDI X Screw terminal power connec tors Ethernet Surge and Lightning Protector recom mended Industrial grade Surge capacity 1 kA line Operating temp range 40 F to 185 F Max frequency 155 MHz Clamp and rated 10V and 5V 10 Base T 100
249. e application Ifa particular input or output is being logged by the E2 and has log data stored in the system you can view the log or graph by following the instructions below 1 Use the arrow keys to highlight the desired input or output on the Home or a Status screen 2 Press to call up the Actions Menu and 7 select either option to view a graph or to view a log If Graph and Log options are not listed in the Actions Menu this means the property you have selected is not set up to be logged It may also be the case that there are currently no logged values to be viewed this often happens when a controller is first set up or after a log has been cleared If this is the case E2 will tell you that no logged samples exist For a complete list of items in the Actions Menu refer to Section 10 7 3 The Actions Menu 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 12 11 1 2 Setup Screens 98 26 05 RX 466 Unit 3 16 50 33 Use Ctrl X to Select Tabs SETUP FULL ALARM C1 General C2 Setpoints c3 C4 Inputs C Comp Setup C7 Comp Outs C8 C9 Alarms CO MORE Suction Groups SUCTION GRP61 Setpoints Value SUCT PRES SETPT 22 0 Suct Pres DBand 6 28 Extrn Pres Shft 8 Comp On Delay 0 00 04 Comp Off Delay 0 00 04 Unldr On Delay 6 66 62 Unldr Off Delay 6 66 62 Min ON Time 0 00 05 Min OFF Time 6 66 60 TR Pressure 30 0 F1 PREU TAB NEXT TAB F3 EDIT Fh STATUS F5 CANCEL Figure 12 25 Example S
250. e cycle ends An entry of 0 days will disable this parameter 11 21 4 4 Freeze Lockout An irrigation cycle should be terminated if the current environmental conditions will result in freezing of dis pensed water This is to prevent the sheeting of ice on any adjacent paved surfaces or sidewalks which could create hazardous conditions for motorists and or pedestrians Zones are inhibited from watering if the outside air temperature falls below the entered setpoint for Freeze Lockout 11 21 4 5 Alarm If the zone is inhibited for more than the number of days specified in the Inhibit Alarm setpoint an Inhibit alarm will be generated for the zone This alarm will return to normal when the zone is no longer inhibited 11 21 5 Zone Bypass Inputs Each zone has a digital bypass input called Zone Bypass Inputs A zone can be bypassed to ON at any time while the application is enabled A zone cannot be bypassed to OFF When a zone is bypassed to ON the main water valve will be turned ON immediately 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ 11 21 5 1 Bypass Failsafe While each zone is bypassedto ON a timer is checked If time has elapsed equal to or greater than the zone s cycle duration parameter the bypass input will be ignored and the zone will return to normal operation For a zone in Bypass Failsafe its bypass input must be set to OFF or NONE to reset the Bypass Failsafe and to use the bypass input again 11 21 6 Flow Se
251. e for additional support Sensors located on refrigerant lines should be insulated to eliminate the influence of the surrounding air A self adhering insulation that will not absorb moisture is recom mended to prevent ice logging at the sensor location The sensor should be positioned on the side of the line as shown in Figure 3 24 Sensors and Transducers 26509022 Figure 3 24 Sensor Orientation 3 5 7 Product Temperature Probes The product temperature probe is designed to be used alongside food products in a refrigeration case or freezer The product probe uses a thermistor type temperature sen sor in a sealed cylindrical container approximately 16 oz A magnet is contained at the bottom the probe s enclosure to allow easy attachment to a side or bottom ofa refrigeration case 3 5 8 Humidity Sensors and Humidistats 3 5 8 1 The indoor relative humidity sensor should be mounted in a central location within the zone to be mea sured away from doors windows vents heaters and out side walls that could affect temperature readings The sensor should be between four and six feet from the floor Note that this sensor generates a small amount of heat therefore do not mount temperature sensors directly above RH sensors Mount RH sensor P N 203 5751 as follows Indoor RH Sensor 1 With a flat head screwdriver push down the middle tab on the top of the sensor case and pop the lid off to expose the circu
252. e relays control the compressor groups The communication interface is RS485 I O using the Standard Extended Address Form for Retail Solutions Dis tributed Controllers Currently the PAK is designed to interface with the Retail Solutions E2 controller 26501126 LEGEND 1 INPUT OWER RS485 TERMINATION 24VAC JUMPERS RS485 1 0 NETWORK 10 HAND HELD TERMINAL JACK PAK pu 1 8 RELAY OUTPUT CONNECTORS PAK e ANE 9 16 RELAY OUTPUT FUSES 2A rated 250V slow blow NETWORK D IIPD RELAY STATUS LEDs SWITCH S3 INPUT TYPE DIP 14 RELAY FAIL SAFE SWITCHES 81 2 SWITCHES r BOARD STATUS LEDs 15 PAK ANALOG Code A Code B General OUTPUTS 1 4 Status DC POWER OUTPUTS 3 at 5VDC 1 at 12VDC 16 NETWORK STATUS LEDs Table 2 9 MultiFlex PAK 2 8 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee 2 2 3 The MultiFlex ESR Board The MultiFlex ESR Valve Regulator board P N 810 3199 shown in Figure 2 1 is an RS485 I O Network electronic stepper valve regulator capable of driving up to eight stepper motor valves which are typically used to control temperature LEGEND Valve Connectors 8 6 Termination Jumpers 24VAC CT 75 VAC Power Input HHT Jack General Status LED 8 Network Address Switches Network Input 9 Open LED 8 TX and RX LEDs 10 Close LED 8 Figure 2 1 MultiFlex ESR Board Layout The MultiFlex ESR uses suction side variable position evaporator regulators
253. e report priority 12 10 9 Facility Status Display FSD Alarms The FSD can be used to handle alarms Information such as time stamp alarm ID string current status the rea son an alarm was triggered 1f a case temp limit was exceeded configured priority of the advisory Return To Normal information and if available the limit that was exceeded can be viewed through the FSD Alarms cannot be configured from the FSD unit If more than one E2 controller is at a site one E2 must be set up as the alarm annunciator for that site The FSD will receive alarms from that alarm annunciator E2 for the entire site The FSD will point only to a single E2 at a site it will not poll multiple controllers for alarms For more information refer to the FSD Manual P N 026 1400 11 26 68 RX 366 Unit 3 Use Ctr1 X to Select CX Tabs SETUP C1 General C2 Data Pts C3 Pts Names C4 Outputs Status Display ALM PANEL661 General Value Display Number 1 Status Title Department Status Num Data Points 1 Audible Alarm None Show RTN Yes Show Notices Yes Min Adv Prior 99 Pass Code E 466 1 PREU TAB F2 NEXT TAB F3 EDIT F4 STATUS FS CANCEL Figure 12 23 FSD General Setup 12 11 Viewing Logs and Graphs There are two basic forms used by the E2 to display data logs and graphs A log is simply a list of sampled values for a particular input or output along with the sampling times and dates When you view
254. e the arrow keys to select the OIL SENSOR field 3 Choose None from the LOOK UP menu 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 SYMPTOM POSSIBLE PROBLEM SOLUTION Problems with Condenser Condenser will not operate Verify that E2 1s programmed with proper number of fans 1 Highlight the General tab C1 in the Condenser Setup screen 2 Is the correct number of fans in the Number of Fans field Incorrect board and point set tings Confirm proper board and point settings Go to the Inputs tab C3 in the Condenser Setup screen to check PRES CRTL IN and DISCH TRIP IN Fail Safe wiring on 8RO is incorrect Verify proper fail safe switch positions on the 8RO board The fail safe dip switches are labeled S2 on the 8RO and S3 on the 8ROe and 810 Set the rocker UP ON to close the relay and turn the output ON during net work failure Set the switch DOWN OFF to open the relay and turn the output OFF during network failure Condenser will not split Enable the condenser to split Go to the General tab C1 in the Condensers Setup screen and set the Split Enable field to Yes Unsplit setpoint is set too low Unsplit setpoint value is com pared with discharge pressure value instead of temperature Enter the value in terms of dis charge pressure Go to the Setpoints tab C2 in the Condensers Setup screen and check that the UNSPLIT STPT field value has been entered as a press
255. e to set this field to YES The screen you are currently in is always highlighted in the screen s index tab For example because Screen 1 is displayed tab C1 is highlighted As you move to other screens within Setup the high light will move to different tabs to indicate which screen will be displayed 12 6 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual Header Icons 300 Unit 1 Device Summary 14 15 16 ALARN 68 61 65 Press Log In Out to Log On Figure 12 12 Header Icons At the very top of every screen in the E2 there are icons that indicate various stages of activity number of users logged into the controller battery alerts connectivity status and more icon Description Battery indicator Yellow less than 30 of battery life left Red less than 10 of bat tery life left or battery switch is disabled Le Table 12 4 Header Icons and Descriptions RX 4668 Unit 3 Use Ctrl X to Select SETUP C1 General H i C3 C Comp Setup 7 Comp Outs 8 Suction Groups SUCTION GRP61 68 26 65 Tabs 5 Outputs Name Long Name Strategy Control Type Num of Stages Refr Type R22 Phase Protect No Yes No No No No CONDENSER 61 em SUCTION GRPO1 Normal 1 Pressure 4 One Comp On Comp On Defrost Comp On Reclaim Run Time EQ Enable SP Float Associated COND NEXT TAB F3 EDIT F4 STATUS F5 CANCEL Figure 12 13 Setup Screen RX
256. eases by one degree every time an update occurs The following adjust ment would then likewise occur after every update P mode adj 1 0 1 degree 10 degrees 0 1 10 After 10 updates the input value would be 34 F and the output would be 10096 The same would happen if it were five updates at two degrees each or one hundred updates at 0 1 degrees each In every case the tempera ture travels a total of 10 degrees and because the throt tling range is also 10 degrees the output travels from 096 to 100 proportionally Higher Throttling Range values will result in a wider 0 100 range and therefore will result in smaller reaction to changes in input values Proportional Constant The Proportional Constant is simply a multiplier that can be used to fine tune the size of the Proportional Mode adjustment Raising the value of K results in a greater reaction to input value changes while lowering it results in a smaller reaction Changing K is essentially the same thing as changing the value of the throttling range For example having a TR of 10 and a K of 2 is the same as having a TR of 5 and a K of 1 Mathematically speaking the effective propor tional range is calculated by dividing the Throttling Range by Ky D 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee If Proportional Mode is functioning incorrectly in your system it may be more appropriate for you to change the Throttling Range value to a more approp
257. eater shouldbe used how and where to set it up and how to configure the E2 s on the net work to interact with the router or repeater Emerson Retail Solutions Product Technical Sheet Binder P N 026 1904 The product sheet binder gives important installation information about sensors transducers thermostats and other essential items that are a part of every Retail Solu tions control network The product sheet binder is not necessary for field installation instructions however it may be a useful reference for contrac tors and OEMs who require more information about a specific peripheral MultiFlex ESR Installation and Operation Man ual P N 026 1720 From general information to details on mounting wiring and heat dissipation the MultiFlex ESR manual provides the informa tion you need to install and operate the MultiFlex ESR board in addition to valuable information on software setup and valve control 1 6 2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee MultiFlex I O Board Installation and Operation Manual P N 026 1704 Installation and opera tion manual for the MultiFlex 16 and all versions of the MultiFlex combination input output board excluding unit controllers such as the CUB and RTU MultiFlex CUB CUB II Condensing Unit Board Installation and Operation Manual P N 026 1705 Installation and operation manual for the MultiFlex CUB old style and the MultiFlex CUB II family which includes the CUB II and CUB TD
258. ect ON and OFF times 11 14 1 3 Temporary Schedule Events Each schedule may also be given up to three pairs of temporary schedule events These events start and end at specific days and times and do not continue past those dates in other words temporary events cannot be made to Software Overview 11 41 occur weekly or annually 11 14 1 4 Overlapping Events may and often do overlap within a schedule When events overlap the E2 uses the following priority structure from highest to lowest Temporary Schedule Event 1 2 Temporary Schedule Event 2 3 Temporary Schedule Event 3 4 Events that occur on HD1 Holiday 1 5 Events that occur on HD2 Holiday 2 6 Events that occur on HD3 Holiday 3 7 Events that occur on HD4 Holiday 4 8 Temporary Schedule Events of a slave schedule s master schedule if applicable 9 Standard events within the schedule itself 11 14 1 5 Ranges In addition to the 15 events within a master or slave schedule up to 12 standard ranges may be specified Ranges are sets of dates that specify which days within the year the schedule s events will be applied The E2 checks the list of ranges to see if the current date falls within any of the twelve possibilities if the date does not fall within a range none of the schedule s events will occur When no date ranges are specified the schedule is con sidered to be active All scheduled events will occur nor mally 11 14 2 Ho
259. ed ON when the input source is equal to or greater than a user specified value The total amount of time the application has been in a high trip condition is shown in the Time In Trip Today output 11 21 Irrigation Control 11 21 1 Overview Irrigation control is an application used for the control ling of sprinkler systems This application controls water ing by duration of time or water usage parameters Days of the week and times for watering are set by the user with a maximum of two Irrigation applications allowed in the CX controller The master water valve is turned ON and OFF as water is needed for a zone When disabled no application con trol of any outputs will be possible and the System Status output will indicate Disabled Under normal control only one zone will be active at a time 11 21 2 Zones and Cycles A zone is defined as a single line of irrigation fed from a main water supply valve i e a group of sprinklers that are attached to the same line of irrigation Up to 16 zones of irrigation per application are supported with six start times for watering The user will be able to configure each zone to function on different days of the week or odd or even days of the month Zones are turned ON one at a time starting from the first enabled zone The zone that is ON is considered to be the active zone Its state is set to ON and its valve output is also set to ON When the active zone completes its time duration i
260. ed Suction Group includes Circuit Setup where you associate all circuits connected to the suction group Once the circuits are set up the suction group will use the circuit states to help determine current loadson the suction group For example when one or more circuits go into defrost the Enhanced Suction Group determines that there is less of a load on the suction group than if all circuits were in refrigeration With the appropriate circuits associ ated the Enhanced Suction Group tailors its capacity to meet the load Over time the Enhanced Suction Group will build and store a profile for all the different combina tions of circuit states encountered in the algorithm 11 1 3 3 The Control Cycles Parameter Unlike the standard Suction Group which used PID constants as a means ofoptimizing suction control and had limited features for controlling compressor cycle counts the Enhanced Suction Group has one parameter with five preset settings to allow users to alter suction control per formance or compressor cycling frequency The default setting Moderate Control seeks to bal ance good suction pressure control with efficient cycling If tighter control is needed setting the field to Tight Con 11 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee trol or Tightest Control will increase the application s reaction to suction changes resulting in tighter control usually at the expense of more frequent cycling If fewer compresso
261. ed by selecting M3 H Configured Applications from the Main Menu This menu gives you access to Summary and Status screens such as Anti Sweat Power Monitoring Time Schedules Holidays and many more To gain access to any of the given EB select the corresponding number and press 12 10 Alarms This section describes how to view and use the Alarm Advisory Log 12 10 1 Accessing the Alarm Advi sory Log The Alarm Advisory Log can be accessed by pressing the alarm icon key CD on the controller Alarms 12 10 2 Viewing the Controller Advi sory Log The current number of advisory log entries the log that is highlighted is displayed at the top right of the Advisory Log Screen The total number of alarms and or notices in the Advisory Log is displayed below the current field To move between Advisory Log entries press the up or down arrow key 300 Unit 3 14 07 16 ADVISORY LOG ALARM 1 Current 186 Total Acknowledged Unacknowledged TIME STATE Area Ctrl Application THIS D BRKRPNL 002 Device absent fro 14 19 Lr THIS NetSetup Application confi 13 19 NOTCE THIS 1500 BRKRPNL 881 Application confi 13 08 FAIL THIS Device absent fro 13 88 N NTC THIS Application confi Application confi Application confi Application confi Application confi Application confi Application confi Controller Controller Controller Controller Application confi Controller startu Controller shut
262. ed in on a graph only a subset of the total number of samples are visible To view samples that were recorded earlier or later than those in the current view press the left and right cursor keys The availability of ear lier or later samples is indicated by the presence of arrows at either end of the X time axis 12 12 Low Battery Notifica tion The E2 keeps track of how long the E2 battery has been active and will display a battery icon at the top of the E2 screen whenever the battery is reaching the end of its recommended battery life If a battery has less than 30 of its battery life left a yellow battery icon will appear at the top of the screen If the battery has less than 10 life left or if the battery switch is currently disabled a red battery icon will appear For more information on battery testing and replace ment refer to Section 4 4 Battery Testing and Replace ment Low Battery Notification 12 13 Naming Conventions for E2 Controllers Applica tions and Points For all firmware versions the use of colons in a name is discouraged 12 13 1 All E2 Firmware Versions Do not create a name made up of only numeric characters 12 13 2 E2 Firmware Versions Prior to 2 84 Do not use colons in the name 12 13 3 E2 Firmware Version 2 84 and Above The use of colons in the name is discouraged Operator s Guide to Using the E2 12 17 ee Appendix A Case Type Defaults The
263. ed the K factor The K factor is stored in the memory along with the average value of the outdoor air temperature during the pre start or pre stop Over time collected K factor data will be sorted and combined into a table As a result by constantly observing and recording the results of previous pre starts and pre stops OSS will be able to intelligently guess how much time a pre start or pre stop mode should last based on the outside temperature AHU Control keeps track of three different kinds of K factors Heat K factor used to guess pre start dura tions for AHUs operating in heating mode Cool K factor used to guess pre start dura tions for AHUSs operating in cooling mode Coast K factor a measurement of the change in temperature when no heating or cooling is active This is used to determine pre stop durations for both heating and cool ing AHUs Air Handling Units AHU 11 6 11 Separate Setpoints The Separate Setpoints strategy for AHU allows a Cut In Cut Out setpoint to be set up for each heat and cool stage instead of just one cool and one heat setpoint set up for each stage Normal strategy Dehumidification con trol can be performed while controlling with separate set points 11 6 12 AHU Zone Control Unlike MultiFlex RTU rooftop controller applications AHU applications are not required to be grouped into Zone applications AHUS are usually large enough to be zones in and of themsel
264. ed to the cooling setpoint raising it to 72 F The SEC DEMAND SHED would be set up to shed later if necessary as a second level of shedding for the air conditioner When this input is turned ON the setpoint is raised by the secondary demand bump value Since the PRI DEMAND SHED input is still ON both values are added to the setpoint raising the setpoint to 74 F 11 11 5 Priority Levels Each application that you wish to set up for shedding must be assigned a priority level in the Demand Control application When a Demand Control application sheds loads it does so by sheddingall applications that are in the first priority level and then continuing to shed higher pri ority levels until the demand is at an acceptable level or until all levels are shed Priority levels are simply outputs that connect to the demand shedding inputs of one or more applications When a level is shed the output comes ON and all appli cations connected to the output are shed There are three types of priority levels 1 First Shed First Shed levels are the first ones to be shed when demand shedding begins The Demand Control applica tion first begins shedding by activating level 1 of the First Shed levels As needed each level thereafter is shed in succession 2 3 and so on to 20 Applications that are part of the First Shed priority lev els should be non vital applications that would have no 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ sig
265. ee Sensors humidity I Board Names 6 1 I O Boards snap track installation 3 4 I O Formats alternate 70 26 I O Network baud rate 70 12 Baud Rate Dip Switches 6 3 Baud Rate Settings ARTC 6 3 baud rate settings 6 3 8DO 6 3 810 6 3 E2 6 3 IRLDS 6 3 boards on the 0 2 10 15 checking boards online 70 16 12 10 daisy chains 6 2 dip switches and rotary dials 6 3 E2 RX 1 4 max number of RS485 Boards 6 peripherals for the 4 problems with F 7 terminating resistance jumpers 6 4 Network Setting Up 70 15 Icons 10 4 IMC Controllers 6 5 Index Tabs 10 27 12 6 Inputs analog default values on sensor failure 9 9 selecting units 9 8 setup screen 9 7 digital push button mode 9 10 selecting units 9 9 pulse type setting units per pulse 9 9 Insertion Temperature Probe See Sensors Inser tion Probe Inside Temperature Sensor See Sensors Inside Temperature Installation Guide 16AI 6 12 6 9 1 5 8IO 6 11 CC 100 CS 100 8 6 E2 4 7 ESR8 8 7 MultiFlex 16 6 7 MultiFlex Combo 6 8 MultiFlex ESR 6 13 6 14 6 15 TD3 6 8 Interal Modem Previous Generation Board 3 6 Internal M odems New Process or Bo ard 3 5 4 3 IRLDS specifying the number of 70 2 10 15 Irrigation zones and cycles cycle control types 71 50 cycle control types timed 71 50 volume 50 cycle scheduling 11 50 flow sensor related tests 71 51 leak 71 51 obstructed zone 171 51 number of zones 71 49 override failsafe 71 51
266. een status light means that the status is okay while a red status light indicates alarm This case display can be configured to show either the discharge air temperature default the product probe tem perature or the defrost termination temperature The TD3 communicates with the E2 controller via the Echelon Network and in turn the E2 adjusts the circuit s temperature or defrost status 11 3 6 The Control Link CD Case Display The Control Link CD is mounted inside the refrigera tion case and serves as a point to which the sensors are wired A single RS485 communication cable links the case display back to the E2 controller Additionally an optional remote display can be added to the control module to pro vide a local indication of case temperature and operational mode that is remote from the control module 11 3 7 Wiring Wiring a case circuit so that it may be controlled by a Standard Circuit application primarily involves wiring all temperature sensors to 16AI Analog Input Boards and wir ing the valves and other devices on the case to a relay out put board such as an 8RO Relay Output Board 11 8 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee Figure 11 5 shows a typical case in a circuit and the devices that must be wired for each Follow the guidelines below to wire the circuit to the E2 I O Network 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ LIGHTS CASE TEMP TO OTHER PROBE CASES IN a ee CIRCUIT TERMTEMP 7 __ PROBE EVAPORATO
267. efrigerant will be pumped through the coil This phase will con tinue until the defrost is terminated see Section 11 3 2 3 for information on how defrost is termi nated 3 Run Off Elec amp Hot Gas only After defrost heat is deactivated the application waits for the Run Off time to pass before re entering refrigera tion mode This allows melted frost on the evapo rator to drain from the coil so that it will not re freeze when refrigeration begins again After the user specified Run Off time has passed the defrost cycle has ended 11 3 2 2 Defrost Types There are many different ways used to defrost a refrig erated case A Standard Circuit application is capable of employing five different strategies to accommodate five different types of defrost Timed and Reverse Air Timed defrost and Reverse Air defrost are two differ ent defrost strategies but both are alike in the way they are controlled by a Standard Circuit application In both defrost types no heat is applied to the evaporator The application simply turns the refrigeration solenoid OFF for the duration of the defrost cycle When these defrost types are used Pump Down and Run Off times are not necessary therefore they will not be part of the defrost cycle Hot Gas and Reversed Cycle Hot Gas Hot Gas and Reversed Cycle Hot Gas require the use of hot gas from the refrigeration lines During these types of defrost the application will open the circui
268. en 2 8 Memory clearing all data from 10 1 Menu actions 10 6 User Access 70 13 Menus 72 3 Messages alarm advisory C 1 MODBUS Commissioning 10 19 Modem setup 10 10 Modem Board 3 5 4 3 Modem Mounting 3 7 Modem Communication Expansion Board 3 5 Modem Communication Expansion Card 4 3 Modular Chiller Control 11 52 Mounting bullet and pipe mount sensors 3 9 CC 100 3 5 dewpoint probe 3 11 E2 blank face 3 3 recessed mount 3 retrofit 3 2 standard mount 3 ESR8 3 5 I O Boards And Enclosures single enclosure 3 3 light level sensors 3 7 liquid level sensors 3 1 temperature sensors insertion probe 3 8 inside 3 7 outside 3 8 supply and return air sensors 3 8 MuliFlex Boards 1616 6 5 MultiFlex mounting in enclosure 3 3 plus board 6 2 MultiFlex 16 Board features 2 4 2 5 MultiFlex Boards 2 4 16 2 4 combination input output 2 5 CUB 2 7 11 29 PAK 2 7 11 29 RCB 2 7 11 25 RCB RTU compared 1 25 RTU 2 7 MultiFlex CUB 2 7 11 29 MultiFlex ESR Board 2 8 MultiFlex PAK 2 7 11 29 MultiFlex Plus Board 6 2 MultiFlex RCB 2 7 11 25 MultiFlex RTU 2 7 11 25 N Navigation 12 3 Network RS485 I O baud rate dip switches 6 3 daisy chain diagram 6 2 dip switches and ro tary dials for board numbering 6 3 Network Summary Screen 2 0 Neuron ID manual entry of 0 19 No Description File 8 5 Noise Minimization 6 2 O Off Cycle Defrost See Defrost off cycle Open Echelon 8 4 Operator s Guide to Using the E2 72 1 OSS See AHUs o
269. ene 12 14 12 11 1 Locating Logged Inputs Outputs 12 14 12 11 1 1 Home Status Screens x dex 12 14 12 11 1 2 Setup Screens sss v 12 15 12 11 1 3 Setting Up Input and Output Pointers 12 15 12112 Log View i eai ee ECRIRE ORO RUE ERU YI ere Et He aee OU EE e ver rts 12 16 12 1 L3 The Gr pli VIeW 5 aU vet een eee euer 12 16 12 114 LOOMING In and Out eee de e de EN e US BE Ree gate deer Pere es 12 16 12 12 LOW BATTERY NOTIFICATION s pede ete ar Meere noe n eet 12 17 12 13 NAMING CONVENTIONS FOR E2 CONTROLLERS APPLICATIONS AND POINTS eee e 12 17 12 13 AILE2 FirmwareVersion sa s ee e ete ores etra eee pere are ee ees 12 17 12 13 2 E2 Firmware Versions Prior to 2 84 sees eene eee ee hene e nnne ne e esset 12 17 12 13 3 E2 Firmware Version 2 84 and Above 12 17 APPENDIX A CASE TYPE DEFAULTS cssssssssssssssssessessssessssesessessssessssassssessssesssessssassssessssessesessesesensessesesors A 1 APPENDIX B PRESSURE VOLTAGE AND TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE CHARTS FOR ECLIPSE TRANSDUCERS amp RETAIL SOLUTIONS TEMP SENSORS eere sees eene B 1 APPENDIX C ALARM ADVISORY MESSAGE ccscsssssssssssssssesessessssesscsessesessesessessssessssasssseseesessesessesessssesers C 1 PXOUOIDUGIHEURUP D 1 APPENDIX E COMPRESSED POINT LOG SAMPLE LIMITS AND PRECISION
270. ensers and up to four suction groups The RX 100 is a low cost alternative to the RX 300 with fewer capabilities and a monochrome display The E2 RX is primarily designed to control tempera ture and defrost in refrigerated cases using either direct control connected to the E2 via I O boards or ESR8 lineup control boards or by using CC 100 case control boards connected via the LonWorks Network Table 1 1 shows the differences between capabilities The E2 Refrigeration Controller for the RX 300 and RX 400 Capabilities Analog Combiner N oo 0 Analog Import Point 0 Analog Sensor Control 24 Anti Sweat QN gt Case Control Circuit CC100 Case Suction CC100 Liquid Control CCB Condenser Control Link ACC Control Link Case Disp Control Link RSC CS100 Ckt Suction CT Drive jj EX EX EX EA E N oo Digital Combiner N AR HN AR Digital Sensor Control Discus E2 Alarm Panel Energy Meter AR Enhanced Suction Group ESR8 ESR Control Flexible Combiner 64 128 128 16 16 64 Table 1 1 RX 100 RX 300 and RX 400 Comparison N Heat Cool Control Holiday Schedule i Introduction 1 1 RX RX Infrared Leak Detection 1 Logging Group Loop Sequence Control Modular Chiller Control MultiFlex ESR Performance Alert Power Monitoring P
271. epre sentative at 770 425 2724 for more information about software licensing Introduction 1 7 amp e 2 Hardware Overview This section gives an overview of the E2 the hard ware and how it communicates across the I O and Eche lon Networks to control an entire system 2 1 E2Hardware The E2 controller is programmed to monitor and com mand all aspects of a refrigeration or building environ mental control system The E2 uses both an RS485 I O Network and a LonWorks Network to gather data from input devices communicate with other E2s and activate or deactivate loads In general an E2 control network will consist of the following components 1 E2 The brain of the control network which performs all necessary computations and sends commands to the output devices that control the system 2 Input Boards Transfer readings to the E2 Output Boards Banks of relays digital pulse outputs or analog outputs which the E2 may use to control loads 4 Smart Boards Boards such as case controllers for refrigeration or rooftop controllers for building control that perform control functions for an individual case or rooftop unit and send the data to the E2 forlogging and alarm purposes 5 Modem For remote communication via phone if necessary 6 Network Wiring Wiring that connects the E2 to other E2s and all the input output and smart boards 7 Sensors and Loads The eyes and
272. er may haveup to 16 override sensors either temperature or pressure that allow the condenser to be overridden to fast recovery mode See Section 11 2 5 Fast Recovery 11 2 3 Fan Control Condenser Control applications can control three dif ferent kinds of fans single speed fans up to 12 stages two speed fans and variable speed fans All fan types are controlled by PID control in other words the Condenser Control application generates a percentage from 0 to 100 that corresponds to the amount of total fan power that should be active Single speed fans translate the PID percentage into a percentage of total fan capacity For example if the PID percentage is 75 then 75 of all condenser fan stages will be ON Two speed fans use Cut In Cut Out setpoints to trans late the percentage into an OFF LO or HI fan state Variable speed fans simply use the percentage to determine the fan speed Thus a 51 PID percentage will result in the fan running at 51 maximum speed VS SS combined fan setup is for the combination ofa variable speed fan with single speed fans First under PID control the variable speed VS fan turns on Then as the PID percentage rises above VS fan s maximum speed the E2 switches on additional single speed fan stages 11 2 4 Condenser Split Mode The E2 is capable of operating condensers in a special mode that reduces its condensing capacity This special mode is called split mode Split mo
273. er set point This will cause the fan to switch to HIGH speed when stage 3 1s activated Likewise when stage 3 is deac tivated the fan speed will switch from HIGH to LOW You may choose a different switch over setpoint for occupied heating occupied cooling unoccupied heating and unoccupied cooling modes When the AHU is in dehumidification mode the AHU Control application will ignore the fan speed settings of the active stages and switch to a user specified dehumidi fication speed usually LOW Continuous Two Speed Fan Operation When All Stages Are OFF When the fan is operating in Continuous mode and all heating and cooling stages are OFF the fan speed will default to a user specified speed You may choose a differ ent default speed for both occupied and unoccupied opera tion 11 6 4 3 Variable Speed Fans Variable speed fans may operate at any percentage of its maximum speed The method AHU Control uses to determine the speed percentage is dependent on whether the heat and cool outputs are staged or modulating Variable Speed Fan Operation For staged AHU outputs each stage must be pro grammed with its own speed percentage setpoint The AHU Control application looks at all of the active stages takes the highest speed percentage setpoint and operates the fan at this speed For example if cool stage 1 is active with a 30 speed percentage setpoint the fan will likewise operate at 3096 speed If a second sta
274. erated Limit Exceeded User The power measurement taken by a Power Monitor ISD Discharge Temp Trip ISD Suction Pressure Trip ISD No 3 Phase On Start ISD No Command Communica ing or Demand Control application is higher than the programmed demand setpoint Link To Output Bad No Output 5 valid could not be made between an E2 appli cation and an output assigned to it Last Off Time Expired 99 Notice or alarm generated in digital generic alarming Last On Time Expired Notice or alarm generated digital generic alarming rrigation pipe Teak detected Log Data Loss SRAM Data Bad 50 memory error has resulted in lost log data Log Stamp Loss Flash Data Bad 50 A memory error has resulted in lost log time stamp data Log Stamp Loss SRAM Data Bad 50 A memory error has resulted in lost log time stamp data Logging Group Stuck No Memory 15 A Logging Group is unable to save logging data because there is not enough memory Appendix C Alarm Advisory Messages C 9 0 0 0 0 Default Lost Log Data CRC Error gt internal error has occurred E2 resulting in lost log data Low Voltage ag e backup battery that keeps the time and date resi UE on the E2 main board may need to be replaced Low Limit User An HVAC application AHU Zone 100 or ARTC MultiFlex RTU has a temperature below one of its heating setpoints Low Limit Notice so Low Superheat T tiflex
275. erating normally E2 and Blank Solid ON E2 is booting up E2 PROCESSOR Face E2 Easter blinks per second Indi cates an error condition with the hardware or firmware Green D18 ON E2 is booting up Boot Status LED Table 2 3 Main Board CPU LED s Status Keyboard LED Green D5 1 blink every two seconds 1 sec General Sta ond ON 1 second OFF Status is tus LED normal 2 2 I O Network Boards 4 blinks per second A flash and or crystal problem has been de and Peripherals tected Board should be replaced Table 2 4 Keyboard LED s Status 2 2 1 The Gateway Board Figure 2 5 Mounting the Internal Modem Board 2 1 5 PC 104 Peripherals The Internal Modem Previous Genera tion Processor Board ging the modem into the PC 104 slot Failure to do so can damage the modem and void the warranty CAUTION Power down the 2 before plug The E2 s internal modem mounts in the PC 104 slot located at the top left of the E2 main board See Figure 2 5 Disconnect power to the unit and carefully plug the male pins on the back of the modem card into the E2 s PC 104 slot Use the standoffs and screws supplied with the Hand Held Terminal Jack Receiver Bus Term Jumper modem card to secure the card to the main board as Net RS485 Receiver Bus Network shown in Figure 2 5 When finished restore power to the He Net Status LED Jo Net Term Jumpers Dip
276. es are the recommended wire for connecting between the E V center tapped transformer and MultiFlex ESR boards Earth ground the E C GND center tapped 240 208 terminal of each board 120 Power Wiring Types 14 AWG Belden 9495 PRIMARY SIDE SECONDARY SIDE 18 AWG Belden 9493 ECT MODBUS The RS485 Network and Hardware Setup 6 13 ee XEV22D TO E2 INSTALLATION GUIDE 18 19 20 21 XEV22D HOT KEY 1 Connect the MODBUS Network to the RS 485 Connector on the E2 PIB board Belden 8641 recommended 2 Note to wire the RS 485 polarity at the E2 in the reverse of the XEV22D device 3 Position the three termination jumpers to the UP terminated position to provide RS 485 termination at the E2 4 Do not connect the shield of the MODBUS network to the E2 PIB center terminal Instead use a 100 ohm 7 watt resistor to connect the MODBUS cable shield to earth ground 5 At the XEV22 device wire the MODBUS cable to the RS 485 terminals and connect the MODBUS shield to the pin 16 terminal 6 Terminate the end of the MODBUS network at the last device on the daisy chain with the MODBUS termination block P N 535 2711 or by connecting a 150 ohm resistor between the MODBUS terminals 637 4890 COM4 ON E2 PIB RS 485 OV WIRE WHITE TO WIRE BLACK TO OBSERVE WIRE vj m COLOR POLAR
277. es supplied with the valves or use Belden 9418 four conductor 18AWG wire ow NOTE A wire run may not be longer than 150 4 ft using Belden 9418 If the stepper valves have block style connectors cut the ends off and attach the terminal plugs supplied with the ESRS to the wire ends 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ Emerson WHITE Flow BLACK lt Controls ESR BLUE d RED TOP OF BOARD Pin 1 Figure 9 18 ESR8 Valve Wiring NOTE For Sporlan CDS wire the same as 4 Emerson Flow Controls ESR but use green wire in place of blue wire ESRS Valve Output Wiring Input and Output Setup 9 17 10 Quick Start This section covers what to do when you are program ming a new E2 for the first time The section includes log ging on specifying information about I O boards and application types and other topics related to E2 program ming and navigation 10 1 Logging On User Login Password Copyright c 2882 2885 Computer Process Controls Inc All rights reserved This product and system including protocols user interface and algorithms is protected by copyright law intellectual property law and international treaties Figure 10 1 User Login Dialog Box When the E2 is powered up for the first time the first screen displayed after initialization is the User Login screen 1 Enter USER in the Username field Enter 2 Press mall 3 Enter
278. es this state to a set of minimum ON and OFF times If the requested light state turns ON the lights before the prescribed minimum ON time or turns OFF the lights before the prescribed minimum OFF time the Minimum ON OFF cell will delay the command until the mini mum ON or minimum OFF time has elapsed If ON and OFF delays are specified the cell delays ON OFF commands it receives from the Schedule Interface cell It processes commands for manual bypass ing of the light state When the Bypass input is any value other than NONE the cell ignores the light state command input all minimum ON OFF times and all ON OFF delays and bypasses the light state to the digital value of the Bypass input The digital output of this cell controls the I O board output point that activates and deactivates the lights 11 10 8 The Proof Cell The Proof cell verifies that the lights are turning ON and OFF as commanded by the Lighting Schedule applica tion The Proof cell compares the digital command sent to the I O output that controls the lights with a digital input from a proof checking device like a digital light level sen sor If the two inputs are not equal for an amount of time 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ longer than the programmed proof delay the Proof cell turns its Proof output ON to signify a failure has occurred The Proof cell will deactivate the Proof output if the proof failure has been clearedlonger than the programmed
279. et the baud rate The user associates the various hardware devices with the COM ports listed under the Serial tab Five COM ports have user configurable values such as baud rate and con nection type settings Pre Sets COMI is pre set for serial connection COM3 is pre set with a modem only connection type The COMS con nection is a non configurable E2 keyboard port Overview Serial Device and Soft ware Setup After the COM card has been connected to the E2 set up the associated COM portin the Serial Connection Man ager 5 3 BX 466 Unit 2 SETUP CS Peer Neturk E C6 Web Server C7 System General Setup GENERAL SERU Value COM1 Connection Serial Baud COM2 Connection 10 Net Baud 9688 baud COM3 Connection Modem Baud 1 115 2 Kbaud Modem Type CPC 33 6K Internal Modem Init RTS8 1S10 8E8U1 amp D2 amp K G amp Y GWG Fax Init ATSG 1S10 46E 6U1 amp D2eK GY GWG Dur 188 Pause Dur 2 Connection Lennox Connection Modbus z 19 2 Kbaud Data Size 8 Parity None Stop Bits 1 F1 PREU TAB NEXT TAB F3 EDIT LOOK UP F5 CANCEL Figure 5 1 Serial Configuration Screen NOTE If a COM card is not connected to the 5 E2 its associated COM port will not be visible in the Serial Configuration screen Serial Configuration 5 1 2 COM PORT ASSOCIATIONS E2 Enclosure Right Side E2 Modem Expansion COM Card Mounted Above PIB
280. etpoint or will turn off immediately if the last change was more than Fan Off Delay Additional fans will be staged off at Fan Off Delay intervals while a decrease in capacity is called for 11 19 2 Temperature Differential TD Strategy TD strategy attempts to maintain a constant difference i e TD setpoint between the temperature of the refriger ant and the ambient temperature The TD setpoint allows you to set the constant that is to be maintained TD strategy uses drop leg temperature for the refriger ant temperature and plenum temperature for the ambient temperature The formula for determining the TD control value is TD dropleg temp dropleg offset plenum temp DropLeg Offset is a user configured parameter to allow fine tun ing of the drop leg temperature measurement In TD condenser control operation when the TD rises above TD setpoint TD deadband 2 an increase in fan capacity is called for Similarly when the TD drops below TD setpoint TD deadband 2 a decrease in fan capac ity is called for TD can control up to four condenser fans TD Control 11 19 3 TD Control Fail Safes TD Control operates as long as plenum and drop leg temperature inputs are available and the drop leg tempera ture remains within a minimum maximum range config ured by the user Otherwise TD control uses various fail safe modes to control the condenser fans In the event drop leg temperature is not available
281. etup menu 3 Select Network Summary and the Network 12 10 2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual Summary screen opens css NOTE Jump directly to the Network Sum mary screen by pressing the Wil and keys together For a complete list of Hot Keys press Alt and the gt keys together 12 9 Checking Status Screens F1 SUCTION F2 CONDENSER F3 CIRCUITS SENSORS FS SETUP Figure 12 18 RX Function Button Menu The E2 RX controller has four status screens that are each accessible from the Home screen by pressing the corresponding function key see Figure 12 18 The Suc tion Group status screen the Condenser status screen the Circuits status screen and the Sensors status screen can all be accessed by pressing one of the function keys BZW if the application has been added to the E2 Suction Group Status Screen Press Ball The suction group selected will be dis played with information such as active stages discharge temperature current setpoint associated condenser and other general information Condenser Status Screen Press ZB Information on the condenser such as con trol setpoints detailed fan status and other general infor mation will be displayed Circuit Status Screen Press BM Select which circuit status to view with Enter the arrow buttons and press Information such as current temperature current state individual case informa tion and o
282. etup Screen Setpoints When setting up an application using a Setup screen see Section 10 7 2 Status Screens all inputs and outputs that are set up to be logged will be marked with an L on the right hand side From the Setup screen you may access the logs of these inputs by pressing 12 11 1 3 Setting Up Input and Output Pointers 67 31 69 RX 366 Unit 3 13 42 62 Use Ctrl X to Select CN Tabs SETUP ALARM Inputs SUCTION PRESS SUCTION SUCTION STE RECLAIM STA 1 Board Point DEFROST INH 2 Ar Application Property DISCHARGE 3 Fixed Value DEMAND SHED EMERGENCY 0 ENABLE Press desired selection F5 CANCEL Figure 12 26 Pointer Format Box Pointers allow a property to get or send its value to another property and are a way to transfer information or values input and outputs from one application to another within a controller For example if you are setting up a Suction Pressure pointer you are specifying the location of where the Suc Viewing Logs and Graphs tion Pressure is coming from Note that An output pointer can be connected to multiple input pointers Asingle input pointer cannot be connected to mul tiple output pointers Pointers can be set up for all applications To set up pointers from a Setup screen Press SETUP from the desired applica tion s Status screen If starting from the Home screen move the cursor to the desired applica tion s
283. etwork and Hardware Setup 6 1 2 amp Board Translation Boards That Type Match Board Type X Y 8 lt 256 PAK 32 MultiFlex PAK rack MultiFlex PAK controller ESR 31 MultiFlex ESR valve MultiFlex ESR controller MultiFlex CUB II Single condensing unit controller one compressor and up to 4 condenser fans Table 6 1 Board Types and Boards Included in Each Type 6 1 2 MultiFlex Plus Board The MultiFlex plus board contains a replacement RS485 transceiver chip that presents less of a load on the network than a non plus board This increases the maxi mum number of devices that can be placed on the network but not the number of board types an Einstein controller can communicate with The MultiFlex plus board now accounts for only 1 8 the load of a non plus board with 32 total devices on the network one Einstein controller 31 boards This new conversion allows for the placement of 256 devices on the network one Einstein controller 255 boards The num ber of boards an Einstein controller can support is increased from 31 up to 255 using MultiFlex plus boards only In other words the number of I O net devices are no longer restricted by the I O net 31 node limitation NOTE The MultiFlex plus board replaces the old style MultiFlex boards and is currently being shipped 6 1 2 1 Plus boards are always identified with a plus sign that appears on the plastic insulating cover on the
284. ewpoint Probe Mounting 3 5 10 Light Level Sensor 3 5 10 1 Location The Light Level Sensor P N 206 0002 should be located facing away fromdirect sunlight preferably faing north in the Northern Hemisphere or south in the Southern Hemisphere 3 5 10 2 Mounting The light level sensor is not supplied with mounting hardware The sensor should be mounted horizontally through the knockout of a standard weather resistant junc tion box Figure 3 29 shows a typical mounting configu ration Sensors and Transducers 26509014 Figure 3 29 Light Level Sensor Typical Mounting 3 5 11 Liquid Level Sensors Retail Solutions probe type liquid level sensor P N 207 1000 is usually installed by the refrigeration and equipment manufacturer If a replacement sensor must be installed in the field refer to the instructions supplied with the device or consult the equipment manufacturer 3 5 12 Refrigerant Leak Detectors Retail Solutions supplies the Refrigerant Leak Detec tor System asa stand alone unit that monitors refrigeration leaks in up to sixteen zones Consult the Refrigerant Leak Detector Installation and Operation Manual P N 026 1309 for mounting and installation instructions Mounting 3 11 ee 4 E2Hardware Setup 4 1 Setting up the E2 4 1 2 Processor Board 4 1 1 Enclosure Main Processor Board Power Interface Board PIB LEGEND LCD Connector 8 Reset and Clean Out Buttons
285. f 4AO analog out put boards on this E2 s I O Network IRLDS Controllers Enter the number of leak detec tor units on this E2 s I O Network Options will vary depending on the type of controller used Set Up I O Network Quick Start 10 15 10 13 2 Checking Online Status BX 466 Unit 2 Network Summary Network Address E2 Unit 666352396568 BX488 Bldg 2 70B17 This Controller E16AI_661 Echelon 1681 ESRO 881 Echelon 8R0 E16RI 882 Echelon 1681 E16RI 803 Echelon 16AI ETIN Echelon 1681 E16RI 885 Echelon 16AI E8RO_662 Echelon 8 0 E8R0_663 Echelon 8 0 EINE Echelon 8 0 _805 Echelon 8 0 RRTC RTU 881 RRTC RTU RCB 861 MultiFlex STATUS DSP_661 Status Display E2 Unit61 CX488 C Store u3 RX400 Refrig I0Net 1 I0Net 1 No Revu Ethernet 1 E2 Unit E2 Unit 2 78B17 2 78B17 F2 STRTUS F3 NET STATUS Figure 10 24 Network Summary Screen You can check all boards that are on eitherthe Echelon Network E2 controllers or the I O Network from the Net work Status screen See Figure 10 24 The Network Summary screen displays information such as the Subnet and Node addresses for each board and the status of Eche lon and I O boards To get to the Network Summary Screen 1 Press to open the Main Menu e y e 2 SS S stem C nfiguratio 3 I ress etwork Setup 4 Press Network Summary From the Network Summary screen you can see the total E2 devices online or offli
286. f the year To determine if youhave reached the demand limit the power company arbitrarily monitors a consumer s energy consumption for a fixed period of time This monitoring period is called a demand window Power companies can generally tell you how long a demand window period lasts but you ll never know when the measurement will take place How Power Monitoring Calculates Demand To help you make sure you do notuse more power than the demand limit the E2 s Power Monitoring applications determine your current KW usage in much the same way as your power company Power Monitoring uses a watt hour transducer input to determine the current KW usage Multiple KW values are averaged together into demand windows much like the ones power companies use Then depending on how the application is configured the most current KW value is compared to a demand set point The current KW value in this case may be either the instantaneous value read by the power transducer or it may be the average of all KW transducer readings taken over 1 minute intervals This setpoint should be equal to or slightly lower than the demand limit set by your power company In short since E2 doesn t know when the power com pany s demand window will begin the E2 measures power as if the demand window could happen at any time This way E2 can more accurately determine when your site is approaching or exceeding the demand limit Shed Mode If the
287. fully Try the override com mand again If this alarm persists call Retail Solu tions service Override Operation Didn t Take 20 The E2 tried to carry out an override and was unsuc Override State Not Restored 50 An overridden input or output has remained in the site longor than is programmed Pad Memory Corrupted Reboot 30 A problem with memory has resulted a reset of the NM Part Cnfg Loss Ptr 15 Due to an internal error part of E2 s configuration a_i a eee Appendix C Alarm Advisory Messages C 11 Default After a power failure or reset E2 tried to recover log data from its memory but the log data was corrupted E2 cleared all data from its point logs and started OVer Point Log Stuck No Memory 15 A Point Log 1s unable to save new values because Point Logs Not Restored The point logs stored in memory were not restored BRENNEN Or ME A Suction Group s interna isi of possible compres sor combinations became temporarily invalid requir A product temperature probe a standard or case controlled circuit has measured a product tempera ture above the low limit setpoint A product temperature probe in a standard or case controlled circuit has measured a product tempera ture below the low limit setpoint Program ID mismatc 20 Open Echelon controller Program ID does not matc expected Program ID Proof Fai User A proof checking deviceis registering a failure in one of the Ap
288. g input in relation to the set points Digital Sensor Control modules read the values from one or more digital sensors combine them using a series of logical commands and operate a digital output such as a relay based on the result of the logical combination 11 12 2 Analog Sensor Control On a basic level an Analog Sensor Control module performs three functions COMBINER Up to four analog inputs are com bined into a single analog value CUT IN CUT OUT CONTROL The combined input value is compared to a Cut In Cut Out set point Based on this comparison a digital output will be turned ON or OFF ALARMING Alarms and notices can be generated based on the combined value of the inputs and its relation to a set of high and low alarm and notice setpoints Sensor Control 11 12 3 Cut In Cut Out Setpoint Con trol Cut In Cut Out setpoints work differently depending upon whether the Cut In Cut Out setpoint is higher Cut In Higher Than Cut Out J Setpoint Cut Out Setpoint Figure 11 22 Cut In Setpoint Higher than Cut Out When the Cut In setpoint is higher than the Cut Out setpoint the Sensor Control output turns ON when the sensor input goes higher than the Cut In setpoint The Sen sor Control output remains ON until the input falls below the Cut Out setpoint at which time the output turns OFF See Figure 11 22 for an illustration Cut In Lower Than Cut Out Cut Out Setpoint
289. g portion of the 30 second period Once the period has ended the PWM Cell reads the PID output again and the process is repeated 11 14 Time Scheduling and Holidays Time Schedules are used for timed activation and deactivation of loads and for providing occupied and unoccupied building times for occupancy driven systems such as Sensor Control Lighting and HVAC There are four different types of schedules used by the E2 Brief description of each of these are given below Master schedules are the main scheduling unit used by the E2 A master schedule consists of up to 15 sched uled ON OFF event pairs which may be programmed to occur on any individual date and time or series of dates and times Master schedules may also drive slave sched ules Slave schedules are similar to master schedules except their operation is driven by a master schedule Slave schedules generally are alterations of the master schedule s event times The ON OFF times in a slave schedule may take place either at specific defined times of the day or relative to the times given in the master sched ule For example a master schedule may say The build ing is occupied from 8 00 a m to 9 00 p m while one of its slave schedules says Dim the building lights 15 min utes before the store closes Slave schedules may also be mastered by other slave schedules to create a series of stacked schedules Holiday schedules are used to tell master and slave
290. g section containing active KW and average power information Light Schedules Section In the center of the BX Home screen is ON and OFF status information for light schedules Air Handling Units Section Located at the top right hand corner of the BX Home screen the AHU section shows the number of AHUS tem perature state and ASP information for each Zones Section Directly below the AHU section is the Zones section which shows the number of zones temperature whether or not the application is in occupied mode CSP and HSP Sensor Control Section Sensor Control is at the bottom right hand corner of the BX Home screen and contains analog and digital sen sors value command and status information 12 1 3 Screen 109 13 05 WUAC CONTROL INSIDE RH NONE SPACE MONEHO Cc OFF STATE UNOCC DENUN IMACTU DEWPOINT anua SPACE STATE DEHUN INACTU IN FAM OFF E AICHTING LICHT LEVEL NONE BYPASS OUTPUT SCHEDLEGI NOTACT orf 20 TIME SCHLDLEU2 NOTRCI or OFF OFF NOTACT OFF NOTACT OFF DIGITAL SEMSO3 MOTACT OFF 2 LIGHTING F3 cincurTS seMsons FS SETUP LEGEND 1 Lighting 5 Anti Sweat 2 HVAC Control 6 Sensor Control 3 Refrigeration 7 Time Schedules 4 Demand Control Figure 12 3 CX Home Screen Lighting Control Section The lo
291. ge with a setpoint of 50 were to become active the fan speed would increase to 50 For each heating and cooling stage you may specify both occupied and unoccupied speed percentage setpoints Dehumidification with VS Fans When in dehumidification mode a user defined slow down percentage is subtracted from the variable speed fan percentage This percentage will continue to be subtracted until the AHU exits dehumidification mode Air Handling Units AHU 11 6 5 Economizer Control Economizer dampers on AHUs are used to bring out side air into the building for use in cooling When temper ature and humidity conditions are favorable the economization dampers are opened and outside air is allowed to flow into the AHU Economization is generally used by the AHU just as a cool stage would be in Temper ature Control if cooling is needed and conditions are favorable for economization the dampers will open and economization will begin If more cooling is needed the cooling stages would then cycle on as normal The E2 supports control of both two position digital and variable position analog economizer dampers 11 6 5 1 Economization Enable Before the AHU Control application may open econo mization dampers it must first determine if the outdoor air conditions are favorable for economization There are six possible ways the AHU Control may do this 1 Enthalpy Switch An enthalpy switch is a digital device that is
292. gin to the controller level 4 password or higher 2 Press BP followed by 8 navigate to the System Tests screen 3 Move the cursor to the Battery Test field Press for Yes and press ES The dialog box that appearswill show the CPU Battery status OK or FAIL and the Battery Switch position ON or OFF If the CPU Battery is OK and the switch position is ON the battery icon will disappear Otherwise the bat tery should be replaced or the switch set to ON 4 4 4 Battery Replacement Qual ified Technicians Only To replace the battery remove it from the battery clip E2 Hardware Setup 4 5 and replace it with an identical3 6V battery obtained from or approved by Retail Solutions DO NOT USE AA BAT TERIES IN THIS BATTERY SLOT After replacing the battery you must tell E2 the battery has been replaced so it can reset its battery life counter 1 Login to E2 level 4 password or higher 2 Press o followed by to navigate to the System Tests screen 3 Move the cursor to the Replace Battery field Press for Yes then press 4 Make sure the new battery is in place and press If successful the battery icon should disappear from the top of the screen If it is still there check for proper battery placement verify the battery enable switch posi tion and repeat this procedure 4 6 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ E2 INSTALLATION GUIDE
293. gitesgeves a e a a a a a a a 12 9 12 8 CHECKING BOARDS ONLINE 03 sutessscennsanesesetsuteeaevcusatnedvonteshencovephenutetseninnesnvuedetnensdeentebegurosgesenstorsunesheuseuwsarsanetios 2 10 12 9 CHECKING STATUS SCREENS e e eet a 12 10 12 10 ALARMS 12 11 12 10 1 Accessing the Alarm Advisory Log aee eee to ee ee re I eer E E 12 11 12 10 2 Viewing the Controller Advisory Log eite mter eite eee eripe de bote 12 11 12 10 3 Date and Time ior ata a WA BAA Neat I e p 12 11 T2104 ais 12 11 2105 tet BR RE ER d e n e n a Rd t eise Yet 12 12 12 10 6 Area Ctrl Application Property i eese ipee o met EY ERR RR Ere HE 12 12 12 10 7 Advisory Message ii ie ot E eese a e d e eei Nees Ped ive e ebbe ee pese 12 12 12 10 8 Acknowledging Resetting and Clearing Log Entries eese eene 12 12 12 10 81 Acknowledging eere erre REUNIR ER pde eedem 12 12 12 10 82 Resetting e nasa n E rer ba Ode 12 13 12 10 8 3 Clearing i cnp o veces ER I lp e ERU CO BOTE DU 12 13 12 10 9 Facility Status Display FSD Alarms cesses eee eterne trennen tenente treten rennen nre 12 14 12 1 VIEWING LOGS AND GRAPHS e rire eet trarre ee eain pere nrbe bee bor Eee e
294. h four analog output connec tions that provide a variable voltage signal to any of four analog devices that may be controlled by a single E2 Two 4 20mA outputs are provided for channels 1 and 2 The 4 20mA outputs provide a variable current for applications that are either externally powered or that require power from the 4AO board LEGEND AC Power Input Connection Address and Baud Rate Dip Switch Transmitting TX and Receiving RX LEDs 7 Alarm and Status Indicator LEDs Network Connection Analog Outputs 4 Terminating Resistance Jumpers 4 20mA Channels 2 Hand held Terminal HHT Jack Figure 2 13 440 Analog Output Board P N 815 3030 The previous generation 4AO Analog Output Board P N 810 3030 Figure 2 14 is configured with four ana log output connections that provide a variable voltage sig nal to any of four analog devices that may be controlled by a single E2 LEGEND Address and Baud Rate Dip Switch Analog Outputs 4 places Divider Circuits 4 places Po ver input Connection work Connection LEU Power Indicator Terminating Resistance Jumpers 26501007 Figure 2 14 440 Analog Output Board DISCONTINUED 2 10 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual amp e 2 2 7 8DO Digital Output Board and PMAC II Anti Sweat Controller For control of anti sweat heaters Retail Solutions sup plies the 8DO Digital Output board P N 810 3050 The 8DO h
295. hange Rate Degrees Centigrade Per Minute 50 50 0 00152604 6 889 6 889 0 055556 Degrees Fahrenheit Per Minute 90 90 0 00274688 12 12 0 1 Degrees Centigrade Per Hour 3 000 3 000 0 0915625 413 333 413 333 3 3333 Degrees Fahrenheit Per Hour 5 400 5 400 0 164813 744 744 6 Pressure Pascals 100 000 20 000 000 306 734 100 000 4 200 000 17339 Kilopascals 100 20 000 0 306734 100 4 200 17 3387 Pounds Per Square Inch 14 50 2 901 0 0444881 14 5038 609 160 2 51477 Bars 1 200 0 00306734 1 42 0 173387 Pascals low readings 1 250 5 000 0 0953776 1 250 3 500 19 1532 Inches of Water 5 02 20 0732 0 000382906 5 018 14 0512 0 0768931 Centimeters of Water 12 75 50 9870 0 000972604 12 7468 35 6909 0 195313 Differential Pressure Delta Pascals 2 000 000 2 000 000 61 0417 500 000 500 000 4032 26 Delta Kilopascals 2 000 2 000 0 0610417 500 500 4 03226 Delta Pounds Per Square Inch 290 08 290 076 0 00885336 72 5190 72 5190 0 584831 Delta Bars 20 20 0 000610417 5 5 0 0403226 Delta Pascals low readings 3 000 3 000 0 0915625 1 000 1 000 8 06452 Delta Inches of Water 12 04 12 0439 0 000367590 4 01463 4 01463 0 03237606 Delta Centimeters of Water 30 59 30 5922 0 000933700 10 1974 10 1974 0 08223710 Humidity Relative Humidity 0 100 0 00152604 0 100 0 403226 Light Level Lux 0 25 000 0 381510 0 10 000 40 3226 Foot Candles 0 2 323 5 0 0354576 0 929 400 3 74758 Electrical Voltage Volts 3 276 8 3 276 1 0 1 0 496 2 Electric
296. hard coded in a chip on the board In order for the E2 to begin communications with a unit controller or another E2 it must know the device s ID number When a device is commissioned its 12 digit code is either entered by hand into the E2 via the front panel key board or sent across the network to the E2 using the device s service button Once the E2 knows the device s 12 digit ID it establishes communication and gives the device its user defined subnet and node address From that point on the E2 uses only the subnet and node address to communicate with the device As mentioned above there are two ways in which a device may be commissioned No one way is better than the other in terms of effectiveness but one of the methods may be less difficult than the other depending on the type of installation MODBUS Commissioning If commissioning a MODBUS device and multiple MODBUS ports are available you will be prompted to select the appropriate network during the commissioning process 10 14 2 1 The Service Button Method To commission a device using the service button you must first set up the E2 to receive a service button signal and then press the service button on the device When the signal is received by the E2 the device will be commis sioned To set up the E2 to receive a service button signal move the cursor to the Controller Name field ofthe record you wish to set up and press SET ADDRESS Quick Start 10
297. he application works and instructions on how to program it 11 10 1 Overview The Lighting Schedule application provides an inter face for Cut In Cut Out control based on light level simple time scheduling with or without use of external Time Schedule applications proofing minimum on off times solar control and output dimming control Generally the Lighting Schedule application is designed to follow a digital command from a time sched ule to determine when the lights should be ON or OFF At the same time Lighting Schedule looks at the value of a light level sensor compares it to a set of Cut In Cut Out Software Overview 11 29 setpoints and overrides the schedule as the real time light needed AND saving energy by keeping lights OFF when ing conditions warrant As a result the light level sensor they are not necessary and schedule both work to provide adequate light when 11 10 2 Functions of the Lighting Schedule Application Lighting Control Module MultiLogic 4 Combiner Offset Control RiselSet onset J Control Light Level LLEV a Method EI Interface Select Logic In ov ou Schedif P4 Logic In Use Alt Control w jic Occup cup E se M Min ed in with Delay w EM m slic Invert Output Min
298. he case has a sensor or switch configuration that cannot be satisfied by the default configuration When a valve other than an Emerson Flow Con trols ESR 12 ESR 20 or ESV is being used Each case controller is programmed by default to operate Emerson Flow Controls brand valves If the valve type is different the valve control parameters must be changedin the case controller software When the PID settings that determine the valve aperture or closure require alteration When necessary the case controller can be altered in either of two ways You can change settings in a case con troller application in E2 via the front screen Or you can use a Hand held Terminal to log in to the CC 100 or CS 100 directly and make temporary changes that will not be saved 11 4 14 Associating Case Controllers with Case Circuit Control Applica tions Before you can program a Case Control Circuit with the necessary parameters you must associate the appropri ate CC 100s CS 100s EC 2s and CCBs with the Case 11 16 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual Control Circuit application you will be programming To access the CC CS 100 Case Control Association Screen 1 Press for the Main Menu 2 Press for System Configuration 3 Press for the Network Setup menu 4 Press for Case Control Associations The Case Control Association screen should look like Figure 11 7 RX 466 Unit 3 CASE CTRL ASSOC 16 19 53 ALARM
299. he hole in the enclosure 3 10 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual MOUNTING BRACKETS Figure 3 26 Outdoor RH Sensor Exploded View 3 5 8 3 Duct mounted Insertion RH Probe Retail Solutions specs a duct mounted relative humid ity RH sensor P N 203 5771 with a 0 5VDC output for use in building control and anti sweat control applications using Retail Solutions input boards 1 Cut a small circular hole in the duct large enough for the sensor tube to fit through 2 Boltthe sensor enclosure against the outside of the duct wall so that the sensor element fits through the hole and into the duct The enclosure may be mounted horizontally as shown in Fig ure 3 27 or vertically The screws should be tight enough for the foam gasket around the bottom of the sensor to form an airtight seal between the hole in the duct wall and the outside air DUCT WALL NUT 7 MOUNTING BRACKETS Figure 3 27 Duct mounted RH Sensor Exploded View 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 3 5 9 3 5 9 1 The Dewpoint Probe P N 203 1902 should be located 4 to 6 feet from the floor with the probe pointing up It is recommended that the Dewpoint Probe be mounted in an area where it will be exposed only to minimal amounts of dust 3 5 9 2 Mount the probe using the standard switch cover sup plied with the unit as shown in Figure 3 28 Dewpoint Probe Location Mounting Figure 3 28 D
300. he memory along with the average value of the outdoor air temperature during the pre start or pre stop Over time collected K factor data will be sorted and combined into a table As a result by constantly observing and recording the results of previous pre starts and pre stops OSS will be able to intelligently guess how much time a pre start or pre stop mode should last based on the outside temperature AHU Control keeps track of three different kinds of K factors Heat K factor used to guess pre start dura tions for AHUS operating in heating mode Cool K factor used to guess pre start dura tions for AHUSs operating in cooling mode Coast K factor a measurement of the change in temperature when no heating or cooling is active This is used to determine pre stop durations for both heating and cool ing AHUs 11 28 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 11 7 13 Losing Contact With Zone Applications When a MultiFlex RTU or AHU loses contact with the Zone application to which it was assigned it is forced to operate in Stand Alone Mode Each of the different appli cations have different stand alone capabilities 11 7 14 Stand Alone MultiFlex RTUs The MultiFlex RTU uses its own occupied and unoccu pied heating and cooling setpoints when it operates in Stand Alone Mode These values are programmed through the MultiFlex RTU application and stored in the memory on the MultiFlex RTU board itself During Stand Alone Mode the Mul
301. hen a certain length of time is desired for watering Irrigation begins per cycle start time and lasts for all zone durations that are active for the current day For example ifa time of 30 minutes 0 30 is entered that zone will stay ON for 30 minutes and then shut OFF 11 21 2 3 Volume Under volume control enabled zones will be cycled until the set volume of water for each zone has been dis pensed for the current cycle or an amount of time has elapsed equal to the duration parameter This is a feature to prevent water runoff When irrigation is stopped for a zone due to elapsed time control will cycle to the next active zone 11 21 3 Cycle Scheduling Irrigation cycles can only be started during a user defined irrigation season The Season Source parameter allows the user to select how to determine the season by either using the Dates parameters or the Summer Winter input If the user selects Dates start and stop day and month parameters will become visible and are used to specify the season Each zone will have parameters to configure what days of the month it should participate in irrigation cycles If the user selects Summer Winter an input of the same name will become visible under the Inputs tab The sea son will be active when this input indicates Summer The Summer Winter input is automatically connected to the Global Data output of the same name If the season is not active the System status will be set to
302. hot gas 71 12 run off time 71 12 standard circuits 71 6 defrost states 71 6 defrost type 11 6 electric defrost 71 6 emergency defrost 71 7 pulsed defrost 1 7 termination 7 timed and reverse air 6 termination 3 pulsed defrost 11 13 temperature 71 13 timed off cycle 11 12 Dehumidification 5 Demand explanation of 1 42 Demand Control 71 33 Demand Defrost See Defrost demand Dewpoint Probe 3 11 location 3 11 mounting 3 11 Dewpoint Probe See Sensors Dewpoint Probe DHCP Enabled 70 11 Digital Discus Compressor 71 1 11 2 Digital Scroll Compressor Support 2 Digital Sensor Control 11 37 Dip Switches baud rate 6 3 input type 9 1 network settings 6 3 Discontinued boards 16Ale 2 11 8ROe 2 11 ESR8 2 12 Discus Compressor 11 2 Door Switches 11 7 E E2 I 1 blank face 3 3 Box to Box 5 capabilities connection to other 1 5 documentation 6 I 4 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual Echelon connectors 4 2 Echelon jumpers 4 2 installation instructions 4 7 mounting blank face 3 3 recessed mount 3 retrofit 3 2 standard mount 3 networking introduction to 4 Quick Start 10 1 repeater part number for manual 6 routers part number for manual 6 RS 232 Baud Rate 70 12 RS485 port 4 2 RS485 termination jumpers 4 2 specifications 2 2 user s guide 6 EC 2 Case Controller defined 2 11 detail 2 11 Echelon Network checking boards online 70 16 12 10 daisy chaining 8 7 device wiring 8 1
303. humidity based on a combination of each HVAC unit s space temperature and space humidity The fallback temperature and humidity set points to use in case the unit loses contact with its Zone application 11 7 3 Applications That May Be Connected To Zones There are three different HVAC applications that may be associated with a Zone application a MultiFlex RTU application a MultiFlex RCB application and an AHU application The MultiFlex RTU and RCB applications interface with the MultiFlex RTU and RCB I O Network boards that control rooftop units AHU applications use input and output points on the I O Network to control air handling units 11 7 3 1 MultiFlex RTU Board The MultiFlex RTU is a control board on the E2 s I O Network that controls the operation of a single rooftop HVAC unit This board has an on board processor with Zone Control numerous inputs relay outputs and 0 10VDC analog out puts and is designed for controlling advanced rooftop units with a large number of heat cool stages variable position economizers variable speed fans etc The E2 s MultiFlex RTU applications serve only two purposes to act as an interface between the user and the MultiFlex RTU processor and to allow communications between the MultiFlex RTU board and the Zone applica tion The MultiFlex RTU depends on the Zone application to provide temperature setpoints dehumidification and economization enabling and other information
304. ical order to 4 SELECT The sensor module reads an analog input which provides a numerical value from 1 to 4 This number determines AND The logical input value will be ON only when all sensor control inputs are ON If one or more of them are OFF then the logical input value will also be OFF OR The logical input value will be ON if one or more sensor control inputs are ON If all of them are OFF the logical input value will also be OFF XOR This combination strategy is exactly the same as OR except when all sensor control inputs are ON the logical input value will be OFF instead of ON VOTE If more than half of the sensor control inputs are ON the logical input value will be ON Otherwise if 50 or less of the sensor control inputs are OFF the logical input value will be OFF 11 13 Loop Sequence Con trol The Loop Sequence Control application s main func tion is to read the value of an analog input compare the 11 38 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee value to a setpoint and generate a single analog output value This output value is represented in three different forms a single analog value from 0 to 100 up to eight digital stage outputs and a digital pulse width modulation output The output value s are generated by a PID Control cell which takes into account both the input s instanta neous value and its rate and direction of change The PID Control algorithm is similar to the PID algorithm u
305. ication using alternate setpoints has risen above its programmed Lo Limit setpoint Appl Not Keeping Setpoint An Air Handling Unit or Heat Cool Heat Cool appli cation has not achieved setpoint for a prolonged period of time Application Cell Is Lost 15 An internal error has caused the loss of an entire Application Config Has Changed A user has changed the configuration of one of E2 Appendix C Alarm Advisory Messages C 1 Default Application Setpoint Has Changed a user has changed a setpoint in one of E2 s applica tions Application Was Created 99 JA user has created a new application in this E2 Application Was Deleted 99 Auser has deleted an existing application in this E2 been ON for a prolonged period of time suggesting a possible switch failure ART C MultiFlex Reset From 50 An ARTC MultiFlex RTU lost power and reset when Attempt To Write Past Mem EOB 5 The E2 attempted to write data to memory but the I 0 Average Log Stuck No Memory 5 The Average Log cannot be written because there 1s 0 not enough memory The modem on this E2 1s not functioning properly Battery backed memory lost 30 Battery backed memory loss not due to cleanout Batt Runtime Limit Battery runtime has exceeded 80 of the battery life time Binding Input To Output Failed 20 A valid connection could not be made between an input and an output BIOS BIOS Ext Update Failed 20 JAn update to the E2 s BIOS has failed
306. identically to the way it works in the Suc tion Group application Refer to Section 11 1 2 3 Float ing Setpoint Control 11 1 4 Hardware Overview An overview of the input and output devices that make up a Suction Group is shown in Figure 11 1 These devices should be wired to input and output boards in the manner outlined in Table 11 1 and Table 11 2 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ CIRCUIT LIQUID RECEIVER CASE TEMP C FOR FLOATING Suction Pressure 100 Ib Eclipse see Table 9 1 on transducer page 9 3 Discharge Pres 500 Ib Eclipse see Table 9 1 on sure transducer page 9 3 lt 2 LIQUID LINE SOLENOID CONDENSER Oil Pressure E 2 n lt DISCHARGE PRESSURE SUCTION PRESSURE 200 Ib Eclipse see Table 9 1 on transducer page 9 3 Temperature see Table 9 1 on page 9 3 Digital see Table 9 1 on page 9 3 Table 11 1 Suction Group Inputs Case Circuit Temperature Oil Reset Switches OIL RESET SWITCHES J m OIL lt PRESSURE 26507005 Figure 11 1 Diagram of a Suction Group Wire Output Output Device Board Contacts Ser Fansat Switch to to Compressor N C N C up If you want acompressor to be OFF during network power loss use N O failsafes instead N O down These fail safe settings are specifically for unloader
307. ield is set to 30 seconds each fan is staged ON in 30 second intervals until all fans are ON or until the TD falls back below the setpoint For the Condenser Fan Off Delay setpoint fans are cycled OFF when the TD is below the setpoint at the rate set for Condenser Fan Off Delay In other words if this field is set to 30 seconds each fan is staged OFF in 30 sec ond intervals until all fans are OFF or until the TD rises back above the setpoint 11 19 6 Inputs The Drop Leg Temperature input is the current drop leg temperature used for TD control The Plenum Temperature input provides the current value of the ambient temperature used for TD calculation 11 19 7 Alarms For Drop Leg High alarm the alarm setpoint is the drop leg temperature that if exceeded will cause an alarm to be generated If you wish to generate an alarm for high drop leg temperature enter the desired setpoint Other wise to disable this alarm leave the value set to NONE For Drop Leg Delay if the drop leg alarming feature is used enter the amount of time the drop leg temperature must be higher than the setpoint before an alarm will be generated HHH MM 11 48 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee For TD High alarm the TD setpoint is the value of the TD calculation that if exceeded will cause an alarm to be generated If you wish to generate an alarm for high TD enter the desired setpoint Otherwise to disable this alarm leave the value
308. ification 11 7 11 1 MultiFlex RTUs and RCBs Once the MultiFlex RTU and RCB applications acknowledge the signal to begin dehumidification it will search its outputs for a dehumidification device If one is configured this device will be turned ON Afterwards cool stages will be cycled ON up to a user defined maxi mum number of stages until all stages are ON or until the Zone application signals dehumidification is complete When dehumidification is complete the stages will cycle OFF followed by the dehumidification device 11 7 11 2 AHUs AHUS use a special dehumidification algorithm based on the Proportional loop in PID control When dehumidifi cation is enabled by the Zone application the AHU appli cation will activate a percentage of its total cool stage capacity the amount of which depends on how close the current relative humidity is to the setpoint See Section 11 6 Air Handling Units AHU for more information 11 7 12 Optimum Start Stop OSS emissum NOTE OSS applies only to Zone applications 4 that use a time schedule to change occupancy states Overrides initiated by the digital BY PASS TO OCC or BYPASS TO UNOCC inputs will not initiate pre starts or pre stops Optimum Start Stop OSS is a feature that works alongside the Zone application s occupied and unoccupied temperature control modes OSS takes control of heating and cooling several minutes before the Zone application is scheduled to change occupanc
309. igerant and gradually establishes a differential between the coil in and coil out temperatures When the Recovery Mode ends the superheat will be relatively close to the setpoint at this Software Overview 11 11 time Superheat Control will begin Recovery Mode always lasts for a specific number of seconds The case controller determines the duration based on past performance of the evaporator during previous Recovery Modes Thermostatic Expansion Valves TXVs As an alternative to regulating superheat using EEVs case controllers also support cases that use mechanical thermostatic expansion valves TXVs When TXVs are being used the case controllers use only Temperature Control to turn refrigeration ON and OFF Superheat Control is disabled since it is assumed the TXV is tak ing care of the superheat 11 4 3 2 EEPRs Suction Stepper The CC 100H CS 100 and CCB suction stepper and lineup control case temperature from the suction side of the evaporator by using an EEPR to regulate suction pres sure Suction side control differs from liquid side control in that Superheat Control is not used In liquid side control the valve aperture is controlled in order to achieve a super heat setpoint In suction side control the CC 100 changes the valve aperture to achieve the case temperature set point Case temperature may be supplied by a supply air sen sor return air sensor or a mixture of the two values Temper
310. ighest instantaneous KW reading taken for that day and the time that reading was taken The total number of minutes the Power Monitoring application was in Shed Mode The Heat Degree Days for that day The Cool Degree Days for that day Monthly For monthly logging the day of month can be user specified so the day of the month on which the utility bill ing period starts can be accurately compared to the utility bill The monthly log contains a list of power usage sum maries for the previous 24 months A monthly log entry contains The month and year of the entry The KWh for that month The maximum average KW within any demand window for that month Power Monitoring The highest instantaneous KW reading taken for that month and the date and time the reading was taken The total number of minutes the Power Monitoring application was in Shed Mode The Heat Degree Days for that month The Cool Degree Days for that month Definition of Heat and Cool Degree Days Heat degree days and cool degree days are standard industry measurements of the demand for heating and cooling This measurement is based on the daily average outdoor air temperature If the daily average temperature 1s below 65 F then the number of heat degree days for that day is equal to 65 minus the day s average temperature in degrees Fahren heit Example if the day s average temperature is 54 F the number of heat degree days for that day is 65 54
311. ill generally be treated as the primary pressure controlling device and any other standard compressors in the rack are secondary devices used only if the VS compressor is unable to fully handle the required horsepower The vari able speed compressor will be the first compressor on and the last compressor off 11 1 2 3 Floating Setpoint Control The Floating Setpoint strategy within the E2 RX pro vides a method for varying the suction setpoint of the group based on the temperature within a circuit When Floating Setpoint Control is enabled the E2 RX monitors either a circuit temperature or a case temperature from a CC 100 and adjusts the suction setpoint if the temperature is too low or too high The user establishes a range outside of which the E2 RX is instructed to make a one PSI adjustment to the suc tion pressure setpoint to either reduce or increase the case temperature If the temperature continues to remain out side of the range for a user defined period of time the E2 RX continues to make pressure setpoint adjustments until the temperature is within the established range By varying the suction pressure setpoint to match the temperature requirements of the circuit the E2 RX is able to ensure product integrity while achieving maximum rack efficiency 11 1 3 The Enhanced Suction Group Application A Suction Group application looks at suction pressure or suction temperature and compares it to the suction set point to deter
312. ill take you to the Setup In screen 9 1 3 3 Open the Analog Input screen by selecting an Analog A input from the Input Status screen Figure 9 4 and pressing SETUP The Analog Input screen Figure 9 4 is where sensor types units and default values are specified for analog input points Setting Up Analog Inputs Input and Output Setup 9 7 01 01 02 RX 300 Unit 1 ANALOG INPUT 18 14 24 Board Point 1 1 Point Name Sensor Type 5v 100PSI Select Eng Units PSI Default on Open NONE Default on Short NONE Default Other NONE Change Delta Multi Factor Sensor Offset OCCUPANCY OUTPUT MED TEMP SUCTION GRPO1 SUCTION PRESS L Fi SET ALARMS F2 SET LOGGING F5 CANCEL Figure 9 6 Analog Input Screen Point Name The Point Name is simply a name for the point that may be used as a reference Assigning a descriptive name to a point makes setting up inputs for applications much easier For example if you have an inside temperature sensor located in Zone 1 of your building you may name it ZONE 1 TEMP Then when programming your HVAC applications you may easily define Zone 1 s temper ature sensor input by tying it to ZONE 1 TEMP This keeps you from having to keep track of which sen sors are tied to which point numbers You are required to enter a point name in the Point Name field The default name is BOARD NAME BOARD NUMBERJ PO
313. ime date and alarm status are dis played along the top of the screen The display is backlit but turns off to save energy after a determined amount of time Press any key to bring the display back up The Home screen acts as a master and default screen for all the functions of E2 and can be customized accord ing to the user s needs see Section 12 5 Customizing the Home Screen 12 1 1 RX Home Screen 2 8 CAP 100 LEGEND 1 Suction Group One 4 Function Button Index 2 Additional Suction Groups 5 Circuit Status 3 Condenser Status 6 Sensor Control Figure 12 1 RX Home Screen Suction Groups Section The first section of the RX Home screen is the Suction Groups section located in the top left corner The large let ters have the name of Suction Group 1 along with infor mation on compressor stages active and the current pressure setpoint Setpoints status percentages of capaci ties and which stages are active foreach suction group are displayed as well The suction group that is displayed in the large block atthe top left ofthe screen is the group that is named alphabetically first of the suction groups The E2 Home Screen Circuit Status Section To the right of theSuction Groups section is the Circuit Status section Both the Standard Circuits and the Case Controllers are listed in this screen The circuit names their current status and temperatures are listed Condenser Sect
314. ing Sched ule application If more than one Lighting Control applica tion will be using the same schedule it is recommended you configure an external Time Schedule application so you won t have to re enter event and date information for each lighting application 11 32 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee 11 10 6 1 Slave Scheduling If you have an external Time Schedule application pro viding occupied unoccupied times but you want to alter this schedule slightly for the Lighting Schedule applica tion you can designate the Basic Schedule cell s schedule as a slave schedule A slave schedule differs from a master schedule in that its events are relative to the events of a master schedule A master schedule s events are absolute times like 08 00 ON 23 00 OFF A slave schedule contains a set of times that are added to or subtracted from its master schedule s events like 00 30 ON 01 00 OFF As a result the behavior of the output of the slave schedule is altered slightly from that of the master schedule Slave scheduling is most often used in cases where the master schedule represents the occupied unoccupied times of a building and slave schadules are used to control loads that need activation or deactivation earlier or later than the occupied unoccupied times 11 10 7 The Min ONJOFF Cell The Minimum ON OFF cell has three important func tions t receives the light state requested by the Schedule Interface cell and appli
315. ion This section is located at the bottom left of the screen and contains information on the status of the condenser such as the discharge setpoint and individual fan states Sensor Control Below the Circuits section at the bottom right of the screen is the Sensor Control section where Control Value and Command information are displayed 12 1 2 Screen 109 09 05 OUTSIDE NOTA 2 sa 2 HOTA LIONTSU7 LEUEL 623 2 217 P ad Denand SHED HUAC ZONEOJ f 73 78 CIRLOT 9 0 CTRLO2 3 VALUE CHD NOME orr orr AUG MOMIRUT MONE NONE LEGEND Outside Humidity 7 Function Button Index 5 Outside Air Temperature Sensor Control Season 9 Zones Light Level FTC Air Handling Units Demand Control Light Schedules Power Monitoring Figure 12 2 BX Home Screen OAT Section The upper left hand section of the BX Home screen contains status information for four different values including outside air temperature humidity percentage season and light level Demand Control Section Directly below the OAT section is demand control sta tus information which shows the number of applications and number of loads being shed Operator s Guide to Using the E2 12 1 Power Monitoring Section In the lowest left hand corner of the BX Home screen is the power monitorin
316. ion field Association is the application s user defined property 9 12 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual that 15 associated with the point Multiple applications attached to single input will all be displayed in the Associ ation field Pressing LOOK UP when on a set application will bring up a list of property sebctions CANCEL will cancel this menu 7 Value read only Value shows the sensor value in theunits you select for the output type 9 2 6 3 Open the Digital Output screen by selecting a Digital D input from the Output Status screen Figure 9 9 and pressing SETUP Digital Outputs are ON when the E2 calls for them to be ON and OFF whenever the E2 calls for them to be OFF Most outputs that directly activate and deactivate output devices will need to be set up as the Digital output type Setting Up Digital Outputs 01 01 02 RX 300 Unit 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT 18 17 40 Point Name Board Point amp Ba B WEN Select Eng Units ON OFF Default Value OFF Physical 0n i Energ off De Energ Hull De Energ Minimum Physical On Time 0 00 00 Off Time 0 00 00 PRIORITY OVR Priority Override Timeout 2 0 30 INPUT MED TEMP SUCTION GRPO1 COMP1 F5 CANCEL Figure 9 11 Digital Output Screen Point Name The Point Name is simply a name for the output point that may be used as a reference Assigning a descriptive name to a point makes set ting up outputs f
317. ions listed below LLEV Logic Only The Schedule Interface cell uses the input from the Light Level Lighting Schedules Interface cell as its output ignoring the value passed to it from the Basic Schedule cell Sched Only The Schedule Interface cell uses the input from the Basic Schedule cell as its output ignoring the value passed to it from the Light Level Interface cell Both ON Both OFF From an output OFF state when both the Light Level Interface input and the Basic Schedule input are ON the resulting output command will be ON The output command will remain ON until both the Light Level and Basic Schedule inputs turn OFF Both ON Sched OFF Like the Both ON Both OFF strategy except when the Sched ule Interface output is ON it will turn off only when the Basic Schedule input turns OFF Sch ON Both OFF Like the Both ON Both OFF strategy except when the Schedule Interface output is OFF it will turn ON only when the Basic Schedule input turns ON Both ON Any OFF Like the Both ON Both OFF strategy except when the Schedule Interface output is ON it will turn OFF if any input turns OFF If desired the final result of any of the above combina tions can be inverted by setting a parameter Alternate Schedule Interface Combinations If desired you can specify an alternate means of com bining the Schedule Interface cell inputs that is used only when the Use Alt Sched Comb input is ON 11 10 5 A
318. iring types are required for each type of sen sor used with E2 All Analog Temperature Sensors and Air Flow Sensors Temperature and air flow sensors are to be wired with shielded 2 conductor at least 22 GA wire Belden 8761 or equivalent All Pressure Transducers Humidity Sensors and Refrigeration Transducers Pressure and refrigeration transducers and humidity sensors are to be wired with shielded 3 conductor at least 22 GA wire Belden 8771 or equivalent Dewpoint and Light Level Sensors These sensors are to be wired with shielded 4 conduc tor at least 22 GA wire Belden 8729 or equivalent 9 1 1 3 An input type dip switch must be set for each input point Input type dip switches are located in the switch banks labeled S1 and S2 on the MultiFlex 16AI and switch bank S4 on the 810 The input type dip switch tells the input board whether or not the sensor connected to the point requires a DC sup ply voltage in order to operate If the sensor requires DC voltage the dip switch should be set to the DOWN posi tion If the sensor does not require power or if it uses AC power the dip switch should be set to the UP position Dip switches for unused points should be set to the UP posi tion Sensor Wiring Types Input Type Dip Switches The dip switch positions for each specific sensor type is shown in Figure 9 2 Input and Output Setup 9 1 amp e 9 1 2 Power Connection If power is needed to
319. it board 2 Insert the flat head screwdriver into the two slots on either side of the top of the sensor case and twist to separate the back plate from the case 3 Remove the knock outs from the back plate before mounting so wires may be threaded through Mounting 3 9 4 Mount the back plate to the wall using the two open mounting holes on the top and bot tom of the plate 5 Replace the cover on top of the back plate by lining up the tabs and snap the lid back into place Screw Opening RH Sensor x 4 75 Back Panel i 212 mm Wiring Wiring nock oi i E SSS 28 ooo Opening 3 50 89 Figure 3 25 Indoor RH Mounting Dimensions 3 5 8 2 Outdoor RH Sensors The outdoor RH sensor P N 203 5761 The outdoor RH sensor P N 203 5761 should always be mounted on the north side of the building if in the Northern Hemisphere or on the south side if in the South ern Hemisphere The sensor should be mounted under an overhang or otherwise out of direct sunlight 1f possible Mount the RH sensor P N 203 5761 as follows 1 Secure the rear side of the enclosure to the out side wall using the two mounting brackets as shown in Figure 3 26 The tube holding the sen sor element should point straight down 2 Ifyou will be running the sensor cable through the wall behind the sensor cut or drill a hole in the wall through t
320. ithin the range of the new setpoint Figure 11 15 shows an example of how pre starts and pre stops work in a heating application From unoccupied mode the pre start period ramps the temperature up slowly so that when the scheduled change from unoccu pied to occupied mode occurs the temperature will already be at ornear the occupied heating setpoint During the pre stop which occurs before the Heat Cool goes from occupied to unoccupied mode heating is suspended and the temperature is allowed to coast down to the unoccu Heat Cool Control pied setpoint OCCUPIED SET POINT SET POINT 26512036 Figure 11 27 Diagram of Pre Start and Pre Stop Operation Intelligent Pre Starts and Pre Stops OSS is designed to handle pre starts and pre stops in the most energy efficient manner possible Every time a pre start or pre stop occurs OSS measures the amount of time it takes to bring the temperature from the previous setpoint to within the comfort zone of the new setpoint a user defined range of values above and below the set point within which the temperature is considered accept able This duration is used to determine the average rate of temperature change called the K factor The K factor is stored in the memory along with the average value of the outdoor air temperature during the pre start or pre stop Over time collected K factor data will be sorted and combine
321. ity minimum E2 firmware rev 2 68F01 Refer to this manual for more information on the Status Display application Square D Smart Breaker Control Manual P N 026 1711 The Smart Breaker products are designed to allow the Retail Solutions family of site controllers to command control panels minimum E2 firmware rev 2 71F01 A breaker panel gener ally consists of a series of circuit breakers that are 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ flipped from OFF to ON and from ON to OFF by commands sent from E2 through MODBUS or a Square D Smart Breaker Gateway board Refer to this manual for more information on the Square D Breaker Panel application Eaton Breaker Control Manual P N 026 1709 E2 can communicate directly with Eaton s Breaker Control Bus BCB modules Communication with the E2 minimum E2 firmware rev 2 82 will enable users to access features such as Time Sched ules Enhanced Lighting and Logging with the the added capabilities of dial out on failure and offsite remote connection specifically with UltraSite32 and Site Manager to the breaker panel The Eaton Breaker Panel controller is a licensed application available in the E2 300 and 400 model controllers Refer to this manual for more information on the Square D Breaker Panel application Energy Meter Manual P N 026 1726 The Energy Meter provides a solution for measuring energy data with a single device Inputs include Control Power CT and 3 phase voltag
322. l High USER LOG GRP82 High 083 USER LOG GRP83 High 083 USER LOG GRPO4 High 083 Point Logging Summary Referenced Points Analog Points high resolution Analog Points medium resolution Analog Points low resolution Digital Points Runtime Log Summary Number of runtime logs 36 Space used by runtime log files 72 00 kB 1 0 of total Resource Usage Summary Space available for log files 7 15 MB Space used by log files 2 17 36 4 of total Space used by non log files 62 66 kB changed since startup restore F5 CANCEL Figure 11 14 System Log Report Example 11 6 Air Handling Units AHU 11 6 1 The E2 BX supports the simultaneous control of up to six air handling units AHU AHU Control applications govern all aspects of an AHU s operations including heat ing and cooling dehumidification fans and economizer control Unlike rooftop control units RTUs AHUs are con trolled directly by the E2 itself and not by a separate unit control board Overview An AHU Control application actually consists of three separate control algorithms The main control algorithm monitors the indoor temperature and activates heating and cooling stages when necessary to maintain the user defined temperature setpoint Another algorithm monitors the indoor humidity and uses a desiccant wheel or addi tional AHU cool stages to reduce the humidity level The third loop controls either a two position digital or vari a
323. l Safe Mode When a case controller enters Fail Safe Mode each output will be set to the fail safe state described in Table 11 7 Case Control Circuits Pulse Valve Stepper Valve Controller will fix the position to the last known good out put percentage LEDs red per second Liquid Solenoid Valve Satellite Output s Table 11 7 Fail Safe States 11 4 11 1 Recoverable Sensor Failures The CC 100 and CS 100 will be able to cope with some sensor failures without having to enter Fail Safe Mode Coil In or Coil Out Failure A coil inlet temperature or coil outlet temperature sen sor will be considered failed if one of two conditions occur 1 The sensor gives a value outside of its minimum and maximum temperature range that is below 50 F or above 120 F for two consecutive read ings Or 2 The sensor value is 20 F above the control set point for longer than ten minutes If the coil inlet or coil outlet temperature sensor has failed the case controller will compensate by guessing the inlet or outlet temperature based on the values of the remaining functional coil sensor and the case temperature sensor s The case controller will continue to guess the value until the coil inlet or outlet sensor can be fixed If both the coil inlet and coil outlet sensors have failed or if one coil sensor and the case temperature sensor s have failed the case controller will not be able to make the required ca
324. l be pulsed ON for a percentage of the specified time interval The per centage is determined by proportionately measuring where the dewpoint falls between the range of val ues formed by the two setpoints Figure 11 6 shows an example of how anti sweat con trol works The setpoints Full ON dewpoint 80 F Full OFF dewpoint 20 F form the range of dewpoints across which the heaters will be pulsed When the measured dew point is 45 F directly in between both setpoints the per centage will be 50 and the heaters will be pulsed ON for 5 seconds of the defined 10 second interval If the dew point drops to 30 F the percentage will lower to 20 and the heaters will be on only 2 seconds out of every 10 TALL ON SETPT 80DEGF 50 DEWPOINT 45 DEG F ALL OFF SETPT 20 DEG F 0 sec T ALL ON SETPT 80DEGF DEWPOINT 30 DEG F ALL OFF SETPT 20 DEG F 0 sec 2sec 10 sec 26512014 Figure 11 6 Illustration of Anti Sweat Control 11 4 5 1 Dewpoint Input Sources Dewpoint control inputs for the case controller s Anti Sweat algorithms must come from a dewpoint probe set up on the E2 I O Network Note that when using a dewpoint probe on the E2 I O Network the case controller will rely on the E2 to provide the anti sweat control value If communications with the E2 are lost the case controller will enter Fail Safe Mode see Section 11 4 11 and default to a fixed 50 o
325. l control lag is expected to be present When a compressor has been shut down on an alarm the compressor will remain out of the active rotation until the alarm has been cleared Additionally the user will have the option of specifying that the alarmed compressor be re tried the next time it comes up in the rotation To prevent damage to a compressor the user will have the option of specifying a number of trips per day before the compressor is permanently locked out Once this condition has occurred the compressor alarm will require a manual reset to bring it back into the active rotation The controller will monitor the Chilled Differential Pressure and if it falls below a user specified threshold the controller will start to shut down compressors one at a time based on a user specified time delay This shutdown operation will be suspended if the Chilled Differential Pressure rises above a user defined setpoint Software Overview 11 53 11 23 4 1 Digital Scroll Compressor MCC can also utilize a single Digital Scroll Compres sor The assumption is that one of the Compressor Control Modules in the system may have a digital scroll instead of a standard scroll compressor installed The Digital Scroll Compressor may not be the same size as the fixed scroll compressors When a Digital Scroll Compressor is defined in the application MCC will utilize the compressor con trol modules with the digital scroll at all times modulating the
326. l for the System Information screen 4 Press for General Controller Info and scroll down to RX Home Screen or BX Home Screen depending on which controller you are using 5 Press UP to open the Option List Selection menu 6 Choose the desired Home screen from the list 7 Logoffto save changes 12 6 Manual Defrost and Clean Mode A circuit can be placed in manual defrost from the RX Home screen or a Circuit Status screen If a refrigeration circuit needs to be placed in manual defrost follow these steps 1 Press CIRCUITS to go to the Circuits Status screen or place the cursor on the desired Enter circuit from the Home screen and press to open the Actions Menu Select Manual Defrost 2 Once inside a Circuits Status screen press to open the Actions menu 3 Select Manual Defrost from the list and the Cir 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 cuit Bypass screen opens RX 466 Unit 3 STANDARD CKT BYP Circuit Name 1 STANDARD 1 CIRCUIT STATE Refrigeration BYPASS STATE NORMAL Bypass Command Scroll using Next Prev keys LOOK UP F5 CANCEL Figure 12 14 Circuit Bypass Screen RX 400 Version Shown 4 The Circuit Bypass screen see Figure 12 14 will display the circuit name its current state and the bypass state The Bypass Command field will be highlighted RX 466 Unit 3 OPTION LOOKUP 16 46 28 ALARM Option List Selection Select Des
327. l pulse valve model case controller is used to control walk in boxes since it is the only model capable of controlling two valves Walk in boxes are controlled the same way as for other cases The primary difference between walk in boxes and other cases is the use of the door switch When the case controller s door switch input is turned ON refrigeration is suspended all pulse valves go to 0 the fans turn OFF and the lights turn ON The walk in box remains in this state until the door switch turns OFF again Alarm times can be assigned to the door switch input so that an alarm can be generated when the door is left open for too long Also when temperature alarm setpoints are configured for the case the case controller will begin refrigeration if a temperature alarm trips with the door open 11 4 11 Fail Safe Mode When major system malfunctions occur the case con troller enters a Fail Safe Mode The Fail Safe Mode is designed to keep the case functioning as normally as pos sible under system conditions that would otherwise make case control impossible A case controller will enter Fail Safe Mode whenever one of three conditions occur 1 The superheat and or temperature control set point s are corrupted i e outside of its pro grammed minimum maximum range 2 The software is corrupted 3 An unrecoverable sensor failure has occurred see Operation with Failed Sensors below Actions Taken During Fai
328. lculations and they will go into Fail Safe Mode Discharge Return Air If the sensor or combination of sensors supplying the case temperature to the case controller have failed i e the Software Overview 11 15 case controller has no usable case temperature input value the case controller will keep the valve percentage at its last known good value and continue operation as nor mal For instance if the valve was at 7596 when the case temp sensor s failed the valve will remain at 75 until it the failure is corrected All other case control functions will continue functioning as normal 11 4 12 Wiring Input and output wiring for a case controller is dis cussed in detail in Section 4 E2 Hardware Setup Before a Case Control Circuit application may begin functioning all case controllers must be properly connected to its case inputs and outputs and each case controller must be com missioned and properly communication on the Echelon Network see Section 4 E2 Hardware Setup for instruc tions on how to do this 11 4 13 Setting Up An Individual Case Controller Most of the data required for a case controller to begin operation are supplied to it by associating the controller with an E2 However in some cases it will benecessary to change some of the parameters in an individual case con troller Some instances where it will be necessary are When the configuration for the inputs needs to be changed 1 when t
329. le this alarm may occur if the case is not being supplied with the proper temperature refrigerant DENIC Door Alarm 9 Door to a case has been Teff open too Tong Dest Mem Out Of Stack Bounds 50 An internal error has occurred in the An internal error has occurred in the E2 Device Absent From Networ The current a could not find the specified E2 I O board or Echelon controller RT 100 or similar Echelon device but the change was not accepted Try the update rate change again If this alarm persists call Retail Solutions service Dial To Day Time Site 1 Failed 20 E2 tried to dial out to the site listed as Day Time Site Dial To Day Time Site 2 Failed 20 E2 tried to dial out to the site listed as Day Time Site D o S C 4 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 ee Priority Dial To Day Time Site 3 Failed 20 E2 tried to dial out to the site listed as Day Time Site E2 tried to dial out to the site listed as Night Site and was unsuccessful A E2 tried to dial out to the site listed as Night Site 2 and was unsuccessful 2 E2 tried to dial out to the site listed as Night Site 3 a and was unsuccessful A case circuit did not enter defrost at 11 scheduled pr ee refrigeration re started Did Not Exit Was User JA CC 100 or CS 100 did not exit Clean Mode Did Not Respond To command U A CC 100 or CS 100 did not respond to an E2 com mand D id Not Terminate Defrost U
330. lected value opens Upon first entering the Graph view for a logged value all available samples are displayed The X axis sample time ranges from the time and date of the earliest avail able sample relative to the time and date of the latest sam ple The Y axis sample value ranges from the minimum sensor reading to the maximum sensor reading In the case of an input point log e g suction pres sure assume the Log Group setup specifies Samples as 1000 and Log Interval as 0 03 00 Also assume that the system has been running continuously with no interrup tions for one week The X axis would span a time interval starting approximately six days and six hours ago all the way up to the present If suction pressure ranged from 18 psi to 25 psi during the time period of the log the Y axis of the graph would be just large enough to show all samples in the log 12 11 4 Zooming In and Out For a more detailed view of a graph zoom in by press ing M This results in half of the samples of the current view being redrawn to fill the entire view Using the above example the graph would now shows three days and three hours of samples from the middle of the original graph 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ Pressing again zooms in even farther Pressing zooms out resulting in a graph whose time scale spans twice that of the previous view This dou bles the number of displayed samples Navigating a Zoomed View While zoom
331. liday Schedules A Holiday Schedule application s primary function is to pass along the day ofthe week to one or more master or slave schedules and to tell these schedules when it is a holiday HD1 HD4 A holiday schedule determines hol idays by cross referencing the current date with its user programmed list of holiday date ranges During the time periods of these date ranges the holiday schedule tells the schedules to perform the events programmed for one of the four holiday dates HD1 HD2 HD3 or HD4 Because multiple E2s on a network would likely use the same holiday schedules for determining special occu pied and unoccupied building hours holiday scheduling is handled by Global Data This means the holiday schedule can be set up in one E2 and shared with all other E2s that use time scheduling 11 15 Power Monitoring A Power Monitoring application 1s used primarily for monitoring recording and to a lesser degree controlling 11 42 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee KW usage in a building 11 15 1 Overview Explanation of Demand Power companies supply power to consumers at a fixed rate per kilowatt hour until a pre defined level of energy consumption is reached This level is called the demand limit When the demand limit is exceeded the rate is greatly increased as a penalty for high power demand by the consumer Generally once the demand limit is exceeded the increased rate is charged for the remainder o
332. ll auto matically be defined if you are configuring the point from the Output Definitions screen Output Type The analog output may be either of two types Linear and VSComp Linear means that the output is a standard 0 10VDC linear output VSComp means that the output is a percentage 0 100 that is driving an inverter that controls a vari The 8RO 8ROe 8IO and MultiFlex Outputs Input and Output Setup 9 13 able speed device such as a compressor or fan If the output will be driving a variable speed device choose VSComp in this field otherwise select Lin ear Use LOOK UP to select Select Eng Units The engineering units of the output value are entered in the Select Eng Units field This value is defaulted to percent PCT Use LOOK UP to select Default Value The value that the relay output should go to if the output is not associated to an application The default value of the Default Value field is OFF Modify Output Equation Enables the value to be translated into an output Low End Point The output voltage when the INPUT is at the value specified in the Low Eng Units field High End Point The output voltage when the INPUT is at the value specified in the High Eng Units field Low Eng Units The value of the input in Engi neering Units that will produce the output voltage specified in the Low End Point field High Eng Units The value of the input in Engi neering Units that will produ
333. ller near the controller s 16AI SRO and other RS485 Network peripherals The Gateway is designed to fit into a standard 3 snap track supplied with the board or may be mounted in a panel or on stand offs Follow the dimensions in Figure 3 12 for panel mounting 5 00 0 16 TYP 4 PL GATEWAY BOARD 26501125 Figure 3 12 Gateway Board Mounting Dimensions The Gateway should be mounted in an environment with ambient temperature between 40 F and 150 F with a non condensing relative humidity between 5 and 95 3 3 Echelon Devices 3 3 1 16Ale and 8ROe The 16AIe and 8ROe boards have the same mounting dimensions as their I O counterparts the 16AI and 8RO boards For mounting dimensions and instructions see Section 3 2 2 Boards Without Enclosures Snap Track and refer to Figure 3 9 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ 3 3 2 100 Case Controller and CS 100 Case Circuit Controller Generally the case controller will be mounted within the raceway or on top of the case If a controller must be replaced or installed inthe field it should be located based on the specific design of the case CONTROLLER TOP VIEW CONTROLLER SIDE VIEW Figure 3 13 CCB Mounting Dimensions 3 3 3 8 Discontinued The ESR8 board is slightly larger than the 16AI and 8RO boards and is not supplied with a snap track If the ESR8 is supplied without an enclo
334. lly used by the AHU just as a cool stage would be in Temperature Control If cooling is needed and conditions are favorable for economization the dampers will open and economization will begin If more cooling is needed the cooling stages would then cycle on as normal The position of the analog economizer damper is important only for the purposes of keeping the mixed air temperature a combination of the outdoor air coming through the dampers and the return air temperature near the user specified setpoint The damper is controlled using PID control 11 6 8 Dehumidification Control Dehumidification control uses the AHU s existing cool stages and a separate dehumidification device such as a desiccant wheel if available to remove moisture from the 11 22 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee air The dehumidification setpoint is placed at the 0 end of the dehumidification PID throttling range In other words the dehumidification output will start at 0 when the humidity is equal to the setpoint and increase to 100 when the humidity is equal to or above the setpoint plus the throttling range The dehumidification output percentage is used much like a heating or cooling output percentage is used in Tem perature Control The percentage represents the percent age of total dehumidification capacity available to the AHU including cool stages and other dehumidification devices 11 6 9 Curtailment Some power companies offer cur
335. lobal sensor values to all other Global Data applications on the E2 As a result a single sensor can be used by any applica tion in any E2 on the network Unless you program it otherwise the E2 always assumes you will be using Global Data in all your applica tions When you create new applications in the E2 it will always automatically connect the appropriate application inputs except for the spares to their corresponding Global Data outputs 10 17 1 Priority Settings When selecting the priority for a global sensor input there are four settings to choose from Primary Primary inputs are the highest priority inputs If a sensor is set up with a primary priority it is recognized by all Global Data applications on the network as the highest priority The primary provider sends this input value to the other Global Data appli cations in the other E2s and each E2 immediately sends that value to all of its own applications that use the Global Data input Only one input of each type may be designated as a primary on the E2 Network In other words if one E2 is acting as the primary provider of the global Out door Air Temp no other E2 on the network may have a global Outdoor Air Temp sensor with a primary priority If using this priority setting you must enter board and point settings Secondary Sensors that are set up with secondary priorities are backup sensors that will be used by all Global Data applications 1f the
336. lpy Switch An enthalpy switch is a digital device that is pre set to detect when the tempera ture and humidity levels are favorable for econo mization When the conditions are favorable this switch sends an OK ON signal to the Zone application Otherwise the switch sends a NOT OK OFF signal 2 Dewpoint Setpoint A dewpoint probe measur ing the dewpoint of the outside air is compared to a setpoint If the outside air dewpoint is less than the setpoint economization is enabled If it is higher than the setpoint economization is dis abled 3 Calculated Enthalpy The Zone application cal culates the outside air enthalpy by reading the value of a relative humidity sensor and an out door air temperature sensor This calculated enthalpy is compared to a setpoint If the enthalpy is less than the setpoint economization is enabled If greater economization is disabled 4 Dewpoint Fail Safe This is similar to method 2 except an outdoor temperature sensor value is compared to the setpoint instead of a dewpoint probe s value This comparison is a poor substi tute for actual dewpoint readings and is recom mended for use as a fail safe only When possible use humidity or dewpoint sensors 5 Temperature Comparison The AHU Control application simply compares the temperature of the inside air with the temperature of the outside air If the outside air is cooler than the inside air economization is enabled 6 Invs
337. lternate Control Alternate control comprises Multi Logic Combiner and Offset Solar Control strategies 11 10 5 1 Multi Logic Combiner When the Alternate Lighting Control Use Alt Con trol parameter under the General tab in Setup of the application is set to Yes an alternate lights on off combi nation method is then used to turn lights ON and OFF The user is then presented with a logical matrix where they can select which inputs will turn lights ON and OFF This matrix is located under the Alt Control tab in Setup of the application The Number of Inputs parameter Num Inputs located under General tab in Setup of the application specifies the number of input sources made available in the matrix Up to four input sources may be used Sched ule Solar Light Level and Logic Software Overview 11 31 is the only way to use the Solar Calculation TIP Activating the Use Alt Control parameter Q Control method for Lighting Control 11 10 5 2 Offset Solar Control The Offset Solar Control cell of the Lighting Schedule application uses the Sunrise Offset and Sunset Offset parameters to determine how many minutes before or after sunrise the sun is considered to be risen or how many minutes before or after sunset the sun is considered to be set The resulting offset for sunrise and sunset is used by Lighting Control in its logical equations for the Solar state A positive value is entered 1f adding to the sunrise time and a
338. ly information screen that contains current system ver sion information Set up system diagnostics mem ory and execution info and per form advanced functions system resets and firmware update Writable field for technician to make notes about changes made or general information Enter information about Logging Group applications such as the sampling frequency and total number of samples When set to on FULL will appear at the top right of the screen and gives user full access to options and applications Choose the default values most appropriate to the refrigeration control components in the sys tem Table 10 5 System Information Menu Options 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 ee 10 8 Time Date Setup RX 466 Unit 3 16 11 47 RX DEU SUMMARY RLARM SUCTION GB Tenp SYSTEM INFORMATION NONE NONE NONE NONE Eallime and Date E NONE NONE Passwords User Access wr p NONE Service Actions General Controller Info Firmware Revision Maintenance Logs Display Users Toggle Full Options Value S NONE Application Default Value Setup NONE NOTAC F1 SENS62 NOTAC ON Controlled By Dis Figure 10 14 System Information Menu The Time Date Setup screen is where users may change the time date date format Daylight Savings Dates and special time synchronization features To get to the Time Date Setup screen from the Main Me
339. m the Status screen of the desired Logging Analog Prints 1 1 1 Group application press the Enter key to bring CDS ne R U S ry up the Actions menu Pih otal space available in system 7 15 MB Space used by SUCTION GRP61 212 00 kB 2 9 of total 2 Press 8 Application Logs Graphs to bring up Seer A eee SUCTION GRP81 CTRL TEMP SETPT BASE the APPLICATION SPECIFIC LOGS AND SUCTION 1 LOSS gt GLOBAL DATA REFR PHASE LOSS BASE SUCTION GRP61 EMERGENCY OUR gt GLOBAL DATA REFR EMER 00 BASE GRAPHS menu SUCTION GRP81 COHP1 BASE SUCTION GRP81 COHP2 BASE 3 Press 1 Logging Group Report SUG TION ERR G1 BASE SUCTION GRP61 COMP4S BASE SUCTION GRP61 COMPS BASE SUCTION GRP81 COHP6 BASE RX 366 Unit 1 14243237 APPLICATION LOG ALARM Logged Points Summary 01 30 2007 14 43 29 Rev 2 40B14 Logging Group Configuration for BASE LOG Resolution High Logs are kept for 7 666 days 3366 samples Sample interval 6 03 06 1 1 5 5 3 System Log Report finalog Points 187 DigitsE The System Log report provides a summary of all Midi dier ips logged points for all applications in the system and a com Total space available in system 7 15 MB Space used by BASE LOG 2 18 29 4 of total available Points 69 Analog samples assumed plete list of logged points for all applications in the sys mom BASE tem Note that depending on the size of the co
340. may use The E2 uses four access levels one being the lowest and four being the highest Table 12 1 gives a description of each level and the capabilities they have access to Read only access Users may generally only view status screens setpoints and some system settings Setpoint and bypass access Users may perform all the tasks a level 1 user may and they may also change control setpoints and bypass some devices Level 3 Configuration and override access Users may perform all the tasks a level 2 user may and they may also override system settings create new cells and program new applications Level 4 System Administrator access All E2 func tions are accessible by a level 4 user Table 12 1 User Access Levels 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 ee 12 3 Toggling Full Options Toggling Full Options on allows you to have full access to programming applications To Toggle Full Options on 1 Press the gt key elect H y te 2 S 1 C S stem C nfigur ation 3 Select H System Infor mation 4 Select Toggle Full Options FULL will appear in the top right corner of the screen when Full Options is enabled Pressing H toggles Full Options on and off 12 4 Navigation 12 4 1 Main Menu The Main Menu is accessed by pressing the c key This menu gives you direct access to applications such as Suction Groups Condensers Circuits Air Han dling Units Zones Light Schedules and Sensor Controls
341. me ON Total setpoint Generic pulse trip alarm nit Ctlr Cell Create Failed WPK condenser fan or compressor trip Unknown FW Update Attempted The E2 unsuccessfully tried to create a unit controller Unknown Heap Operation Error 5 cell An error has occurred during a firmware update o E2 Call Retail Solutions service for assistance There is an internal error the E2 software Noti Unoccupied Hi Limit Exceeded User An analog value has risen above 16 defined high limit setpoint during UNOCCUPIED mode Unoccupied Low Limit Exceeded User An analog value has fallen below its defined low limit setpoint during UNOCCUPIED mode n Un O e e 50 0 Appendix C Alarm Advisory Messages C 13 Priority User Cleared All Applications IE user has cleared out all data fromall applications in this E2 User Appl Forced Reset 50 JA user or an application has forced a reset of this E2 VS Alarm 20 Multiflex PAK variable speed device alarm VS Inverter Fai User A variable speed inverter driving a variable speed fan or compressor has failed WCC Controller Alarm 20 Woodley case controller alarm WPK Controller Alarm 20 Woodley Pack Amps Fail alarm E2 I alarm occurs often there may be a problem with your system Contact Retail Solutions service Watchdog Reset Timer Failed watchdog feature the E2 was disabled Check the jumper J19 labeled Watch Dog on the E2 main board
342. menu gives you direct access to applications such as Suction Groups Condensers Circuits Air Han dling Units Zones Light Schedules and Sensor Controls applications depending on which controller type you are using as well as all configured applications in the control ler The Main Menu also allows you to add and delete applications gives system configuration abilities and shows status information for inputs and outputs network graphs and logs Screen Types 10 7 2 Status Screens RX 466 Unit 3 SUCT GROUP STAT 13 59 56 ALARM SUCTION GROUP NAME SUCTION GRPO1 STAGES HP STATUS RUNTIME 1 Comp E 6 62 2 Comp 6 14 3 Comp ON 6 15 4 Comp ON 6 15 Suct Dsch 22 0 CONDENSER CONDENSER 61 GENERAL INFORMATION Sat Suc Temp 3 2 Rack Fail E Current HP 38 8 Capacity 58 8 PID amp 31 8 F1 SUCTION F2 CONDENSER F3 CIRCUITS F4 SENSORS FS SETUP Figure 10 9 Status Screen RX version shown Status screens are real time views of application func tions They show the current status of all outputs the cur rent values of all inputs and other important data such as control setpoints run times and whether or not bypasses or overrides are active Each status screen is specially designed to provide a concise at a glance view of how one or more systems are functioning gm TIP To view the Suction Group Status screen V in the RX controller start from th
343. mine whether compressor stages should be Software Overview 11 1 cycled ON or OFF Unlike the Suction Group application which uses a PID percentage to determine how many stages to turn ON or OFF the Enhanced Suction Group keeps historical data of the effects each compressor stage has on the suction pressure or temperature and analyzes that data to determine which stages to cycle The Enhanced Suction Group application is designed to balance tight control of suction pressure with economic management of compressor cycling to reduce power usage and compressor wear 11 1 3 1 Learning Mode When an Enhanced Suction Group application runs for the first time it undergoes a Learning Mode period to collect data on the compressor stages During Learning Mode the Enhanced Suction Group will control suction pressure but it will purposely cycle the compressor stages in different combinations to measure the effect they have on the suction input value The Learning Mode lasts for several minutes After Learning Mode ends the Enhanced Suction Group will require up to 24 hours of operation before compressor cycling is operating at maximum efficiency If compressor cycling seems too frequent after 24 hours of operation you may reduce compressor cycling by changing the Con trol Cycles parameter see Section 11 1 3 3 The Control Cycles Parameter 11 1 3 2 Circuit Load Analysis Unlike the standard Suction Group algorithm the Enhanc
344. mory to allow it to control com pressors condensers refrigeration and defrost for a single condensing unit using on board I O and control algo rithms The MultiFlex CUB has its own installation and opera tion manual P N 026 1706 2 2 2 4 MultiFlex RTU BX and CX Only Similar in design to the MultiFlex combination input output boards the MultiFlex RTU board is designed spe cifically for operating packagerooftop HVAC units as part of an E2 BX or REFLECS BCU building control system The MultiFlex RTU is designed to bea replacement for the previous generation ARTC and is 100 compatible with all legacy E2 BX and BCU systems The MultiFlex RTU board has 16 analog inputs 8 relay outputs and 4 analog outputs Most of these I O points are reserved for sensors and input devices required to read environmental data such as space and supply air temperature and control all output devices that control the environment such as heat cool stages and dampers The RTU relay outputs are rated for line voltage 240VAC The RTU board controls the rooftop unit directly with its built in heating cooling and humidity control algo rithms It may operate in stand alone mode or it may interface with an E2 BX or BCU to control the store envi ronment in zones and pass along logging and alarm infor mation The MultiFlex RTU has its own installation and opera tion manual P N 026 1705 2 2 2 5 MultiFlexRooftop Control Board RCB BX
345. n E O RE RS 11 16 11 4 13 Setting Up An Individual Case Controller eee eee eese eene nennen tnter enne 11 16 11 4 14 Associating Case Controllers with Case Circuit Control Applications eee 11 16 11 9 20GGING GROUPS REISEN EE RETE GR ORTA TA OI I EISE 11 16 LISD Data Compressioni ocn a dde eR HR P PERF CE Ra EE Eee ERES eH Ld 11 17 VS DE Clipping epe er E ERR C n E e Ute oe er e pe POESIE FREIE 11 17 T1 5 1 2 Incompressible Data Types to er rH RI EPOR RE POE III re e REO cee aoe 11 17 11 5 2 Base Log Group icu eue ph eee ee e i e eei Hate ie tete 11 5 3 Setting Up Logging e ee UI RR LUE C Pe Y ous Hu e eee EYE paves NEE 11 5 4 Logging Group Status Screen LES Logi Reports sie si ho e A Rb ete n eee ee pes evt IESS Eoggitig Group Reports cade ee Tbe Cem de iet orte hele Pere d epe aid eee dope e 11 5 5 2 Application Log Report is ds 1T 5 5 3 System Log Report rem RR ORE HI OD EI OT EET PEE EEEE 11 6 AIR HANDLING UNITS AHU sne nnne aa IEOMEO au Eas 11 6 2 Temperature Control zx ene ade e eere e ERN EEE S R eet LEO Alternate Setpolnts c iie Tees ete n ade deret o ea nde t ecce ei te erts repe 11 20 FONG ONTO Loc ee d pe t eee c pase edente pit eet RS 11 20 11 6 4 1 Single Speed Fans 11 6 4 2 Two Speed Fans 11 6 4 3 Variable Speed Fan
346. n finished restore power to the E2 3 6 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual MODEM 14 4k or 33 6k PREVIOUS GENERATION BOARD Figure 3 18 Mounting the Internal Modem Board 3 4 2 Two Channel and Four Channel Repeaters 3 4 2 1 Repeaters are used to extend the maximum length of a segment of Echelon cable or to act as a bridge between two devices that are farther apart than the cable s maxi mum node to node distance Retail Solutions offers two versions of repeaters for the E2 controller an external two way repeater that comes in an enclosure P N 832 1010 and four channel repeater mounted in the E2 P N 832 4830 For more information about installing repeaters and routers please refer to the Repeater and Router Installa tion and Networking Guide P N 026 1605 3 4 2 2 Mounting the Two Channel Repeater The external repeater P N 832 1010 is externally mounted within its own enclosure Mounting Repeaters Overview 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ 4 170 1 75 R0 156 TYP 2 PLACES EXTERNAL REPEATER TOP OF ENCLOSURE 0 50 26501084 Figure 3 19 External Repeater Mounting For external repeaters the mounting bracket at the bot tom of the enclosure has two 0 156 bolt holes on either side Use the bolt holes to mount these repeaters in the field as necessary see Figure 3 19 When mounting external repeaters keep in mind that
347. n in Figure 9 10 This menu will prompt you to spec B output as either Digital Pulse or One Shot Press if the output is Digital press ES if the output is Pulse press if the output is One Shot or press to cancel setup uvriUm UKrUL v uur SUCTION GRPO1 COMP2 3 One Shot Press desired selection D SPR UUTFUT D 01 BAKERY CLR REFRIG SOLENOID D 02 ISLAND PROD REFRIG SOLENOID D 03 PROD DISP 1 REFRIG SOLENOID Figure 9 10 Output Data Type Pop Up Menu Depending upon what type of output you selected the Digital Output see Section 9 2 6 3 Setting Up Digital Outputs Pulse Digital Output or One Shot Digital Output screen will appear 9 2 6 2 Using the Output Definitions Sta tus Screen The Output Definitions Status screen serves a dual Input and Output Setup 9 11 purpose It is both an at a glance summary of all points on each output board and a menu where output points may be selected and configured In order for the E2 to properly control devices that are hooked to an I O board you must first tell the E2 what type of output the devices require This is achieved by using the Output Definitions Status screen SETUP DEL MOD LOOK UP and CANCEL are the function keys along the bottom of the screen available for the Output Definitions Status screen The Output Definitions Status screen serves a dual purpose It is both an at a glance summary of all points on each output boa
348. n the Sunday of thesecond week of March ever y year and will end on the Sunday of the first week of November Note these are the dates recently enacted by the U S Congress which went into effect in 2007 USER DEFINED DLT DATES when this option is chosen the user can specify start and end times for daylight savings including month week and day settings EUROPEAN UNION DLT DATES the Euro pean Union Daylight rules are the same as the Stan dard US DLT Dates with the exception that one hour must be added to the time at 1 00AM GMT during the last Sunday in March DLT Not Used the E2 does not make any adjust ments to Active Time for Daylight Savings Time 10 10 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual Daylight Savings Time uses GMT This setting is only visible when Daylight Savings Dates is set to User Defined DLT Dates If set to Yes Daylight Savings Time uses GMT calculates the time to change from GMT and the current time zone setting For example if the start time is at 1 00 AM and the time zone is 200 GMT the time change willoccur at 3 00 AM local time Defaults to No Unit Location From Sunrise and sunset times are calculated based on either zip code or latitude longitude If US Zip Code is chosen in the Unit Location From field enter the zip code in which the controller is located If outside the United States choose Lat Long and enter the latitude and longitude val ues in which the controller is
349. n the type of con troller being used Function key usage often varies depending on which screen or field E2 is currently in 10 6 3 The Help Line The line directly above the function button menu is called the help line The help line displays information about the currently selected field such as general descrip tions possible ranges and other information to help a user maneuver around and or configure the field 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ TIP To see different messages the help line generates start from the RX Home screen Press CIRCUITS Highlight a circuit Enter and press ES Use the arrow buttons to move around the screen and notice how the help line changes as the cursor moves from the setpoint to status sections When finished press key to return to the Home screen 10 7 Screen Types 10 7 1 TheMain Menu 88 23 05 RX 400 Unit 3 RX DEU SUMMARY State Temp SUCTION GRPO1 NONE NONE MAIN MENU Refr NONE T Refr NONE Refr NONE NONE Refr NONE Refr NONE Refr NONE Refr NONE Refr NONE Refr NONE 18 56 28 ALARM Circuits Condensers Circuits Sensor Controls Configured Applications fidd Delete Application System Configuration Value Status NONE Controlled By Dis NONE DIGITAL NOTAC F1 DIGITAL SENS82 NOTAC ON Figure 10 8 The Main Menu RX version shown The Main Menu is accessed by pressing the c key This
350. nd the integralerror 1s still near zero it will make another Mode 3 adjustment If the KW is below the setpoint but not below the setpoint minus the user defined hysteresis value it will go back to operating in Mode 1 shedding levels sequentially If the KW is below the setpoint minus the hysteresis value and the integral error is below zero Demand Control will begin restoring 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ loads 11 11 6 1 Power Monitoring Input The Input Type Selection parameter defines the way the Power Monitoring input INPUT under the Inputs tab in application Setup will be used The parameter can be set to KW Analog or Pulse KWH Settings When KW Analog is selected verify the input is con nected to a board and point that is set up with Engineering Units of KW When Pulse KWH has been selected verify the input is connected to a board and point that is set up with Engineering Units of KW 11 12 Sensor Control 11 12 1 Overview The E2 is equipped with numerous generic control modules that may be used both for simple monitoring of an analog or digital sensor and for simple Cut In Cut Out control of a digital output These modules are called Sen sor Control modules There are two different Sensor Control Module types Analog Sensor Control modules read the values from one or more analog sensors compare them to a set of Cut In Cut Out setpoints and operate a digital output such as a relay based on the analo
351. nding on the user s needs 2 1 2 E2ProcessorInterface Board PIB Figure 2 3 E2 PIB The E2 Processor Interface Board PIB interfaces the power and most all communications with the main proces sor board and contains all field wiring connections The PIB allows you to connect anexternal keyboard accessory cards and an external computer All RS485 and Echelon Network connectors are located on the PIB 2 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee 2 1 3 E2 Keypad Figure 2 4 E2 Keyboard The E2 has a QWERTY style keyboard layout with two rows of function keys The first row Bill zl is comprised of screen specific function keys and the sec ond row has designated icon keys The five icon keys are Help BP Alarms CD Home CP Menu 9 and Back 2 1 4 LEDs The PIB main processor board and keyboard located behind the main board LEDs can be used to determine the status of normal operating parameters for the unit Green 14 ON Power is being applied to the PIB Yellow RX1 ON Communication is being re ceived on RS485 Port 1A Yellow RX2 ON Communication is being re ceived on RS485 Port 1B Red TX ON Communication is being sent on RS485 Port 1A and 1B Table 2 2 PIB LED s Status 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ MODEM 14 4k or 33 6k Main Board CPU LEDs Green D1 1 blink every two seconds 1 sec General Sta ond ON 1 second OFF Main tus LED for board is op
352. ne status setup screens change board or controller names configure and commis sion devices delete a device and view detailed status screens of controllers After determining 1f a board is offline turn to Appen dix E Troubleshooting 10 14 Set Up Echelon Net work 10 14 1 Specifying Number of Devices To specify the number of devices on the Echelon Net work navigate to the Connected I O screen 1 Press to open the Main Menu 10 16 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee y te 2 55 S stem C nfigura 1 n etw rk S 4 Press Connected I O Boards amp Controllers 65 28 66 RX 466 Unit 1 Use Ctrl N to Select CX Tabs SETUP Board Type 0166 Liquid 166 Suction e 99 99 99 99 99 99 16 32 99 S166 Ckt Suction 1 EC2 29x Control 1 EC2 39x Control 1 ESR8 Line Up Echelon 16AI Echelon 8R0 TD3 Case Display F1 PREU TAB F2 NEXT TAB F3 EDIT F5 CANCEL Figure 10 25 Connected I O Setup Screen E2 firmware revisions 2 81 and above After logging in for the first time the Connected I O screen will ask you to specify how many of each type of device will be connected to the E2 you are currently pro gramming Options will vary depending on the type of controller used Unit Number Echelon Subnet Each E2 on the Echelon Network must have a different unit number This can be any number from 1 to 255 but each E2 s number mu
353. neering unit press LOOK UP to select Default Value The value that the relay output should go to if the output is not associated to an application The default value of the Default Value field is OFF Physical On Specifies whether the physical relay output should energize or de energize its coil when the logical output is on Physical Off Specifies whether the physical relay output should energize or de energize its coil when the logical output is off Physical Null Specifies whether the physical relay output should energize or de energize its coil when there is no application associated with the output Minimum Physical On Time Specifies the mini mum time the physical output must remain on regardless of the logical output state Minimum Physical Off Time Specifies the mini mum time the physical output must remain off regardless of the logical output state PRIORITY OVR When an input is overridden to an output cell If this input is not set to NONE it will be used for the output value instead of the input value but only for the override timeout period Priority Override Timeout When an input goes on it will override to a value for the timeout period INPUT This field links the output to an application You do not need to enter anything in this field You will be able to link applications to this point during the application setup process 9 2 6 4 Setting Up Analog Outputs Open the Analog Outputscreen by selec
354. nel The meter is not sensitive to CT orientation to reduce installation errors 11 25 2 Supported System Types The Energy Meter Series has a number of different possible system wiring configurations To configure the meter set the System Type via the User Interface or Mod bus register 130 1f so equipped The System Type tells the meter which of its current and voltage inputs are valid which are to be ignored and if neutral is connected Set ting the correct System Type prevents unwanted energy accumulation on unused inputs selects the formula to cal culate the Theoretical Maximum System Power and deter mines which phase loss algorithm is to be used The phase loss algorithm is configured as a percent of the Line to Line System Voltage except when in System Type 10 and also calculates the expected Line to Neutral voltages for system types that have Neutral 12 amp 40 For more information about this application see the Energy Meter manual P N 026 1726 Energy Meter Software Overview 11 55 EZ 12 Operator s Guide to Using the E2 12 1 The E2 Home Screen The Main Status or Home screen Figure 12 1 and Figure 12 2 is divided into sections that display the cur rent status in areas of importance in the system i e for RX suction groups compressor stages active circuits condensers sensor control and for BX OAT demand control power monitoring light schedules zones AHUs and sensor control T
355. nfiguration OUTPUT and the number of points logged this may take a few sec Figure 11 13 Application Log Report Example BASE HEAT CL gt GLOBAL DATA HUAC EMER 00 BASE onds HEAT CL PHASE LOSS gt GLOBAL DATA HUAC PHASE LOSS BASE HEAT CL TDOOR AIR gt GLOBAL DATA OAT OUT BASE 1 HEAT CL CTRLO1 MOD HEAT OUT BASE To display the System Log Report CTRLG1 MOD COOL QUT BASE 1 Press for the Main Menu 2 Press for System Configuration Figure 11 12 Logging Group Report Example 3 Press Logging Setup 11 5 5 2 Application Log Report 4 Press KB Display Logged Points The Application Log report provides a summary of all logged points for the current application and a complete list of all the logged points that belong to that current _ application To display the Application Log report www NOTE Depending on the number of points 4 logged and the resolution setting a limited amount of memory space is available for one year logging 1 Press the Enter key to bring up the Actions menu from the desired application Status screen 2 Press 8 Application Logs Graphs to bring up the APPLICATION SPECIFIC LOGS AND GRAPHS menu 3 Choose Application Log Report Logging Groups Software Overview 11 19 61 36 67 RX 366 Unit 1 RX DEU SUMMARY INAMESBFULL Logged Points Summary 61 36 2667 14 56 59 Rev Resolution Days Interval Used Analog Digita
356. ngement works similarly in Heating mode except that the setpoint delta is below the Heating setpoint and Lead and Lag are both on when the tempera ture is below the setpoint delta TEMPERATURE SETPT DELTA SET POINT m 8 LEAD AND LAG ON LEAD ON ONLY LEAD AND LAG ON LEAD ON ONLY TIME 26512037 Figure 11 29 Lead Lag Arrangement Heat Cools in a Lead Lag arrangement take turns act ing as the Lead loop The user designates the maximum amount of time a Heat Cool will act as a Lead loop after this duration the current Lead loop will switch places with its Lag loop Lead Lag arrangements only work when both Heat Cools are in Occupied mode Dehumidification control uses the AHU s existing cool stages and a separate dehumidification device such as a desiccant wheel if available to remove moisture from the air The dehumidification setpoint is placed at the 0 end of the dehumidification PID throttling range In other words the dehumidification output will start at 0 when the humidity is equal to the setpoint and increase to 100 when the humidity is equal to or above the setpoint plus the throttling range The dehumidification output percentage is used much like a heating or cooling output percentage is used in Tem perature Control The percentage represents the percent age of total dehumidification capacity available to the AHU including cool st
357. nificant effect on the system if it were to be shed for a prolonged period of time Examples motor room exhaust fans satellite HVAC units and or lights in low occupancy rooms 2 Rotational Shed The Rotational Shed levels are shed in sequence only if all defined First Shed levels have already been shed and the Demand Control application needs more shedding to lower demand Unlike the First Shed priority levels Rotational Shed levels do not always begin shedding by activating level 1 Instead it shares the burden of being the first to activate among all the Rotational Shed levels If during one demand condition Rotational Shed level 1 is the first of all the Rotational Shed levels to activate it rotates first activation status to the next level in sequence in this case level 2 Thus the next time a demand condition occurs level 2 will activate first and further levels will activate in sequence until it reaches level 1 which will be the last to activate Applications that are Rotational Shed priority should be more vital to system performance than the ones config ured as First Shed priority levels In addition all applica tions assigned to Rotational Shed levels should all be of relatively equal importance since they each will spend about the same total amount of time in shed Also if you will be shedding a small amount of loads that are relatively equal in priority you may choose to define them all under
358. nough to require a defrost The optical demand defrost sensor may be either an analog or digital type sensor When this sensor detects no major build up of frost the Case Circuit application ignores all scheduled calls for defrost and continues in refrigeration mode When the sensor detects frost the defrost inhibit is cancelled and the case circuit will enter defrost at the next scheduled time A demand defrost inhibit only keeps scheduled defrosts from occurring Any manual calls for a defrost cycle will occur as normal CCB demand defrost is cur rently not supported in E2 Demand sensors if present on the circuit will be ignored Demand Fail Safe Time To protect against demand defrost sensors that may not be working properly a demand fail safe time may be set up Demand fail safe times limit the amount of time a defrost inhibit may last If a demand defrost sensor does not detect frost for an amount of time equal to the Demand Fail Safe Time the defrost inhibit is lifted and the circuit will enter defrost at the next scheduled time 11 4 4 5 Emergency Defrost When necessary a user can initiate an emergency defrost cycle from a circuit Emergency defrost cycles are similar to normal defrost cycles except an emergency defrost cycle will ignore all calls for termination and remain in defrost for the entire programmed defrost time Emergency defrosts are initiated by the user from the Case Control Circuit Bypass screen se
359. nsers Circuits CC 100s etc Building Control This category includes changes or actions involving building control applications specific to BX controllers AHUs Zones Lighting Control Time Schedule Demand Control etc Common Control This category includes control applications common to both RX and BX control lers Sensor Control Time Schedules Conversion Cells Analog or Digital Combiners Global Dataetc Advanced Control This category includes applica tions common to both boxes that are only used by advanced users such as Loop Sequence Control lers Refrigeration or HVAC Simulations etc Each row has five columns each of which corresponds to a different category of user actions Setpoint This includes all actions that change application setpoints Also clearing one or more alarms out of the Alarm Advisory Log is considered a setpoint action refer to Section 12 10 8 3 Clearing for the definition of clearing alarms Bypass This includes all actions that bypass a device to a certain state such as initiating a manual defrost or configuring an application input desig nated as a bypass Also resetting one or more alarms in the Alarm Advisory Log is considered a bypass operation refer to Section 12 10 8 2 Resetting for the definition of resetting alarms Override This includes any user ordered override of a setpoint input or output Config This includes all actions
360. nsion Card Mount ing New Processor Board The E2 s modem communication expansion card mounts above the PIB in the back of the enclosure box as shown in Figure 3 17 The standoffs and mounting holes are located above the PIB in the back of the enclosure box Use the mounting screws and standoffs to secure the card in place The ribbon cable plugs into the Modem Com 6 slot on the motherboard For more information on the modem communication expansion card see Section 4 3 2 Modem Communication Expansion Card New Proces Mounting 3 5 sor Board Expansion Card E2 Ribbon Ribbon Connector Expansion Card Mounting Cable Connector Figure 3 17 Modem Comm Card Mounting in E2 www NOTE Because the modem communication expansion card and four channel repeater card share the same mounting platform they must be used separately 3 4 Mounting PC 104 Cards in E2 Previous Generation Processor Board 3 4 1 1 The Internal Modem ging the modem into the PC 104 slot Failure to do so can damage the modem and void the warranty CAUTION Power down the E2 before plug The E2 s internal modem mounts in the PC 104 slot located at the top left of the E2 main board See Figure 3 18 Disconnect power to the unit and carefully plug the male pins on the back of the modem card into the E2 s PC 104 slot Use the standoffs and screws supplied with the modem card to secure the card to the main board as shown in Figure 3 18 Whe
361. nsitive ODD TERMINAL EVEN TERMINAL various Digital Sensors Klixons Sail Switches etc Connect one lead to the odd numbered terminal and the other lead to the even numbered terminal polarity insensitive ODD TERMINAL EVEN TERMINAL 800 2100 800 2200 800 2500 Pressure Trans ducers CPC 100 200 500 lb ratings 0 5 4 5VDC output SVDC input voltage Connect RED power wire to 5VDC sup RED TO 5VDC WHITE TO ply on input board gt EVEN TERM gt BLACK TO Connect WHITE sig nal wire to even num bered terminal Connect BLACK ground wire to odd numbered terminal Connect the bare SHIELD wire to odd numbered terminal TRANSDUCER E ODD TERM SHIELD BARE WIRE TO ODD TERMINAL E 1 1 Ed 203 5750 Relativd Humid ity Sensor Table 9 1 Sensor Wiring The 16AI 8IO and MultiFlex Inputs Wire the P sensor terminal to 12VDC sup ply on board Wire the GND sensor terminal to odd numbered ter minal Wire the OUT sensor terminal toeven numbered ter minal SHIELD CONNECTED TO GND Jumper sensor terminal N to sensor terminal GND TO ODD TERMINAL poweR GND our DO NOT CONNECT SHIELD JUMPER POWER 412VDC Y TO EVEN TERMINAL Input and Output Setup 9 3 P N 203 5751 Wall mounted relati
362. nsor Related Tests 11 21 6 1 Leak Test For both Timed and Volume control types if a flow sensor is configured water flow will be checked via a leak test that is performed at the beginning of the cycle During the leak test the main water valve will be turned ON and all zone valves will be set to OFF After an amount of time has elapsed equal to the Flow Alarm Delay the Water Flow input will be compared to the Minimum Flow for Alarm setpoint If the water flow is greater than the set point the flow alarm output will be set to ON and a Leak alarm will be generated If a Leak alarm occurs the cycle will terminate While a Leak alarm is active no normal cycles will run and the system status will be set to Leak Detected A Leak alarm must be cleared by the user or the alarm will return to normal after passing a leak test run by a manual cycle If an enabled zone is overridden to ON dur ing a leak test it will cause the test to fail resulting in a false alarm 11 21 6 2 Obstructed Zone Test When a zone becomes active during a cycle a timer is reset After time has elapsed equal to the flow alarm delay the water flow input will be compared to the Min Flow alarm setpoint If the water flow is less than the setpoint the flow alarm setpoint output will be set to ON an Obstructed alarm generated and the zone will be removed from the current cycle 11 21 7 Service Modes The Service Check cycle allows a service technician to visually
363. nt features of the Actions Menu is the Setup screen BH Setup The actual setup screen will vary depending on where the cursor is placed in the Main Status Home screen before is pressed This is the easiest way to edit an existing application For more information on usage of the Setup screen and how to implement its functions see Section 12 11 1 2 Setup Screens 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ 10 7 4 The Setup Screens items Menu Option 1 Input Definitions Value BisucrioM curat Mormal re 2 Output Definitions COMDENSEROT 3 System Information Fi PREY TAS 2 NEXT TAB F3 EDIT 1 FS CANCEL FUNCTION EM 4 Remote Communica tions 5 Alarm Setup Set up dial outs and alarm reporting for the current E2 Figure 10 11 Typical Setup Screen Setup screens are the interface used to change settings and setpoints and define inputs and outputs in the E2 Figure 10 11 shows atypical Setup screen and its primary elements For more details on Setup screens see Section 10 18 2 3 Navigating the Setup Screen 10 7 5 System Configuration Menu 6 Logging Setup 7 Network Setup RX 466 Unit 3 15 02 17 RX DEU SUMMARY ALARM 22 8 Circuits 8 Global Data SYSTEM CONFIGURATION me input Definitions Output Definitions 9 Licensing System Information Remote Communications Alarm Setup Logging Setup Network Setup Value Global Data NONE Controlled By Dis NO
364. nter is pressed when a circuit is high lighted the Actions Menu would display all available options for that circuit such as Manual Defrost meaning that by selecting Manual Defrost the Manual Defrost screen would come up for that particular circuit Detailed Status Manual Defrost Application Logs Graphs Override Expanded Information Detailed Status Figure 12 8 Example Actions Menu for Suction Group Value 12 4 2 Screen Types Summary Screens Summary screens let you view status information for multiple applications of the same type For example Fig ure 12 9 is the Circuits Summary screen in the E2 RX controller This screen shows the name state temperature setpoint alarm refrigeration and defrost information for all defined standard and case control circuits displayed To see a more detailed status when on an application sum mary screen highlight the desired application from the list with the arrow keys and press This will take you to the Status screen Navigation RX 4668 Unit 3 SUMMARY 17 58 52 ALARM Name State Temp Setpt Alarm Refr Defr Refrigeration NONE OFF STANDARD 2 NONE NONE OFF STANDARD CKT63 rati NONE NONE OFF CKTO4 2 pati NONE NONE OFF 5 d rati NONE NONE OFF CKT86 i NONE NONE OFF CKT 67 rati NONE NONE OFF CKT88 r rati NONE NONE OFF CKT69 Refrigeration NONE NONE Ar OFF CKT16 Refrigeration NONE NONE OFF CK
365. nu elect y te 1 S 1 C S stem C nfiguration S stem Inforn 1atior 1 3 Select Time Date The Time Date Setup screen Figure 10 15 is where all time and date changes occur RX 466 Unit 3 16 33 56 TIME DRTE SETUP FULL ALARM Date Format Date HH DD VV Time Format 25 Hour Format E Active Date 68 23 65 Active Time 6 31 26 88 Eastern Time Zone Line Sync Yes DEFINED DLT Dates Honth of Change Week of Change Day of Change Time DLT Start APR First Week of Month SUN 2 66 DLT End oct Last Week of Month SUN 2 88 Daylight Savings uses GMT Unit Location From US 21 Code US Zip Code 30144 Twilight Type Standard SUNDOWN Sunset Time 28 16 Active Longitude 84 597435 Sunrise Time 7 85 fictive Latitude 35 033850 F4 LOOK UP F5 CANCEL Figure 10 15 Time Date Setup Screen User Defined Shown Time Date Setup 10 8 1 The Time Format field affects how times are displayed and entered throughout the controller When 24 Hour For mat is selected in this field the hours are displayed and entered as a number from 0 to 23 When 12 Hour Format is selected the hours are displayed and entered as a num ber from 1 to 12 an A ora P at the end of the time signi fies whether the time is A M or P M Table 10 6 shows some times as how they would appear in both formats 12 Hour Format 24 Hour Format 7 15 00A 7 15 00 12 00 noon 12 00 00P 12 0
366. o same color 6 IN OUT 1 4 2 a JP2 o PLUG INPUT 45 g3 PLUG CABLE ol Eme Scd NN Ja Brom 2 PUT SOCKET NO TERMINATION TERMINATION 4 1 MULTIFLEX INPUT ADAPTER P N 335 2301 Acceptable CPC Transformers vs P N 640 0041 120VAC Primary ACI 50VA YELLOW AC2 P N 640 0050 120VAC Primary 75VA P N 640 0042 220VAC Primary 120 208 240 VAC S 50VA P N 640 0080 Multi tap 120 208 240VAC Primary 80VA P N 640 0056 Multi tap 120 208 240VAC Primary 56VA YELLOW AC1 24 VAC Note Please refer to transformer SECONDARY SIDE for primary side wiring 6 8 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ 4AO INSTALLATION GUIDE 1 Connect the 4AO board to the RS485 I O Network 2 Set the network address on the first five rockers of dip switch S1 3 Set the network baud rate using rockers 6 and 7 of dip switch S1 4 Set RS485 termination jumpers UP terminated if at either end of a daisy chain Otherwise set jumpers DOWN not terminated 4 BOARD 5 Optionally connect the 4 20mA outputs in either a 2 wire or 4 wire hookup as illustrated in Step 5 or if a 4 20mA is not used it may be left unconnected 6 Connect board to th
367. odigy interface has its own technical bulle tin explaining installation network setup and E2 configu ration Refer to Technical Bulletin 026 4117 6 3 ECT MODBUS E2 controllers version 2 30F01 or greater may select ECT MODBUS as a network type The E2 communicates with MODBUS devices including but not limited to Con trol Link CD Control Link RSC and Control Link ACC The Control Link products have their own documents explaining device configuration networking and E2 setup 026 4600 Control Link RSC Installation Instruc tions 026 4601 Control Link CD Installation Instruc tions 026 4703 Control Link ACC Installation Instruc tions 026 4602 Control Link ECT MODBUS Network ing to E2s covers MODBUS installation for all Control Link models 6 3 1 Control Techniques Drive VSD Using the MODBUS network type E2 controllers can communicate with the Control Techniques variable speed drive VSD There are three different VSD models the E2 communicates with Commander SE Commander SK and Unidrive SP drive types Note that all CT drives are 2 stop bits with no parity Since ECT MODBUS specifies 1 stop bit CT drives will configure the General Services setting for stop bits and always communicate with the drives using 2 stop bits The E2 calculates the difference and adjusts for the additional stop bit Configure the COM port the CT drive will connect to by pressing Alt M to open the serial configuration man
368. olu tions before changing any of these values Output at Minimum Output at Max imum The Output at Minimum and Output at Maximum val ues are used to change the range of possible output per centages The default values 0 for minimum 100 for maximum allow the output to vary from fully off to fully on changing these values therefore would only be neces sary if you desire a limited output range Two things occur when the Output at Minimum or Output at Maximum values are changed 1 The throttling range is shortened as dictated by the new values For example if you specified a 20 minimum the portion of the throttling range that would usually represent the range of outputs from 0 to 20 is cut off Any input value that falls within the previous 0 to 20 portion of the throttling range will cause the Proportional Mode to move the output towards 20 2 The Output at Minimum or Output at Maximum value replaces any calculated adjustment that would normally call for the output to be outside of the specified range In other words if the Out put at Minimum and Output at Maximum values Appendix D PID Control D 5 are 20 and 100 respectively the output per centage will never be below 2096 even if the P I and D Mode adjustments call for the output to be below 20 The output will remain in saturation at 20 until a higher output percentage is called for In short PID works as it normally does except the out
369. om where it is most convenient for the user The FSD can be configured to filter out notices and or return to normal alarms and provides a quick review of all advisories and detailed advisory information The FSD also receives alerts and provides annunciated alarms and alarm information directly to store and department manag ers This compact unit can be installed virtually anywhere with a standard Ethernet connection and 120V power source If more than one E2 controller is at a site one E2 must be set up as the alarm annunciator for that site The FSD will receive alarms from that alarm annunciator E2 for the entire site The FSD will point only to a single E2 at a site it will not poll multiple controllers for alarms For more information refer to the FSD Manual P N 026 1400 Hardware Overview 2 13 EZ 3 Mounting This section gives mounting instructions and dimen sions for all controllers and peripherals in the E2 system 3 1 Mounting the E2 The E2 s box body style is designed to be mounted against or inside a wall or panel If mounted against a sur face the controller will be 3 75 off the mounting surface If mounted inside a surface the door and front section of the back panel will rest 2 0 off the mounting surface See Figure 3 1 and Figure 3 2 3 1 1 Standard Mount The standard mount is meant for the controller to be mounted against a wall using the four mounting holes at the rear of the enclosure
370. ompressor connected to a brazed plate heat exchanger that provides a chilled water and glycol mixture for cooling display cases and coolers Multiple Modular Chillers are connected together to meet the capacity requirements of the system Modular Chillers are designed to provide cooling by paral leling the hydronics side of the secondary system instead of the refrigeration side of the system These units also use a water and glycol mixture as a condensing fluid for com pressor heat of rejection This design eliminates the long refrigerant piping runs thereby significantly reducing re frigerant charge 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ Multiple CCUs in Parallel Compact Chiller Unit Condenser Water Compact Chiller Unit Chilled Supply Temp Sensor Chiller Pump Station Condenser Bypass Condenser Valve Water Return Figure 11 1 Compact Chiller System 11 23 2 Learning Mode When an MCC application runs for the first time it undergoes a Learning Mode period to collect data on the chiller stages During Learning Mode the MCC will con trol the chilled water temperature but it will purposely cycle the chiller stages in different combinations to mea sure the effect they have on the temperature input value The Learning Mode lasts for several minutes After Learning Mode ends the MCC will require up to 24 hours of operation before compressor cycling is operating at maximum efficiency If
371. on The 8RO 8ROe 8IO and MultiFlex Outputs o 3 Press 8 Output Definitions The Output Status screen opens 01 01 02 RX 300 Unit 1 OUTPUT STATUS Top O Board Type Bra Pt Type Application Association Value ono Du on 8R0 1 2 SUCTION GRPO1 VS INV RST OUT OFF BRO 2 3 D SUCTION GRPO1 VS ALARM OUT OFF 8RO 1 4 D SUCTION GRPO1 COMP2 on 880 X 5 D SUCTION GRPO1 880 1 6 D SUCTION GRPO1 COMP4 on 8RO 1 7 D SUCTION GRPO2 COMPL 880 8 D SUCTION GRPO2 VS INV RST OUT OFF BRO 1 D SUCTION GRPO2 VS ALARM OUT OFF BRO 2 2 D SUCTION GRPO2 2 8RO 2 3 D SUCTION GRPO2 COMP3 on 8RO 2 4 D SUCTION GRP02 4 880 2 5 880 2 6 D CONDENSERO1 FAN OUT NOTACT 880 2 7 D SPR OUTPUT OFF BRO 8 BRO 3 1 01 BAKERY CLR REFRIG SOLENOID 8RO 3 2 D 02 ISLAND PROD REFRIG SOLENOID 8RO 3 3 D 03 PROD DISP 1 REFRIG SOLENOID on 8RO 3 4 D 04 PROD DISP 2 REFRIG SOLENOID on 880 5 D 05 FOOD SRV CL REFRIG SOLENOID BRO 3 6 D 06 MEAT PREP REFRIG SOLENOID F1 SETUP F2 DEL MOD F4 LOOK UP F5 CANCEL Figure 9 9 Output Status Screen To configure a point use the up and down arrow keys to move the cursor to the point you wish to set up and press SETUP If you press to set up a 4AO output point the E2 will automatically transfer you to the Analog Output screen Figure 9 6 For all other output board types press ing will bring up a pop up menu such as the one show
372. on Circuits Raises case temperature setpoints Suction Groups Raises suction setpoint Raises discharge setpoint Raises or lowers PID setpoint Analog Output I O Modules whichever will save energy Digital Output I O Control output is locked OFF Modules Table 11 12 Shedding Effect on Applications 11 34 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee 11 11 4 Shedding Levels Some applications have a single input usually called DEMAND SHED that when ON sheds the application Each application is programmed with a specific demand bump value that is added or subtracted from the control setpoints when this input comes ON Other applications notably HVAC applications have two inputs a primary and a secondary usually called PRI DEMAND SHED and SEC DEMAND SHED Each input has its own demand bump value so that when the primary is ON the primary demand bump is in effect and when the secondary is ON the secondary demand bump is in effect When both of these inputs are ON the demand bump values are added subtracted together and applied to the setpoint s As a result two levels of shedding are pos sible for a single application Example An air conditioner with a cooling setpoint of 70 F has a primary demand bump value of 2 and a sec ondary demand bump value of 2 In a typical Demand Control application setup the PRI DEMAND SHED input would be one of the first inputs to go into shed when this occurs the bump value is add
373. one E2 is present on site all chains are connected so that the entire network forms a Overview Echelon Network and Hardware Setup 8 1 RECOMMENDED E2 E2 w CABLE CABLE s LONWORKS DEVICES UNBROKEN CHAIN E226513125rev Figure 8 1 Echelon Wiring Subnets CABLE Figure 8 2 Echelon Wiring pt 2 8 3 1 Maximum Number of Eche lon Devices A daisy chained segment may contain no more than 63 total Echelon devices also called nodes If there are 64 or more Echelon devices at your site an Echelon compati ble router P N 572 4200 will be required A router placed on the Echelon Network allows you to add another 63 node daisy chain network For larger installations 8 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee multiple routers can be used to extend the network indefi nitely More information about routers and how they are used in a daisy chain Echelon Network can be found in the Router and Repeater Installation Guide P N 026 1605 8 4 Device Termination In a daisy chain configuration both ends of the net work segment must be terminated Terminate the E2 by setting jumper JP7 to the UP position as shown in Figure 8 3 Other devices on the Echelon Network are terminated either by jumpers on the control board or by connecting a 102 ohm terminator block at the end of the network seg ment see Section 8 4 1 Using
374. onnector with a two wire pigtail These wires may be spliced on to the switch or dig ital sensor leads The connector is designed to snap in to one of the six inputs Connection In order to function correctly the CC 100 needs to know the function of each of the sensors plugged into inputs 1 through 6 For example a CC 100P liquid pulse controller needs to know which of the six sensors is the coil in sensor which is the coil out sensor etc Each of the six inputs have a default input type assign ment based on the type of CC 100 either Liquid or Suc tion If the sensors in your case match the default sensor types plug each sensor into the appropriate receptacle 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ Input Liquid CC 100P and Suction CC 100LS CS 100 and CC 100H 1 COIL IN Blue DISCHARGE TEMP 1 Green 2 COIL OUT Red DISCHARGE TEMP 2 Green 3 DISCHARGE AIR DISCHARGE TEMP Green Green 4 RETURNAIR DISCHARGE TEMP 4 ple Green 5 DEFROST TERM DEFROST TERM Orange Orange 6 CLEAN SWITCH CLEAN SWITCH Table 9 4 Default Input Assignments If your case has sensors or switches that are not listed in the defaults above or if itis otherwise impossible to use all the defaults for the CC 100 the input type can be changed in the system software Refer to P N 026 1603 Programmer s Guide for instructions on how to do this Auxiliary Analog Input JUMPER S j 12V lt
375. ons For a complete menu screen that lists all Hot Keys and how to access them press the WS key and the key together Ctrl Use the control keys to access Insert Mode Edit Mode and Names Pressing and a INS will appear on the top right of the screen activates Insert Mode Insert Mode toggles between Insert and Overwrite edit modes Pressing bl and ED will appear on the top right of the screen activates Edit Mode Edit Mode allows you to change the name of the application to something besides the name of the application and the number Pressing and NAMES will appear on the top right of the screen switches from a Point number to a Point Name when setting up Board and Points in a Setup screen 12 8 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 12 5 Customizing the Home Screen The Home screen can be customized to show different information depending on the user s needs If you wish to change the Home screen from the default screen follow the steps below There are eight different screen options available with the Device Summary screen as the default choice essc NOTE Toggle Full Options must be on in or 4 der to customize the Home screen FULL will appear at the top right of your screen when Full Options are enabled To toggle quickly to Full Alt Options press the a key and Wl together l Press button to open the Main Menu screen amp 2 Press for the System Configuration screen i 3 Press W
376. ontrol of the condenser at its designed TD during swings in ambient temperature For the Drop Leg Minimum setpoint if the drop leg temperature falls below this setpoint condenser fans will be cycled OFF regardless of the value of the TD setpoint For the Drop Leg Maximum setpoint it is the maxi mum allowable value of the drop leg temperature If the Software Overview 11 47 drop leg temperature rises above this setpoint the con denser fans are cycled ON regardless of the value of the TD The Drop Leg Offset setpoint is an adjustment entered if needed after measuring liquid subcooling dur ing operation of an individual condensing unit The TD setpoint is the optimal difference between the refrigerant drop leg temperature and the ambient plenum temperature When the TD i e drop leg temp drop leg offset plenum temp begins to climb above this setpoint fans will be cycled ON to bring down the drop leg temper ature thus lowering the TD measurement The TD deadband setpoint is a range of values around the TD Setpoint within which the value of the TD calcula tion is acceptable When the TD rises above the setpoint plus 1 2 the deadband value fans will begin cycling ON When the TD falls below the setpoint minus 1 2 the dead band value fans will cycle OFF For the Condenser Fan On Delay setpoint fans are cycled ON when the TD is above the setpoint at the rate set for Condenser Fan On Delay For example if this f
377. ontrollers select Net work Summary For the number of I O Network devices 16AIs 8ROs etc associated with each controller online and offline select Connected I O Boards amp Controllers To set up a router select Router Setup For more information on routers and repeaters refer to the Router and Repeater Installation Guide P N 026 1605 For CC 100 circuit associations select Controller Associations 10 13 1 Specify Number of Boards Specify the number of boards from the Connected I O screen 1 Press to open the Main Menu 2 I ress H System Cor fi uration 3 F ress etwork Setup 4 Press Wl Connected I O Boards amp Controllers 82 81 11 RX 466 Unit 3 Use Ctrl X to Select CX Tabs SETUP Ee PR 2 10 Network C7 13 56 68 INAME SB FULL ALARM C4 Third Party C5 Echelon Num Network Ctrls NetSetup 10 Network Board Type 1 16RI 4A0 z 8D0 8R0 CCB 1 DFNC IRLDS MultiFlex CUB MultiFlex ESR MultiFlex PAK z wee WPK e ee F1 PREU TAB Figure 10 23 Connected I O Setup Screen E2 firmware revisions 2 81 and above Boards on the I O Network 16Al Boards Enter the number of 16AI analog input boards on this E2 s I O Network 8RO Boards Enter the number of 8RO relay output boards on this E2 s I O Network 800 Boards Enter the number of 8DO digital out put boards on this E2 s I O Network 4AO Boards Enter the number o
378. ooting rtr i eer ia ee vea reete edis reve ite 8 5 9 INPUT AND OUTPUT SETUP toss suse tates sosta senses eStos 9 1 9 1 THE 16AI 8IO AND MULTIFLEX INPUTS c cccccccsssccececssssceccecsesceceeceessececeseaecececeseaseceecenesssaeccecesaaaeceeceensaeeeeeeenea 9 1 9 1 1 Connecting Sensors to Input Boards eese E EEE S a Ee iaei is 9 tet 9 1 1 2 Sensor Wiring Types 9 1 1 3 Input Type Dip Switches 9 12 Power Gonnectiones an eco PR Qe die aie eet qe hd ere eee sext Ies tex US 9 1 3 Input Setup in EZ sse eme te e ER pe PET o DR ES UR Dire ve egre tee Re e 9 1 3 1 Configuring a Point from the Input Definitions Status Screen sess eene ener 9 6 9 1 3 2 Using the Input Definitions Status Screen 9 1 3 3 Setting Up Analog Inputs 9 1 3 4 Setting Up Digital Inputs 9 2 THE 8RO 8ROE 8IO AND MULTIFLEX OUTPUTS 9 2 1 Wiring Form C COn QCts olde Hen Papeete Ue ee 92 2 MultiFlex Relay OUP UES mitad nu ees 9 2 3 Setting the Fail Safe Dip Switch inie a tse ee itte t edere ree 92 Wiring Outputs to Points x4 iua US erai UE eee Ue RI det RP 9 11 9 2 5 The Output EED sies eet Oe retener LO eee tee te e e RT PP OE 9 11 9 2 6 Setup ti E2 OO UU dest etaed
379. or Inputs 6 Analog Input 2 LonWorks Network Connection Hand Held Terminal HHT Jack 7 LEDs Red Service Green Status Output Cable Connection Network Termination Jumper 26502034 Figure 2 20 Case Controller CC 100P shown 2 3 5 The ESR8 Discontinued The ESRS electronic suction regulator P N 810 3195 is an Echelon Network based control board that controls up to eight separate electronic suction regulator ESR stepper valves The ESR8 uses suction side variable posi tion ESRs to vary evaporator pressure and control temper ature for an entire circuit The ESR8 offers an economical more efficient alternative to TXV control The board can be used with either Emerson Flow Con trols ESR12 or ESR20 valves as well as a number of com mercially available ESR stepper valves Note that Emerson Flow Controls supplies both a 24 Volt and a 12 Volt version of the valve The ESR board is only compati ble with the 12 Volt version of the valve The board features two LEDs for each valve which indicate movement and direction A status LED indicates the general status of the board The ESR8 board is shown in Figure 2 21 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 v GLIIIIITI MM LEGEND 1 Power Input 4 Termination Jumper 2 Valve Inputs 8 5 Status Light 3 Network Inputs 6 DIP Switches Figure 2 21 ESR8 Board Layout 2 3 6 Temperature Display The TD
380. or applications much easier For example if you are setting up condenser fan 3 for condenser 2 you may choose to name it CND 2 FAN 3 Then when programming your Condenser Control application you may easily define the fan output by tying it to CND 2 FAN 3 This keeps you from having to keep track of which contacts are tied to which point numbers You are required to enter a point name in the Point Name field The default name is BOARD NAME SUBNET NUMBER BOARD NUM BER POINT NUMBER 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ Board Point The Board Point Number will auto matically be defined if you are configuring the point from the Output Status screen Select Eng Units The Select Eng Units field is where you may select how the ON and OFF states of this point are displayed and represented in the E2 s setup fields and status screens By default digital outputs have ON OFF engineering units meaning when the output is ON or OFF the input will be rep resented as ON or OFF in the system software Engineering units are only a visual representation of the state of the output point energized or de ener gized Therefore it is not necessary to define engi neering units for digital inputs However selecting units that are appropriate to the output s function such as BYP or NO_BYP for inputs that initiate bypasses will make the output s state easier to read and understand To choose an engi
381. or off as with equal capacity compressors and therefore compressor runtimes may vary significantly over time However for those compressors defined with identical capacity the algorithm will attempt to keep both runtimes and cycle counts as even as possi ble 11 23 5 Bypass Valve Control MCC can utilize the Chilled and Condenser Bypass Valves These valves will be modulated to maintain user defined differential setpoints For each valve as the differ ential pressure rises above the setpoint the valve will modulate open When the differential pressure falls below setpoint the valve will modulate closed 11 54 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee 11 24 Boiler The BX 300 and BX 400 will default to a maximum of two Boiler applications Other models will have to license the Boiler Application The Boiler will be available only for E2 versions 3 0 and higher 11 24 1 Overview The Boiler can be controlled two ways via the boiler temperature or the boiler pressure The E2 uses the current outside air temperature to calculate a new boiler control setpoint If the boiler temperature or boiler pressure is less than the setpoint value then the boiler is turned ON Otherwise it is turned OFF The algorithm will work in an inverted fashion if the Minimum Outside Air Temperature is greater than the Maximum Outside Air Temperature Maximum Boiler temp Boiler Setpoint Minimum boiler temp Outside Maximum temp outside
382. or used for 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ outside and inside temperature to monitor supply and return air temperature When used in this application the sensors are supplied without enclosure covers The sensors should be mounted directly in the air stream of the supply or return air duct The sensors are not supplied with any mounting hardware for this application 3 5 6 Refrigeration System Tem perature Probes and Sensors 3 5 6 1 Retail Solutions supplies several temperature monitor ing devices including bullet sensors pipe mount sensors immersion probes insertion probes and sensors for high temperature applications Each of these sensors is gener ally installed on the system by the equipment manufac turer If a device must be added to the system refer to the information supplied with the device and consult the refrigeration equipment manufacturer Table 3 1 lists some typical sensor applications and the sensor or probe most suited for that purpose Location Table 3 1 Sensor Application and Type 3 5 6 2 Sensors Mounting Bullet and Pipe Mount Bullet or pipe mount sensors mounted on refrigerant lines should be secured with a Panduit low temperature cable tie number PLT2S M120 or equivalent For pipe mount sensors the curved surface should be placed against the pipe and the tie should be positioned in the groove on the top surface of the sensor A second tie should be used to secure the lead to the pip
383. ormation 2 3 4 100 Case Controllers and CS 100 Case Circuit Controllers A CC 100 case control board is a smart board capa ble of controlling all functions for a single case including lights fans defrost anti sweat and suction side or liquid side valve control CC 100s perform these functions inde pendently from the E2 RX controllers but it does rely on a parent E2 for logging alarming providing supplemental I O values and coordinating defrost times among circuits There are four different models of the CC 100 each of which controls a different type of valve 1 CC 100P P N 810 3160 Case controller for liquid side pulse valves also called electronic expansion valves or EEVs This model is capa ble of controlling up to two pulse valves simulta neously for use in dual evaporator applications such as walk in boxes 2 CC 100LS P N 810 3170 Case controller for liquid side stepper valves EEVs 3 CS 100 P N 810 3177 Case circuit controller for suction side stepper valves also called elec tronic evaporator pressure regulators or EEPRs 4 CC 100H P N 810 3171 A special version of the CC 100 that is used by a particular manufac turer This board controls temperature in a case using suction side stepper valves that regulate pressure in the evaporator The CC 100 CS 100 board is shown in Figure 2 20 2 12 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee Valve Connection Temperature Sens
384. ory was full Not Enough Flash Memory The E2 tried to save data to the flash memory but the The E2 tried to save data to unbacked memory but the memory was full The E2 tried to save data to the scratch pad memory but the memory was full 10 0 10 50 Jse Use Jse Jse Jse Jse se 30 A digital value has transitioned ON more times than its defined Number of Events setpoint An analog value has risen above 16 defined high limit setpoint during OCCUPIED mode An analog value has fallen below its defined low limit setpoint during the OCCUPIED mode Occupied Low Limit Exceeded Off Time Exceeded Limit A digital value has been OFF longer than its defined Time Off Last setpoint Oil Failure Occurred User JAn oil sensor for a compressor has detected a failure On Time Exceeded Limit A digital value has been ON longer than its defined Open Wire MultiFlex ESR controller has detected an open wire Overcurrent tiFlex ESR controller has detected an overcurrent Num Of Events Exceeded Limit Occupied Hi Limit Exceeded Notice Limit Exceeded An analog sensor s programmed notice limit has been exceeded 2 User r User User User User User condition on the valve Override Log lost CRC Error 20 An internal error in the E2 has resulted 1n a loss of the 2 Override Lost Output 20 A user tried to override an output on a CC 100 100 or similar Echelon device but the override was not performed success
385. outside Propor tional Mode s throttling range the output percentage will be at 0 if below the Throttling Range or at 100 if above the Throttling Range At this point PID is consid ered to be in saturation meaning it is operating at full or zero capacity and is not able to react any further to changes that occur beyond the throttling range Proportional Mode cannot distinguish between a satu rated and an unsaturated system it simply makes propor tional adjustments to the output percentage Therefore once an input value in a saturated system changes direc tion Proportional Mode reacts to correct the movement regardless of how much error exists As the temperature changes direction and again moves in the direction of the CHANGES DIRECTION THROTTLE RANGE REMAINS SATURATION THROTTLING RANGE FOLLOWS INPUT DURING SATURATION P MODES setpoint Proportional Mode will reduce the 100 output percentage in an attempt to stop the movement and stabi lize the temperature To put it another way when a system is saturated the input changes the placement of the Throttling Range As shown in Figure D 2 as the input rises above the Throt tling Range the top end ofthe Throttling Range rises with it When the input finally changes direction the Throttling Range remains at its new position The Mode covers for Proportional inability to account for saturation When the input value is ou
386. ower Connector 9 12 VDC F2 Main Menu Up Arrow moves to previous screen editable field or top of screen Right Arrow selects last editable field starting from bottom of screen selects last editable field from bottom to top Scrolls list selections and scrolls through ASCII characters if in a text field RS 485 Connector Cancel clears erases text in editable field cancels overrides Down Arrow moves to next screen editable field end of screen or advances Left Arrow selects first editable field from top of screen and next editable field from top to bottom F1 Home Screen Enter save into memory Numeric keypad LCD four lines of 16 characters Figure 2 10 Hand held Terminal 814 3110 2 2 5 Boards The 8RO P N 810 3005 board is a general purpose board used to connect an E2 to any of eight standard con trol relay outputs but is now obsolete and has been replaced by the SROSMT P N 810 3006 board To function the 8RO board must be connected through either the Echelon Network or the RS485 I O Network to the E2 When properly installed the 8RO receives an elec trical impulse from the E2 which either opens or closes any of eight contact relays Output definitions within the E2 allow the user to configure the 8RO board to interact The 8RO and 8ROSMT Relay I O Network Boards and Peripherals with any refrigeration system or environmental control component Th
387. pied mode by reading an occupied state input which is most commonly tied to the output of a Time Schedule application 11 6 4 Fan Control The E2 BX can control three different types of AHU fans However only one fan can be controlled per AHU The fan types include single speed two speed and vari able speed Controls for all fans are similar in that they operate in either of three modes Continuous The fan is always on even when the AHU is not in heating cooling or dehumidification mode Auto The fan is only on when the AHU is in heating cooling or dehumidification mode Summer ON Winter Auto This mode allows the AHU fan to operate in Continuous mode during the summer months and in Auto mode during the winter months The operation of the fans during Continuous and Auto modes is largely dependent on the fan type 11 6 4 1 Single Speed Fans Single speed fans require no advanced control parame 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ ters Whether in Continuous or Auto mode the fan will be ON when Fan Control calls for it to be ON and OFF when it calls for it to be OFF 11 6 4 2 Two Speed Fans Two speed fans have a LOW and a HIGH speed set ting You must specify the number of the stage that when activated will switch the fan from LOW to HIGH For example if there are four cooling stages and you wish to have the fan switch from LOW to HIGH when stage 3 becomes active enter a 3 as the switch ov
388. pla Down Arrow def Up Arrow aux Program Button mute Remote Program LED 26513050 Figure 2 19 EC 2 The EC 2 is an advanced refrigerated case controller that doubles as a temperature and case status indicator During refrigeration and defrost the EC 2 controls most typical case functions including fans defrost and a pulse valve on the liquid side of the evaporator to regulate super heat The EC 2 29x version controls the refrigeration sole noid valve to allow the passage of refrigerant to the TXV valve The EC 2 39x version controls a pulse valve on the liquid side of the evaporator to regulate Superheat control The EC 2 relies on a parent E2 to handle logging alarm control defrost scheduling and other case control functions The EC 2 is designed to be mounted on the front of a refrigerated case The LED display shows the current case temperature with one tenths of a degree s accuracy The display can also show alarm codes to immediately notify Hardware Overview 2 11 floor managers of alarms and notices Other lights on the display show the ON OFF status of refrigeration defrost and fans The EC 2 can be easily programmed using either the four front panel buttons or an optional infrared remote control For security the buttons can be disabled to pre vent tampering msan NOTE There are several variations of the 4 EC 2 Contact Retail Solutions at 1 800 829 2724 for more inf
389. plication s control devices Proof Failure Occurred User A proof checking device 1s registering a failure 1n of the Application s control devices Proof Reset Stage In retry 50 Due to a FAIL signal from a proof checking device P fae E2 stenting reset he poo ae Rack Failure Occurred User A Suction Group application is registering a tota Qiu REFR Phase ONERE User A phase loss device connected to Global Data has switched ON to shut down all refrigeration systems REFR PNE utdown User A Global Data application s REFR Shutdown input has turned ON to shut down all suction groups con densers and circuits Relativ Adv No Active Setpt An application that 1s supposed to be generating an alarm for a specified input has no active setpoint to use for alarming This usually occurs when alarm set points are supplied by other applications or inputs and the application or input fails Resize bad Logging Terminated The number of samples was changed in a log group and the resizing of the file storing data was not suc cessful Check memory Runtime Log Stuck No Memory 15 A Runtime Log 1s unable to save new data because Cereme isnot enough memory Runtime Logs Not Restored 15 The runtime logs stored in memory were not restored Oe O oerte tast resetar opge o o C 12 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 Default ee RX BX Firmware Update Failed 20 The E2 s firmware update was not successful
390. pre set to detect when the tempera ture and humidity levels are favorable for econo mization When the conditions are favorable this switch sends an OK ON signal to the AHU Control application Otherwise the switch sends a NOT OK OFF signal and economization is disabled 2 Dewpoint Setpoint A dewpoint probe measur ing the dewpoint of the outside air is compared to a setpoint If the outside air dewpoint is less than the setpoint economization is enabled If it is higher than the setpoint economization is dis abled 3 Calculated Enthalpy The AHU Control appli cation calculates the outside air enthalpy by read ing the value of a relative humidity sensor and an outdoor air temperature sensor If the enthalpy is lower than the setpoint economization is enabled If the enthalpy is greater than the set point economization is disabled 4 Dewpoint Fail Safe This is similar to method 2 except an outdoor temperature sensor value is compared to the setpoint instead of a dewpoint probe s value This comparison is a poor substi tute for actual dewpoint readings and is recom mended for use as a fail safe only When possible use humidity or dewpoint sensors 5 Temperature Comparison The AHU Control application simply compares the temperature of the inside air with the temperature of the outside air If the outside air is cooler than the inside air Software Overview 11 21 economization is enabled 6 In
391. primary sensor fails If a global input is set up on an E2 with a secondary priority the E2 will not send its value to the other Global Data applications as long as it is receiving a primary value of that type from another E2 on the network If a secondary provider does not receive a primary value update at least once every five min utes the secondary provider will assume the primary sensor has failed and it will send the secondary value to all other Global Data applications on the net work These applications will then use the secondary value in place of the failed primary value Secondary providers will continue to send the input 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ value until the primary provider again sends a valid update to the other Global Data applications The secondary provider would then stop sending the sec ondary value and all Global Data applications would use the primary value If using this priority setting you must enter board and point settings Example Out of three E2s an outside air temperature sensor on E2 A s I O Network is set up as the primary provider of the global Outside Air Temp input A sim ilar sensor is set up on E2 C with a secondary prior ity see Figure 10 45 As long as E2 A is capable of broadcasting a valid temperature value all three E2s would use E2 A s Outside Air Temperature value in their own Global Data applications However if E2 A loses contact with the sensor E2 A no
392. ptimum start stop Outputs digital selecting units 9 73 Outside Temperature Sensor See Sensors out side temperature Overrides initiating 12 9 P PAK 2 7 11 29 Part Numbers and Model Descriptions 2 Passwords setting 70 13 Peer Communications 7 1 7 closed network layout 7 2 ethernet IP configurations 7 1 ethernet network layouts 7 2 hardware specifications 7 open network layout 7 2 7 3 software specifications 7 2 troubleshooting 7 4 PIB 2 2 PID Control D Plus Board 6 2 PMACII defined 2 0 features 2 0 Pointers input and output 72 15 Points See Inputs or Outputs Power I O Boards 6 5 Power Modules wiring 9 15 wiring schematic 9 15 Power Monitoring 11 42 daily logs 11 43 hourly logs 71 43 logging 11 43 monthly logs 11 43 shed mode 71 42 Pressure Transducers 3 7 Pulse Accumulation 48 accumulator reset types 71 49 configuration 11 48 high trip 11 49 logging 11 49 outputs 71 48 Pulse Modulating Anti Sweat Controller See PMAC II Pulsed Defrost See Defrost pulsed R RCB 2 7 11 25 Recovery Mode for Case Controllers 71 11 Refrigeration Controller 1 1 Repeaters part number for manual 6 two channel mounting 3 6 Reset Button 70 1 1 8 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual E2 Resetting 12 13 Resetting the E2 Controller 70 1 Retrofit Mounting 3 2 Returned To Normal and Forced To Normal Alarms 12 12 Reverse Cycle Hot Gas See Defrost reverse cy cle hot gas Rotary Dials I O Board Set
393. put connectors from old board into the MultiFlex input sockets and one for inputs 5 8 Otherwise polarity sensitive inputs will have to be rewired No adapter is needed for inputs 9 16 ne for inputs 1 4 7 Connect board to power transformer If a center ta presen DO NOT use the center tap Instead connect 0V erminal to a separate Earth ground sesessss ssss ssssssss sess S999 toro OvSIG ovsiG OvSIG OvSIG OvSIG ovSIG 0 516 2 E lt OvSIG 0 516 OvSIG 0516 0 516 0 516 Ov SIG INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT INPUT 4 INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 INPUT 9 INPUT 10 INPUT 11 INPUT 12 INPUT 13 INPUT 14 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 1 S3 INPUT 16 S4 RELAY SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR ADDRESS ADDRESS BELDEN 8761 FOR PLENUM USE BELDEN 82761 OR 88761 BOARD 1 BOARD 2 BOARD 5 BOARD 7 BOARD 8 OR EQUIV Ree ee E ESL TEES 508 LL BOARD BOARDS BOARD 9 BOARD 13 BOARD 14 BOARD 15 BOARD 16 annis BOARD 24 54 ANALOG 440 ADDRESS 3 Tia GITE or BDO ADDRESS OF THE RS 16800 BOARD i 9600 BAUD 19200 BAUD WIRE to same color WIRE OV to 0V WIRE t
394. que No two E2s on the network may have the same unit number Enter this number in the Unit Number field It is rec ommended you number the first E2 1 and number the other E2s on the network sequentially 2 3 4 etc Unit Name Type a name for the E2 in the Unit Name field Boards on the I O Network 16AI Boards Enter the number of 16AIs or Multi Flex I O boards on this E2 s I O Network If you have any special MultiFlex or Gateway boards that emulate 16AI also include their total number of boards in this field 8RO Boards Enter the number of 8ROs and Multi Flex 168AOs 168s 88AOs relay output boards this E2 s I O Network 8DO Boards Enter the number of 8DO digital out put boards on this E2 s I O Network 4AO Boards Enter the number of 4AOs MultiFlex 10 2 2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 168AOs and MultiFlex 88AO analog output boards on this E2 s I O Network IRLDS Controllers Enter the number of IRLDS RLDS leak detection units on this E2 s I O Network Unit Controllers Echelon Liquid Ctrls CC100P CC100LS Enter the com bined number of pulse valve case controllers CC100Ps and liquid side stepper valve case con trollers CC100LSs in this field Suction Controllers CC100H Enter the num ber of suction stepper case controllers CC100Hs in this field Circuit Suction CS100 Enter the number of suc tion lineup circuit controllers CS100s in this field ESR8 Line Up Boards
395. r Wir ing Practices available in the Product Manuals section of the Emerson Climate Technologies Web site www emersonclimate com 6 1 6 Network ID Numbers Board Numbers Each device on an RS485 segment has either a network dip switch or rotary dials that must be used to assign the board a unique network ID number The network ID number makes a board unique from other boards on the network of the same type This allows E2 to find it and communicate with it easily Boards of the same type should be numbered in sequence starting with one and continuing with two three and so forth For example if a segment contains four 16AI boards and five 8RO boards you should num ber the 16AIs one two three and four and the 8ROs one two three four and five The same should be done with multiple 4AO and 8DO boards and IRLDS leak detection units For all boards except 8IO and 8DO boards the net work dip switch labeled S1 or S3 for the 16AI board is used to set the unique board number of the unit and the baud rate The 810 and 8DO uses rotary dials to set the board number of the unit Numbering the MultiFlex Combination I O Boards When it comes to network numbering the MultiFlex Combination Input Output boards 88 88AO 168 168AO and 168DO are special cases They are actually a The I O Network combination of three types of Retail Solutions boards the inputs are configured like a 16AI the relay outputs are configu
396. r cycles are desired setting the field to Less Cycling or Least Cycling will decrease the number of cycles but also increase the amount of fluctuation in the suction pressure 11 1 3 4 Variable Speed Digital Scroll and Digital Discus Compressor Support The Enhanced Suction Group supports variable speed compressors similar to the Suction Group application When a variable speed compressor is present it is the first compressor stage ON and the last stage OFF and its capacity is varied to attempt to correct small fluctuations in the suction pressure or temperature In addition the Enhanced Suction Group application supports use of one or multiple Copeland Digital Scroll or Digital Discus compressors for use as a variable capacity compressor With several Digital Scroll or Digital Discus compressors the Enhanced Suction Group will modulate one of those compressors at a time to control suction pres sure As compressor capacity is added or removed the Enhanced Suction Group may modulate another Digital Scroll compressor to distribute compressor resources and solenoid wear The operating capacities ofthe Copeland Digital Scroll and Copeland Digital Discus compressors are determined in the same way as a variable speed compressor except the Copeland Digital Scroll and Copeland Digital Discus controlled by pulse width modulation PWM 11 1 3 5 Floating Suction Control Floating suction control in the Enhanced Suction Group behaves
397. r1 X to Select CX Tabs SETUP C1 General A p C Comp Setup C7 Outs LCR eo alarms Press desired selection Alternate 1 0 Formats Set Multiple Outputs Output Change Delta Generic Alarm Setup Logging Setup Bypass Setup 1 0 MODE SETUP 1 0 Comp On Defrost Comp On Reclaim Min to Lu On Run Time EQ Minimize Switch Two Stage n SP Float Associated COND Figure 10 46 Edit Menu The Edit menu becomes available when you are on a Setup screen and can be opened by pressing EDIT Depending on which Setup option index tabs is high lighted the Edit menu allows you to change field format ting using these options Alternate I O Formats setting up pointers can change a field to expect a Board Point Fixed Value or Area Ctrl A pplication Property Set Multiple Outputs allows you to connect an output pointer to multiple input pointers Output Change Delta the change that must occur at the output before the new value is used Generic Alarm Setup enables the user to custom assign alarming parameters in the controller Logging Setup enables the user to turn logging on for a particular parameter Note that if L appears next to the parameter default logging has already been enabled for the Logging Group Cell Bypass Setup Opens screen for bypass input types which are Momentary or Level triggered and remain active for a
398. ransformer 120 208 240 AC and 640 0080 80VA Transformer 24VAC Center Tapped Transformer 1 24vAC Center Tapped g OV 12 z Three conductor non shielded cables 7 AC2 are the recommended wire for connecting between the center tapped transformer and I O boards Y Power Wiring Types Sars Earth ground the m 14 AWG Belden 9495 OV center tapped 240 2208 18 AWG Belden 9493 Y Y Y terminal of each board 24V 24V 120 PRIMARY SIDE SECONDARY SIDE ECT MODBUS The RS485 Network and Hardware Setup 6 7 ee MULTIFLEX COMBINATION I O BOARD INSTALLATION GUIDE 1 Connect board to the RS485 I O Network 2 Set the network address on the first five rockers of dip switch S3 for the 16AI and S4 for the 8RO sections of the MultiFlex 3 Set the network address on rockers 6 8 on S4 for the 4A0 8DO sections of the MultiFlex if 88A0 and 168A0 have 4AO section The 16800 has 8DO section 4 Set the network baud rate using rockers 6 and 7 of dip switch S3 For 9600 baud set 6 UP_and 7 DOWN For 19200 baud set 6 DOWN and 7 UP 5 Set RS485 termination jumpers OUT term if at either end of a daisy chain Otherwise set jumpers IN no term A a o lt A 6 If replacing an old 810 or 16Al use MultiFlex input adapters P N 335 2301 to plug in
399. rd and a menu where output points may be selected and configured Each record in this screen contains the following infor mation about a point 1 Board Type read only Board Type shows which kind of output board the point is on The Board Type field will read either 8RO 8DO or 4AO for I O Network 16AI boards E16AI and 8ROE for Echelon Network 16AlIe boards The last character of the Board Type field also shows what type of input the point is defined as If a point has already been defined as an analog or digital input this field will signify its input type with an A for analog or D for digital 2 Brd read only The point s board number appears under the Brd field 3 Pt read only The point number of each point appears in its record in the Pt field 4 Type read only The Type field shows the output s data type Possible Types are A Analog D Digital O One Shot or P Pulse If the point has not been identified a will appear at the end of the field instead 5 Application Select which application you wish to set up inputs to Pressing LOOK UP when on a defined point will open the Application Selection menu a list of application types currently existing in the box CANCEL will cancel this menu 6 Association If a point has already been defined and is currently being used by an application the name of the input to which the point is connected will be displayed in the Asso ciat
400. re used to detect a Rack Pack failure produced by some device out of the PAK s control Failed Attempt To Bind Input 50 A valid link could not be made between an E2 appli cation and an input assigned to it Failed Sensor Or Bad Wiring 20 E2 1s unable to get a valid sensor value due to a possi ble hardware problem Failed To Create logging 15 unable to create logs for input or output shown btain DHCP Lease to obtain a DHCP lease from the DHCP Server when a lease is requested This happens at system startup if a DHCP lease is requested or if the user switches to using DHCP to Renew DHCP Lease DHCP Lease failed to renew altogether DHCP Leases are renewed at an interval of half the time of the requested lease If the lease is for 5 days then a renewal will happen at 2 5 days If this fails it will retry at the of the lease time If both attempts fail the alarm is generated Fax Init String Is Not Valid 30 The fax initialization string for the E2 s modem 15 incorrect and may need editing License manager has denied permission to access a feature during a restore Either the license for that feature is invalid or it doesnot exist or the number o licenses for that feature is less than the number needed for the configuration Further information may be found in the service log License manager permission to access a fea ture during startup Either the license for that feature is invalid or it does not exist or the
401. red input terminal Place 250Q resistor across odd and even numbered input termi nals ODD TERMINAL EVEN TERMINAL Table 9 1 Sensor Wiring 9 1 3 At this point in the setup process you should have all sensors transducers and other input devices wired to points on MultiFlexes 16AIs and all output devices con nected to 8ROs 8DOs or 4AOs outputs Once the physi cal wiring is complete you will need to tell E2 the types of sensors or devices that are connected to each I O point This is achieved in the Input and Output Definitions screens 9 1 3 1 Configuring a Point from the Input Definitions Status Screen Input Setup in E2 To configure a point go to the Input Definitions Status screen 1 Press to open the Main Menu amp 2 Press System Configuration 3 Press Input Definitions The Input Status screen opens 9 6 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual Pulse Accumulator output to input board If the input board is an 8IO or a 16AI version E 02 or greater connect the two KWh terminals to the input point polarity insensitive If the input board is a 16AI version less than E 02 connect the KWh terminals to board point 1 Set input switch 1 DOWN and set input switch 8 UP If the input board is a 16AIe connect the two KWh terminals to input 1 2 3 or 4 ONLY TO INPUT LOW VOLTS Py PHASE LOSS 26613086 01 01 02 RX 300 Unit 1 18 12 22 INPUT STATUS O
402. red like an 8RO and the analog outputs are config ured like a 4AO When a MultiFlex combo board is present on the net work it must be addressed like all three board types Therefore when numbering these boards you must set a unique number for both the 16AI 8RO and 4AO compo nents of the board Addressing the MultiFlex Boards For MultiFlex boards set positions 1 to 5 on S3 for the 16AI component and positions 1 to 5 on S4 for the 8RO component Set positions 6 to 8 on S4 for the 4AO or 4DO segment For MultiFlex board controllers use positions 1 to 5 on S3 to set the address Addressing the MultiFlex ESR Boards The MultiFlex ESR uses standard Retail Solutions I O Network addressing Set positions 1 to 5 on 51 to set the network ID address of the MultiFlex ESR from 1 to 31 6 1 7 Setting the Baud Rate All I O boards have dip switches that determine the baud rate at which they communicate Currently the baud rate dip switch in network components may be set at either 4800 9600 19200 and 38400 Setting of the baud rate is accomplished using dip switches refer to the board s installation sheets at the end ofthis section for specific dip switch settings Baud Rate for the E2 The baud rate default for E2 is 9600 Baud Rate for the Gateway The Gateway can be set to either 9600 baud or 19 2K baud by dip switch 6 ON places the rate at 9600 baud while OFF sets it at 19 2K baud Dip switches 6 and 7 control
403. regular intervals which are determined by a parameter called thefilter period Every time a new filter period interval occurs the PID percentage sampled during the last period interval is subtracted from the current PID percentage from the current period interval The result of this subtraction is multiplied by a param eter called the filter percentage 0 100 to yield the actual amount the PID percentage will change Over time the application of the filter percentage to the change in PID position will result in a PID control loop with a smaller amount of reaction to changes in the input Example A stepper EEV valve on a CC 100 is con D 6 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee trolled by PID control Valve filtering is active in this CC 100 with the filter period set to six seconds and the filter percentage set to 75 During one sample taken during a period interval the CC 100 calls for a valve position of 5096 One period six seconds later the CC 100 asks for a 5896 valve opening The total difference between the current sample and the previous sample is 8 58 50 To determine the actual amount the valve will change the CC 100 multi plies the filter percentage 7596 with the total amount of valve position change 896 As a final result the new PID output value for the CC 100 will be 56 Note that filtering only slows down the reaction of the PID loop When the control input is stabilized the PID loop will e
404. regulatethe superheat ofthe refrigerant in the system If the case controller is configured with a Real Time Clock RTC it can be programmed with up to 6 daily defrosts and an energy saving function Without the RTC the E2 can coordinate defrostcycles and the energy saving function Several parameters of the Emerson controllers such as inputs outputs setpoints and alarms can be configured directly in E2 and sent to the appropriate Emerson control ler depending on the controller model 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ MULTIFLEX 16 INSTALLATION GUIDE POWER MULTIFLEX 16 BOARD 1 Connect board to the RS485 1 0 Network O 20 AC2 1 2 Set the network address on the first five rockers of dip switch S3 Valid address range 1 16 3 Set the network baud rate using rockers 6 and 7 of dip switch S3 4 Set RS485 termination jumpers OUT term if at either end of a daisy chain Otherwise set jumpers IN no term 5 If replacing an old 810 or 16 use MultiFlex input adapters P N 335 2301 to plug input connectors from old board into the MultiFlex input sockets One for inputs 1 4 and one for inputs 5 8 Otherwise polarity sensitive inputs will have to be rewired R 50 E 6 Connect board to the power transformer CT Note If you change any dip switch settings while the board is powered disconnect the power and re power the board to reset
405. rently pointing to 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ 11 Software Overview 11 1 Suction Groups 11 1 1 The E2 RX refrigeration controller uses suction group applications to cycle compressors in an effort to maintain a constant suction pressure or temperature in a refrigeration system A suction group may contain up to 16 compressor stages standard variable speed or unloader Introduction There are two different types of suction group applica tions Suction Group The standard suction group application that has existed since the first version of E2 firmware The Suction Group uses PID Control and with proper optimization it can achieve very tight suction pressure or temperature control but compressor cycling is not based on load analysis and can be inefficient especially in larger racks All versions of E2 support the standard Suction Group application Enhanced Suction Group Introduced in E2 version 2 30F01 the Enhanced Suction Group has all of the important features of the older Suction Group appli cation but instead of employing user configured PID constants to optimize operation the Enhanced Suction Group determines optimum control by learning the effect each compressor and circuit load has on the suction input The Enhanced Suc tion Group is easier to configure and more conser vative with compressor cycling than the standard Suction Group In addition the Enhanced Suction Group also supports
406. riate value Kp is designed as a fine tuning constant for example it might be used to speed up reaction slightly by setting it to 1 04 or to slow down reaction by setting it to 0 98 Integral Mode The Integral Mode also called Mode is the por tion of PID control that seeks to make the input equal to the setpoint When an update occurs the Integral Mode measures the difference between the current input value and the setpoint The size of this difference determines Integral Mode s output percentage adjustment Why I Mode is Necessary Though Proportional Mode handles the majority of the workload during PID control there are two major short comings that make the Mode necessary Proportional Offset Proportional Mode if left to operate all by itself is only capable of stopping the error from changing When the error is not changing neither is the portion of the output This means the system may reach stability at any value regardless of whether it is above or below the set point see Figure D 2 Proportional Mode alone has no mechanism that can bring the error to zero after stability has occurred The Mode is necessary in order to move the input in the direction of the setpoint 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE P MODE ONLY Figure D 2 Comparison of Mode vs I Mode Saturation Once the input value has wandered
407. roblem Higher values of K result in quicker reactions lower values result in slower reactions How Condenser Control and HVAC PID Differs From The Others The RMCC approaches condenser control and HVAC control from a different angle than other PID controlled systems such as Pressure Control and Case Control PID control for Pressure Control and Case Control seeks to maintain a constant equality between the input and the set point Specifically in Pressure Control the RMCC tries to keep the suction pressure or temperature equal to the suc tion setpoint and in Case Control the RMCC tries to keep D 4 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee the case temperature equal to the temperature setpoint Condenser Control and HVAC Control seek only to keep pressure or temperature values below or above their setpoints Thus the system is only concerned when the input value is on the wrong side of the setpoint e g above the setpoint in Condenser Control and Cooling Control or below the setpoint in Heating Control Any value on the other side of the setpoint is considered an acceptable value for the purposes of controlling and therefore the output will be at or near 0 Condenser PID and HVAC Cooling Control only react to pressure or temperature levels that climb above the set point Likewise in HVAC Heating Control the tempera ture level must be below the heating setpoint in order to begin heating The 0 100 output percentage is then de
408. s sees ene net nennen 11 21 INOS Economizer Control a e Rte eet ree tere Eee eI rs eee e ete ea tv ra ect ipee Nd 11 21 11 6 5 1 Economization Enable aiee rotta T Ca ei P Hs Ret RO EORR Enea 11 21 11 6 5 2 Economization Lockout Features 11 22 11 6 6 Digital Economizer 11 22 11 6 7 Analog Economizer Control sisien eR Rt apr ER 11 22 11 6 8 Dehun dification Control e egeo eee eed ette EU eter E ig Gees dee egere dens 11 22 T1 0 9 Curtailmeltz i hte eee Hie donna e Ro de 11 22 11 6 10 Optimum Start Stop OSS esses 11 22 TI 64 1 Separate Setpolnts erre NI ee al eid 11 23 11 0 12 AHU Zone eis dete BL dbeedadeadadenskibesdedecsbuid sceadsuevddeeaadeaveceeve 11 23 LTO D9 Hardware ee tete E ee ree 11 23 HIST ZONE CONTROL a RECENTE RR RR IIR IE TREE Retos 11 24 TI OVOTVUCW s sre te ee eee i eee ou QNI re dee exer e ee eo Wee Vra redes dede e pev Ud 11 24 11 7 2 How Zones Work eei itii tede ins dete trei end eee e RH dustiaiaccedeedudasddacdsdsedsdeatsovebdesutdenedeesies 11 25 11 7 3 Applications That May Be Connected To Zones sees eee nennen nennen nennen enne 11 25 11 7 3 1 MultiFlex RTU Board 11 7 3 2 MultiFlex RCB Board je I TLAS 3 VoU pe EE 11 7 4
409. s Liquid Line Sole N C N C up Keeps solenoid energized during network power loss noid LLS Electric Defrost N O down Keeps contacts de energized during network power loss Table 11 2 Suction Group Outputs 11 2 Condenser Control An E2 RX is capable of controlling air cooled or evap orative condensers The E2 RX 300 may control a single condenser while the RX 400 may control up to two con densers 11 2 1 Air Cooled Condensers An air cooled condenser consists of one or more fans that blow air across a manifold of tubing to cool heated refrigerant and condense it into a liquid The E2 controls condensers by activating or deactivating fans in order to maintain discharge pressure or temperature at or below a chosen setpoint A Condenser Control application may use either of two strategies to operate air cooled condensers an air cooled strategy or a temperature differential T D strategy 11 2 1 1 Air Cooled Strategy The air cooled strategy uses a simple PID control loop Condenser Control that compares a single Control In input to a PID setpoint The resulting percentage is used to activate the condenser fan s necessary to bring the input value down below the setpoint Control inputs for air cooled strategies most commonly come from a pressure transducer mounted on either the discharge line the condenser inlet or the condenser outlet However temperature sensor values will also be accepted 11 2 1
410. s are to be powered by one transformer The total VA is 2 x15VA 1 x 18VA 48VA 2 Use a transformer that has a power rating higher than the total calculated VA see Table 6 2 Example For boards totalling 48VA a 56VA trans former is sufficient since 56VA is greater than 48VA I O Board Transformers should be located within 10 feet of the board it is powering preferably within the board enclosure 6 1 9 1 Wiring Types For powering I O boards use only the listed wire types from Table 6 4 Three conductor non shielded cables are the recommended wire for connecting between the center tapped transformer and the I O boards The third conduc tor should be connected to earth ground If boards use a IMC Prodigy Rooftop Unit Controllers center tapped transformer also connect the center tap to the earth grounded third conductor Power Wiring Types 14 AWG Belden 9495 18 AWG Belden 9493 Table 6 4 Power Wiring Types The wire length from the transformer and the number of boards connected to the same wire determines the type wire gauge used In most cases the distance between the I O boards and the transformer that supplies power to them is not enough to be concerned with But it is very impor tant not exceed this maximum wire length or the boards will malfunction Use these formulas to determine if the wire gauge you are using fits within specification 14 AWG Feet 1920 VA 18 AWG Feet 739 VA
411. s manual covers how to assign COM ports COM2 COM4 and COM6 to different RS485 network types Section 6 this section explains the network types the hardware that may be con nected to each type and how to configure the devices 6 1 Thel O Network All boards and controllers manufactured by Retail Solutions for communication with E2 via RS485 are gen erally referred to as I O boards and the network they are connected to is referred to as the I O network or I O Net A COM port configured as I O Net may connect with up to 127 I O boards This network is used by the E2 to read data from the input boards and to send commands to the analog and digital output boards Some unit control lers such as CCB case controllers and MultiFlex RCBs also communicate with the E2 via the I O Network 6 1 1 Board Names and Termi nology There are many input relay output analog output and combination I O boards available from Retail Solutions for use with the E2 However separate from the various MultiFlex unit controller models E2 only recognizes four different types of I O boards 16AI 8RO 4AO and 8DO All E2 compatible I O boards communicate with E2 as if they are one or more of these types of boards In this manual and in the E2 interface when you encounter these board names bear in mind that they are terms that represent many types of boards Table 6 1 describes all the actual boards or board components for each E2 board type
412. screen Setting Number of Applications 10 5 The Main Status Home Screen RX 466 Unit 3 17 16 38 RX DEU SUMMARY FULL fRLARH 22 8 Circuits State Temp STANDARD CKT61 Refr NONE CAP 100 STANDARD 2 Refr NONE STANDARD Refr NONE STANDARD CKT8 Refr NONE STANDARD 5 Refr NONE STANDARD Refr NONE STANDARD CKT87 Refr NONE STANDARD CKT68 Refr NONE STANDARD CKT89 Refr NONE STANDARD CKT18 Refr NONE STANDARD CKT11 Refr NONE 51 52 53 Sh ON ON ON CONDENSERO1 NONE 200 9 Sensor Ctrl Value ANALOG SENS61 NONE ANALOG SENS82 NONE DIGITAL SENS81 NOTAC F1 DIGITAL SENS62 NOTAC ON Controlled By Discharge Status Fan s On F1 SUCTION F2 CONDENSER F3 CIRCUITS F4 SENSORS FS SETUP Figure 10 4 Home Screen RX version shown The Main Status screen is the home screen for the E2 When no one is logged in to the controller this is the screen that will be shown in the display When a user is logged into the controller the Home screen is displayed when the user is not performing any actions such as appli cation setup viewing other status screens etc The Home screen will vary depending on the configu ration of the controller In most cases the Home screen will show the real time status of the most fundamental sys tems being controlled by the E2 The Home screen is a good place to point out three important common elements of all E2 screens the screen header
413. sed by Pressure Control except the Loop Sequence Control application is designed to be used in a wider array of applications 11 13 1 Layout of the Loop Sequence Control Application There are two different types of cells in the Loop Sequence Control Application control cells and output cells The control cells have a part in determining the PID output percentage The output cells convert this PID per centage to staged digital and pulse width modulation acti vations 11 13 1 1 Control Cells The five control cells in the Loop Sequence Control application act as steps in determining the final PID per centage Step 1 Select The Select cell determines whether the occupied setpoint or the unoccupied setpoint will be used by the PID cell This cell reads in values for both set points chooses the one to use based on the value of an Occupancy input and sends the appropriate setpoint value to the next cell in line the Setpt Float cell Step 2 Setpt Float The Setpt Float cell allows alter ation of the control setpoint provided by the Select cell based on comparison of a float input to a range of val ues The floating setpoint is then sent to the next cell in line the PID Control cell Step 3 PID Control This cell makes the PID percentage calculation based on the value of the setpoint received from the Setpt Float cell compared to the control input which is fed directly into the PID Control cell The resulting
414. sensors 9 2 specifying the number of 10 2 10 15 wiring input devices to 9 7 16AIe Analog Input Board defined 2 11 detail 2 11 Analog Output Board defined 2 0 features 2 10 specifying the number of 0 2 10 15 8DO Digital Output Board defined 2 0 features 2 10 location 3 3 mounting without enclosure 3 4 specifying the number of 0 2 10 15 810 Combination Input Output Board input labeling 9 input type dip switches 9 7 numbering 6 3 power connections for sensors 9 2 8RO Relay Output Board defined 2 9 features 2 9 mounting in enclosure 3 3 mounting without enclosure 3 4 specifying the number of 0 2 10 15 8RO 8ROSMT Board 2 9 8ROe Relay Output Board defined 2 11 detail 2 11 mounting 3 4 A Access Levels 10 13 guidelines 70 13 Accessing the Alarm Advisory Log 12 11 Accounts creating a new user 10 14 deleting a user 70 14 Acknowledged State 2 2 advisory message 72 12 area ctrl application property 2 2 Acknowledging 12 12 Acknowledging Resetting amp Clearing Log En tries 72 12 Actions Menu 10 6 12 4 Advanced Rooftop Controller input labeling 9 Advisory Log acknowledging alarms 72 12 clearing alarms 2 3 expanded advisory information 2 3 resetting alarms 2 3 Advisory Message 72 12 AHU Zone Control 11 23 AHUS 11 20 curtailment 7 22 dehumidification 71 22 fan control during 71 21 economizers 71 21 analog 11 22 digital 11 22 enabling 2 lockout features 71 22 fan control 11 20 during
415. ser If an alarm has been acknowledged or reset a dash will appear at the end of the State field If an alarm has not been acknowledged or reset an asterisk will appear at the end of the State field 12 10 6 Area Ctrl Application Prop erty This column describes where the alarm notice or fail 12 12 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual was generated from Alarms and notices can either be generated within the E2 system or from an input value that is higher or lower than an alarm or notice setpoint defined during the system configuration process 12 10 7 Advisory Message The Advisory Message column is a brief description of the alarm notice or failure Because of screen size con straints it is often the case that the full advisory message will not be displayed in the Message field To view the full advisory message as well as the alarm priority and other important alarm information press EXPD INFO for Expanded Information E Advisory 1 of 206 Parent Controller THIS 63 1 Property or Board Pt 80 03 02 X388 System Advisory Message FAIL Device absent from network Acknowledge Status UNK Report Priority 26 Date 69 69 65 Time 11 16 Press the ENTER key to close this dialog Figure 12 21 Expanded Info Screen 12 10 8 Acknowledging Resetting and Clearing Log Entries 12 10 8 1 Acknowledging When an alarm notice or failure is acknowledged the alarm stays in th
416. ser Defrost 1n a standard or its entire pro grammed time duration and did not terminate Usu ally this means the termination sensor did not record 0 0 WAIT state but did not exit the WAIT state when ser a temperature higher than its setpoint but it could also mean sensor failure has occurred Did Not Was User A case circuit that was ordered to go into cleaning modedidrotseces l emer Cean Mode _ Differential Limit Exceeded User The difference between the supply air temperature and the return air temperature in an HVAC applica tion was less than the programmed heating or cooling differential setpoint This might indicate a problem with cooling or heating Dirty Filter Detected 30 A filter checking device connected to an P RTU is detecting a dirty filter Discharge Trip User igh discharge pressure detected by a Suction Group application has caused an emergency shut down of the compressor rack DoorOpen _ w ECLECG Cd 30 Duplicate Controller Names 20 Two controllers on the network have the same names One of them will need to be renamed to prevent com munications problems Events Per Hour Exceeded Limit User A digital value has transitioned ON more times the past hour than its defined Events Per Hour setpoint Appendix C Alarm Advisory Messages C 5 External Fault An external fault input defined in a Multiflex PAK controller has indicated a failure External fault inputs in the PAK a
417. series of case control and case circuit control boards and the ESR8 board 8 6 1 Powering Echelon Devices with the same 56VA and 80VA transformers used to power the I O Network Echelon devices require Class 2 power to operate which is not supplied by the I O board transformers CAUTION Do not power Echelon devices All Echelon devices require 24VAC Class 2 power Retail Solutions specs several sizes of transformers to accommodate the full range of Retail Solutions Echelon compatible products Table 8 3 lists each transformer s part number and rating Xformer P N VA Rating Input Voltage 640 0039 10 VA 110 VAC 640 0041 50 VA 110 VAC 640 0042 50 VA 220 VAC 640 0050 75 VA 110 VAC 640 0045 75 VA 220 VAC Table 8 3 Class 2 Transformers for Echelon Devices To select a power transformer for one or more Echelon devices 1 Determine what the total VA is for the boards and controllers that will be powered by the transformer see Table 8 4 Example Two TD3 boards 4 VA each and one E2 40 VA board are to be powered by one transformer The total VA is Echelon Network and Hardware Setup 8 3 E2 2 x AVA 1 x 40VA 48VA 2 Usea transformer that has a power rating equal to or higher than the total calculated Echelon Board status VA see Table 8 3 Red D1 Reset ON The Echelon port is being held in reset or if momentary it means the board has gone through reset Example Boards to
418. setpoint minus one half the deadband at which point refrigerant flow will be turned OFF Case temperature may be supplied to Temperature Control by a supply air sensor a return air sensor or a mixture of both the supply and return air sensor values Temperature Control itself does not vary the opening percentage of the pulse or stepper valve it simply addresses the case s need for refrigerant flow to maintain its setpoint Once refrigeration is started control of the valve is handled by Superheat Control Superheat Control The difference between the temperature of the refriger ant going in to the evaporator inlet the coil in tempera ture and the refrigerant leaving the evaporator outlet the coil out temperature is called Superheat When refriger ant is flowing through an evaporator Superheat Control uses PID Control to keep the Superheat at a user defined Superheat setpoint Superheat Control positions the valve to increase or decrease refrigerant flow in an effort to keep the Superheat equal to a user defined Superheat setpoint Recovery Mode Recovery Mode is a special part of Superheat Control that occurs at the beginning of every refrigeration cycle When refrigeration has been OFF and Temperature Con trol calls for refrigeration to be ON a Recovery Mode begins during which the valve is fixed to a user defined percentage usually 70 for a fixed amount of time This floods the previously empty evaporator with refr
419. shown inFigure 3 3 These holes are accessible without any removal of boards inside the enclosure 3 1 2 Recessed Mount The recessed mount is meant for the controller to be bolted against a surface using the eight mounting holes The unit may be mounted with the recessed back portion of the unit inside the wall and the front portion of the unit visible through the hole in the wall Figure 3 1 and Fig ure 3 4 For a recessed mount you will need to cut a rectangu lar hole into the mounting surface 9 0 wide by 10 5 high 22 86 cm wide by 26 67 cm high Once this hole is cut mount the unit as desired using the eight outer mounting holes shown in Figure 3 1 and Figure 3 4 Mounting the E2 Figure 3 2 E2 Side Dimensions Mounting 3 1 219 DIA 4 HOLES i 219 DIA 8 HOLES CUT OUT FOR RECESS MOUNT Figure 3 4 E2 Recess Mount Hole Locations 3 1 3 Retrofit Mounting The retrofit mounting plate and bracket allow the E2 to be mounted where previous generation controllers Ein stein or REFLECS were These two options allow con version of the flush mounted Einstein and the side mounted REFLECS Figure 3 5 shows the low profile conversion mount plate that allows a flush mounted Einstein to be converted to a low profile mount The plate slides over the back of the E2 and is attached using the four holes pictured closest
420. sioning 1s necessary for the E2 to identify and establish communications with all devices on the net work To start commissioning open the Network Summary screen 1 Press to open the Main Menu amp 2 Press System Configuration 3 Press Wl Network Setup 4 Press Network Summary 17 02 58 ALARM CX 466 Unit 1 Network Summary 661618495166 1 81F81 IONet 1 I Net 1 I Net 1 I 0Net 1 I 0Net 1 IO0Net 1 I Net 1 I Net 1 I Net 1 I Net 1 HE IO0Net 1 HODBUS 1 4 13B 63 HODBUS 1 4 13B 63 HODBUS 1 3 12801 MODBUS 1 2 87F81 MODBUS 1 2 87F81 MODBUS 1 2 87081 MODBUS 1 2 07981 ESR 001 168I 801 1681 1 _882 16 661 602 SRO 8RO_003 60 8RO0 ESR8 Line Up 8RO_605 8R0 ARTC RTU_ 661 RRTC RTU 4 008603 IRLDS 8601 IRLDS HultiFlex RCB MultiFlex CUB MultiFlex ESR CtrlLink RSC Ctr1lLink RSC Ctr1lLink RSC CtrlLink CD CtriLink CD CtrlLink CD CtrlLink CD RCB 601 Unknown CUB_ 661 MFLEX ESR_661 CL 5 001 CL RSC662 CL RSC663 CL CD801 CL CD8682 us CL CD88 F2 STATUS F3 NET STATUS Figure 10 26 Network Summary Screen Set Up Echelon Network NOTE A device only be commissioned if it is properly connected on the network and powered up How Echelon Commissioning Works Each device that is capable of communicating on a Echelon Network has a unique 12 digit Neuron ID code number that is
421. solution setting number of days to keep logs the amount of available logging resources number of analog and digital points associated with this logging group status and more can all be seen from this summary screen Highlight the desired logging group and press to open the setup screen for that log group 11 29 86 RX 366 Unit 1 Use Ctr1 X to Select CX Tabs SETUP 12 49 25 EM System Value Name BASE LOG Log Interval Mode Start Date Start Time Log Duration Log Resolutio DIGITAL POINTS ANALOG POINTS AVAILABLE PTS PCT USED STATUS ENABLE ENABLE Enter 1 8 to 366 6 DAY Number of days to keep logs for this group F1 PREU TAB F2 NEXT TAB F3 EDIT F4 STATUS F5 CANCEL Figure 11 10 Logging Setup From this screen logging group configuration can be 11 18 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee specified Group name interval between log records mode start date and time duration of logs log resolution points percentage used status and enable disable logging can be configured See the online help for each property for more information on what individual parameters do 11 5 4 Logging Group Status Screen From the Logging Group Summary screen you can also access the Status screen for any logging group in the list by highlighting the desired group and pressing Enter RX 366 Unit 1 15 66 36 LOG STATUS RLARM Log Group Name BASE LOG CONFIGURATION USAGE Status I
422. sors The compressor control strategy is Fixed Steps with setpoint deadband using ON and OFF delays Up to 20 Fixed Steps can be configured The PAK can control up to 4 condenser fan groups containing up to 8 total condenser fans The PAK con denser control strategy is sequential TD control with set point deadband using ON and OFF delays The PAK has a compressor condenser interlock fea ture that will override TD control and force the condenser fans to stage off using the TD control OFF delay when all compressors are off This feature can be disabled with an Enable Disable setpoint or when the discharge pressure is above a configurable setpoint The MultiFlex PAK boards consist of two circuit boards a bottom layer with 16 combination digital analog inputs and a plug in top layer which contains a combina tion of 8 relay outputs and 4 digital DC voltage outputs The analog outputs on the Multiflex PAK drive solid state relays to control the fanstages The relays control the compressor groups The communication interface is RS485 I O using the Standard Extended Address Form for Retail Solutions Dis tributed Controllers Currently the PAK is designed to interface with the Retail Solutions Einstein and E2 con trollers The MultiFlex PAK has its own installation and opera tion manual P N 026 1712 11 10 Lighting Schedules This section explains the function of E2 s Lighting Schedule application It includes an overview of how t
423. splayed tab C1 is highlighted The Help Line The line near the bottom of the screen above the func tion key menu is the help line The help line this time pro vides a short description of the selected field along with important information such as minimum and maximum value ranges and setup instructions The Function Keys For Setup The five boxes at the very bottom of the screen show the function of keys through Most of these keys retain the same function no matter which field screen or application is selected in a Setup screen Table 10 8 shows what each key is used for PREV TAB Moves backward one screen NEXT TAB Moves forward one screen EDIT Opens the Edit Menu box STATUS OVER Opens the Detailed RIDE or LOOKUP Status screen Opens the Override Update screen or Look Up Tables CANCEL Cancels the operation Table 10 8 Function Keys for Setup Screens 10 28 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual After all of the functions of E2 are set up the next step is to set the System Configuration which is basically how the system is used 10 18 3 Using the Help Key to get Property Help Property Help gives an explanation of the parameter input or output the user has selected Pressing the key while the cursor is pointing to a parameter input or output opens the Property Help win dow The Property Help window displays documentation specific to the parameter input or output the cursor 1s cur
424. ss Refr NONE Group applications such as the Refr NONE Firmware Revision Refr NONE sampling frequency and total Refr Service actions Refr NONE number of samples 8 Toggle Full Options When set to on FULL will appear at the top right of the o rA F1 Wale screen and gives user full access to options and applications The System Information Menu State Temp Display Users Application Default Value Setup NS62 NONE SENS81 NOTAC an aaa 9 Application Default Choose the default values most Value Setup appropriate to the refrigeration control components in the sys tem Controlled By Dis Figure 12 6 System Information Menu Table 12 3 System Information Menu Options The System Information menu is used to set up the E2 The options in this menu allow setting up time and date Actions Menu passwords toggle full options general information about Functions such as graphing point logging overriding the controller and other important data expanded information setup detailed status and manual 12 4 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ defrosting can be initiated from the Actions Menu box by pressing the key from the Home screen or any sta tus screen When you press the Enter key only the options that are appropriate tothe current field and application will be displayed all others will be hidden For example if E
425. ssure has risen above a Suction of ious mgh sucsion soom _ HVAC Phase Loss User A phase loss device connected to Global Data has switched ON to shut down all HVAC systems HVAC Shutdown User A Global Data application s HVAC Shutdown input has turned ON to shut down all HVAC systems Incomplete Advisory Setup 15 99 An important setting used n advisory and or dial out 5 set up were not configured correctly Inhibit Sensor Failed User A Demand Defrost Inhibit sensor on a case circuit 1s Coo not functioning correctly Input Bypass Failure 15 A command to bypass an input was not successfully carried out Input Sensor Is Open 20 An analog input sensor 1s OPEN possibly due to a n veredcomectin or sensor faire o Input Sensor Is Short 20 An analog input sensor 1s CLOSED possibly due to a E o ec 0 OS 0 2 Open Echelon controllers has been reached A new instance cannot be commissioned Invalid Cell ID In Scratch Pad 30 JAn internal error has occurred in the E2 Invalid Nxt Pit In Scratch Pad Invalid Scratch Pad Block Size Appendix C Alarm Advisory Messages C 7 Default No 20 IRLDS Absorption Data Error An internal error has occurred in the IRLDS Check IRLDS ADC Error ul IRLDS Data Error the IRLDS display for error code onda on and call Retail Solutions service IRLDS Detector Data Error An internal error has occurred the IRLDS display for error code call Retail
426. st be unique No two E2s on the network may have the same unit number Enter this number in the Unit Number field It is rec ommended you number the first E2 1 and number the other E2s on the network sequentially 2 3 4 etc Unit Name Type a name for the E2 in the Unit Name field Unit Controllers Echelon Liquid Ctrls CC100P CC100LS Enter the com bined number of pulse valve case controllers CC100Ps and liquid side stepper valve case con trollers CC100LSs in this field Suction Controllers CC100H Enter the num ber of suction stepper case controllers CC100Hs in this field Circuit Suction CS100 Enter the number of suc tion lineup circuit controllers CS100s in this field 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 ee ESR8 Line Up Boards Enter the number of ESR suction lineup circuit boards SR100s in this field TD3 Temperature Displays Enter the number of TD3 temperature display units in this field EC2 29x Case Controllers Enter the number of EC2 29x refrigerated case controllers in this field EC2 39x Case Controllers Enter the number of EC2 39x refrigerated case controllers in this field Echelon 16 Enter the number of 16AIe analog input boards in this field Echelon 8RO Enter the number of 8ROe analog input boards in this field 10 14 2 Commissioning a Device Once all records have been created and defined for all devices on the Echelon Network they must be commis sioned Commis
427. stantly analyzes the rate of change of the error makes a prediction about what the future error will be and makes an adjustment to the output in an attempt to reduce the rate of change in the error In layman s terms Derivative Mode causes PID con trol to overshoot the amount of output percentage to compensate for the slow reaction times of the P and I Modes As a result Derivative Mode slows the rate error change down to a level the P and I Modes can handle The D Mode Calculation To determine the D Mode adjustment for each update PID performs the following calculation D mode adjustment Kg E 2E 4 At 4 E 2 At 2 Kg derivative gain current error E_ error from the previous update At 4 the amount of time elapsed since the previous exe cution E_5 error from the update before the previous update At o the amount of time elapsed between 2 executions ago and the previous execution The factors E At and E At are the rates of change of the error in units per minute The rate of change for the previous error E weighs twice as much in the Derivative Mode calculation as the 2 previous error p 2 since E_ is closer to the current rate of change than E The derivative gain K41s a multiplier that changes the total size of the Derivative Mode adjustment If Derivative Mode is causing PID control to react too quickly or too slowly the derivative gain may be adjusted to correct the p
428. sure it is supplied with 0 500 long metal stand off dowels which are pressed into the mounting holes in the board See Figure 3 14 ESR8 BOARD WEIGHT 0 50 LB 26501102 Figure 3 14 Mounting Dimensions for the ESR8 3 3 4 MultiFlex ESR The MultiFlex ESR is supplied with a snap track If the ESR8 is supplied without an enclosure it is supplied with 0 500 long metal stand off dowels that are pressed into the mounting holes in the board Modem Communication Expansion Card Mounting New Processor Board i h 0 220 i TYP6PL MULTIFLEX ESR BOARD WEIGHT 9 4 OZ 26501055 Figure 3 15 Mounting Dimensions for the MultiFlex ESR 3 3 5 The TD3 temperature display is almost always mounted by the OEM as part of the construction of the refrigerated cases As such field installations of TD3s are rare TD3s are typically flush mounted on the front of a refrigerated case in such a way as to be fully visible from the sales floor A hole one inch in diameter must be drilled into the case to allow the TD3 s wiring harness to extend into the case and connectto the network the power source and the case mounted probes Figure 3 16 shows the mounting dimensions of the TD3 COMMISSIONING 29 FUNCTION BUTTON BUTTON ECHELON ADDRESS STICKER RUBBER SLEEVE ON BOTTOM 298 a MOUNTING HOLES gt Figure 3 16 TD3 Mounting Dimensions 3 4 Modem Communica tion Expa
429. t 10 7 10 7 6 TheSystem Information Menu Controlled By Dis F1 ON The System Information Menu is another menu used to Figure 10 13 System Information Menu RX 466 Unit 3 RX DEU SUMMARY SYSTEM INFORMATION Time and Date Passwords User Access Firmware Revision Service fictions Maintenance Logs Display Users Toggle Full Options Application Default Value Setup SENS 62 1 Value NONE NONE NOTAC NOTAC 6 08 56 fRLARRH Tenp NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE set up the E2 The options in this menu allow setting up time and date passwords toggle full options general information about the controller and system administrator functions To open the System Information Menu 1 2 Press System Configuration 3 Press c Press Vl System Information 10 8 2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee The System Information menu contains nine items Menu Option General Controller Info 2 Time and Date 3 Passwords User Access 4 Firmware Revision 5 Service Actions 6 Note Pad 7 Display Users 8 Toggle Full Options 9 Application Default Value Setup Edit general information about the E2 such as engineering units and summer winter change over specifications Change the current date and time and specify date formats Set up usernames and pass words and define security level requirements Read on
430. t s liquid line solenoid AND will send a command to the refrigeration rack to open the Master Liquid Line Solenoid As a result heated refrigerant will be pumped through the evaporator coil Any user defined Pump Down and Run Off times will be observed as normal Electric Defrost Electric defrost uses electric heaters to defrost the evaporator coil During electric defrost the application 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ will turn the Defrost output ON to activate the heaters con nected to the output Any user defined Pump Down and Run Off times will be observed as normal 11 3 2 3 Defrost Termination Both the start and the end times of a defrost cycle are determined by the user The Pump Down Defrost and Run Off stages all have fixed durations and when the last stage of the cycle is complete defrost is terminated However a Standard Circuit application may be pro grammed to terminate the Defrost stage of the defrost cycle early if the temperature inside the case rises above a fail safe temperature setpoint called the termination set point For certain defrost types defrost heat may also be pulsed in order to keep the temperature below the set point without terminating defrost Pulsed Defrost DEFROST TERMINATION PULSED STRATEGY DEFR TERM TEMP REACHED TIME HEAT WILL BE PULSED ENDS ha lt ao Q H REFRIGERATION TIME PUMP DOWN LEGEND R
431. t The 16 dip switches on the 16AI Pressure Transducer Displaying improperly board correspond to each of the Proper Value inputs Dip Switches Up Temperature Sensor Dip Switches Down Pressure Transducer Incorrect board and point Set proper board and point set address tings for both input and output Go to the Inputs tab in the appli cation s Setup screen and check Board and Point Incorrect sensor type 1 Verify that the sensor type in E2 is the same as the sensor installed For example 5V 200PST is a 5 volt powered 200PSI pressure transducer and Temperature is the standard Retail Solutions temperature sensor NOTE The previous Eclipse and Standard sensors are now 5V and 12V respectively 2 From the Main Menu select System Configuration 7 and Input Definitions 1 3 Highlight the desired input and press SETUP to check Sensor Type No Heat or Air Will Come On Incorrect board and points Make sure that your board and assignment points are assigned to the correct compressors and heat stages Check the Heat and Cool OAT From the Home screen press lockout temps AHU SETUP Move cursor to C5 HT CL Setup to check the Lockout temperatures Appendix F Troubleshooting F 7 SYMPTOM POSSIBLE PROBLEM SOLUTION Dehumidification Problems Number of stages are not set up or set up incorrectly From the Home screen press AHU SETUP Move cursor to
432. t programmed properly Verify that E2 was programmed for correct number of compres sor stages Highlight the General tab C1 in the Suction Group Setup screen Is the correct num ber of stages in the Number of Stages field Compressor types are set up incorrectly Make sure that compressor stages were properly set up as VS variable speed C com pressor or U unloader Compressor programmed with incorrect rating Verify that compressors were assigned the proper rating HP AMP or BTU Pressure setpoints are set up incorrectly Set proper pressure setpoints If you are controlling the rack using suction pressure enter the pressure setpoint in the SUC PRES SETPT field If you are controlling by temperature enter the temperature setpoint in the CTRL TEMP SETPT field Note Pressure setpoints are located under the Setpoints tab C2 in the Suction Group Setup screen Board and point addresses are incorrect Set proper board and point set tings for input output and com pressor outputs Board and point settings are located under the Inputs tab C4 Outputs tab C5 and Comp Outs tab C7 in the Suction Group Setup screen Appendix F Troubleshooting F 3 SYMPTOM POSSIBLE PROBLEM SOLUTION Compressor will not Operate Cont F 4 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 8RO fail safes are not wired cor rectly Verify fail safe wiring on 8RO board for N O
433. t setpoint values depending on the sea son summer or winter and occupancy occupied or unoc cupied The Demand Control application is programmed with three different modes of operation Under normal condi tions Demand Control operates in the first mode then proceeds to the second or third mode if the demand is not adequately lowering Mode 1 KW Input Is Greater Than Setpoint Mode 1 is usually the first stage of demand shedding used by Demand Control It begins when the KW input rises above the setpoint When this occurs Demand Control begins by shedding one level at a time starting with First Shed 1 and con tinuing sequentially through all First Rotational and Last levels as shown in Figure 11 21 The Demand Control application will continue to shed levels in this sequence until the KW goes below the set point minus a user defined hysteresis value and the inte gral error is less than zero When both these conditions are met the shed levels will be restored in last shed first restore order Mode 2 KW Input Has Been Greater Than Setpoint for 1 4 Demand Window And Is Still Going Up Mode 2 begins when the KW input has been above the setpoint for an amount of time equal to 1 4 the demand window duration and the KW input has not begun to come down In short if Mode 1 is not working to lower demand Mode 2 will take over When Mode 2 begins Demand Control sheds two lev els at a time using the same sequence
434. table below lists the sixty four default case types High Alarm Low Alarm and Delay that may be used in Standard Circuit or Case Control Cir The High Alarm Low Alarm and Delay columns are cuit applications along with the recommended defaults for the suggested high and low case temperature alarm set each case type points and the report delay To set up these alarm setpoints When one of these sixty four case types isselected the and delays locate the Case Temperature control input and E2 automatically enters the following information from select the Generic Alarm Setup action from the Actions the table into the Circuit application Menu Enter the High and Low setpoints in the Normal Hi and Normal Low fieldsrespectively Enter the Delay in the Th int e setpoin Report Delay field Defrost Type The E2 assumes by default that all cases have electric defrost If this is not the case you will have to enter new values for the Number of Defiosts and the Defrost Time in the circuit The suggested defaults are listed under the Hot Gas Elec Rev Air and Timed columns The number to the left of the slash indicates the suggested number of defrost times per day and the number to the right of the slash indicates the recommended Defrost Time length Defrost Type Low Elec D Description cp y m DEF Timed oe NEIN L i spic escis a as et 1 3 SDF Single deck freezer juice I8 30 32 8 mas eoj 16
435. tailment programs that allow participating stores to disable user defined loads during peak power times in return for discounts on utility rates If you are participating in a curtailment program the power company will supply you with a digital curtailment device that must be wired to an input on the RS485 I O Network To set up curtailment in the system software you must designate which specific heating and cooling stages will be subject to curtailment When the power company sends a curtail command i e the value of the curtailment device switches to CLOSED all stages that are set up to be curtailed will be shut off and locked out Fan control is not directly affected by a call for curtail ment The AHU fan will still run at a speed based on the number of active non curtailed stages or if using modu lated outputs the curtailed modulating percentage If this causes the fan to slow down or shut off during curtailment there will be energy savings from the fans 11 6 10 Optimum Start Stop OSS NOTE OSS applies only to AHU Control ap 4 plications that use a time schedule to change occupancy states Overrides initiated by the digital BYPASS TO OCC or BYPASS TO UN OCC inputs will not initiate pre starts or pre stops Optimum Start Stop OSS is a feature that works alongside the AHU Control application s occupied and unoccupied temperature control modes OSS takes control of heating and cooling several
436. tal Accumulation out put on the application Status screen 11 20 3 Outputs All output information is available from the main Sta tus screen or from under the Outputs tab in application Setup Current output status average output high trip 0 The engineering unit that is active in the 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ total accumulation and the last accumulated total informa tion can be viewed The current output shows the rate of consumption of the quantity represented by pulses Average output shows the average rate value accumulated over the period set in the Average Window parameter The High Limit Trip out put will turn on if the total accumulation exceeds a user specified high limit Total accumulation shows the total accumulated value since the last reset Last Total output shows the total accumulated value when the last reset occurred 11 20 4 Accumulator Reset Types The Pulse Accumulator is a register that is increased by the value of each update of the Quantity Accumulation input Each time the Accumulator is reset before clearing its value is saved to a Last Total output The type of reset the Accumulator uses can be user specified with the Accu mulator Reset Type parameter The Accumulator can be set to reset at a certain time ofday day of the month when a high limit trip occurs or not to reset at all 11 20 5 Logging Rate and usage data is logged and stored using applica tion logging Data
437. taling 48VA can be connected to either a 50 or 75VA transformer Red Service During normal operation this LED should be off If the Ser vice Pin is pressed this LED will come on Center If the LED is blinking the node does not have its Subnet Node address set E2 should set this during the first power up sequence where the user Table 8 4 Device Power Requirements will be asked in which Subnet to put the controller E2 will al Refer to the installation guides on the next few pages ways be Node 1 on the net for instructions on how to install these boards on the Eche work lon Network If the LED is blinking then try resetting the E2 If this does 8 7 LEDs not correct the problem re place the Echelon board The Echelon Board LEDs can be used to determine the status of normal operating parameters for the board ON no blinking Replace the Echelon board The Neuron processor has lost its applica tion program Table 8 5 Echelon LED Status 8 8 Open Echelon Device Connectivity Open Echelon E2s must be ordered pre configured from Retail Solutions Open Echelon licenses must be purchased and enabled on units and are not transferrable to other units without assistance from Retail Solutions Call 770 425 2724 for technical assistance or your sales representative Your sales representative will know which devices your unit will connect to 8 8 1 Configuring Echelon Devices Login to
438. termined based on the distance between the input and setpoint and the rate of change Output at Setpoint Mathematically the only difference between PID for Condenser and HVAC Control and PID for other systems is the Output at Setpoint value The Output at Setpoint value is simply the percentage the output will be when the input value is stabilized at the setpoint In other words when the PID input equals the PID setpoint the PID output percentage will be fixed at the Output at Setpoint value Output at Setpoint is the value that determines where the throttling range is placed As mentioned in Throttling Range on page 1 the Throttling Range is the range of input values across which Proportional Mode will gradu ally move the output percentage from 0 to 100 excluding effects by the Integral and Derivative Modes The Output at Setpoint value basically tells the RMCC where to place the Throttling Range in relation to the set point this is explained in further detail below Output at Setpoint for Non Condenser HVAC PID For all non condenser and non HVAC PID control the Output at Setpoint is fixed at 50 except for Analog Out put Modules which may be programmed with any value from 0 100 As mentioned before this means that PID control will constantly strive to achieve a stable system where the input is equal to the setpoint and the output is 50 The throttling range in a PID Control application with a 50 Output
439. that baud rate switches are set to 9600 If switches are wrong make changes and then reset the controller Refer to Section 6 1 6 Network ID Numbers Board Numbers Terminating resistance jumpers are set incorrectly Check for proper setting of ter minating resistance jumpers Network segment should be ter minated on the two endpoints of the daisy chain and unterminated everywhere else Refer to Sec tion 6 1 8 Setting the Terminat ing and Biasing Jumpers Boards are not powered Check Network Power voltages Refer toSection 6 1 9 Powering the I O Boards Appendix F Troubleshooting F 1 SYMPTOM POSSIBLE PROBLEM SOLUTION Echelon Network Problems Faulty wiring Check connections Are wires broken or loose Check network polarity positive to positive negative to negative Check for wire damage Termination jumpers are set Check for proper setting of ter incorrectly minating resistance jumpers Network segment should be ter minated on the two endpoints of the daisy chain and unterminated everywhere else Refer to Sec tion 8 4 Device Termination Subnet unit is set incorrectly Each controller must have its own subnet address Refer to Section 8 3 Echelon Network Structuring Daisy Chains 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 SYMPTOM POSSIBLE PROBLEM SOLUTION Compressor will not Operate Compressor is no
440. that change an application setting This includes configuring inputs and outputs Alarm Ack This includes acknowledging one or more alarms in the Alarm Log Refer to Section 12 10 8 1 Acknowledging for the definition of acknowledging alarms For each row and column of the Level Required For 10 14 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee table enter the desired minimum priority level that will be required for users to perform actions on each type of appli cation E2 will check this table when a user attempts an action to verify the user has the appropriate access level to make the change If the user s access level is equal to or above the priority setting in the table access will be allowed If not access will be denied 10 12 2 Creating a New User Account After entering the User Access Setup screen by press ing Passwords User Access from the System Infor mation menu 1 Move the cursor so that it is somewhere in the Users box at the bottom of the screen 2 Press ADD USER to puta blank record at the bottom of the list 3 Typein the user name Username and then move to the next field Password by pressing the right arrow button 4 Type ina password for the next user then press the right arrow button to advance to the next field 5 The Auto Logout feature determines the maxi mum time user may be inactive before being logged out Enter the amount of time for the user and press the right arrow button
441. the screen allowing site managers or supervisors to see that one or more alarms are active for the E2 RX 466 Unit 3 16 49 23 RX DEU SUMMARY ALARM Figure 10 38 Display Line 10 16 1 2 The Alarm Output Each E2 has a single digital output that reacts to alarm reports An alarm can be reported to this output in which case the output turns ON and remains on until the alarm condition has returned to normal 10 16 1 3 Dial Out Alarms may be sent to remote alarm receivers via the modem defined for the controller Possible dial out devices include a PC running UltraSite a printer a fax machine and a digital pager Dial out sites are configured in Section 10 16 3 10 16 1 4 The Echelon Network The Alarm Annunciator If multiple E2s exist on a network you may choose to send alarms from all E2s across the Echelon Network so that they may be picked up by the Alarm Annunciator The Alarm Annunciator is the primary alarm reporting device in a multiple device E2 Network The Alarm Annunciator gathers all alarms posted by all devices on the Echelon Network records them in its own advisory log and applies its own set of alarm filters to determine if the alarms should be dialed out reported to its display or sent to its Advisory Output There are several benefits to having an Alarm Annun ciator An Alarm Annunciator makes it possible to handle all alarm dial outs for all controllers with a single modem or network card
442. the controller and enter the desired number of Echelon devices to be added in the Connected I O screen From the Main Menu 1 Select System Configuration amp 2 Select Network Setup 8 4 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 ee 3 Select Connected I O Boards and Control lers Enter the number of Echelon devices you wish to add on the Connected I O screen RX 466 Unit 3 SETUP Num Network Ctrls NetSetup Board Type Caterpillar EMCP3 ETN Breaker Panel Open Echelon Sporlan SH Ctrl 590 Breaker Panel Quantity 5 Figure 8 5 Connected 1 0 Screen E2 firmware revisions 2 81 and above Navigate to the Open Echelon field under the Third Party Tab section of the Connected I O screen and enter the number of Echelon devices to be added Next commission the Echelon device Commissioning is done at the Controller Setup screen If still on the Con nected I O screen hit the back button to go back to the Network setup menu and select kl Controller Setup Or from the Main Menu 1 Select System Configuration 2 Select Wl Network Setup 3 Select Network Summary Commission the device on the Network Summary screen Open Echelon Device Connectivity b 300 Unit 3 15 54 37 Netuork Summary FULL RLARRH Network fiddress Status THIS 63 1 RX366 Refrig LonMark Device LONHARK 882 LonMark Device E 168I 881 16 1 10 Port
443. the defrost cycle When these defrost types are used Pump Down and Run Off times are not necessary therefore they will not be part of the defrost cycle Hot Gas and Reversed Cycle Hot Gas Hot Gas and Reversed Cycle Hot Gas require the use of hot gas from the refrigeration lines During these types of defrost the application will open the valve and pump heated refrigerant through the evaporator coil Any user 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 ee defined Pump Down and Run Off times will be observed as normal Electric Defrost Electric defrost uses electric heaters to defrost the evaporator coil During electric defrost the application will turn the Defrost output ON which will likewise acti vate the heaters connected to the power module s defrost relay Any user defined Pump Down and Run Off times will be observed as normal 11 4 4 3 Defrost Termination Both the start time and the end time of a defrost cycle are determined by the user The Pump Down Defrost and Run Off stages all have fixed durations and when the last stage of the cycle is complete defrost is terminated However a case controller may be programmed to ter minate the Defrost stage of the defrost cycle early if the temperature inside the case rises above a fail safe tempera ture setpoint For certain defrost types defrost heat may also be pulsed in order to keep the temperature below the setpoint without terminating defrost Temperat
444. the setpoint minus the dehumidifica tion hysteresis value An example of this is shown in Fig ure 11 16 SO DEHUM OFF DEHUM HYSTERESIS 26512040 Figure 11 16 Dehumidification Setpoint Control The need for dehumidification may also be determined by a digital humidistat In this case dehumidification is active only when the humidistat input is ON 11 7 10 The Zone Humidity Input Note that unlike Zone Temperature which has 16 inputs that combine into a single value Zone humidity is designed to be provided by a single input However there may be some instances where one or more relative humid ity sensors exist within a Zone such as an installation where each MultiFlex RTU has its own humidity sensor for use in Stand Alone mode If you have multiple humidity sensors in a Zone and you wish to combine these humidity sensor values to calculate Zone Humidity use an Analog Combiner application to make the combination Zone Control and tie the Zone application s Zone Humidity input to the output of the combiner Refer to Section 11 18 Analog and Digital Combiners for Analog Combiner application programming instructions 11 7 11 The Effect of Enabling Dehu midification When a Zone application determines that dehumidifi cation is needed it sends an ON signal to all its associated controllers signaling them to begin dehumidification It is up to the individual MultiFlex RTU RCB or AHU to per form the dehumid
445. ther the COMPRESSOR STGS or FAN STAGES sections and highlight the stage or fan to be bypassed Press Enter to access the override option from the menu RX 4668 Unit 3 16 46 RX DEU SUMMARY ALARM SUCTION GRPO1 39 1 eiecuits State Temp ECTRL CKT61 Off NONE ECTRL CKT82 Off NONE NONE A NONE Override Update NONE R NONE THIS 63 1 SUCTION GRP61 1 NONE In Override No NONE NONE 6 66 68 NONE E NONE Override Value NONE Property Override Time Sensor Ctrl Value ANALOG SENS81 NONE ANALOG SENS82 NONE DIGITAL SENS61 NOTAC F1 DIGITAL SENS82 NOTAC ON Controlled By Discharge Status Fan s On Enter State F1 SELECT Use Next Prev keys FS CANCEL Figure 12 16 Override Update Screen RX Version Shown 2 The Override Update screen appears see Figure 12 16 Press the WS or to enter Yes to place the stage in override Scroll down one space to enter the Override Time 3 Choose the Override Value of either OFF or ON using or m Operator s Guide to Using the E2 12 9 The compressor stage or condenser fan stage in over ride mode will be marked with a cyan blue background in the Main Status screen indicating that the override is in effect 12 8 Checking Boards Online CxX 466 Unit 1 Network Summary 64 61 69 Network Address E2 Unit61 Cx466 C Store 2 78817 This Controller ESR_ 661 ESR8 Line
446. ther information are given Sensor Status Screen Press Select an analog or digital sensor and press ES Information such as control value and com mand values will be displayed The analog sensor will have Cut In Cut Out temperature values F2 20 F3 LIGHTING FS SETUP F4 SENSORS Figure 12 19 BX Function Button Menu 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 ee The E2 BX controller has four status screens that are each accessible from the Home screen by pressing the corresponding function key AHU Status Screen Press lll The AHU information such as control temperature season mode space humidity apparent tem perature heat cool mode fan state economization status dehumidification and humidity status are all included on this screen Zones Status Screen Press MB Zone information including outdoor and zone temperature outdoor humidity season mode occu pied state and economization status are displayed in the Zone Status screen Lighting Status Screen Press Lighting status information can be found on this screen Check light level bypass and other modes from here Sensors Status Screen Press MB Select an analog or digital sensor and press Information such as control value and com mand values will be displayed The analog sensor will have Cut In Cut Out temperature values Other Status Screens Other status screens in the E2 controller may be access
447. thernet Peer Communications 7 3 unique site name in the Group Name field NOTE The site name is the unique identifier 4 for the site that will allow the controllers within the same group to share data 05 09 05 BX 300 Unit 1 16 54 59 Use Ctrl X to Select CX Tabs SETUP C1 General C2 Eng Units C3 Modem C8 Peer Netwrk General Setup GENERAL SERV Peer Hetwrk Value Network Type Ethernet ETH Enable Encrypt Ho AutoDscTimeou 300 Reconect Timeout 120 F1 PREV TAB F2 NEXT TAB F3 EDIT F4 STATUS F5 CANCEL Figure 7 5 Peer Network Tab Set Group Name All controllers that you would like to appear in this group must all have the same group name and must be using the same network type 7 6 Troubleshooting Network troubleshooting is outside the scope of this section Section 7 E2 Ethernet Peer Communications Consult your IT Network Administrator for any additional information needed 7 4 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 ee 8 Echelon Network and Hardware Setup 8 1 Overview Echelon is an optional two conductor network that interconnects E2s and other associated devices such as CC 100 case controllers TD3 temperature displays and ESR8 evaporator stepper regulator boards All Echelon devices are wired together using the daisy chain method of network structuring If an Echelon network enabled E2 is required it must be specifically or
448. tiFlex RTU uses its space temperature sen sor value as the control input The MultiFlex RTU also has a seven day fallback occupancy schedule that it may use to determine occupied or unoccupied building status Different times may be pro grammed in the MultiFlex RTU application for Sunday through Saturday Holiday scheduling is not supported Economization control is available if the sensor pro viding the economization checking is connected to an input on the MultiFlex RTU Otherwise economization is disabled As it does in Temperature Control the MultiFlex RTU stores its own occupied and unoccupied dehumidification setpoints If the MultiFlex RTU has its own humidity sen sor it will continue dehumidification using the stored fall back setpoints 11 7 15 MultiFlex RTU ARTC and AHU Zone Association MultiFlex RTUs and AHUs are assigned to Zone appli cations using the Zone Association screen To access this screen 1 Press for the Main Menu 2 Press for System Configuration 3 Press Wl the Network Setup menu 4 Press for Associations 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 ee BX 466 Unit 3 ZONE ASSOCIATION AHU ARTC lt gt Zone Association 13 53 35 ALARH fipplication HURC Zone RRTC RTU 001 RRTC RTU 662 RCB_661 1 Ethernet F1 SETUP AHU F2 SETUP ZONE F4 LOOK UP FS CANCEL Figure 11 18 Zone Association Screen BX 400 Unit Shown The Zone Association screen lists all RTUs ART
449. ting an Analog A output from the Output Status screen Figure 9 9 and pressing SETUP This is where output types units and default values are specified for analog output points In most cases only the point name will need defining in this screen unless you wish to change the 0 10V output range or configure a priority override 01 01 02 RX 300 Unit 1 ANALOG OUTPUT Point Hame Ba Seeded Board Point Output Type Linear Select Eng Units PCT PC Default Value NONE Modify Output Equation Low End Point Low Eng Units High End Point 10 0 High Eng Units PRIORITY OVR H Priority Override Timeout 0 30 INPUT MED TEMP SUCTION GRPO1 VS COMP OUT F5 CANCEL Figure 9 12 Analog Output Screen Point Name The Point Name is simply a name for the output point that may be used as a reference Assigning a descriptive name to a point makes set ting up outputs for applications much easier For example if you are setting up fan 3 for Zone 1 you may choose to name it FANZI HT 3 Then when programming your Condenser Control application you may easily define the fan output by tying it to FAN 1 HT 3 This keeps you from having to keep track of which contacts are tied to which point num bers You are required to enter a point name in the Point Name field The default name is BOARD NAME SUBNET NUMBER BOARD NUM BER POINT NUMBER Board Point The Board Point Number wi
450. ting the cool stage On Delay countdown timer 11 21 10 Dehumidification Control Dehumidification control is implemented on an AHU basis not individual cooling or heating stages Because of implementation on an AHU basis dehumidification con trol is woven throughout the cool Cut In Cut Out as well as the heating Cut In Cut Out control algorithms by calling for increases or decreases in heating and cooling capaci ties The dehumidification algorithm does not directly change the states of the heating or cooling instead it influences the staging process by calling for more less or the same amount of cooling and limit the amount of heat used if a call for heating is necessary during dehumid ification If the current space temperature is less than the dehu midification minimum space temperature call for the end of dehumidification If the current control value used for dehumidification is greater than the dehumidification setpoint plus the dead band divided by two 2 call for an increase in dehumidi fication capacity If the current control value used for dehumidification is less than the dehumidification setpoint minus the dehu midification deadband divided by two 2 call for a decrease in dehumidification capacity 11 21 11 Two Speed Fan Control To determine proper fan speed determine which heat ing and cooling stages are ON and if the user has set any of the fan speeds for those stages to High If any of the
451. tings 6 3 Settings For 8IO 6 3 Routers part number for manual 1 6 RS 232 Baud Rate 70 12 RS485 Network I O Network 6 1 noise minimization 6 2 RTU 2 7 11 25 RX Capabilities RX Home Screen 2 S Screen Elements 70 4 function keys 10 4 header 10 4 Help line 70 4 Screen Types 10 5 12 5 actions menu 0 6 RX and BX Main Menus 0 5 setup screens 10 7 status screens 10 5 system configuration menu 10 7 system information menu 0 8 Screens Main Status 0 3 Status 10 5 Sensor Control analog alarm control 71 37 combiner function 71 37 cut in cut out control 71 37 analog sensor control modules 71 37 digital alarm control 71 38 logical combination methods 71 38 digital sensor control modules 37 Sensors analog 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ E2 setup 9 7 analog liquid level indicator wiring to input board 9 4 bullet and pipe mount mounting 3 9 coil in temperature location 3 9 mounting 3 9 coil out temperature location 3 9 mounting 3 9 dewpoint probe 3 11 location 3 11 mounting 3 11 wiring to input board 9 5 digital selecting units 9 9 wiring to input board 9 3 Hansen probe See Sensors liquid level probe humidity connecting to a case controller 9 15 installation 3 9 indoor RH sensors 3 9 outdoor RH sensor 3 10 insertion probe 3 8 location 3 8 mounting 3 8 inside temperature 3 7 location 3 7 mounting 3 8 Klixons wiring to input board 9 3 KW Transducer wiring to input board 9 6 light level loc
452. tion it usually sheds one or two levels at a time Therefore Demand Control would do a much better job of reducing demand quickly if each acti vated level were reducing the KW by an equivalent amount Also each priority level has three important user definable parameters that affect the level s time in shed Minimum Shed Duration the minimum amount of time a level must remain in shed Demand Control will not restore the level until this minimum time has passed Maximum Shed Duration the maximum amount of time a level will remain in shed When the level has been shed longer than this duration it will automat ically be restored regardless of the current need for demand shedding Minimum Restore Duration the minimum amount of time a level must be restored from shed before it may be shed again Demand Control will not re shed this level until this minimum time has passed NOTE If a level is RESTORE but its mini mum restore duration has not been met levels of the next highest priority category or catego ries will not be shed until the lower priority lev els are all in shed Software Overview 11 35 11 11 6 How Demand Control Uses Load Shedding Demand Control uses three parameters to perform load shedding the current KW input value the current integral error described inSection 11 11 2 Demand Monitoring and the active KW setpoint The active setpoint is chosen from four differen
453. tionalities of input boards relay output boards digital output boards and analog output boards The MultiFlex combination input output boards are designed to be replacements for the 8IO Combination Input Output Board but the MultiFlex board provides sev eral new hardware options and software features T O Network Boards and Peripherals Hardware Overview 2 5 810 3066 MultiFlex 16 analog digital inputs 8 168 relay outputs 810 3067 MultiFlex 16 analog digital inputs 8 168DO relay outputs 4 digital out puts 810 3072 MultiFlex 16 analog digital inputs 1616L 16 low voltage 24VAC rated relay outputs 810 3073 MultiFlex 16 analog digital inputs 1616LAO 16 low voltage 24VAC rated relay outputs and 4 analog outputs 810 3077 MultiFlex 16 analog digital inputs 1616LDO 16 low voltage 24VAC rated relay outputs and 4 pulse width modulating digital outputs Table 2 7 MultiFlex Combination Input Output Board Models 2 6 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ 2 2 2 3 MultiFlex CUB The MultiFlex Condensing Unit Board CUB is a smart input output board designed to control single con densing units A single condensing unit is a self contained compressor and condenser bearing unit which controls refrigeration in a single case line up or walk in cooler The MultiFlex CUB uses the same general hardware configuration as a MultiFlex 168AO It is equipped with a processor and extra me
454. trigger and alarm delays are equations Alarm type prior ity and the message for each alarm are user configurable Equations used to calculate output values and time delays may use mathematical combinations of any of the Flexible Combiner s analog and digital inputs as well as numeric and named constants operators functions and even rudimentary if then logic functions For control of digital outputs the Flexible Combiner also supports sepa rate equations that determine ON and OFF delays For E2 versions 2 40 and above the user can set up to four alarms whose trigger and alarm delays are equations The user may also choose the alarm type priority and the message for each alarm The Flexible Combiner may also be programmed to operate a digital output as a PWM pulse width modula tion output In this instance the equation written for a PWM output determines its period and pulse width A typ ical Flexible Combiner application consists of three types of components inputs equations and outputs For more information about this application see the Flexible Com 11 52 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee biner manual P N 026 1620 11 23 Modular Chiller Con trol MCC The Modular Chiller Control is available for the E2 RX model controllers version 2 82 and above In the RX 300 a maximum of one MCC is allowed In the RX 400 a maximum of two MCCs are allowed 11 23 1 Overview A Modular Chiller is made up of a single c
455. trolled as well as a physical location 2 Whenstep 1 iscomplete go to whereeach device on the list is installed and locate each device s Neuron ID sticker Every Echelon compatible device available from Retail Solutions has a sticker on its enclosure that shows the unit s Neu ron ID number Each sticker also has a perforated tag at the bottom that may be removed and affixed to your form Tear this tag off and stick it in the Neuron ID blank on the sheet of paper If the perforated tag has already been removed write the ID number in the blank When all Neuron ID numbers have been collected return to the E2 and enter the Neuron ID numbers for each device To commission a device move the cursor to the device to be commissioned and press Set Address lame Hodel Bus Subnet Boardit Neuron ID HIS 03 1 RX4 Set controller address for CL 63 662 CL 03 002 RTT ressing Service Pin on controller ntering Neuron ID s directly pecifying a range of nodes P 5 1 1 2 3 4 Press desired selection Figure 10 31 Commissioning Menu A menu will appear on the screen giving you the License Management option of either pressing the service button entering the Neuron ID by hand or cancelling and returning to the main screen Press to select the manual entry option and bring up the dialog box shown in Figure 10 32 Bus Subnet Board Neuron ID Setting Controller Address for
456. ts state will be set to Done and its valve output set to OFF For enabled zones that are not active or complete the states will be set to Pending and the valve output set to OFF A cycle is the sequence of all defined zones irrigating one at atime A cycle is considered complete when the last defined zone finishes irrigating and shuts OFF Each zone turns ON one at a time starting with the first defined zone until the last defined zone in the list turns OFF The Number of Zones parameter with a default value of 4 specifies how many zones the application will use No two zones are ever ON at the same time each zone starts and stops independently and waits for the other to finish before another zone starts Software Overview 11 49 11 21 2 1 Cycle Control Types By default Timed cycles are always used unless the user has configured a flow sensor optional If a flow sen sor is configured a control type parameter will become visible where the user can select either a Timed or Volume cycle control type During any cycle the disabled zone states and valve outputs will be set to OFF For midnight crossover times a cycle will be com pleted if the duration extends into the next day 11 21 2 2 Timed Instead of start and stop times entered to define the length of time a zone is on the user enters a duration of time The default parameter called On Time with a default value of 2 hours entered in HHH MM format is used w
457. tside the throttling range Mode will continue to adjust the output percentage to bring the input value towards the set point AS INPUT IN SATURATED SYSTEM CHANGES DIRECTION THROTTLE RANGE REMAINS SATURATION Y I CORRECTS ERROR AND BRINGS z THROTTLING 0 FOLLOWS INPUT DURING SATURATION P MODE ONLY Figure D 3 Saturation in vs P I Modes The I Mode Calculation To determine the Mode adjustment for each update the following calculation occurs I mode adjustment K current error in this equation is called the integral constant It is simply a multiplier that increases or decreases the speed at which the I Mode will increase or decrease the percent age Introduction to PID Control P P MODES When changing the value of K it should be noted that small adjustments yield large results For this reason it is suggested that K should remain close to 1 0 and certainly no less than 0 5 and no greater than 2 0 Derivative Mode The Proportional and Integral Modes provide a good method of controlling a closed loop system However in special circumstances where the input value is changing rapidly there may be a lag time between when the error is noted and the length of time it takes the system to compen Appendix D PID Control D 3 sate for error To reduce this lag time Derivative Mode is used Derivative Mode con
458. tup and detailed status The Log In Out Key The Log In Out key brings up the current E2 User Login Screen when logging in If the Log In Out key is pressed in order to log out and there is data on the screen that has been edited and not saved a dialog box opens asking if the data should be saved If Yes is selected the data is saved the user is logged out and returned to the Home screen If No is selected the dialog box closes and the screen is refreshed as necessary Press ing the Log In Out key in order to log out when no data needs to be saved simply logs the user out and returns to the Home screen Four Directional Arrow Keys Directional arrow keys move the cursor in the direction of the arrow pressed The arrow keys are always func tional on menus and can be used to move from section to section on the Home and Status screens Page Up Page Down Keys The Page Page Down keys scroll the user through menus application summary screens and setup screens too large to fit on one screen Ctrl Page Up Ctrl Page Down Keys Page Ctrl Page Ctrl The Ctrl Page Up Ctrl Page Down ial Dow keys on an application setup screen take the user to the next or previous application on the same screen Numeric Keypad The numeric keypad is fully functional from both the front panel and an external keyboard Hot Keys Hot Keys are quick and easy shortcuts to frequently used functions and applicati
459. tween the minimum and maxi mum range values nothing will be added or subtracted from the setpoint Between the halfway point and the min imum value part of the setpoint adjustment will be sub tracted from the setpoint Between the halfway point and the maximum value part of the setpoint adjustment will be added to the setpoint An example of this is shown in Fig ure 11 28 RESET SET SENSOR POINT RANGE CHANGE MAX TS MAX RANGE CHANGE MIDPOINT SUBTRACT MAX CHANGE Figure 11 28 Setpoint Reset Diagram 11 17 5 Lead Lag A Heat Cool application may be linked with another Heat Cool application in what is called a Lead Lag arrangement In this arrangement one Heat Cool is desig nated as the Lead loop and used as the primary space tem perature control device The other Heat Cool the Lag loop becomes active only to support the Lead loop when it is unable to keep the space temperature within a certain proximity of the setpoint called the setpoint delta Figure 11 29 shows how a pair of Heat Cool applica tions using a Lead Lag arrangement would operate in Cooling mode When the temperature is in between the 11 46 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual setpoint and the setpoint delta the Lead loop alone will control cooling However when the temperature is above the setpoint delta the Lag loop will come on line and both Lead and Lag loops will work to bring the tempera ture down The Lead Lag arra
460. ual to the PID percentage In other words if the PWM cell is set with a pulse width of 10 seconds aPID percentage of 6076 turns the output ON for 6 seconds OFF for 4 seconds ON for 6 seconds etc 11 13 1 3 Diagram An abstract diagram of the control and output cells is shown in Figure 11 24 OVERRIDE Analog PID PWM Unoc SP Loop Output Ein T 9 Out Occupied SETPT FLOAT SP In Float AV PID CONTROL L Setpoint Control Valu Input PID Out Av AN AV Analog Value Figure 11 24 Loop Sequence Control Application Diagram 11 13 2 Loop Sequence Control Cell Descriptions 11 13 2 1 The Select Cell The Select cell s function is to provide the control set point to the PID Control cell and to switch between occu pied and unoccupied setpoints based on the current state of occupancy To determine whether to use the occupied setpoint or the unoccupied setpoint the Select cell reads a digital Loop Sequence Control SEQUENCER Digital Stage Stage 1 1 8 Output Input Stage 2 Stage 3 Stage 4 Stage 5 oi Stage 6 p Stage 7 Stage 8 p Digital PWM Output L DV Digital Value input If this input is ON OCC the occupied setpoint is used If this input is OFF UNO the unoccupied setpoint is used If the occupancy input is NONE
461. ulse Accumulator Standard Circuit Suction Group A nN N TD Condensor Fan Con trol TD3 Controller Time Schedule i Table 1 1 RX 100 RX 300 and RX 400 Comparison 1 2 The E2 Building Con troller The counterpart to the E2 RXis the E2 BX which con trols HVAC systems for low rise retail industrial and commercial buildings The BX s primary function is to provide energy efficient control of air handling units AHUs rooftop units RTUs and other systems related to environment control In addition the BX provides extensive sensor control logging and graphing features that allow the user to view accurate real time information about system conditions The BX is equipped with many power monitoring and demand control features that give you the information you need to keep your site s energy consumption low The E2 BX is available in two models the BX 300 and BX 400 The only significant difference between the E2 BX 300 and the E2 BX 400 is the total number of building control devices that may be operated by a single controller 1 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual Table 1 2 shows the differences between capabilities for the BX 300 and BX 400 Control mu conor Link case Di 9 wem m Infrared Leak Detec 16 16 tion Loop Sequence Control Table 1 2 BX 300 vs BX 400 Comparison 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 Capabilities BX 300 BX 400 Pulse Accumulator
462. ultiFlex ESR board by set ting switches 6 and 7 on the network address terminal labeled S1 To communicate at 9600 baud set switch 6 to the UP position and switch 7 to DOWN For 19200 baud set switch 6 to the DOWN position and switch 7 to UP Currently 9600 baud is recommended Recommended Baud Rate The baud rate should be set to 9600 baud in all cases 6 1 8 Setting the Terminating and Biasing Jumpers The I O Network connector for all I O boards and the E2 has a set of three terminating jumpers They are the jumpers positioned closest to the I O Network connector The E2 has jumpers next to each of the COM ports that can be configured as an I O network COM2 COM4 and COMO The purpose of the jumpers is to provide network ter mination resistance and network biasing to the two ends or termination points ofthe daisy chain One device at the beginning and one device on the end must be terminated ee and biased by placing all three jumpers in the UP position All other devices on the daisy chain must have all three jumpers set to the DOWN position Figure 6 2 shows the proper terminating jumper settings for the E2 and for all I O boards VO BOARD AND E2 TERMINATING JUMPERS THE TERMINATING JUMPERS MUST BE IN THE UP POSITION IF AT THE BEGINNING OR END OF THE NETWORK THE TERMINATING JUMPERS MUST BE IN THE DOWN POSITION IF NOT AT THE BEGINNING OR END OF THE NETWORK Figure 6 2
463. umption is reached This level is called the demand limit When the demand limit is exceeded the rate is greatly increased as a penalty for high power demand by the consumer Typically once the demand limit is exceeded the increased rate is charged for the remain der of the year To determine if a consumer has reached the demand limit the power company arbitrarily monitors a con sumer s energy consumption for a fixed period of time usually anywhere from 15 to 30 minutes with most power companies although it may be as short as 5 minutes This Demand Control monitoring period is called the demand window Demand windows are always the same length of time but they may be measured at any time the power company chooses to Since Demand Control applications have no way of determining when the power company will start a demand window they simply assume that the demand window can begin at any time As new values of the KW input are gathered Demand Control applications roll their demand windows forward and recalculate their load shed ding algorithms as if the power company were measuring the average power of the new window For example if the power company s demand window lasts for 15 minutes the Demand Control applications will keep a constant real time average of all recorded KW val ues from the previous 15 minutes If a Demand Control application determines from its calculations that the cur rent KW usage might cause
464. ure Termination One or more temperature sensors in the case circuit may be designated as termination temperature sensors The values of these sensors are combined into a single control value and this value is compared to the setpoint If the termination control value is greater than the user defined setpoint defrost will end and the defrost cycle will begin the Run Off period if applicable Termination sensors may be either analog temperature sensors or digital closures Klixons Also Case Circuit applications may use the value of the analog case tempera ture sensors for use in temperature termination Pulsed Defrost Pulsed Defrost is only available if the circuit is using Electric or Hot Gas defrost Pulsed Defrost is similar to Temperature Termination except when the termination temperature rises above the setpoint defrost does not terminate Instead the output that applies defrost heat is turned OFF The output will remain OFF until the temperature falls below the setpoint at which time the output will come back ON The Case Circuit application will continue to pulse defrost in this manner until the defrost time has passed The defrost cycle will then begin the Run Off period 11 4 4 4 Demand Defrost If a case is configured with a demand defrost sensor a case controller may use their inputs as a means of keeping scheduled defrost cycles from occurring when frost levels Case Control Circuits are not high e
465. ure value Half of the fans are not running Check the split fan relay output 1 Go to the Other Outs tab C7 in the Condensers Setup screen and check that SPLIT FAN has a board and point assignment 2 Venfy Split is enabled Go to General tab C1 in the Condens ers Setup screen and set the Split Enable field to Yes 3 Verify output is ON Appendix F Troubleshooting F 5 SYMPTOM POSSIBLE PROBLEM SOLUTION Problems with Cases Case will not go into hot gas or cool gas defrost Check Group LLSV in Suction Group setup 1 Go to the Outputs tab C5 on the Suction Groups Setup screen and check GROUP LLSV 2 Verify that the case s is assigned to the correct group Case will not terminate out of defrost mode 1 Verify the termination type Term Type in the Defrost tab C4 in the Standard Circuits Setup screen 2 Check the defrost termination input location on circuit input 3 Go to the Inputs tab C6 and check DEFROST AV TERM Problems with Global Actions F 6 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual Information cannot be read from another E2 controller Verify that the controller with the sensor is set up as the Pri mary and the controller receiv ing the information is set up as the User both controllers default as local 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 SYMPTOM POSSIBLE PROBLEM SOLUTION Problems with Temp Sensor or 16AI input dip switches are se
466. use of the Copeland Digital Scroll and Copeland Digital Discus compressors 11 1 2 The Standard Suction Group Application 11 1 2 1 egy A Suction Group application looks at suction pressure or suction temperature to determine how many compressor stages should be ON or OFF The application compares the suction pressure or temperature to its control setpoint using PID control The result of this comparison is a per centage from 0 to 100 that corresponds to the total capacity of the compressor rack that should be active Overview of PID Control Strat The Suction Group application then takes that percent age and determines what combination of compressors Suction Groups should be switched ON or OFF to best fulfill the require ment For example if the application says that 60 of the total compressor rack s power should be active and the rack has compressors totaling 50 HP then E2 will try to switch on compressors totaling 30 HP For more information on PID see Appendix D PID Control 11 1 2 2 Variable Speed Compressors Suction Group applications are compatible with vari able speed compressors VS compressors allow Suction Group applications to fine tune the amount of total active rack horsepower to react to small changes in suction pressures or temperatures As a result the rack does a bet ter job of controlling suction requiring less compressor switches When a variable speed compressor is present it w
467. ut For example in a Case Control application the Throt tling Range would be the number of degrees between the input temperature that would result in a 0 output and the temperature that would cause a 10096 output Therefore the Throttling Range essentially determines the percentage of the output adjustment that will be added to the previous percentage when a change in input occurs PID Control places this Throttling Range around the setpoint As a result Proportional Mode works to keep the temperature near the setpoint and within the throttling range In most cases the Throttling Range straddles the setpoint evenly on both sides as shown in Figure D 1 However in some applications such as Condenser Con trol the Throttling Range may be placed elsewhere see Appendix D PID Control D 1 Throttling Range on page D 1 THROTTLING RANGE OUTPUT AT SETPOINT shown here as 50 CONTROL INPUT 26512028 Figure D 1 Throttling Range Example 1 Suppose a Case Control application has a throttling range of 10 degrees Also for simplicity s sake assume only the Proportional Mode is active and the pro portional constant Kp is one The system begins with a 096 output at the bottom of the Throttling Range and with an input value of 24 F Because the throttling range is 10 degrees Proportional Mode will gradually add 100 to the output percentage as the input changes to 34 over time Suppose for example the input incr
468. ut value by 7596 of the application s designated KW value For example if a priority level contains a single AHU with a user assigned KW value of 250 Demand Control will only expect to save 75 of this value 187 5 KW by shedding it Example of a Mode 3 operation A Demand Control application reads an integral error near zero and a KW input 300 KW above the setpoint Mode 3 begins by deter mining how many levels it will need to shed to bring the KW input down to the setpoint First since Demand Control assumes it will only save 75 of an application s KW rating by shedding it the application determines that it must shed 400 KW worth of levels to achieve the setpoint Second Demand Control looks at all the applications in the next few priority levels assume for purposes of this example that all First and Rotational Shed levels are already shed and there are six defined Last Shed levels The applications in the remaining levels are as follows Last Shed 1 Total 80 KW Last Shed 2 Total 90 KW Last Shed 3 Total 75 KW Last Shed 4 Total 80 KW Last Shed 5 Total 95 KW Last Shed 6 Total 75 KW Mode 3 will immediately shed stages 1 2 3 4 and 5 for a total of 420KW If 75 of this total is actually saved by this action the total KW reduction will be 315 KW which will bring the input 15KW below the setpoint After Mode 3 makes its emergency adjustment Demand Control will recalculate If the KW input is still above the setpoint a
469. utput 11 14 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual ee 11 4 6 Dual Temp Control A case controller can be configured to change its case temperature alarm and superheat setpoints when an exter nal digital input is switched ON or OFF The user simply connects the digital switch to an input point on the RS485 I O Network and configures the case controller to read that input as a dual temp switch When the dual temp switch 1s ON the case controller overrides its normal case temperature alarm and superheat set points with a set of user specified alternate setpoints 11 4 7 Fan Control A relay on the power module activates the case fans The fans will be ON while in refrigeration mode and they may be programmed to be either ON or OFF when the temperature setpoint is satisfied and refrigerant is not flowing When in defrost mode the fans default to OFF but they may be programmed by the user to be either ON or OFF When a liquid side CCB is in Recovery Mode see Recovery Mode page 9 10 Fan Control may be config ured to delay the activation of fans for a user specified amount of time This delay helps keep the fans from splashing excess moisture that may still be on the coil 11 4 8 Light Control Lights are activated and deactivated by a relay on the power module The case controller itself does not have any special control algorithm for the case lights other than to leave the lights ON during normal operation There are onl
470. utput turning OFF The LOGIC IN input should not be used to compare the light level state to a Time Schedule output or a similar digital state that represents OCCUPIED UNOCCUPIED Schedule comparisons are handled by the Schedule Inter face cell If a schedule input value is the only digital value you will be using to combine with the light level sensor value choose the LLEV ONLY combination for this cell Occupied Unoccupied and Alternate Settings If desired the Light Level Interface cell can be set up with a set of unoccupied Cut In Cut Out setpoints To do this the Light Level Interface cell relies on a separate dig ital input to tell it when to use occupied or unoccupied set points The Light Level Interface cell can also be set up with a set of alternate occupied and unoccupied setpoints used only when the value of the input called USE ALT LLEV COMB is ON 11 10 4 2 The Schedule Interface Cell SCHEDIF The Schedule Interface cell is similar in function to the Light Level Interface cell except it is used to logically combine the output of the Light Level Interface cell with that of the Basic Schedulecell The Schedule Interface cell allows you to choose how the light level sensor and the time schedule work together to control the lights Logical Combinations The output of the Schedule Interface cell represents the final ON OFF state of the lights It determines this state by performing one of the logical combinat
471. value and logged at the lowest possible valid value 11 5 1 2 Incompressible Data Types Points of certain data types cannot be compressed due to the nature of their data values These points are called Incompressible Points Refer to the following table for the data types that are considered to be incompressible at cer tain resolutions Data Type Incompressible at Resolution PULSE TYPE Low and Medium ONE SHOT TYPE Low and Medium SYS LIST TYPE Low and Medium Table 11 1 Incompressible Data Types and Their Resolutions Logging Groups 11 5 2 Base Log Group The Base Log group is a permanent logging group and cannot be deleted When a new application is added to the system the inputs and outputs that are logged by default are associated with the Base Log group Points are pre configured to be logged for newly added applications Many of the most important inputs and out puts within an application are already pre configured to be logged and all of these inputs belong to the Base Log Group Simply define the inputs and outputs to enable log ging no special set up is required Logging is done auto matically When you first create an application in the E2 you can tell which inputs and outputs belong to the Base Log Group an L will be displayed at the right hand side of their definitions The L isa marker that signifies that the input or output is currently part of a logging group either the Base Log Group or
472. value and press to open the Actions Menu Choose Setup This will take you to the Setup screen 2 Once inside the application s Setup screen use the and keys to highlight the Inputs and Outputs index tabs Press EDIT to open the Edit menu Choose Alternate I O Formats to open the for mat menu 5 Choose one of the pointer formats If you are in the Inputs setup and have selected Area Ctrl Application Property as the pointer format the third column the Output field is the output that you are pointing connecting the input to If you are in the Out puts setup and have selected Area Ctrl Application Property as the pointer format the third column the Input field is the input that you are pointing connecting the output to Changing the format to a Fixed Value will give you the option of entering a value in the field that will be read by the input instead of being hooked to a board point or another cell For information on naming conventions for E2 control lers applications and points see Section 12 13 Naming Conventions for E2 Controllers Applications and Points Operator s Guide to Using the E2 12 15 12 11 2 Log View RX 466 Unit 3 LOG SCREEN 15 42 25 ALARH Point Log Time Point PSI 15 39 00 196 8 15 36 00 196 8 15 33 00 196 8 15 36 66 196 8 15 27 01 196 6 196 0 196 0 196 8 196 6 196 8 196 8 15 06 00 196 8 15 63 66 196 8 15 66 66 196 8 14 57 66 196 8 14 54 66 196 8 1
473. ve humidity RH Sensor Input Type Dip Switch Down Use Belden 8771 shielded three conductor cable or equivalent Connect the RED BLACK and WHITE wires to the screw terminals the sensor s connector as shown in Figure 2 Clip the SHIELD wire Connect the SHIELD and BLACK wires to the terminal of the input board Con nect the WHITE wire to the SIG terminal of the input board Connect the RED wire to the 12V power terminal on the input board Locate the input dip switch for the sensor point and set to the OFF position LEFT for MultiFlex DOWN for 16AT Refer to the input board s user manual for locations of the input dip switches WALL MOUNT RH SENSOR BACK PLATE FRONT VIEW Peor MULTIFLEX INPUT BOARD BOTTOM LEFT CORNER SHOW SHIELD oREQUV 206 0002 Light Down Wire GREEN ground wire to odd numbered terminal Wire YELLOW and RED signal wires to even num bered terminal Wire the POWER wire to a 12VDC source on input board N33H9 Y TO ODD TERMINAL qas MOTI3A Y TO EVEN TERMINAL ZL H3MOd vs TO 12VDC ON BOARD 207 0100 Analog Liquid Level Table 9 1 Sensor Wiring 9 4 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual Down Connect RED power wire to 12VDC source on input board Connect BLACK ground wire to odd numbered ter minal Conne
474. ve the cursor to Setpoints The Setpoints Setup screen is dis played Press again and the Inputs Setup screen comes up Press a few more times to see the rest of the Setup menu screens When the CO tab MORE is highlighted there may be more Ctrl than one extra Setup screen Press a zero to see a list of all Setup screens for that application Keep pressing while taking note of the extra screens until C1 is highlighted once more These screens C1 through C0 contain all of the et up information that is associated with the selected suction Quick Start 10 27 Set Up Applications group Blank tabs are inaccessible There are several reasons why a tab may be inaccessible i e without a name next to the number The tab and the corresponding screen is unused and reserved for later revisions The screen may only be accessed when running in Full Options mode The screen may require one or more fields to be set to certain values beforethe screen may be accessed For example a screen containing nothing but com pressor proof input definitions might be hidden if there is a field on another screen that tells the sys tem there are no proof checking devices on the group s compressors To access this screen you would have to set this field to YES The screen you are currently in is always highlighted in the screen s index tab For example in Figure 10 11 and Figure 10 48 because Screen 1 is di
475. ventually achieve the output percentage it is calling for To demonstrate this suppose in the example above the CC 100 continues to call for a 58 output during the period immediately after the 6 adjustment Since the total difference between the asked for percentage and the current actual percentage is 2 58 56 valve filtering will make the new adjustment for that period 1 5 75 of 2 As a result the new valve output would be 57 5 Future filter periods will bring the actual output even closer to the asked for output Application PID filtering is used for systems that appear to be over reacting to changes in the control input If filtering is to be used at all it is recommended to use caution since even a small amount of filtering may cause the PID loop to become underreactive 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 ee Appendix E Compressed Point Log Sample Limits and Precision Table Medium Resolution Low Resolution Engineering Unit Low Clip High Clip Precision Low Clip High Clip Precision Temperature Degrees Centigrade 200 1 500 0 0259427 40 97 7778 0 555556 Degrees Fahrenheit 328 2 732 0 0466969 40 208 1 Differential Temperature Delta Degrees Centigrade 200 200 0 00610417 68 889 68 889 0 555556 Delta Degrees Fahrenheit 360 360 0 0109875 124 124 1 Temperature C
476. ves However if desired you may associate an AHU Con trol application with a Zone application The AHU will then use the Zone s Temperature Control setpoints occu pancy state summer winter state and economization and dehumidification enable signals More information on Zone control is available in Section 11 7 Zone Control 11 6 13 Hardware Overview To set up an AHU for control by an E2 numerous tem perature and humidity sensors for several different appli cations must be connected to the I O Network as well as fan and cool proof checking devices economization checking devices curtailment devices and all of the heat ing cooling and dehumidification outputs Listed below are wiring instructions for some of the inputs and outputs that are part of a typical AHU setup Space Temperature Temperature See Table 9 1 on page 9 3 Space Humidity Humidity See Table 9 1 on page 9 3 Supply Air Temp Temperature See Table 9 1 on page 9 3 Return Air Temp Temperature See Table 9 1 on page 9 3 Outdoor Air Temp Temperature Set up as Out door AirProvider in Global Data see Section 10 17 Table 11 9 Suction Group Inputs Software Overview 11 23 Outdoor Air Humid Humidity Set up as Out door Humidity Provider in Global Data see Section 10 17 Digital Set up as Curtail ment in Global Data see Sec tion 10 17 Curtailment Device See Table 9 1 on Fan Proof Digital page 9 3 Fan Proof Reset Digit
477. vice controlled by an application such as a sensor or fan Returned To Normal and Forced To Normal Alarms For as long as the condition that caused the alarm mes sage exists the State field will show either ALARM NOTICE or FAIL as appropriate to the alarm type How ever if the condition that caused the alarm notice or fail ure is corrected the message shown in the State field will change to signify the correction There are two ways an alarm notice or failure condi tion may be corrected Return To Normal Return To Normal means the condition that generated the alarm notice or failure has returned to normal on its own or the E2 has automatically corrected the condition If an alarm returns to normal a N will appear in front of the alarm state in the State field Reset Forced To Normal Reset To Normal means the E2 has been forced by a user to consider the condition normalized for purposes of alarm control A Reset To Normal occurs when an alarm is reset using the Alarm Reset button ALARM RST If an alarm is forced to normal an R will appear in front of the alarm state in the State field Table 12 8 lists the nine possible state messages as they appear in the State field Advisory Type Condition Condition Condition To Normal Table 12 8 Alarm States 12 10 5 Ack Reset State The State field also shows whether or not an advisory record has been acknowledged or reset by a u
478. vs Out Enthalpy This strategy requires indoor and outdoor humidity sensors and also indoor and outdoor temperature sensors The enthalpy of the outdoor air is calculated and com pared to the enthalpy of the indoor air If the out door air enthalpy is less than the indoor air enthalpy economization is enabled Otherwise economization is disabled You may choose a different economization checking method for use in summer and winter months 11 6 5 2 Economization Lockout Features In addition to the methods listed above there are two economization lockout features that apply to all AHUs using economization Max Outside Air Humidity The Max Outside Air Humidity is the highest allow able humidity level for the outside air If the outside rela tive humidity is higher than this setpoint economization will not be allowed to occur Minimum Supply Temp The Minimum Supply Temp is a user defined setpoint that locks out economization 1f the supply air temperature falls below a minimum supply temperature setpoint This feature ensures that the air coming from outside is not too cold 11 6 6 Digital Economizer Control Control of digital or two position economizers is rela tively simple When conditions are favorable for econo mization the dampers will be opened when cooling is needed If not favorable the dampers will be closed 11 6 7 Analog Economizer Control For variable position dampers economization is gen era
479. w 8ROs and 8RO FCs All other E2 compatible output boards including the new design of 8RO P N 810 3005 the 8RO FC and have Form C contacts Figure 9 8 shows how to wire the three terminal Form C contact Wiring Outputs to Points One wire of the two wire 8RO FC connection should always be connected to the middle terminal The second wire must either be connected to the N C terminal if you want the path to be closed when the relay is de energized or the N O terminal if you want the path to be open dur ing power failure 9 2 5 The Output LED Each output point on an output board has an indicator LED that shows the status of the output This LED is lit to show the output is ON and unlit to show the output is OFF The definition of ON and OFF in this case is deter mined by the position of the fail safe dip switch see Table 9 3 Therefore if the output s switch is UB an illuminated LED means the path is CLOSED but if the switch is DOWN an illuminated LED means the path is OPEN 9 2 6 Output Setup in E2 In order for the E2 to properly control devices that are hooked to an I O board you must first tell the E2 what type of output the devices require This is achieved from the Output Definitions Status screen 9 2 6 1 Configuring a Point from the Out put Definitions Status Screen To configure a point go to the Output Definitions Sta tus screen l Press to open the Main Menu amp 2 Press System Configurati
480. wer left hand corner of the screen shows name and bypass output for the lighting circuits HVAC Control Section The top left hand corner of the screen shows whether the fans are ON or OFF state and dehumidification status of the first two air handlers in the sequence Refrigeration Control Section The top center of thescreen shows the name state and 12 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual current temperature of standard circuits Demand Control Section The top right hand corner of the screen shows the sta tus of the Demand Control application Anti Sweat Control Section The middle right hand section of the screen shows name and percent ON information for each anti sweat application Sensor Control Section The bottom center section of the screen shows both analog and digital sensor control name and command output Time Schedules Section The lower right hand section of the screen shows the name and current status of time schedules 12 2 Logging On and Access Levels An E2 may be programmed with up to 25 different users A user basically consists of a username a passwacd and an access level Whenever a username and password are entered during login the E2 searches the user records for the username and password If found the E2 will log the user in at the access level configured for the user in the user records The access level determines how many of the E2 s fea tures the user
481. witch Power On LED Earth Ground Figure 4 4 Power Interface Board The PIB interfaces the power and most all communica tions with the main board and contains all field wiring connections 4 2 E2 RX BX CX I amp O Manual 2 4 2 Powering the E2 Starting at the lower right sideof the PIB the first plug is the 24VAC input This must terminate into the power supply transformer E2 requires 24VAC Class 2 power which is supplied by a non center tapped Class 2 transformer Retail Solutions supplies two transformers that may be used to power E2s one for use with 110VAC P N 640 0041 and one for use with 220VAC P N 640 0042 Both transformers are rated at 50VA and each will power one E2 unit 4 2 1 RS485 Ports On the lower left side of the PIB are two RS485 Net work connector ports This is where all I O boards except the case controllers TD3 ESR8 and Echelon I O boards are connected 4 2 2 5485 Jumpers There is one set of RS485 jumpers for each RS485 port Jumpers JP1 3 are located directly above the first connector port and jumpers JP4 6 are located directly above the second connector port The RS485 termination jumpers JP1 JP2 JP3 JP4 JP5 and JP6 are used to ter minate the devices at the beginning and end of an RS485 Network If the E2 is the beginning of all RS485 I O Networks all three of these jumpers should be set to the UP position 4 2 3 Echelon Network Connect The ne
482. works set up board controllers routers and make controller associations Menu Option Description 8 Global Data Configure one or more analog or 1 General Controller Info Edit general information about digital sensors to be used as the E2 such as engineering global values by all E2s units and summer winter 9 Licensing Select this option to access the change over specifications License Report screen that lists all the applications in E2 that are currently licensed and the num ber of each type of applications that are in use You can also add 3 Passwords User Access Set up usernames and pass additional licenses by pressing words and define security level Fl requirements The System Information menu contains nine menu items 2 Time and Date Change the current date and time and specify date formats 4 Firmware Revision Read only information screen that contains current system ver sion information Table 12 2 System Configuration Menu Options 5 Service Actions Set up system diagnostics mem ory and execution info and per form advanced functions system resets and firmware RX 460 Unit 3 16 08 56 update RX DEU SUMMARY ALARM 7 6 Note Pad Writable field for technician to SYSTEM INFORMATION Refr NONE make notes about changes made or general information Refr Time and Date chat we 7 Display Users Enter information about Logging Refr Passwords User Acce
483. xt connector is the Echelon Network plug The one connector handles both input and output connections The input and output cables are connected directly to the Echelon plug This plug is the connection to the Case Con troller CC 100 the Evaporator Stepper Regulator board ESR8 TD3s and other E2s 4 2 4 Echelon Jumpers The two Echelon jumpers JP7 and JP8 are located next to the Echelon Network port Additional information about Echelon Networking and terminating the network can be found in Section 8 3 Ech elon Network Structuring Daisy Chains 4 3 Add OnE2Peripherals The E2 has many plug in card options to choose from Plug in Echelon card with mounting screw RS485 Modem communication expansion card 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 Plug in digital I O Network card RS485 port card Plug in Four Channel Internal Repeater Plug in modem with mounting screws and stand offs previous generation processor board only 4 3 1 Echelon Card Plug In P N 537 4860 with mounting screw P N 101 4201 Echelon is a two conductor network that interconnects E2s and other associated devices All Echelon devices are wired together using the daisy chain method of network structuring For the E2 to communicate on the Echelon Network the plug in card must be connected No Echelon Network communication can occur without the card The plug in Echelon card connects to the main proces sor board on the far right side of the
484. y Press B to acknowledge all advisories Press to cancel the operation 12 10 8 2 Resetting When a log entry is reset it is forced to a normal con dition and the log entry remains in the Controller Advisory Log An alarm notice or failure can be reset by highlight ing a log entry and pressing ALARM RST while at the Advisory Log screen A screen will come up prompt ing the user to either reset the selected advisory reset all advisories or to cancel the operation A 1 Press to reset the selected advisory 2 Press E to reset all advisories 3 Press to cancel the operation 12 10 8 3 Clearing The option to clear logs completely removes a log entry from the Advisory Log Advisory Log entries may be cleared by highlighting the log entry and pressing ALARM CLR while viewing the Advisory Log screen A screen will come up Alarms prompting the user to either clear the selected advisory clear all advisories or to cancel the operation A 1 Press A to clear the selected advisory 2 Press to clear all advisories 3 Press to cancel the operation Expanded Advi sory Information Parent Controller THIS 63 1 Property or Board Pt 80 03 02 X388 System E Advisory 1 of 200 Advisory Message FAIL Device absent from network Acknowledge Status UNK Report Priority 26 Date 69 69 65 Time 11 18 Press the ENTER key to close this dialog Figure 12 22 Expanded Info Screen
485. y and uses simple ON OFF control of the heating and cooling outputs The Heat Cool application in unoccupied mode makes use of a hysteresis value to form a range of temperature values across which the heating and or cooling will be applied As shown in Figure 11 26 when the temperature 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ drops to the Unoccupied Heating Setpoint or rises to the Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint the heat or cool outputs go to 100 ON They remain in this state until the tempera ture rises above the heating setpoint plus the hysteresis or below the cooling setpoint minus the hysteresis at which time the outputs will go to 0 ON E TEMPERATURE COOLING SET POINT HYSTERESIS HEATING SET POINT 100 m 2 a E 2 26512035 Figure 11 26 Unoccupied Hysteresis Mode 11 17 3 Optimum Start Stop OSS NOTE OSS applies only to Heat Cools that use a time schedule to change occupancy states Overrides initiated by the digital OCC STATE input will not initiate pre starts or pre Stops Optimum Start Stop OSS is a feature that works alongside the Heat Cool s occupied and unoccupied tem perature control modes OSS takes control of heating and cooling several minutes before the building is scheduled to change occupancy states and prepares the building for the upcoming change in setpoints As a result when the occu pancy state changes the temperature will be comfortably w
486. y called Blue R resets named for the key presses required to clean out Retail Solutions previous generation of controllers REFLECS Performing a Clean Out grammed parameters from memory Do not follow these instructions unless you are abso lutely sure you wish to remove all applications and logs from memory CAUTION A clean out will erase all pro 1 Press and RELEASE the Reset Button quickly The screen will clear 2 Press and Hold the Clean Out button 3 When CLEANOUT appears in large text across the screen RELEASE the Clean Out but ton CLEAN RESET OUT oe AC 20 X 9 O Quick Start 10 1 10 3 Setting Number of Network Devices 82 81 11 R t3 13 56 66 NAMES FULL ALARN Use Ctrl X to Select CX Tabs ee C2 I0 Network AEEA 1 DFHC 1 IRLDS MultiFlex CUB MultiFlex ESR HultiFlex PAK WCC 1 WPK 1 1 PREU TAB F2 NEXT TAB F3 EDIT FS CANCEL Figure 10 2 Connected I O Setup Screen E2 firmware revisions 2 81 and above After logging in for the first time the Connected I O screen will ask you to specify how many of each type of device will be connected to the E2 you are currently pro gramming Options will vary depending on the type of controller used Unit Number Echelon Subnet Each E2 on the Echelon Network must have a different unit number This can be any number from 1 to 255 but each E2 s number must be uni
487. y states and prepares the area for the upcoming change in setpoints As a result when the occupancy state changes the temperature will be comfortably within the range of the new setpoint Figure 11 15 shows an example of how pre starts and pre stops work in a heating application From unoccupied mode the pre start period ramps the temperature up slowly so that when the scheduled change from unoccu Software Overview 11 27 pied to occupied mode occurs the temperature will already be at ornear the occupied heating setpoint During the pre stop which occurs before the Zone application goes from occupied to unoccupied mode heating is sus pended and the temperature is allowed to coast down to the unoccupied setpoint OCCUPIED SET POINT UNOCCUPIEDL SET POINT 26512036 Figure 11 17 Diagram of Pre Start and Pre Stop Operation Intelligent Pre Starts and Pre Stops OSS is designed to handle pre starts and pre stops in the most energy efficient manner possible Every time a pre start or pre stop occurs OSS measures the amount of time it takes to bring the temperature from the previous setpoint to within the comfort zone of the new setpoint a user defined range of values above and below the set point within which the temperature is considered accept able This duration is used to determine the average rate of temperature change called the K factor The K factor is stored in t
488. y two cases where the lights are not always ON 1 An override from an E2 takes over control of the case lights This override may take the form of a manual switch or a schedule output 2 Ifthe case controller is set up to use Walk In Box Control the case lights default to OFF and only come ON when the door switch is tripped See Section 11 4 10 Walk In Freezer Control 11 4 9 Clean Wash Mode Clean Mode is a special kind of case deactivation designed specifically for washing or performing mainte nance on the case Clean Mode is initiated by activation of a cleaning switch input or by a command sent from a Hand held Ter minal or an E2 During Clean Mode refrigerant flow is turned OFF all fans and anti sweat heaters are deacti vated and the lights are turned either ON or OFF as pro grammed by the user 026 1610 Rev 11 02 MAR 2011 EZ Clean Modes may be either fixed or timed Fixed Clean Modes begin when the clean switch is turned ON and end when the clean switch is turned OFE Timed Clean Modes begin when the clean switch is turned ON and ends a specific time afterwards The user specifies how long the wash mode will last End of Mode Warning To warn service personnel that wash mode is about to end the case controller will blink the case lights for five seconds After five seconds of blinking the case fan will activate and refrigeration will restart 11 4 10 Walk In Freezer Control The CC 100P and CCB dua

E2 User Manual.book - Emerson Climate Technologies

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents